December 2022, 1st Edition
1
This page intentionally left blank.
Nevada Department of Transportation
1263 South Stewart Street
Carson City, Nevada 89712
NEVADA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SIGNING, STRIPING, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL DESIGN GUIDE 2022 EDITION
This guide has been prepared by Atkins North America, Inc., a member of SNC-Lavalin Group, for the Nevada Department of Transportation’s (NDOT) engineering personnel and other interested agencies, departments, and individuals.
The purpose of this guide is to establish uniform design criteria; review important signing, striping, and traffic control (SSTC) elements for consideration; and provide supplemental information to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(MUTCD) and other traffic related manuals in instances where this guidance gives a large range or is open to varying interpretations. It also is intended to provide uniform guidelines for design details that may arise from the Standard Plans,
Standard Specifications, field reviews, and construction activities. This guide also outlines how to prepare contract plans and estimates to ensure continuity in the level of standards that are used throughout the state. This guide is not intended to
replace engineering judgement or knowledge.
Overview of Contents
Section 1. Introduction presents the purpose of the Guide and an overview of the contents.
Section 2. Glossary of Terms provides a list of all terms, acronyms, initialisms, and symbols that are found within the document that are common to the SSTC disciplines.
Section 3. Field Investigation Guidelines establishes the specific protocols required when performing field investigations to aid in the development of SSTC design and plans.
Section 4. Signing presents specific fundamental concepts and standard practices related to the design of traffic signs to have sign uniformity.
Section 5. Striping and Pavement Markers presents specific fundamental concepts and standard practices related to the design of roadway striping to provide uniformity and correlation with other traffic control devices.
Section 6. Temporary Traffic Control presents specific fundamental concepts and standard practices related to the design of maintenance of traffic to provide safe and efficient public traffic movement for the when a roadway is impacted by
construction, utility work, maintenance operations, incidents, among others.
Section 7. Policy and Procedures addresses specific policies and procedures for items that are the responsibility of the SSTC Design. This section defines the SSTC quality control process and related agencies information.
Section 8. Plan Preparation assists the plan preparer in developing contract plans that are consistent with NDOT standards.
Please direct questions and comments to the Principal Signs, Striping, and Traffic Control Engineer; at (775) 888-7563.
This page intentionally left blank.
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1. Purpose of This Guide .................................................................. 1-1
1.2. Overview of Contents .................................................................... 1-1
1.3. Updates and Corrections .............................................................. 1-1
1.4. Local Agency Standards ............................................................... 1-1
1.5. Engineering Support, Divisional Resources, and Other
Agencies ....................................................................................... 1-2
1.6. References .................................................................................... 1-2
GLOSSARY OF TERMS ............................................................... 2-1
2.1. Acronyms/Initialisms/Symbols ...................................................... 2-1
2.2. Definitions ..................................................................................... 2-3
FIELD INVESTIGATION GUIDELINES ........................................ 3-1
4.4.6.
General Information Signs ............................................. 4-19
5.4.10. Ramp Metering .............................................................. 5-19
4.4.7.
Specific Service Signs .................................................... 4-19
5.4.11. Permanent Pavement Markings—Transverse .............. 5-21
4.4.8.
Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs ................................. 4-19
5.4.12. Stop and Yield Lines...................................................... 5-21
4.4.9.
ITS Dynamic and Changeable Message Signs ............. 4-19
5.4.13. Crosswalk and Parking Space Markings ....................... 5-22
4.4.10. Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Signs ............... 4-19
5.4.14. Word, Symbol, and Arrow Markings .............................. 5-24
4.4.11. Emergency Management Signing .................................. 4-19
5.4.15. Roundabout Markings ................................................... 5-29
4.4.12. Pedestrian and Bicycle Signs ......................................... 4-20
5.4.16. Bicycle Facilities Markings ............................................ 5-30
4.4.13. School Zone Signs ......................................................... 4-20
5.4.17. Railroad Crossing Markings .......................................... 5-37
4.4.14. Inspection Station Signing .............................................. 4-20
5.4.18. Raised Pavement Markers—USED ONLY IN
CLARK COUNTY .......................................................... 5-38
4.4.15. Temporary Traffic Control Zones ................................... 4-21
4.4.16. Nevada Signs ................................................................. 4-21
4.4.17. Ground-Mounted Sign Supports/Posts .......................... 4-29
4.4.18. Overhead Sign Supports ................................................ 4-31
4.4.19. Connected and Autonomous Vehicle Signing
Technology ..................................................................... 4-31
3.1. General.......................................................................................... 3-1
STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS ..................................... 5-1
3.2. Project Kickoff and Preliminary Design Field Study (PDFS)......... 3-1
5.1. General .......................................................................................... 5-1
3.3. Project Constructability/Traffic Control Field Review .................... 3-1
3.4. Intersection and Roadway Geometry ............................................ 3-1
5.1.1.
Project Scoping ................................................................ 5-1
5.2. Design Criteria and Standards ...................................................... 5-1
3.5. Checklist ........................................................................................ 3-1
5.2.1.
Regulations, Codes, and Jurisdictional Policies .............. 5-1
3.6. Video Inventory ............................................................................. 3-2
5.2.2.
Bid Items .......................................................................... 5-1
SIGNING ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.1. General.......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1.
Project Scoping ................................................................ 4-1
4.2. Design Criteria and Standards ...................................................... 4-1
5.3. Types of Pavement Markings used in Nevada.............................. 5-3
5.3.1.
NDOT Pavement Markings by District ............................. 5-3
5.3.2.
NDOT District Map—Longitudinal Pavement
Markings ........................................................................... 5-4
5.3.3.
Longitudinal Pavement Markings Used by Each
Nevada District ................................................................. 5-5
5.3.4.
4.2.1.
Regulations, Codes, and Jurisdictional Policies .............. 4-1
4.2.2.
Existing Signs and Supports ............................................ 4-1
4.2.3.
Bid Items .......................................................................... 4-1
Transverse Pavement Markings Used in Nevada
(All Districts) ..................................................................... 5-6
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices ..................... 4-2
5.4. Design Elements, Standards, and Practices ................................. 5-6
4.2.4.
5.4.1.
Pavement Markings—Longitudinal .................................. 5-6
Standardization of Sign Location ..................................... 4-2
5.4.2.
Center Lines ..................................................................... 5-6
Sign Placement ................................................................ 4-2
5.4.3.
No-Passing Zones ............................................................ 5-7
4.4. Design Elements ........................................................................... 4-3
5.4.4.
Lane Lines (White) ........................................................... 5-7
General ............................................................................ 4-3
5.4.5.
Edge Lines ..................................................................... 5-11
4.4.2.
Regulatory Signs .............................................................. 4-5
5.4.6.
Median Island Markings ................................................. 5-12
4.4.3.
Warning Signs .................................................................. 4-9
5.4.7.
4.4.4.
Guide Signs and Route Markers .................................... 4-14
Extensions Through Intersections and
Interchanges ................................................................... 5-14
4.4.5.
Preferential Lanes, Managed Lanes, and Ramp
Meter Signs .................................................................... 4-17
5.4.8.
Lane Reduction and Passing Lanes .............................. 5-15
5.4.9.
Managed Lanes Pavement Markings ............................. 5-17
4.3. Design Plans and Practices .......................................................... 4-2
4.3.1.
4.3.2.
4.4.1.
i
5.4.19. Recessed Striping, Contrast Striping, and Rumble
Strip Markings ................................................................ 5-40
5.4.20. Delineators .................................................................... 5-43
5.4.21. Pavement Markings for Connected and
Autonomous Vehicles .................................................... 5-45
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 6-1
6.1. General .......................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1.
Project Coordination Meetings .........................................6-1
6.1.2.
PIO Notification for Signing ..............................................6-1
6.1.3.
Project Scoping ................................................................6-1
6.2. Design Criteria and Standards ...................................................... 6-2
6.2.1.
Regulations, Codes, and Jurisdictional Policies ...............6-2
6.2.2.
Design Expectations .........................................................6-2
6.2.3.
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices......................6-3
6.2.4.
Speed Reductions ............................................................6-4
6.3. Fundamental Principles of Temporary Traffic Control ................... 6-4
6.3.1.
Temporary Traffic Control Goals ......................................6-4
6.4. Temporary Traffic Control.............................................................. 6-5
6.4.1.
Temporary Traffic Control Plans ......................................6-5
6.4.2.
Temporary Traffic Control Zones .....................................6-7
6.4.3.
Components of Temporary Traffic Control Zones ............6-7
6.4.4.
Smart Work Zones ............................................................6-9
6.4.5.
Pedestrian and Worker Safety ...................................... 6-10
6.4.6.
Flagger Control .............................................................. 6-11
6.4.7.
Temporary Traffic Control Devices ................................ 6-13
6.4.8.
Other Work Zone Features ............................................ 6-24
6.4.9.
Type of Temporary Traffic Control Zone Activities ........ 6-24
6.4.10. Temporary Traffic Control Typical Applications ............ 6-25
TABLE OF CONTENTS
POLICY AND PROCEDURES ...................................................... 7-1
8.3.3.
List of Sheets .................................................................... 8-8
Table 4-9. Sign Borders for Regulatory and Warning Signs ......................4-5
7.1. General.......................................................................................... 7-1
8.3.4.
Format and Scale ............................................................. 8-8
Table 4-10. Horizontal Alignment Sign Selection Chart .............................4-9
7.2. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices .................................. 7-1
8.3.5.
Striping Schedules ........................................................... 8-8
Table 4-11. Horizontal Alignment Sign Selection Chart .......................... 4-11
7.3. Signing, Striping, and Traffic Control Quality Control
Review........................................................................................... 7-1
8.3.6.
Review Checklists ............................................................ 8-8
8.3.7.
Specifications ................................................................... 8-8
Table 4-12. Typical Spacing of Chevron Alignment Signs on
Horizontal Curves ............................................................... 4-11
8.3.8.
General Notes .................................................................. 8-9
8.3.9.
Special Details .................................................................. 8-9
7.3.1.
Applicability ...................................................................... 7-1
7.3.2.
Responsible Review Participants ..................................... 7-1
7.3.3.
Quality Control Review Process ...................................... 7-1
7.3.4.
Quality Control Tracking Checklist ................................... 7-2
8.4. Traffic Control Plans ...................................................................... 8-9
8.4.1.
Required Information ........................................................ 8-9
PLAN PREPARATION .................................................................. 8-1
8.4.2.
Required Documentation ............................................... 8-10
8.1. General.......................................................................................... 8-1
8.4.3.
List of Sheets .................................................................. 8-10
Table 4-13. Minimum Letter Height on Street Signs ............................... 4-23
Table 4-14. Post Selection Chart ............................................................ 4-29
Table 4-15. Sign Mount Height ................................................................ 4-30
Table 5-1 Typical Striping Bid Items ...........................................................5-2
Table 5-2. Longitudinal Pavement Markings Used by Each Nevada
District ....................................................................................5-5
Table 5-3. Transverse Pavement Markings Used by Each Nevada
District ....................................................................................5-6
8.1.1.
Plan Submittals and Project Development Reviews ........ 8-1
8.4.4.
Format and Scale ........................................................... 8-10
8.1.2.
Plan Sheets ...................................................................... 8-1
8.4.5.
Traffic Control Schedules ............................................... 8-10
8.1.3.
Format and Scale ............................................................. 8-1
8.4.6.
Review Checklists .......................................................... 8-10
Table 5-5. Minimum Sight Distance Requirements as a Function of
85th Percentile Speed ...........................................................5-7
8.1.4.
Plan Sheet Orientation and Color .................................... 8-1
8.4.7.
Specifications ................................................................. 8-10
Table 5-6. Lane Line Widths.......................................................................5-8
8.1.5.
Consultant Requirements ................................................ 8-1
8.4.8.
General Notes ................................................................ 8-11
Table 5-7. Typical Drop Lane Pattern Lengths........................................ 5-10
8.1.6.
Title Sheets ...................................................................... 8-1
8.4.9.
Special Details ................................................................ 8-11
Table 5-8. Edge Line Widths ................................................................... 5-12
8.1.7.
Index of Sheets ................................................................ 8-1
8.1.8.
Key Map ........................................................................... 8-1
8.1.9.
North Arrow ...................................................................... 8-2
8.1.10. Project Number, County, and Design Unit ....................... 8-2
8.1.11. Sheet Numbering ............................................................. 8-2
8.1.12. Stamps ............................................................................. 8-2
8.1.13. Plan Schedules ................................................................ 8-2
8.1.14. Design Preferences.......................................................... 8-4
8.2. Signing Plans ................................................................................ 8-5
Table 5-9. Standard Median Nose Spacing Table .................................. 5-14
APPENDICES
Appendix A. Speed Reduction Request Form
Appendix B. NDOT Temporary Rumble Strips Typical Application Detail
Appendix C. TTC Typical Application Figures
Appendix D. Signing Plan Examples
Appendix E. Striping Plan Examples
Appendix F. Traffic Control Plan Examples
Appendix G. Various Conditions
Appendix H. 6-Inch Edge Line Policy Memo
8.2.1.
Required Information........................................................ 8-5
8.2.2.
Required Documentation ................................................. 8-5
8.2.3.
List of Sheets ................................................................... 8-5
8.2.4.
Format and Scale ............................................................. 8-6
Table 1-1. Local Agency Standards ........................................................... 1-1
Sign Summary .................................................................. 8-6
Table 2-1. Sign Structure Symbols ............................................................ 2-3
8.2.6.
Review Checklists ............................................................ 8-6
Table 4-1. Sign Bid Items ........................................................................... 4-1
8.2.7.
Specifications ................................................................... 8-7
8.2.8.
General Notes .................................................................. 8-7
8.2.9.
Special Details ................................................................. 8-7
8.2.5.
8.3. Striping Plans ................................................................................ 8-8
8.3.1.
Required Information........................................................ 8-8
8.3.2.
Required Documentation ................................................. 8-8
Table 5-4. Center Line Widths ....................................................................5-7
LIST OF TABLES
Table 4-2. Minimum Spacing Between Signs ............................................ 4-3
Table 4-3. NDOT Standard Specifications for Sign Sheeting .................... 4-3
Table 4-4. Illumination of Sign Elements .................................................... 4-3
Table 4-5. Retroreflectivity of Sign Elements ............................................. 4-3
Table 4-6. MUTCD-Specified Sign Shapes ................................................ 4-4
Table 4-7. Uses of Sign Colors .................................................................. 4-4
Table 4-8. Sign Borders for Guide Signs ................................................... 4-4
ii
Table 5-10. Ramped Median Nose Spacing Table ................................. 5-14
Table 5-11. Advance Warning Distance (D) and Taper Length (L)
Values ................................................................................. 5-16
Table 5-12. Standard Edge Line and Lane Line Markings for
Preferential Lanes ............................................................... 5-17
Table 5-13. Number of Markings Determination ..................................... 5-20
Table 5-14. Word Marking Examples ...................................................... 5-24
Table 5-15. Distance Between Arrow and "ONLY" Markings in
Storage Lanes .................................................................... 5-27
Table 5-16. Bikeway Design Options ...................................................... 5-30
Table 5-17. Recess Marking Groove Dimensions ................................... 5-40
Table 5-18. Guidepost Spacing on Horizontal Curves ............................ 5-45
Table 6-1. TTC Bid Items ...........................................................................6-5
Table 6-2. Advance Warning Sign Spacing................................................6-8
Table 6-3. Merging Taper Length and Channelizing Device Spacing ........6-8
Table 6-4. Longitudinal Buffer Length ........................................................6-9
Table 6-5. Stopping Sight Distance as a Function of Speed ................... 6-13
Table 6-6. Type I Barricade Striping ........................................................ 6-16
Table 6-7. Type II Barricade Striping ....................................................... 6-16
Table 6-8. Type IIIB Barricade Striping ................................................... 6-17
Table 6-9. Direction Indicator Barricade Striping..................................... 6-17
Table 6-10. Arrow Board Types............................................................... 6-19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Figure 4-36. Placement of Milepost Panels ............................................. 4-23
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1. Signing Pre-Design Field Checklist ......................................... 3-2
Figure 4-1. Speed Limit and Route Sign Placement .................................. 4-5
Figure 4-2. Intersection Regulatory Signs .................................................. 4-6
Figure 4-3. Mini Roundabout Signing ........................................................ 4-7
Figure 4-4. One-Lane Roundabout Signing ............................................... 4-7
Figure 4-5. Two-Lane Roundabout Signing ............................................... 4-8
Figure 4-6. Typical Exit/On Ramp Sign Locations ..................................... 4-8
Figure 4-7. Speed Zone Signing for Speed Reduction ............................ 4-10
Figure 4-8 Typical Passing Lane ............................................................. 4-10
Figure 4-9 Typical Lane Reduction .......................................................... 4-10
Figure 4-10. Warning Signs for a Turn ..................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-11. Type 1 Median Obstructions ................................................ 4-12
Figure 4-12. Type 2 for Use on Approach End of Median ....................... 4-12
Figure 4-13. Type 2 Modified Median Crossover Marker ........................ 4-13
Figure 4-14. Type 3 Markers for Bridges, Piers, and Abutments............. 4-13
Figure 4-15. Typical Route and Auxiliary Road Signs ............................. 4-14
Figure 4-16. Interstate Highway and Interstate Business Loop (M11) Signs ............................................................................... 4-14
Figure 4-17. Two-Digit and Three-Digit State Highway Route (M1-5)
Marker ................................................................................. 4-15
Figure 4-18. Advance Turn and Directional Arrow Signs ......................... 4-15
Figure 4-19. State Highway Advance Junction Sign ................................ 4-15
Figure 4-20. Interchange Exit Sign .......................................................... 4-16
Figure 4-21. Single-Lane Interchange Exit with Dropped Lane ............... 4-16
Figure 4-22. Exit Panels, with Dimensions .............................................. 4-16
Figure 4-23. Interchange Sequence Sign ................................................ 4-16
Figure 4-24. Placement of Interchange Sequence Signs ........................ 4-17
Figure 4-25. System-to-System Interchange Sign ................................... 4-17
Figure 4-26. HOV Lane Sign .................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-27. HOV Lane Access Opening Signing ................................... 4-18
Figure 4-28 Tourist-Oriented Directional Sign ......................................... 4-19
Figure 4-29. Inspection Station Signing ................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-30. Tire Anomaly Classification System (TACS) Signing .......... 4-21
Figure 4-31. Nevada Border Sign Package, Part 1 ................................. 4-22
Figure 4-32. Nevada Border Sign Package, Part 2 ................................. 4-22
Figure 4-33. Milepost Signs ..................................................................... 4-22
Figure 4-37. Installation of Street Signs on Signals or Luminaires .......... 4-24
Figure 4-38. Median Crossover Signing ................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-39. Brown Background State Park Signing Examples ............... 4-24
Figure 5-18. Typical Dotted Line Marking Extensions into
Intersection ......................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-19. Typical Dotted Line Markings to Extend Center and
Lane Lines into Intersection ................................................ 5-15
Figure 4-40. California & Pony Express National Historic Trail Signs ..... 4-25
Figure 5-20. Lane Reduction Markings for Northern Districts (D2
and D3) ............................................................................... 5-16
Figure 4-41. Auto Tour Sign for Route for California Trail and Pony
Express ................................................................................ 4-25
Figure 5-22. Typical Passing Lane Pavement Markings ......................... 5-17
Figure 4-42. Alternative Fuel Corridor and LPG Signing ......................... 4-26
Figure 4-43. EV Charging Station and Parking Signs .............................. 4-26
Figure 4-44. National Scenic Byway Sign ................................................ 4-27
Figure 4-45. NDOT Scenic Route Signs .................................................. 4-27
Figure 5-23. Merge Arrow Marking .......................................................... 5-17
Figure 5-24. Per-Lane Change Minimum Distance ................................. 5-18
Figure 5-25. Beginning a Managed Lane Examples ............................... 5-18
Figure 5-26. Managed Lane Termination Examples ............................... 5-18
Figure 4-45. Chain and Snow Tire Signs ................................................. 4-27
Figure 5-27. Managed Lane Termination as a General-Purpose
Lane Example ..................................................................... 5-18
Figure 4-46. Chain Station Sign ............................................................... 4-28
Figure 5-28. Double Solid Lines for HOV Lanes ..................................... 5-19
Figure 4-47. Truck, Passing, or Climbing Lanes ...................................... 4-28
Figure 5-29. Ingress/Egress Markings for Intermediate Access to
HOV Lanes ......................................................................... 5-19
Figure 4-48. Daytime Headline Signs ...................................................... 4-28
Figure 4-49. US-50 Bike Route Sign ........................................................ 4-28
Figure 5-30. HOV Symbol Marking Detail ............................................... 5-19
Figure 4-50. Ground-Mounted Sign Placement ....................................... 4-29
Figure 5-31. Ramp Metering Illustration .................................................. 5-19
Figure 4-51. Placement of Signs in Excavation or Embankment
Areas ................................................................................... 4-30
Figure 5-32. Ramp Metering Markings without HOV Lane ..................... 5-20
Figure 5-33. Ramp Metering Markings with HOV Lane .......................... 5-20
Figure 4-52. Types of Sign Islands .......................................................... 4-30
Figure 5-34. HOV Symbol Placement and Details .................................. 5-20
Figure 5-1. Paint Pavement Marking Examples ......................................... 5-3
Figure 5-35. Ramp Metering RPM Stop Bar ........................................... 5-21
Figure 5-2. Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Examples .......................... 5-4
Figure 5-36. Minimum Distance from Stop Line to Crosswalk
Marking ............................................................................... 5-21
Figure 5-3. Pavement Marking Tape Examples ......................................... 5-4
Figure 5-4. NDOT Longitudinal Pavement Markings used by District
and County ............................................................................ 5-5
Figure 5-5. Example of Two-Way Left-Turn Lane Markings ...................... 5-6
Figure 5-6. Lane Line Types Application Example .................................... 5-8
Figure 5-7. Exit Ramp Markings for Parallel Deceleration Lane ................ 5-9
Figure 5-8. Exit Ramp Markings for Parallel Deceleration Lane at
Multi-Lane Exit Ramp ............................................................ 5-9
Figure 5-37. Yield Lines at Non-Signalized, Non-Stop Controlled
Crosswalks ......................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-38. Yield Bar Pavement Markings ............................................. 5-22
Figure 5-39. Nevada District 1 Crosswalk Detail ..................................... 5-22
Figure 5-40. Nevada Districts 2 and 3 Crosswalk Detail ......................... 5-23
Figure 5-41. On-Street Parking Space Markings .................................... 5-23
Figure 5-9. Lane Drop Markings for Single Lane Exit Ramp ................... 5-10
Figure 5-42. Handicapped Parking Space Pavement Marking
Symbol ................................................................................ 5-24
Figure 5-10. Lane Drop Markings for Auxiliary Lane Between
Ramps ................................................................................. 5-10
Figure 5-43. Dedicated Turn Pocket Arrow Markings, Example 1 .......... 5-25
Figure 5-44. Dedicated Turn Pocket Arrow Markings, Example 2 .......... 5-25
Figure 5-11. Entrance Ramp Markings for Parallel Acceleration
Lane ..................................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-45. Dedicated Turn Pocket Arrow Markings, Example 3 .......... 5-25
Figure 5-12. Entrance Ramp Markings for Tapered Acceleration
Lane ..................................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-47. Lane-Drop Turn Pocket Markings, Example 2 .................... 5-25
Figure 5-13. Yellow Painted Median Island Example .............................. 5-13
Figure 5-14. Standard Median Nose Paint and RPM Installation ............ 5-13
Figure 5-15. Ramped Median Nose Paint and RPM Installation ............. 5-14
Figure 4-34. Enhanced Milepost Signs .................................................... 4-22
Figure 5-16. Typical Pavement Marking Extension with Offset Lane
Lines .................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 4-35. Enhanced Reference Panels ............................................... 4-22
Figure 5-17. Typical Marking Extension with Double Turn Lanes............ 5-15
iii
Figure 5-46. Lane-Drop Turn Pocket Markings, Example 1 .................... 5-25
Figure 5-48. Lane-Drop Turn Pocket Markings, Example 3 .................... 5-25
Figure 5-49. Example of “ONLY” Pavement Marking Use ...................... 5-26
Figure 5-50. Example of “ONLY” Pavement Marking Not Used .............. 5-26
Figure 5-51. Two-Way Left-Turn Lanes Arrow Markings ........................ 5-27
Figure 5-52. Single Storage Lane Details ............................................... 5-27
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Figure 5-53. Left-Turn Lane Reversing Curve Pavement Marking
Radius ................................................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-86. Rumble Strip Detail for Solid Double Yellow Line ................ 5-41
Figure 6-20. Typical Portable Precast Concrete Barrier (Type F) ........... 6-21
Figure 5-54. Multiple Storage Lanes Details ............................................ 5-28
Figure 5-87. Rumble Strips for Two-Way Traffic with Passing Zone ....... 5-41
Figure 6-21. Steel Impact Attenuator ...................................................... 6-22
Figure 5-88. Rumble Strip Detail for Solid Yellow Line ............................ 5-41
Figure 6-22. Water-Filled Impact Attenuator ........................................... 6-22
Figure 5-89. Rumble Strips for Two-Way Left-Turn Lane ........................ 5-42
Figure 6-23. Sand Barrel Impact Attenuator ............................................ 6-22
Figure 5-90. Rumble Strips at Bridge Structure Proximity ....................... 5-42
Figure 6-24. Truck-Mounted Impact Attenuator ...................................... 6-23
Figure 5-91. Edge Line Rumble Strip for Two-Way Traffic ...................... 5-42
Figure 6-25. Warning Light ...................................................................... 6-23
Figure 5-92. Edge Line Rumble Strip Placement at Roadway with
Approach ............................................................................. 5-42
Figure 6-26. Portable Balloon Light ......................................................... 6-23
Figure 5-93. Edge Line Rumble Strip Placement when a Dedicated
Right-Turn Lane is Present ................................................. 5-43
Figure 7-1. Quality Control Review Process ..............................................7-1
Figure 5-55. Examples of Elongated Route Shield for Pavement
Markings .............................................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-56. Speed Humps without Crosswalks Marking Options .......... 5-28
Figure 5-57. Speed Humps with Crosswalks Marking Options................ 5-29
Figure 5-58. Typical Roundabout and Components ................................ 5-29
Figure 5-59. Single-Lane Roundabout Markings ..................................... 5-30
Figure 5-60. Multi-Lane Roundabout Markings........................................ 5-30
Figure 5-61. Bicycle Shared Lane Symbol without On-Street
Parking ................................................................................ 5-31
Figure 5-62. Bicycle Shared Lane Symbol with On-Street Parking ......... 5-31
Figure 5-63. Shared Lane Bicycle Marking Detail ................................... 5-31
Figure 5-64. Block Intersection Shared Lane Markings ........................... 5-32
Figure 5-65. Combined Right Turn with Bicycle Shared Markings .......... 5-32
Figure 5-66. Bicycle Lane Widths with On-Street Parking and
Bicycle Lane Widths Without On-Street Parking ................. 5-32
Figure 5-67. Bicycle Lane Symbol and Arrow Detail ............................... 5-33
Figure 5-68. Intersection Bicycle Lane Pavement Marking Example ...... 5-33
Figure 5-69. Bicycle Lane Treatment at Right-Turn Only Lane ............... 5-34
Figure 5-70. Bicycle Lane Treatment at Parking Lane into a RightTurn Only Lane .................................................................... 5-34
Figure 5-71. Bicycle Lane Pavement Markings at Intersections .............. 5-35
Figure 5-72. Bicycle Lane Buffer Markings .............................................. 5-35
Figure 5-94. Edge Line Rumble Strips on Concrete Pavement ............... 5-43
Figure 5-95. Examples for Daytime and Nighttime Rumble Stripes......... 5-43
Figure 5-96. Typical Transverse Rumble Strip......................................... 5-43
Figure 5-97. Rigid Post Delineator Details ............................................... 5-44
Figure 5-98. Flexible Post Delineator Details ........................................... 5-44
Figure 6-27. Portable Beacon Light System............................................ 6-24
Figure 7-2. Quality Control Checklist Example ...........................................7-2
Figure C-8-1. Multi-Lane Highway, One-Lane Closure ............................ 4
Figure C-8-2. Two-Lane, Two-Way Highway, One-Lane Closure ............ 4
Figure C-8-3. Multi-Lane Highway, One-Lane Closure with
Temporary Barrier Rail ........................................................... 5
Figure 5-99. Type 1 Reflectors ................................................................. 5-44
Figure C-8-4. Two-Lane, Two-Way Highway, One-Lane Closure
with Temporary Barrier Rail .................................................. 5
Figure 5-100. Type 2 Reflectors ............................................................... 5-44
Figure C-8-5. Multi-Lane Closure ............................................................... 6
Figure 5-102. CAV Connectivity to Pavement Markings Illustration ........ 5-46
Figure C-8-6. Half-Road Closure on Multi-Lane Undivided Road ........... 6
Figure 6-1. Transportation Management Plan (TMP) Type
Flowchart ............................................................................... 6-3
Figure C-8-7. Multi-Lane Shift..................................................................... 7
Figure 6-2. Typical TTC Zone Areas .......................................................... 6-7
Figure C-8-9. Exit Ramp Opening .............................................................. 8
Figure 6-3. Example of the Use of a Stop/slow Automated Flagger
Assistance Device (AFAD) .................................................. 6-12
Figure 6-4. Example of the Use of a Red/Yellow Lens Automated
Flagger Assistance Device (AFAD) ..................................... 6-12
Figure C-8-8. Median Crossover (Multi-Lane Divided Highway) ............. 7
Figure C-8-10. Shoulder Work .................................................................... 8
Figure C-8-11. Multi-Lane Highway Haul Road ......................................... 9
Figure C-8-12. Two-Lane, Two-Way Highway Haul Road ........................ 9
Figure 5-73. Bicycle Lane Buffer Markings Example from Austin,
Texas ................................................................................... 5-35
Figure 6-5. Haul Road Crossing (TA-14) ................................................. 6-13
Figure C-8-13. Loose Grave/Dust Hazard ................................................ 10
Figure 5-74. Green Color Marking Example Application for Bicycle
Lanes ................................................................................... 5-36
Figure 6-6. TTC Regulatory Sign & Plaque Examples ............................. 6-14
Figure C-8-14. Roadway Bumps............................................................... 10
Figure 6-7. TTC Warning Sign & Plaque Examples ................................. 6-14
Figure C-8-15. Shoulder Drop-Off ............................................................ 11
Figure 6-8. TTC Guide Signs Examples .................................................. 6-14
Figure C-8-16. Uneven Lanes ................................................................... 11
Figure 6-9. Low-Level TTC Sign Support ................................................. 6-15
Figure C-8-17. Intersection Outside Lane Work with Flaggers ............. 12
Figure 5-76. Bicycle Lane Dotted Green Lines ........................................ 5-37
Figure 6-10. Traffic Cone Dimensions ..................................................... 6-15
Figure 5-77. Passive Railroad Crossing Typical Markings and Signs ..... 5-37
Figure 6-11. Drum Dimensions ................................................................ 6-15
Figure C-8-18. Intersection Outside Lane Work Without
Flaggers ................................................................................. 12
Figure 5-78. Typical Railroad Crossing Advance Pavement
Markings .............................................................................. 5-37
Figure 6-12. Type I Barricade Dimensions ............................................... 6-16
Figure 5-79. Non-Reflective RPM ............................................................ 5-38
Figure 6-14. Type IIIB Barricade Dimensions .......................................... 6-17
Figure 5-75. Bicycle Lane Marking Green Color Pavement
Background ......................................................................... 5-36
Figure 5-80. Reflective RPM .................................................................... 5-38
Figure 5-81. RPM use at Intersection Example ....................................... 5-39
Figure 5-82. RPM use at Freeway Exit Ramp Example .......................... 5-39
Figure 6-13. Type II Barricade Dimensions .............................................. 6-17
Figure 6-15. Direction Indicator Barricade Dimensions ........................... 6-18
Figure 6-16. Tubular Marker Dimensions and Striping Details ................ 6-18
Figure 5-83. Contrast Striping Details for Broken White Lines ................ 5-40
Figure 6-17. Examples of Flashing Arrow/Sequential
Arrows/Sequential Chevrons ............................................... 6-19
Figure 5-84. Contrast Striping Example, I-580, Nevada .......................... 5-40
Figure 6-18. Flashing Double Arrow Example ......................................... 6-19
Figure 5-85. Rumble Strips for Two-Way Traffic with no Passing
Zone .................................................................................... 5-41
Figure 6-19. Examples of Flashing Caution/Alternating Diamond
Caution ................................................................................ 6-19
iv
Figure C-8-19. Intersection with Median Island with Flaggers.............. 13
Figure C-8-20. Intersection with Median Island Without
Flaggers ................................................................................. 13
Figure C-8-21. Intersection with No Island with Flaggers ..................... 14
Figure C-8-22. Intersection with No Island Without Flaggers ............... 14
INTRODUCTION
1.1.
Purpose of This Guide
Table 1-1. Local Agency Standards
The guidance supplied by this document is based on established practices of the Nevada Department of
Transportation (NDOT) and includes research into best practices by other states. It is applicable to all types of traffic
design containing sections on signing, striping, and traffic control (SSTC). The purpose of this guide is to present the
fundamental concepts and standard practices related to the design of SSTC components for NDOT. The guide is
intended for both NDOT personnel and consultants who prepare plans and specifications on behalf of NDOT.
Contributions of ideas, suggestions for changes, new concepts, and entire drafts of subjects, etc., are welcome and
should be addressed to NDOT’s Traffic Operations Office.
1.2.
Agency
Overview of Contents
This guide is split into five separate, but interrelated, technical sections including Section 2: Glossary of Terms,
Section 3: Field Investigation Guidelines, Section 4: Signing, Section 5: Striping and Pavement Markers, and
Section 6: Temporary Traffic Control. Additional related procedural sections include Section 7: Policy and
Procedures and Section 10: Plan Preparation. The technical sections should be used to develop an understanding
of the essential concepts and standard practices required to design SSTC for NDOT. The procedural sections should
be used to learn the required information to develop a standard set of SSTC plans for NDOT. A thorough
understanding of the technical and procedural sections within this guide should allow for the development of a
standardized set of SSTC plans that meet all requirements for NDOT.
1.3.
Updates and Corrections
The content of this guide consists of new material relying on industry standards and evolving technologies.
Understandably, some information will be incomplete, and some references may be outdated. For this guide to
become an integral tool, updates to the guide will be performed on an as-needed basis and will involve technical staff
from multiple disciplines, as appropriate.
To accomplish the updates, staff within the NDOT Traffic Operations Division, Signing, Striping, and Traffic Control
Section, will be designated to maintain and update their respective sections of the guide. It is imperative that all users
of the design guide forward any suggested changes/updates to the Signing, Striping, and Traffic Control Principal
Engineer for review and distribution to the appropriate party. All updates to this design guide must be approved and
adopted by the Chief Traffic Operations Engineer prior to incorporation into the design guide.
1.4.
City of Boulder City
https://www.rtcsnv.com/projectsinitiatives/streets-highways/uniformstandard-specifications-and-drawingarchives/
City of Carson City
Washoe County
https://www.washoecounty.us/csd/engin
eering_capitalprojects/information_for_d
evelopers/standard_details.php
Churchill County
Washoe County
https://www.washoecounty.us/csd/engin
eering_capitalprojects/information_for_d
evelopers/standard_details.php
Clark County
RTC Southern Nevada
https://www.rtcsnv.com/projectsinitiatives/streets-highways/uniformstandard-specifications-and-drawingarchives/
Douglas County
Washoe County
https://www.washoecounty.us/csd/engin
eering_capitalprojects/information_for_d
evelopers/standard_details.php
City of Elko
Washoe County*
https://www.washoecounty.us/csd/engin
eering_capitalprojects/information_for_d
evelopers/standard_details.php
RTC Southern Nevada
https://www.rtcsnv.com/projectsinitiatives/streets-highways/uniformstandard-specifications-and-drawingarchives/
RTC Southern Nevada
https://www.rtcsnv.com/projectsinitiatives/streets-highways/uniformstandard-specifications-and-drawingarchives/
Town of Laughlin
RTC Southern Nevada
https://www.rtcsnv.com/projectsinitiatives/streets-highways/uniformstandard-specifications-and-drawingarchives/
City of Lovelock
Washoe County
https://www.washoecounty.us/csd/engin
eering_capitalprojects/information_for_d
evelopers/standard_details.php
RTC Southern Nevada
https://www.rtcsnv.com/projectsinitiatives/streets-highways/uniformstandard-specifications-and-drawingarchives/
City of Las Vegas
When designing signing, striping, or traffic control projects, it is important for the SSTC designer to understand the
design standards and preferences of the Nevada cities, counties, and metropolitan planning organizations (MPOs)
where the equipment will be installed and operated. The SSTC designer should note which manuals take precedence
during design, with the following order:
1) NDOT manuals and standards, most current versions (i.e., NDOT, Sign Supplement, NDOT, Standard Plans
for Road and Bridge Construction)
2) NDOT Signing, Striping, and Traffic Control Guide
3) Federal manuals and standards, most current versions (i.e., FHWA, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(MUTCD), ITE, Traffic Control Devices Handbook)
4) Agency codes and standards
Table 1-1 provides a list of local entities and the standards they set as preference for signing, striping, or traffic control
projects.
City of Mesquite
1-1
Website
Regional Transportation Commission (RTC)
of Southern Nevada
City of Henderson
Local Agency Standards
Standards Used
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
Agency
City of North Las Vegas
City of Reno
Standards Used
RTC Southern Nevada
https://www.rtcsnv.com/projectsinitiatives/streets-highways/uniformstandard-specifications-and-drawingarchives/
City of Reno
https://www.reno.gov/government/depart
ments/public-works/formspublications/construction-standarddetails
City of Sparks
City of Sparks
https://cityofsparks.us/resources/resourc
e/construction-standard-details/
City of Yerington
Washoe County
https://www.washoecounty.us/csd/engin
eering_capitalprojects/information_for_d
evelopers/standard_details.php
RTC Southern Nevada
https://www.rtcsnv.com/projectsinitiatives/streets-highways/uniformstandard-specifications-and-drawingarchives/
RTC Southern Nevada
RTC Southern Nevada
https://www.rtcsnv.com/projectsinitiatives/streets-highways/uniformstandard-specifications-and-drawingarchives/
Washoe County
Washoe County
https://www.washoecounty.us/csd/engin
eering_capitalprojects/information_for_d
evelopers/standard_details.php
RTC Washoe County
Washoe County
https://www.washoecounty.us/csd/engin
eering_capitalprojects/information_for_d
evelopers/standard_details.php
Freeway and Arterial
System of Transportation
(FAST)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Website
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*City of Elko has a deviation from standards to use its own D3-1 street name plaques.
1.5.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Engineering Support, Divisional Resources, and Other Agencies
To be an effective SSTC designer, it is essential to understand and appreciate the roles and responsibilities of NDOT,
the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), and other city, county, state, and federal agencies as they relate to the
planning, design, construction, and maintenance of SSTC infrastructure. For detailed information regarding the roles
and responsibilities of NDOT, FHWA, and other city, county, state, and federal agencies as they relate to the design
of highway infrastructure, refer to the current version of the NDOT Road Design Guide.
1.6.
•
•
•
•
References
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), A Policy on Geometric
Design of Highways and Streets (Green Book), 7th Edition, 2018
AASHTO, Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, 4th Edition, 2012
AASHTO, Guide for the Planning, Design, and Operation of Pedestrian Facilities, 2004
AASHTO, Highway Safety Design and Operations Guide (Yellow Book), 1997
•
1-2
AASHTO, Highway Safety Manual, 1st Edition, with 2014 Supplement
AASHTO, LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications, 4th Edition, 2017
AASHTO, Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH), 2016
AASHTO, Manual for Bridge Evaluation, 3rd Edition, 2018
AASHTO, Roadside Design Guide, 4th Edition, 2015
AASHTO, Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals,
6th Edition, with 2015 Interim Revisions
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990 (42 United States Code [USC] 12181)
o Public Right-of-way Accessibility Guidelines (PROWAG) (2011)
o Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) (1998)
ADA, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility
Guidelines, 2004
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Road and Paving Materials; Vehicle-Pavement Systems,
Volume 04.03
Clark County Public Works, Uniform Standard Drawings
Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), Communications Handbook for Traffic Control Systems (replaced in
2004 by Telecommunications Handbook for Transportation Professionals)
FHWA, Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and LRFD Design Methods, 2010
FHWA, Highway Design Handbook for Older Drivers and Pedestrians, 2001
FHWA, Highway-Rail Crossing Handbook, 3rd Edition, July 2019
FHWA, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), 2003 and 2009 MUTCD with Revisions 1 and 2,
May 2012
FHWA, MUTCD, Interim Approval for Optional use of Green Colored Pavement for Bike Lanes (IA-14), 2011
Memorandum
FHWA, Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook, Revised 3rd Edition, 2019
FHWA, Standard Highway Signs Manual, 2004
FHWA, Standard Highway Signs Supplement, 2012
FHWA, Synthesis of Pavement Marking Research, 2015
Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE), Manual of Traffic Engineering Studies, 2nd Edition, November 2010
ITE, Traffic Control Devices Handbook, 2nd Edition, 2013
ITE, Transportation and Traffic Engineering Handbook, 7th Edition, January 2016
National Association of City Transportation Officials (NACTO), Urban Bikeway Design Guide, 2014
NDOT, A Streamlined and Automated Procedure for Identifying No-Passing Zones Using Existing Resources
Available to the Nevada Department of Transportation, 2018
NDOT, Access Management System and Standards, 2017 Edition
NDOT, Concept of Operations: NDOT Active Traffic Management System, 2019
NDOT, Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual, December 2013
NDOT, NDOT HOV/Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Design Manual, 2006
NDOT, Qualified Products List (QPL)
NDOT, Research Manual, August 2003
NDOT, Road Design Guide, 2019 Edition
NDOT, Roadside Design Guide, 4th Edition, 2011
NDOT, Sign Supplement, 2006
NDOT, Signals, Lighting, and ITS Design Guide, 2019
NDOT, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2014
NDOT, Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction, 2020
NDOT, Structures Manual and Revision, 2008 and 2019 Revision
NDOT, Work Zone Safety and Mobility Implementation Guide, April 2015 and April 2019
Transportation Research Board (TRB), Highway Capacity Manual: A Guide for Multimodal Mobility Analysis
(HCM), 6th Edition, 2016
TRB, Report 350: Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features,
1993
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
•
•
•
TRB, National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP), Report 581: Design of Construction Work
Zones on High-Speed Highways, 2007
TRB, NCHRP, Report 672: Roundabouts: An Informational Guide, 2nd Edition, 2010
U.S. Department of Transportation (USDOT), Uniformity Requirements
1-3
This page intentionally left blank.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
FONSI:
Finding of No Significant Impact
FSP:
Freeway Service Patrol
GPS:
Global Positioning System
HAR:
Highway Advisory Radio
AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
HCM:
Highway Capacity Manual, published by the Transportation Research Board
AC:
Asphalt Concrete
HOV:
High-Occupancy Vehicle
ADA:
Americans with Disabilities Act (42 USC 12181)
ITE:
Institute of Transportation Engineers
ADAAG:
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
ITS:
Intelligent Transportation Systems
ADT:
Average Daily Traffic
LCD:
Liquid-Crystal Display
AFAD:
Automated Flagger Assistance Device
LED:
Light-Emitting Diode
ANSI:
American National Standards Institute
LOS:
Level of Service
ASTM:
American Society for Testing and Materials
LPG:
Liquified Petroleum Gas
ATM:
Active Traffic Management
LPN:
Location Project Number
ATSSA:
American Traffic Signing and Safety Association
LRFD:
Load and Resistance Factor Design
AV:
Autonomous Vehicle
LTP:
Lead Technical Professional
BWL:
Broken White Line
MASH:
Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware
CADD:
Computer-Aided Design and Drafting
MOT:
Maintenance of Traffic
CAV:
Connected and Autonomous Vehicle
MOU:
Memorandum of Understanding
CBR:
Concrete Barrier Rail
MPH:
Miles per Hour
CC:
Corner Clearance
MUTCD:
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, published by the U.S. Department of Transportation
CCTV:
Closed-Circuit Television
MVH:
Maximum Vehicle Height
CFR:
Code of Federal Regulations
NACTO:
National Association of City Transportation Officials
CMP:
Construction Monitoring Plan
NB:
Northbound
CMS:
Changeable Message Sign
NCHRP:
National Cooperative Highway Research Program
CPM:
Critical Path Method
NDOT:
Nevada Department of Transportation
CV:
Connected Vehicle
NEH:
Nevada’s Electric Highway
DMS:
Dynamic Message Sign
NHS:
National Highway System
DWL:
Dotted White Line
NRS:
Nevada Revised Statutes
EA:
Environmental Assessment
NSRS:
Nevada Shared Radio System
EB:
Eastbound
OH:
Overhead
EOP:
Edge of Pavement
PBS:
Plant mix Bituminous Surface
EOT:
Edge of Travel Lane
PC:
Point of Curvature
ETC:
Electronic Toll Collection
PCCP:
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
EV:
Electric Vehicle
PDFS:
Preliminary Design Field Study
FAST:
Freeway and Arterial System of Transportation
PI:
Public Information
FHWA:
Federal Highway Administration
PIF:
Public Interest Finding
This section is intended to provide the SSTC designer with a glossary of terms commonly associated with SSTC work.
2.1.
Acronyms/Initialisms/Symbols
AADT:
Annual Average Daily Traffic
2-1
SECTION 2. GLOSSARY OF TERMS
PIO:
Public Information Officer
TSR:
Temporary Speed Reduction
PLSS:
Public Land Survey System
TTC:
Temporary Traffic Control
PPCBR:
Portable Precast Concrete Barrier Rail
TTI:
Texas Transportation Institute
PRT:
Perception-Response Time
TTS:
Travel Time Sign
PS&E:
Plans, Specifications, and Estimates
USBRS:
U.S. Bicycle Route System
PSAMS:
Project Scheduling and Management Systems
USC:
United States Code
PT:
Point of Tangent
USDOT:
United States Department of Transportation
QA:
Quality Assurance
USE:
Use as Service Equipment
QAQC:
Quality Assurance and Quality Control
UTCO/UTC: Uniform Traffic Control Officer
QC:
Quality Control
UVC:
QCR:
Quality Control Reviewer
VASCAR: Visual Average Speed Computer and Recorder
QPL:
Qualified Products List
VC:
Vertical Clearance
QR:
Quick Response
VSL:
Variable Speed Limit
RE:
Resident Engineer
V2I:
Vehicle to Infrastructure
RFID:
Radio Frequency Identification
WB:
Westbound
ROW:
Right-of-Way
RPM:
Raised Pavement Markers
RTC:
Regional Transportation Commission
RWIS:
Road Weather Information System
SB:
Southbound
SLI:
Signals, Lighting, and ITS
SOV:
Single-Occupancy Vehicle
SR:
State Route
SSTC:
Signing, Striping, and Traffic Control
SWL:
Solid White Line
SWZ:
Smart Work Zone
TACS:
Tire Anomaly and Classification System
TC:
Traffic Control
TCP:
Traffic Control Plan
TCS:
Traffic Control Supervisor
TCT:
Traffic Control Technician
TIA:
Traffic Impact Analysis
TIM:
Traffic Incident Management
TMC:
Traffic Management Center
TMP:
Transportation Management Plan
TO:
Transportation Operations
TRB:
Transportation Research Board
TSE:
Traffic Safety Engineering
Uniform Vehicle Code
Table 2-1 provides a list of sign structure symbols commonly used in plans.
2-2
SECTION 2. GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Bicycle Boulevard: Street segment that has been modified to accommodate through bicycle traffic and minimize cutthrough motor traffic.
Table 2-1. Sign Structure Symbols
Symbol
Structure Description
Single Post Sign
Breakaway Support: A support for a sign that separates when pressure is applied to limit damage to drivers and
vehicles.
Double Post Unbraced Sign
Buffer Space: Extra roadway space that adds separation from adjacent motor vehicle lanes.
Double Post Braced Sign (must be protected or outside of clear zone)
Center Lines: Yellow pavement marking lines used to delineate and separate traffic traveling in opposite directions.
Changeable Message Sign (CMS): An electronic message sign used to provide public notification before a major
change in roadway configuration, speed reduction, or traffic patterns in which the message to be displayed can be
created by changing each pixel independently. It also may be called Variable Message Sign, Dynamic Message Sign,
or Electronic Message Sign.
Back-to-Back Signs
Back-to-Back Signs with Additional Perpendicular Panel
Clear Zone: An area, starting at the edge of travel, that is clear and available for safe stopping by a driver
experiencing difficulties.
Back-to-Back Signs (2 Sets Perpendicular)
Special Pivot Post or Perpendicular Post
Cantilever Sign Structure
Collector-Distributor (CD) Road: A one-way road next to a freeway that is used for some or all ramps that would
otherwise merge into or split from the main lanes of the freeway. It is similar to a frontage road but is built to freeway
standards. It is used to eliminate or move weaving from the main lanes of the freeway.
Sign Bridge Structure
Construction Phasing: A balance between effective traffic management and efficient construction by sequencing
critical construction elements while maintaining safe work zones.
Crossbuck: An X-shaped highway warning sign that indicates a railroad crossing.
Butterfly Structure
Crosswalk Markings: Pavement markings that provide visible guidance to pedestrians and vehicles on the segments
of roadway where pedestrians are expected to cross.
Sign Mounted to Light Pole
2.2.
Delineators: Retroreflective devices used to indicate the alignment of the roadway. Also known as Guideposts.
Sign Mounted on Sound/Retaining Wall (Vertical)
Demand: The need for service, e.g., the number of vehicles wanting to use a given segment of roadway during a
specified unit of time.
Sign Mounted on Sound/Retaining Wall
Density: A measure of the concentration of vehicles, stated as the number of vehicles per mile per lane.
Design Speed: Selected speed used to determine the various geometric design features of the Roadway. This will be
determined by Roadway Design Division.
Definitions
Design Vehicle: The largest vehicle that must be accommodated by the design of this roadway. Usually this will be
the largest vehicle allowed by law on that roadway without a permit, however permitted vehicles are designed for in
some instances.
Advance Warning Area: A highway section where drivers are warned and prepared about an upcoming work zone or
incident area.
Alternative Fuel Corridors: Corridors designated by the USDOT in strategic locations that have national plug-in
electric vehicle charging and hydrogen, propane, and natural gas fueling locations to improve the mobility of
alternative fuel vehicles.
Detectable Warning Surfaces: Raised surface that is easily detectable by a cane or feet required at pedestrian curb
ramps for crosswalk (marked or unmarked) locations.
Arterial: A roadway that provides a high degree of mobility with a low degree of access in an urban or rural area.
Detour: Temporary rerouting of road users onto an alternate roadway to avoid a road closure.
Ball-Bank Indicator: A device used to determine advisory speeds for curves and turns by measuring the angle of the
ball versus the speed driven around a curve.
Diversion: Temporary rerouting of road users onto a temporary highway or alignment placed around the work area
that reconnects with the permanent infrastructure of the designated route.
Barricades: Portable or fixed devices having one to three rails with appropriate markings (stripes) used to control
road users by closing, restricting, or delineating all or a portion of the right-of-way.
Fog Line: A painted stripe that delineates the right and left edges of a roadway.
Gore: A triangular piece of land where roads merge or split.
Best Management Practice: Methods or techniques found to be the most effective and practical means to achieve
an end.
2-3
SECTION 2. GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Highway Advisory Radio: A low-powered AM radio transmitter used to inform motorists of local roadway or traffic
conditions.
Radar Detector: A vehicle detector installed above or adjacent to the roadway capable of being activated by the
passage of a vehicle through its field of radar.
Incident: Any non-recurring event that causes a reduction of roadway capacity or an abnormal increase in demand.
Such events include traffic crashes, disabled vehicles, spilled cargo, and special non-emergency events (e.g., sports
events, concerts, parades, construction, maintenance, or any other event that significantly affects roadway
operations).
Ramp Meters: Traffic signals placed where on-ramps enter freeways or other major thoroughfares.
Recessed Striping: Striping placed in a grooved or milled pavement section that is used to increase protection to
pavement markings from snowplow blades and shearing forces from daily traffic.
Incident Zone: Area of a highway where temporary traffic control devices are imposed by authorized officials in
response to a traffic incident.
Retroreflectivity: The property of a surface that allows a large portion of the light coming from a point source to be
returned directly back to a point near its origin.
Inspection Stations: Checkpoints in the highway where trucks are inspected for legal compliance purposes.
Road Design Guide: This guide, published by NDOT, contains crucial information on topics pertaining to the roadway
design process.
Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS): A broad range of diverse technologies that, when applied to our current
transportation system, can help improve safety, reduce congestion, enhance mobility, minimize environmental
impacts, save energy, and promote economic productivity. ITS technologies are varied and include information
processing, communications, control, and electronics.
Road Diet: The method of restriping and repurposing travel lanes for other uses—for example, as bicycle lanes.
Rumble Strips: A series of rough-textured or slightly raised or depressed road surfaces intended to alert inattentive
drivers through vibration and sound that their vehicle has left the travel lane.
Intersection Lane Control: The requirement of specific lane maneuvers when approaching an intersection.
Runaway Truck: A commercial vehicle that has lost control driving downhill, typically due to brake issues.
Lane Lines: White pavement marking lines used to delineate and separate traffic traveling in the same direction.
Scope: A set of design parameters that satisfy the purpose and need of the project.
Line Matrix Sign: An electronic message sign in which there are no fixed blank spaces (no pixels) between
characters. The entire line contains columns of pixels with a constant horizontal pitch across the line.
Service Life: The amount of time a product is in use.
Maintenance of Traffic (MOT): The overarching framework in which to plan, design, and execute construction
phasing while maintaining traffic through the work zone.
Shadow Vehicle: A truck or trailer with attenuators spaced a short distance from a moving operation, giving physical
protection to workers from traffic approaching from the rear.
Major Intersection: an intersection with another major street, or an intersection with a high-volume multi-lane
highway, principal urban arterial, or major rural route where the intersecting traffic is heavy or includes many road
users unfamiliar with the area.
Shared Lane Markings (Sharrows): Pavement markings indicating where bicycles and motor vehicles must share a
lane when a bicycle lane is not present.
Smart Work Zone (SWZ) System(s): Systems used to collect, communicate, and archive raw data for determining
performance measures to improve the operations within and around the work zone.
Managed Lane: A lane within a highway facility where operational strategies are proactively implemented and
managed in response to changing conditions. Also known as a Preferential Lane or a Tolled Lane.
Stop Line: Used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to stop in compliance with a traffic control
signal or stop sign. Also known as a Stop Bar.
Mast Arm: A structural support extending over the roadway from a pole to support signal heads and other devices.
Masterworks: The cloud-based project tracking, financing, and estimating program.
Stopping Sight Distance: The distance needed for drivers to see an object on the roadway ahead and bring their
vehicles to a safe stop before colliding with the object. The distances are derived for various design speeds based on
assumptions for driver reaction time, the braking ability of most vehicles under wet pavement conditions, and the
friction provided by most pavement surfaces, assuming good tires.
Minor Intersection: an intersection with another minor arterial or minor street, which are typically local residential
streets. Intersecting traffic is local and very light (low volume).
Movement Prohibition: The restriction of a particular traffic movement, typically at an intersection.
System to System Interchange: An interchange where traffic is carried from one freeway to another via a network of
ramps and connectors.
Operating Speed: The speeds at which vehicles are observed operating during free flow conditions. Free flow
conditions occur when vehicles are unimpeded by traffic control devices (e.g. traffic signals) or other vehicles in the
traffic stream.
Target Speed: The ideal speed limit for a given roadway.
Temporary Speed Reduction (TSR): Posted speed limit as part of a special event or work zone.
Overpass: An overpass is a bridge, road, railway, or similar structure that crosses over another road or railway.
Temporary Traffic Control (TTC): Includes all items necessary to regulate, guide, and provide information to road
users so they can safely travel through a work zone.
Pavement Marking Extensions: Pavement marking dashed lines that help guide vehicles by providing a continuous
mark for the lanes through intersections and interchanges. Also known as “cat tracks.”
Termination Area: A section downstream of the work area where road users are returned to their normal driving
path.
Pork Chop Island: Triangular islands placed adjacent to free right-turn lanes. They separate right-turning vehicles
from through lanes and provide a refuge for pedestrians to cross the free right-turn lane before crossing the through
lanes.
Toll Plaza: The entrance of a tolled roadway, usually through toll booths.
2-4
SECTION 2. GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Temporary Traffic Control Plans (TTCPs): Detailed drawings that lay out a plan, including temporary signing,
striping, and devices to navigate through and around a temporary construction site.
Traffic Management Center (TMC): The hub of a transportation management system, where information about the
transportation network is collected and combined with other operational and control data to manage the transportation
network and to produce traveler information.
Transition Area: A highway section where road users must maneuver out of their normal path to go through a work
zone area.
Transportation Management Area (TMA): An urbanized area with a population of more than 200,000 residents. In
Nevada, these areas are Las Vegas and Reno. The following counties also will be considered as TMAs: Clark,
Carson, Douglas, Lyon, Storey, and Washoe. In the TMA urbanized areas, any project located on an interstate or US
designated roadway will be considered significant.
Transportation Management Plan (TMP): A project-specific plan, coordinated by design and construction
professionals, to identify implementation strategies in which to appropriately maintain and monitor traffic through
phased construction. There are three parts to a TMP: (1) traffic control plan, (2) transportation operation strategies,
and (3) public information activities.
Tunnel: Road tunnels are enclosed roadways with vehicle access that is restricted to portals regardless of the type of
structure or method of construction. They do not include enclosed roadways created by highway bridges, railroad
bridges, or other bridges.
Underpass: A portion of a roadway extending through or beneath a natural or man-made structure.
Work Zone: Area of a highway with construction, maintenance, or utility work activities.
Yield Lines: Used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to yield in compliance with a Yield sign.
Yielding Support: A support for a sign that flexes when pressure is applied to limit damage to drivers and vehicles.
2-5
This page intentionally left blank.
i
FIELD INVESTIGATION GUIDELINES
3.1.
General
3.3.
During design plan development, field investigations may be conducted at the proposed site. The purpose of field
investigations is to verify and/or collect data on existing field conditions to facilitate plan preparation and identify
potential conflicts prior to actual construction. Field investigations may allow the designer to assess the existing
elements, geometry, and conditions, which may provide information not available on maps or images.
The Construction Division, Roadway Design Division, and the Traffic Division, work together to discuss a traffic control
concepts.
At the Intermediate design state, a constructability field meeting takes place and is coordinated by the Construction
Division. When practical the SSTC designer should attend these field meetings to observe and discuss any
constructability concerns and what impacts they will have on TTC. Some items to be considered when performing the
constructability field review are listed in the Nevada MOT Red Flag Summary checklist.
Field investigations may be more common for signing design, but, in certain cases, it may be performed for striping
and temporary traffic control (TTC) design. Existing topographic survey files and aerial imagery offer thorough
information for striping and TTC plans, but a field visit could be made to confirm the information used.
3.2.
Project Constructability/Traffic Control Field Review
A Constructability/Traffic Control meeting will be scheduled by the Project Coordinator. This meeting will determine
TC development/delivery method, limitations of operations, potential TC strategies, speed reduction needs, and
device requirements. Items from the Nevada MOT Red Flag Summary should be considered and discussed when
necessary. The Traffic representative is responsible for determining if the TTCP or concept conforms to the MUTCD,
identifying and developing any necessary 625.03.05 Special Provisions language and developing the TMP.
Project Kickoff and Preliminary Design Field Study (PDFS)
Prior to holding the PDFS, the Project Coordinator will schedule a Project-Kickoff meeting. This meeting is intended to
notify and provide the appropriate divisions and other key stakeholders with the project limits, scope preliminary
schedule, specific areas of concern, the location of project information to be collected to date, and when the PDFS is
scheduled. Generally, there will be a 4-week time period between Project-Kickoff and the PDFS to allow individual
divisions to perform any additional project research needed prior to the PDFS.
3.4.
Intersection and Roadway Geometry
Capturing information on intersection and roadway geometry may prove useful when conducting a field investigation.
Existing intersection and approach geometry can be verified in the field, including:
A PDFS is a field visit to see the project from a different perspective, discover new items that need addressing, and to
get feedback from maintenance, District Traffic, and other divisions. Before performing the field visit, generally there
will be a meeting to go over the agenda and discuss the specific areas that are planned to be reviewed in the field.
The SSTC project designer should perform a virtual field review and gather existing project information to gain a
better understanding of the project scope and to identify any additional areas that may need to be addressed that
were not originally considered in the development of the project scope prior to the PDFS. The Project Coordinator will
schedule and coordinate the PDFS. Some items to be considered when performing a PDFS are:
•
Roadside slope
•
Curb and gutter
•
On-street parking
•
Left- and right-turn channelization
•
Existing sign locations in relation to the right-of-way
•
Sight distance restrictions
•
Right-of-way concerns for placing new signs
•
Sidewalks
•
Upgrading and/or installing new signs to meet current MUTCD/NDOT Standards
•
Bicycle paths
•
Signs on light poles that will need to be placed on posts
•
Posted speed limits
•
Signs placed in concrete sidewalk (ADA, replacement of concrete needed for new or removal)
•
Unique sign mountings (barrier rail mounting/sound wall mounting/non-standard posts
•
Verify if project has any wildlife/horse/bull signs on project
•
Overhead/bridge mounted sign structures – age/condition/panel requirements (MUTCD)
•
New overhead sign structure needs
•
Construction impacts to existing signs/overhead structures (Median crossovers needed, new barrier rail or
replacement barriers)
•
Communicate & include any District Traffic concerns or request
•
RSA recommendations have been considered and included (if applicable)
•
Costs and scope included at scoping level adequate to cover sign needs
In addition, information on right-of-way (ROW) and drainage can be verified. ROW restrictions may require that
permanent easements be obtained to place and maintain infrastructure.
3.5.
Checklist
The field investigation may include a thorough investigation of the site to familiarize the designer with the
characteristics unique to that location. Review the signing field investigation checklist (Figure 3-1) during the
investigation to help capture any pertinent information.
Prior to the field visit, the designer should become familiar with the location of the project using available aerial
imagery, such as images from Google Maps, to document the characteristics of the site. Also obtain a previous or
current plan set prior to going into field if available. Verify the accuracy of information represented on the plans and
include discrepancies noted during the field investigation. Information not included on the plans but observed in the
field should be added. The designer also should develop initial plan sheets with existing sign information and
mapping, which may/should be brought into the field to confirm data, document existing sign sizes, and document any
variations. It is most productive to conduct the field investigation when weather conditions are favorable. The signing
pre-design field checklist (see Figure 3-1) has been created to capture the existing conditions of the project location
prior to the field visit and then verify elements during the field visit. It is recommended that the checklists be reviewed
The project designer should work with the Senior Traffic Designer to determine if additional PDFS scope needs to be
included. A PDFS request should be prepared and provided to the Project Coordinator/Manager. The additional items
will be sent by the Project Coordinator to the Chief Roadway Design Engineer for approval.
3-1
SECTION 3. FIELD INVESTIGATION GUIDELINES
Figure 3-1. Signing Pre-Design Field Checklist
prior to heading out to the site and then use plan sheets or an aerial image to document any variations from the
checklist items. The checklist provides, at a minimum, a general list of items that should be confirmed during the field
investigation.
Elements in the signing pre-design field checklist include roadway features, physical features, sign structure features,
sign panel features, and an “Other” category for additional features. The roadway features include basic information
such as roadway name, speed limit, and approximate milepost location and location of signs. The physical features
include roadside slope, pavement type, and existence of bicycle lanes and on-street parking. Sign structure features
capture whether the sign is ground mounted or overhead mounted, and associated details of the sign structures. Sign
panel features include information such as panel size, panel color, and panel text. Elements included in the “Other”
category include creating a photo log of the existing signs in the field, noting any damage to the sign, identifying any
elements that obstruct the view of the sign, assessing the retroreflectivity of the sign, and capturing any date stamp or
etching located on the back of the sign panel.
Reach out to the district’s traffic engineer or engineering services manager to ask if they have any pending sign(s) or
pavement marking(s) additions or modifications within the project limits so they can be accounted for in the project.
(With a field investigation, any recently installed signs or pavement markings by district should be accounted for which
would not be part of prior as-built drawings, Roadview Explorer or Google Map street viewing, etc.)
3.6.
Video Inventory
Video inventory is an optional supplement to field investigation and may be used to substitute for field investigation in
certain rare cases. This can be performed by driving down each roadway (both directions) in the project area with a
camera set up to capture video along the corridor. The video data will allow the designer to capture the existing
features in the field in an accessible format. Using the video data, the designer will be able to stop at each sign
location to assess the information and return to each location as needed, which will allow for a shorter and safer visit
in the field.
3-2
SIGNING
4.1.
General
The design of new or improved sign installations has many interrelated elements. Uniformity in the design of those
elements promotes efficient traffic operations and reduces the potential for driver confusion and incidents. This
uniformity is accomplished through use of applicable design standards, including those found within:
•
Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)
•
2004 edition of FHWA Standard Highway Signs and 2012 Supplement
•
Current edition of the Nevada Department of Transportation (NDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction
•
Most current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction
•
NDOT Sign Supplement 2006
•
2001 Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) Traffic Control Devices Handbook
•
United States Department of Transportation (USDOT) uniformity requirements
4.2.
Design Criteria and Standards
4.2.1.
Regulations, Codes, and Jurisdictional Policies
All sign plans, materials, and workmanship must conform to the standards established by the American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM), the MUTCD, the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (the “Green Book”), NDOT Sign Supplement 2006,
NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction, FHWA Standard Highway Signs Manual, NDOT Managed
Lanes and Ramp Metering Design Manual, 2001 ITE Traffic Control Devices Handbook, and to any local ordinances
or maintaining agency requirements that may apply.
In addition to the above requirements, materials, equipment, and installation/construction procedures must conform to
the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Where specific products or
materials are designated for specific agencies, only those items will be allowed for those agencies.
4.2.2.
Existing Signs and Supports
Design Expectations
Signs must be designed and installed to convey clear and positive guidance to drivers and pedestrians. This section
contains discussions, illustrations, and examples of the design elements that are necessary to develop effective
signing plans.
In addition to the information contained in this section, there are several standard references that may prove valuable
to the signing engineer and designer. These references are listed in Section 1.6, References.
When gathering information for each design project, the designer needs to determine whether signs need to be
removed, replaced, relocated, or remain in place based on the scope of the project. Ensuring sign uniformity for both
directions of travel must be considered. In addition, the designer must replace the signs that do not meet the minimum
requirements of the current editions of the MUTCD, Nevada Sign Policy, NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge
Construction, or the NDOT Sign Supplement 2006.
4.1.1.
Service Life
Project Scoping
The expected service life of sign panels is approximately 10 years. The service life for ground-mounted sign supports
and for overhead (OH) sign supports is 20 and 50 years, respectively. A visual sign inventory inspection should be
completed for all design projects. A visual inspection of existing signs within the project limits should include searching
for damaged signs that are broken, dented, cracked, faded, delaminated, or scratched. The visual inspection also
should include ensuring that signs meet the current MUTCD and NDOT standards. Signs that are damaged,
approaching the end of their life span, or are not to code will need to be replaced in each project. Considerations
should also be made for when the next project will occur in this location to ensure the sign does not surpass its
service life. For example, if a sign is 7 years old but the next project is about 7 years out, the panel should be
replaced. The project coordinator should be consulted to determine frequency of next project.
A project’s scope can be defined as a set of design parameters that precisely satisfy the purpose and need of the
project. A poorly identified scope that is broader than the purpose and need will result in an unnecessarily high project
budget and extended schedule, while a scope that falls short will yield a project that doesn’t accomplish what is
needed and may include many addenda. While an accurate project scope is difficult to identify early in development, a
careful, multidisciplinary examination of the purpose and need will produce a solid foundation upon which project
development can occur.
During initial scoping, the sign designer should review and update the checklist presented in Figure 3-1 and
consider the following information, so potential changes to the project scope can be dealt with as they emerge.
This will allow the scope, represented by the preliminary plan, to be as accurate as possible.
•
Do existing signs conform to national, state, and local standards?
•
Do the proposed signing limits extend beyond those of the roadway plans?
•
Will project design features impact vertical clearance requirements?
•
Are existing signs approaching the end of their life span?
•
Should overhead sign structures be added or replaced?
Certain signs may need more frequent replacement, such as south facing signs, signs in natural pullouts, and signs in
plowed areas. A field visit may be needed to evaluate the sign for replacement and relocation, even if the sign is
relatively new.
4.2.3.
Bid Items
Refer to Section 627 of the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction for more information on
Permanent Signs bid items. Section 627 includes the furnishing, erecting, and installation of signs, sign supports, and
other materials required for highway signs. The following, Table 4-1, represents the typical sign bid items.
The items above are in no way a complete list of information that needs to be considered within the scope of work for
a signing project, but they can be used as a starting point. From a design perspective, the items listed above are for
information only and do not fall under the purview of a designer or engineer. Typically, these items are considered by
the Project Manager and the Principal Traffic Operations Engineer.
Table 4-1. Sign Bid Items
4-1
ITEM#
6270022
UOM
SPCL
EACH
FALSE
6270050
LS
TRUE
6270100
INSTALL STATE FURNISHED MATERIAL
LS
TRUE
INSTALL STATE FURNISHED SIGNS
DESCRIPTION
PERMANENT OVERHEAD SIGN PANEL, RECONSTRUCT
SECTION 4. SIGNING
DESCRIPTION
•
Chapter 2H: General Information Signs
PERMANENT OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORT STRUCTURES*
•
Chapter 2I: General Service Signs
PERMANENT OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORT STRUCTURES, REMOVE
•
PERMANENT OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORT STRUCTURES, RESET
Chapter 2J: Specific Service Signs
•
Chapter 2K: Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs
•
Chapter 2L: Changeable Message Signs
•
Chapter 2M: Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Signs
•
Chapter 2N: Emergency Management Signing
ITEM#
6270110
UOM
SPCL
LS
FALSE
6270130
EACH
FALSE
6270131
EACH
FALSE
6270140
LS
TRUE
EACH
TRUE
6270150
PERMANENT OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORT, STRUCTURE MOUNT
PERMANENT OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORT, STRUCTURE MOUNT,
REMOVE
SQFT
FALSE
6270160
PERMANENT SIGN PANELS (OVERHEAD)
SQFT
FALSE
6270170
PERMANENT SIGN PANELS (OVERHEAD) (REMOVE)
SQFT
FALSE
SQFT
FALSE
PERMANENT SIGN PANELS (OVERHEAD) (RESET)
PERMANENT SIGN PANELS (OVERHEAD) (INTERNALLY
ILLUMINATED)
SQFT
FALSE
SQFT
FALSE
6270210
SQFT
FALSE
6270220
PERMANENT SIGNS (GROUND MOUNTED) (TIMBER SUPPORTS)
SQFT
FALSE
6270230
FA
6270240
6270145
6270180
6270190
6270200
The MUTCD is used as the standard; however, engineering judgement or studies also should be considered. Sign
applications on roadway geometric designs should be coordinated with NDOT Traffic Operations to effectively place
signs that provide the road user with essential regulatory information, warning, guidance, or other pertinent
information provided by signs.
PERMANENT SIGNS (GROUND MOUNTED) (METAL SUPPORTS)
PERMANENT SIGNS (GROUND MOUNTED) (SPECIAL METAL
SUPPORTS)
4.3.
Design Plans and Practices
PERMANENT SIGN PANELS (PANELS ONLY)
TRUE
4.3.1.
Standardization of Sign Location
PERMANENT SIGNS, ADJUST
SQFT
FALSE
General
6270250
PERMANENT SIGNS, REMOVE
SQFT
FALSE
6270260
PERMANENT SIGNS, REMOVE (PANEL ONLY)
SQFT
FALSE
6270270
PERMANENT SIGNS, RESET
SQFT
FALSE
6270280
PERMANENT SIGNS, RESET (PANELS ONLY)
SQFT
TRUE
PERMANENT SIGNS (FOREST SERVICE)
6270300
The MUTCD specifies, in Section 2A.16, guidance on the standardization of sign locations. Signs should only be used
as justified by engineering judgement or study. Roadway geometric design and sign application should be coordinated
to effectively place signs that provide the road users with any necessary information.
Signs requiring separate decisions by the road user must be spaced sufficiently far apart for the appropriate decisions
to be made at a reasonable distance for a safe maneuver. One of the factors considered when determining the
appropriate spacing is the posted or 85th-percentile speed. Signs should typically be located on the right-hand side of
the roadway. Signs that do not serve a traffic control purpose and are placed within the highway right-of-way should
not be located where they will interfere with other traffic control devices.
EACH
TRUE
VANDALISM DETERRENT
*Includes: SIZE OF SIGN PANEL(S); NUMBER OF SUPPORT POSTS; SPAN (IF APPLICABLE)
Additionally, Section 619 of the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction provides details on
Object Markers and Guideposts, which Roadway designers will refer to.
4.2.4.
As specified in Section 2A.16, the MUTCD outlines several considerations for sign locations:
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
The MUTCD has been administered by FHWA since 1971 and is the national standard for all traffic control devices,
which includes roadway pavement markings, highway and roadway signs, traffic control, and traffic signals. The
MUTCD presents the governing standards for all traffic control devices. All public agencies and owners of private
roads open to public travel must comply with these standards. The 2009 Edition of the MUTCD with Revision
Numbers 1 and 2 incorporated is the most recent version of the MUTCD, which includes the signing section: Part 2,
Signs. This section of the MUTCD includes information related to the function and purpose of signs, standardized
applications of signs, and design standards. Part 2 of the MUTCD has detailed sign requirements divided into the
following Chapters:
•
Outside of the clear zone unless placed on a breakaway or yielding support
•
Optimize nighttime visibility
•
Minimize the effects of mud splatter and debris
•
Do not obscure other signs
•
Do not obscure the sight distance to an approaching vehicle on the major street for drivers who are stopped
on the minor street approach
•
Are not hidden from the view
Sign Placement
•
Chapter 2A: General
4.3.2.
•
Chapter 2B: Regulatory Signs, Barricades, and Gates
•
Chapter 2C: Warning Signs and Object Markers
Freeways and Expressways
•
Chapter 2D: Guide Signs—Conventional Roads
•
Chapter 2E: Guide Signs—Freeways and Expressways
•
Chapter 2F: Toll Road Signs
Conventional Highways
•
Chapter 2G: Preferential and Managed Lane Signs
On conventional highways, the order of signs with the highest priority for placement is Regulatory signs, followed by
Warning signs, then Guide signs. Some Regulatory sign placements are critical. Speed Zone, No-Passing Zone,
Several types of signs have critical locations for placement on freeways and expressways. All large overhead Guide
and DMS / ATM signs should maintain a minimum of 800-foot spacing, as noted in the 2001 ITE Traffic Control
Devices Handbook.
4-2
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Table 4-3. NDOT Standard Specifications for Sign Sheeting
School Zone, No Parking Area, Disabled Parking, and Loading Zone signs all have critical sign placement that are
required to be within a certain distance of the specified zone.
Intersections
At intersections, stop and Yield signs (R1-1 and R1-2, respectively) have critical sign placements. These signs should
be installed on the near side of the intersection, the right-hand side of the approach, and line up with the stop bar or
yield bar. On multilane approaches consideration should be given towards placing signs on both sides of the road
especially in situations with reduced sight visibility. Stop and Yield signs should not be mounted on the same post. For
more information, reference Section 4.4.2. Sign placement for Do Not Enter and Wrong Way Driving signs can be
found in Section 4.4.2.
Sign Type
Sign Sheeting Standard
Regulatory
Reflective XI
Warning
Reflective XI
School Zones
Fluorescent reflective yellow green XI
Ground-Mounted Guide
Reflective XI
Overhead Guide (Background)
Reflective XI
Overhead Guide (Legend)
Reflective XI
Excessive Use of Signs
Although there are requirements for the amount and location for Regulatory and Warning signs, these signs should
not be overused so as not to lose their effectiveness. Route signs and Directional Guide signs should be used
frequently with Regulatory and Warning signs to maintain communication with the road users about their locations.
For more information, reference Section 4.4.2.
The following tables (Table 4-4 and Table 4-5) specify the illumination and retroreflectivity of sign elements.
Table 4-4. Illumination of Sign Elements
Means of Illumination
Sign grouping is encouraged to eliminate unnecessary posts and improve aesthetics or clutter on the roadside.
Installing back-to-back signs on a single post is encouraged, where feasible. Regulatory sign panels should not be
combined with any other types of signs on the same post for the same direction. Wrong Way and Do Not Enter signs
(R5-1a and R5-1, respectively) cannot be placed back-to-back with stop and Yield signs. In addition, back-to-back
signs must not have a conflict of shape for stop and Yield signs.
Table 4-2. Minimum Spacing Between Signs
Minimum Spacing
Less than 30 mph
150 feet
30 mph to 45 mph
200 feet
Greater than 45 mph
500 feet
4.4.
Design Elements
4.4.1.
General
•
•
•
Symbol or word message
Background
Symbol, word message, and background
(through a translucent material)
Attached or independently mounted light source
designed to direct essentially uniform illumination onto
the sign face
•
Entire sign face
Light emitting diodes (LEDs)
•
•
Symbol or word message
Portions of the sign border
Other devices or treatments that highlight the sign
shape, color, or message:
• Luminous tubing
• Fiber optics
• Incandescent light bulbs
• Luminescent panels
•
•
Symbol or word message
Entire sign face
Light behind the sign face
The minimum spacing between ground-mounted signs should follow the standards set in Table 4-2.
Speed Limit
Sign Element to be Illuminated
Source: MUTCD, Table 2A-1 and Table 2A-2
Table 4-5. Retroreflectivity of Sign Elements
Retroreflectivity and Illumination
Retroreflectivity is the property of a surface that allows a large portion of the light coming from a point source to be
returned directly back to a point near its origin. Retroreflectivity is essential for the nighttime visibility of signs and for
ensuring the safety of road users. Retroreflectivity standards can be found in NDOT’s Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction and are specified in each sign type section to follow. As specified in the MUTCD
Chapter 2A, requirements for sign illumination should not be considered satisfied by street or highway lighting.
Minimum retroreflectivity values for traffic signs are included in the MUTCD. The MUTCD specifies that regulatory
signs must illuminate to show the same shape and similar color during both the day and night. NDOT Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction requirements for sign sheeting is shown in Table 4-3, below.
In some situations, signs are supplemented by flashers. Signs placed on new installations for flashers are SLI’s
responsibility.
Means of Retroreflection
Sign Element
Reflector “buttons” or similar units
•
•
•
Symbol
Word message
Border
A material that has a smooth, sealed outer surface
over a microstructure that reflects light
•
•
•
•
Symbol
Word message
Border
Background
Source: MUTCD, Table 2A-1 and Table 2A-2
Additional information on bold symbol signs, fine symbol signs, and special cases can be found in Table 2A-3 of the
MUTCD. The ASTM D4956-19 provides the standard specification for retroreflective sheeting for traffic control. This
4-3
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Bicycle
Table 4-6. MUTCD-Specified Sign Shapes
Shape
Sign
Sign Code
Octagon
Stop
R1-1
Equilateral Triangle (1 point down)
Yield
R1-2
Circle
Grade Crossing Advance Warning
W10-1
Pennant Shape/Isosceles Triangle
(longer axis horizontal)
No Passing
Pentagon (pointed up)
School Advance Warning Sign
(squared bottom corners)
County Route Sign (tapered bottom
corners)
Diamond
Warning Series
N/A
Rectangle (including square)
Regulatory Series
Guide Series
Warning Series
N/A
Trapezoid
Recreational and Cultural Interest
Area Series
National Forest Route Sign
N/A
X
Fluorescent
Pink
Fluorescent
Yellow-Green
Purple
X
State Route
X
X
US Route
X
X
X
X
Forest Route
X
Street Name
X
X
Destination
X
X
Reference Location
X
X
Information
Yellow
Green
Brown
Blue
Black
X
X
County Route
R15-1
Yellow
White
X
X
Interstate Route
S1-1
M1-6
Grade Crossing
X
Guide
W14-3
Crossbuck (two rectangles in an “X”
configuration)
Red
Black
Chapter 2A of the MUTCD specifies certain shapes that should be used exclusively for specific signs or series of
signs. Table 4-6 shares that information.
Green
Type of Sign
White
Shapes
Background
Orange
Legend
Red
specification provides typical applications for Type XI as permanent highway signing, construction zone devices, and
delineators. The minimum coefficients of retroreflection can be found in Table 10 of the ASTM D4956-19 standard.
X
X
X
Evacuation Route
X
X
Road User Service
X
X
Recreational
X
X
X
X
Temporary Traffic
Control
X
X
Incident Management
X
X
School
X
ETC-Account Only
X
X
X
X
When a regulatory sign has a flasher, the “WHEN FLASHING” sign is to be black on yellow.
Sign Colors
Sign Borders
Table 4-7, modified from Table 2A-5 from the MUTCD, specifies common uses of sign colors based on the type of
sign.
Sign borders should follow the 2003 MUTCD Section 2A.15 and Table 4-8 and Table 4-9, below, for Guide,
Regulatory, and Warning signs. In most cases, the sign border should be the same color as the legend. A white
border should extend to the edge of the panel; however, a dark border should be set in from the edge of the sign. The
corners of all sign borders should be rounded and where suitable, the corners of the sign panels should also fit the
border except for stop signs.
Table 4-7. Uses of Sign Colors
Permissive
Warning
X
X
Case I—Border Only (Guide Signs)
Fluorescent
Pink
X
Fluorescent
Yellow-Green
X
Purple
X
Yellow
Green
Brown
X
X
Blue
X
Black
X
Yellow
X
White
Prohibitive
White
X
Red
Regulatory
Green
Black
Type of Sign
Red
Background
Orange
Legend
Table 4-8. Sign Borders for Guide Signs
Minimum Sign Dimension*
X
X
X
Pedestrian
X
X
Pedestrian Safety
X
< 3”
3” < 5”
5” < 7”
7” < 12”
> 12”
Border Width
1”
1”
2”
2”
3”
Corner Radius
3”
6”
9”
12”
12”
*Minimum dimension can be the width or height.
X
4-4
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Speed Limit and Route Sign Placement
Case II—Margin and Border (Regulatory and Warning Signs)
Speed Limit signs should be placed 1,000 feet after the Route sign, which is placed 500 feet after the on ramp. The
Destination and Distance sign should be placed 1,000 feet after the Speed Limit sign after ramps. Speed Limit signs
should be placed 500 feet from Route signs and Destination and Distance signs for all other scenarios. Prior to
relocating any existing Speed Limit signs, approval of the Principal Traffic Engineer of Operations and Network
Analysis is required. The following figure provides an example of typical speed limit and route sign placements on
freeways/expressways and conventional roadways, respectively in Nevada.
Table 4-9. Sign Borders for Regulatory and Warning Signs
Minimum Dimension
< 12”
12” <
24”
24” <
30”
30” <
36”
36” <
48”
48” <
60”
60” <
72”
72” <
84”
84” <
144”
> 144”
Margin
Width
3/8”
3/8”
3/8”
1/2”
5/8”
3/4”
1-1/4”
1-1/2”
2”
2”
Border
Width
3/8”
1/2”
5/8”
3/4”
7/8”
1-1/4”
1-1/2”
1-3/4”
2-1/2”
3”
Corner
Radius
1-1/2”
1-1/2”
1-1/2”
1-7/8”
2-1/4”
3”
6”
6”
9”
12”
4.4.2.
Figure 4-1. Speed Limit and Route Sign Placement
Regulatory Signs
General
The MUTCD classifies Regulatory signs as prohibitory and restrictive signs, which are used to inform road users of
traffic laws or regulations. These signs may indicate the applicability of the legal requirements. The decision to use an
approved Regulatory sign should be warranted by traffic or field studies. Note that Regulatory signs are not necessary
to confirm driving laws and general driving rules.
If there is a significant regulatory change being proposed on a project (new stop sign, speed limit change, turn
prohibition, etc.), local law enforcement will need to be notified of the change before construction.
Designing Sign Panels
NDOT’s Sign Supplement 2006 provides engineers and designers with a reference for sign panel designs that are
specific to Nevada. It is a supplement to FHWA’s Standard Highway Signs 2012 Supplement.
Retroreflectivity
Retroreflectivity is essential for the nighttime visibility of signs and for ensuring the safety of road users. Minimum
retroreflectivity values for traffic signs are included in the MUTCD. The MUTCD specifies that Regulatory signs must
illuminate to show the same shape and similar color during both the day and night. NDOT Standard Specifications
requires the use of Type IV, IX, or XI reflective sheeting for regulatory sign installations. For more details, see Section
4.4.1.
Speed Limit signs should be placed near the state line on the following routes: I-15, I-80, US 6, US 50, US 93, US 95,
US 395, SR-28, SR-163, and SR-88. Speed Limit signs should be placed following the entrance ramp at all
intermediate and major interchanges. Speed Limit signs should also be posted in or close to municipalities, business
districts, and school zones where speed zones have been established. A sign with the appropriate speed that may be
resumed should be posted at the end of these speed zones to inform the motorist of the end of the speed zone.
Shapes and Sizes
Regulatory signs should be rectangular in shape, unless specifically designated otherwise. Regulatory sign sizes are
shown in Table 2B-1 in Chapter 2B of the MUTCD. The size of the sign is determined based on the type of roadway
on which the sign is being placed. D3 signs are limited in length to 48”. For exceptions, discuss with the Principal
Signs Striping and TC Engineer.
On rural routes over 55 mph, Speed Limit signs should be placed every 10 miles per the MUTCD Recommendation
for 2B.13 approved on January 20, 2011.
Speed Limit Signs
Speed Limit signs (R2-1) are used to display the speed limit established by the law, ordinance, or regulation, or as
adopted by the authorized agency based on an engineering study. Speed limits should be displayed in multiples of 5
mph. Speed Limit signs should be located at the points of change in speeds and the beginning of a section seeing
new road users entering the roadway from intersections or accesses. Speed Limit signs can be installed where
necessary. Speed limit zones can be verified by checking the speed archive maintained in the Operations and
Network Analysis section. If unsure, check with the Principal Operations and Network Analysis engineer. Additional
guidance on Speed Limit signs can be found in Section 2B.13 of the MUTCD.
In urban locations, it is recommended that Speed Limit signs should be placed after every major intersection.
Intersection Regulatory Signs
Yield and Stop-Controlled Intersections
The MUTCD Chapter 2B specifies that a Yield sign (R1-2) or stop sign (R1-1) should be used at an intersection if one
or more of the following conditions occurs:
4-5
SECTION 4. SIGNING
•
An intersection of a less important road with a main road where application of the normal right-of-way rule
would not be expected to provide reasonable compliance with the law
•
A street entering a designated through highway or street
•
An unsignalized intersection in a signalized area
Figure 4-2. Intersection Regulatory Signs
Stop signs should be placed for any paved approach to Nevada highways that consists of public roads and private
routes with access to multiple residences. A stop bar should be placed with every stop sign. Perpetuate any existing
stop signs even if not meeting those criteria. If unsure, coordinate with the District Traffic Engineer. The designer has
ability to add stop signs at their discretion.
Other considerations for installing a stop sign:
•
Dedicated County Road
•
City Streets
•
Special Situations such as:
o
At the intersection of a roadway that generates a large enough volume of traffic that could be unduly
hazardous.
o
At an intersection when the combination of high speed and restricted view would be unduly hazardous
and sight distance improvement is not feasible.
Additional guidance on when to consider a Yield or stop sign can be found in Chapter 2B of the MUTCD.
Stop signs should be 36 inches by 36 inches in size where side roads intersect a multi-lane street or highway that has
a speed limit of 45 mph or higher.
At intersections, stop and Yield signs have critical sign placements that should be installed on the near side of the
intersection on the right-hand side of the approach. When visibility is restricted to stop or Yield signs, a Stop Ahead
(W3-1) or Yield Ahead (W3-2) sign also should be installed in advance of the stop sign or Yield sign.
Signalized Intersections
The use of flashers on yield signs and stop signs is subject to Traffic Operations procedures. Contact NDOT Principal
Operations and Network Engineer with questions. Signs placed on new installations for flashers are SLI’s
responsibility.
Guidance on signing at signalized intersections can be found in the NDOT Signals, Lighting, and ITS Design Guide.
Signing at signalized intersections should be coordinated with a SLI senior designer. NDOT’s SLI group is responsible
for signing on their facilities. Regulatory signs at signalized intersections can include Movement Prohibition signs,
Intersection Lane Control signs, Traffic Signal signs, and Pedestrian and Bicycle Actuation signs. Intersection lane
control signs direct road users on the movement required from that particular lane. Regulatory signs can be ground
mounted, mounted on signal poles, and/or mast arms. Traffic Signal signs—such as Left on Green Arrow Only (R105), Stop Here on Red (R10-6), and Do Not Block Intersection (R10-7)—may be installed at signalized intersections to
clarify signal control. Pedestrian or Bicycle Actuation signs, which provide information about crossing the street,
should be mounted directly above or incorporated into the push button detector unit. More information on signalized
intersections can be found in Chapter 2B and Chapter 4D of the MUTCD.
Roundabouts
Regulatory signs used at roundabouts include Roundabout Directional Arrow (R6-4) signs and Roundabout
Circulation (R6-5P) plaques. Roundabout Directional Arrow (R6-4) signs are placed in the central island when used to
direct traffic counterclockwise around the central island. Roundabout Circulation (R6-5P) plaques are placed below
the Yield sign on each approach when the central island does not provide a reasonable place to install the
Roundabout Directional Arrow signs. Pedestrian warning sign (W11-2) with the diagonal arrow (W16-7p) are to be
used at the crosswalk of roundabout intersections. Additional guidance on Regulatory signs to be used at
roundabouts can be found in Chapter 2B of the MUTCD. Examples of signing at mini roundabouts, one-lane
roundabouts, and two-lane roundabouts with consecutive double lefts can be found in Figure 4-3, Figure 4-4, and
Figure 4-5, respectively from Section 2B.45 of the 2009 MUTCD.
4-6
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-4. One-Lane Roundabout Signing
Figure 4-3. Mini Roundabout Signing
Source: MUTCD, Figure 2B-21
Source: MUTCD, Figure 2B-22
4-7
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-5. Two-Lane Roundabout Signing
Way (R5-1a) signs can be used to supplement Do Not Enter signs where an exit ramp intersects a crossroad, or a
crossroad intersects a one-way roadway in a manner that does not physically discourage or prevent wrong-way entry.
In Chapter 2B of the MUTCD, Figures 2B-14 to 2B-19 display example applications for using One Way signs, Do Not
Enter signs, and Wrong Way signs. Figure 4-6 shows how to use these signs at an exit ramp.
Wrong way and Do Not Enter signs installed on exit ramps shall have red reflective sheeting installed on the back of
the post, on the opposite side of the sign panel face, and conform to Type XI as specified in ASTM D4956.
Figure 4-6. Typical Exit/On Ramp Sign Locations
Do Not Pass Signs
The Do Not Pass (R4-1) sign may be used at the beginning of and within a zone through which sight distance is
restricted or where other conditions make overtaking and passing inappropriate.
If no passing zones are needed on the left side of the road a No Passing Zone sign may be used, See Section 4.4.3
for additional details for No Passing Zone signs. The signs shall also be used in conjunction with pavement markings
or two direction no passing zone pavement markings.
Source: MUTCD, Figure 2B-23
No Trucks Sign
One Way, Do Not Enter, and Wrong Way Signs
No Trucks signs can be either in symbol form (R5-2) or word message (R5-2a). Table 2B-1 of the MUTCD present the
sign size for both symbol and word signs. The Standard Highway Signs and Markings book show details on lettering
for the word message sign.
One Way (R6-1) signs are used to indicate streets or roadways where vehicular traffic is only allowed to travel in one
direction. Do Not Enter (R5-1) signs are used where traffic is prohibited from entering a restricted roadway. Wrong
4-8
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Shapes and Sizes
Before proposing the No Trucks sign, ensure law backing sign, decision on local entity, and corroborate with District
and management.
Warning sign sizes are shown in Table 2C-2 in Chapter 2C of the MUTCD. The size of the sign is dependent on the
type of roadway on which the sign is being placed.
Regulatory Signs for Grade Crossings
Warning Sign Installation Guidance
Signs at railroad and light rail transit grade crossings advise road users to slow down or stop at the grade crossing to
yield to any rail traffic occupying or approaching the grade crossing. The sizes for Grade Crossing Crossbuck (R15-1)
and Grade Crossing Advance Warning Signs (W10 series) signs can be found in Table 8B-1 in Chapter 8B of the
MUTCD.
Table 4-10 (Table 2C-4 in Chapter 2C of the MUTCD), below, provides guidance for determining advance placement
distance of Warning signs based on posted or 85th-percentile speed. Warning signs should be placed to provide an
adequate Perception-Response Time (PRT). The distances in Table 4-10, below, should be used for guidance
purposes and engineering judgement should always be applied.
At a minimum, one Grade Crossing Crossbuck sign (and Grade Crossing Advance Warning Signs as needed) is to be
used on each highway approach to every highway/rail at-grade crossing, alone or in combination with other traffic
control devices. The Grade Crossing Crossbuck sign requires road users to yield the right-of-way to rail traffic at an
at-grade crossing. Additional guidance on Grade Crossing Crossbuck assembly and Grade Crossing Advance
Warning Signs can be found in Chapter 8B of the MUTCD.
Table 4-10. Horizontal Alignment Sign Selection Chart
Posted or
85thPercentile
Speed
Regulatory Signs for Bicycle Facilities
All signs shall be reflectorized for use on bikeways, including shared-use paths and bicycle lane facilities. The
mounting height of the signs shall be a minimum of 4 feet from the bottom of the sign to the edge of path.
Where signs serve both bicyclist and motorists, the signs shall be mounted a minimum of 7 feet from the bottom of the
sign to the edge of roadway.
Advance Placement Distance1
Condition A:
Speed reduction
and lane
changing in
heavy traffic2
Condition B: Deceleration to the listed advisory speed (mph) for the condition
03
104
204
304
404
504
604
704
20 mph
225 ft
115 ft
N/A5
25 mph
325 ft
155 ft
N/A5
N/A5
30 mph
460 ft
200 ft
N/A5
N/A5
35 mph
565 ft
250 ft
N/A5
N/A5
N/A5
40 mph
670 ft
305 ft
100 ft6
100 ft6
N/A5
45 mph
775 ft
360 ft
125 ft
100 ft6
100 ft6
N/A5
Coordinate with Local Agency and District to determine if No Parking sign (R8-3) is warranted.
50 mph
885 ft
425 ft
200 ft
175 ft
125 ft
100 ft6
No Littering Signs
55 mph
990 ft
495 ft
275 ft
225 ft
200 ft
125 ft
N/A5
60 mph
1,100 ft
570 ft
350 ft
325 ft
275 ft
200 ft
100 ft6
65 mph
1,200 ft
645 ft
450 ft
400 ft
350 ft
275 ft
200 ft
100 ft6
70 mph
1,250 ft
730 ft
525 ft
500 ft
450 ft
375 ft
275 ft
150 ft
75 mph
1,350 ft
820 ft
625 ft
600 ft
550 ft
475 ft
375 ft
250 ft
100 ft6
80 mph
1,475 ft
910 ft
725 ft
700 ft
625 ft
550 ft
450 ft
350 ft
200 ft
85 mph
1,600 ft
1010 ft
825 ft
800 ft
750 ft
675 ft
575 ft
450 ft
300 ft
Bicycle paths, bicycle lanes, and shared use paths that are adjacent to the roadway and cross state roads must have
a bicycle stop sign and no motor vehicle signage regardless of the local jurisdiction’s standards.
For details regarding bike lane signs, sizes, and placement, reference Chapter 9B of the MUTCD.
No Parking Signs
Coordinate with Local Agency and District to determine if No Littering sign is warranted.
4.4.3.
Warning Signs
General
Warning signs alert road users to unexpected conditions on or adjacent to a public road. These signs are used in
situations where the unexpected condition might not be readily apparent to the road user. The decision to use an
approved Warning sign should be based on an engineering study or engineering judgement. Warning signs should
only be used when necessary and kept to a minimum and only be used when necessary.
804
150 ft
1 The distances are adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 180 feet for Condition A. The distances for Condition B (with the
exception of the potential stop condition) have been adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 feet, which is appropriate for an
alignment warning symbol sign. For Conditions A and B, warning signs with less than 6-inch legend or more than four words, a
minimum of 100 feet should be added to the advance placement distance to provide adequate legibility of the warning sign.
Designing Sign Panels
2 Typical conditions are locations where the road user must use extra time to adjust speed and change lanes in heavy traffic
NDOT’s Sign Supplement 2006 provides engineers and designers with a reference for sign panel designs that are
specific to Nevada, and it is a supplement to FHWA’s Standard Highway Signs Manual.
because of a complex driving situation. Typical signs are Merge and Right Lane Ends. The distances are determined by providing
the driver a PRT of 14.0 to 14.5 seconds for vehicle maneuvers (2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-3, Decision Sight Distance,
Avoidance Maneuver E) and adjusted for a legibility distance of 180 feet for the appropriate sign.
Retroreflectivity
3 Typical condition is the warning of a potential stop situation. Typical signs are Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, Signal Ahead, and
Intersection Warning signs. The distances are based on the 2018 AASHTO Policy, Table 3-1, Stopping Sight Distance, providing a
PRT of 2.5 seconds, a deceleration rate of 11.2 feet/second2, minus the sign legibility distance of 180 feet.
Retroreflectivity is essential for the nighttime visibility of signs and for ensuring the safety of road users. Minimum
retroreflectivity values for traffic signs are included in the MUTCD. The MUTCD specifies that Warning signs must
illuminate to show the same shape and similar color during both the day and night. NDOT Standard Specifications
requires Type IX or Type XI fluorescent reflective sheeting for Warning sign installations. For more details, reference
Section 4.4.1.
4 Typical conditions are locations where the road user must decrease speed to maneuver through the warned condition. Typical
signs are Turn, Curve, Reverse Turn, or Reverse Curve. The distance is determined by providing a 2.5 second PRT, a vehicle
deceleration rate of 10 feet/second2, minus the sign legibility distance of 250 feet.
4-9
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-8 Typical Passing Lane
5 No suggested distances are provided for these speeds, as the placement location is dependent on-site conditions and other
signing. An alignment warning sign may be placed anywhere from the point of curvature up to 100 feet in advance of the curve.
However, the alignment warning sign should be installed in advance of the curve and at least 100 feet from any other signs.
6 The minimum advance placement distance is listed as 100 feet to provide adequate spacing between signs.
Speed Zone Signing
Examples of warning signs for speed limit reduction are found in Section 2C.38 of the MUTCD, where it is stated that
a Reduced Speed Limit Ahead sign (W3-5 and W3-5a) should be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone
if the speed limit is being reduced by more than 10 mph. These signs should be followed by the Speed Limit sign at
the beginning of the zone to which the speed limit applies.
Figure 4-7. Speed Zone Signing for Speed Reduction
Merging Signs
A Merge sign (W4-1) is used to warn road users on the major roadway that merging movements might be
encountered in advance of a point where lanes from two separate roadways converge as a single lane and no turning
conflict occurs. A Merge sign may also be used to warn road users on the converging roadway that the lane is ending.
A Merge sign should be installed for roadways of equal importance merging together. Merge signs are not needed
who two roadways are converging together but no merging movements are required. Additional guidance on Merge
signs can be found in Section 2C.40 of the MUTCD and in Figure 2C-8 of the MUTCD, which provides sign panel
examples for Merging and Passing signs and plaques. A Lane End sign should be used to warn the road user that the
traffic lane is ending and that a merging maneuver is required. Figure 4-9 below shows the typical signage placement
lane reductions using the Lane End sign.
No Passing Zone Signs
The No Passing Zone sign (W14-3) is used on two lane roads to warn road users of limited sight distance ahead or
that there is a particularly hazardous area where passing is prohibited. The Do Not Pass sign should be used in
conjunction with the No Passing Zone sign and in accordance with the MUTCD (Section 2C.45). The No Passing
Zone sign should be installed on the left side of the roadway at the beginning of no passing zones identified by
pavement markings or Do Not Pass signs. The sign should be used in the following situations:
•
Designated no passing zone on an approach to and through a tunnel; it also may be used on a four-lane road
approach to a tunnel where lane geometrics, lane width, or a combination of both make passing particularly
hazardous
•
Designated no passing zone at the approach to and over a narrow bridge
•
At any location where an engineering study has determined a need due to a particularly hazardous situation
Figure 4-9 Typical Lane Reduction
No Passing Zone signs should be used in all cases but may be removed with engineering judgement.
Passing Lane Signs
Typical sign designs for passing lanes are found in NDOT’s Standard Plans on sheet ST-12. Signs with passing lane
proximity distances should be installed in advance of the passing lane. The tapered area of the passing lane requires
a Keep Right Except to Pass sign (R4-16). When the driver is inside the added lane, signs for Lane Ends Merge Left
(W9-2) and Lane Ends (W4-2) also are required. Figure 4-8 below shows the typical signage placement for passing
lanes.
Horizontal Alignment Signs
A variety of horizontal alignment signs can be found in Figure 2C-1 from Chapter 2C of the MUTCD. These signs are
used to advise road users of a change in the roadway alignment. Table 4-11 provides guidance on horizontal warning
sign placement.
4-10
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-10. Warning Signs for a Turn
Table 4-11. Horizontal Alignment Sign Selection Chart
Type of Horizontal
Alignment Sign
Difference Between Speed Limit and Advisory Speed
5 mph
10 mph
15 mph
20 mph
25 mph or
more
Turn (W1-1), Curve (W12), Reverse Turn (W1-3),
Reverse Curve (W1-4),
Winding Road (W1-5), and
Combination Horizontal
Alignment/Intersection
(see Section 2C.07 to
determine which sign to
use)
Recommended
Required
Required
Required
Required
Advisory Speed Plaque
(W13-1P)
Recommended
Required
Required
Required
Required
Chevrons (W1-8) and/or
One Direction Large Arrow
(W1-6)
Optional
Recommended
Required
Required
Required
Exit Speed (W13-2) and
Ramp Speed (W13-3) on
exit ramp
Optional
Optional
Recommended
Required
Required
Source: MUTCD, Table 2C-5
Table 4-12 provides the typical spacing of Chevron Alignment Signs on horizontal curves.
Table 4-12. Typical Spacing of Chevron Alignment Signs on Horizontal Curves
Advisory Speed
Curve Radius
Sign Spacing
15 mph or less
Less than 200 feet
40 feet
20 to 30 mph
200 to 400 feet
80 feet
35 to 45 mph
401 to 700 feet
120 feet
50 to 60 mph
701 to 1,250 feet
160 feet
More than 60 mph
More than 1,250 feet
200 feet
Source: MUTCD, Table 2C-6
Figure 4-10, below, from Section 2C.07 of the 2009 MUTCD shows placement of appropriate Warning signs for an
upcoming turn.
Chevron alignment signs shall be installed on the outside of the curve and facing approaching traffic at approximately
a right angle to the road.
Source: MUTCD, Figure 2C-2
In order to determine the recommended advisory speed for a horizontal curve, the Ball-Bank Indicator Method can be
used. This method consists of installing a ball-bank indicator on the vehicle and driving along the horizontal curve.
The ball-bank indicator starts at zero degrees and when driving around the curve the ball-bank indicator will rotate a
number of degrees depending on the layout of the curved road. The number of degrees will determine the
4-11
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-11. Type 1 Median Obstructions
recommended speed of the curve. Since the ball-bank indicator determines the angle of the curve, the following
criteria can be used based on Section 2C.08 of the MUTCD:
•
16 degrees for speeds of 20 mph or less
•
14 degrees for speeds of 25 mph to 30 mph
•
12 degrees for speeds of 35 mph and higher
Another option for advisory speed determination on a horizontal curve is found in Section 3.3.1 of the Green Book.
This section provides an equation for vehicle operation on a curve which incorporates the rate of roadway
superelevation, side friction, vehicle speed, gravitational constant and radius of curve.
Object Markers
Object Markers are used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway or used to mark the end of a
roadway. There are four types of Object Markers, which are specified in Section 2C.63 of the MUTCD. Type 1 is used
to mark obstructions within the roadway, Type 2 is used to mark obstructions adjacent to the roadway, and Type 3 is
used to either mark obstructions within the roadway or adjacent to the roadway. Type 4 Object Markers are used to
warn and alert road users of the end of a roadway in other than construction or maintenance areas. Types 1 and 3 are
black and retroreflective yellow, Type 2 is white and retroreflective yellow, and Type 4 is black and retroreflective red.
Type XI retroreflective should be used for object markers. Object Markers are a 619 bid item not a 627, like most sign
bid items, that Roadway designers will refer to.
Object Marker Installation Guidance
When installing Object Markers for marking obstructions within the roadway or obstructions that are 8 feet or less from
the shoulder or the curb, the minimum mounting height is 4 feet measuring from the bottom of the Object Marker to
the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way. When installing Object Markers for marking obstructions more than
8 feet from the shoulder or curb, the clearance from the ground to the bottom of the Object Marker should be at least
4 feet.
Type 2 Object Markers are to be used on the approach end of median islands and are detailed in DM-4. Figure 4-12
also shows a Type 2 Object Marker for use at the end of a median.
For Type 3 Object Markers, the alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes should be installed such that the
stripes are sloped down at a 45-degree angle toward the side on which the traffic is to pass the obstruction. When
traffic passes the obstruction on either side, alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes that form a chevron
upward should be used.
Figure 4-12. Type 2 for Use on Approach End of Median
Type 1 Median Obstructions should follow the details specified in DM-4 in the most current NDOT Standard Plans,
and as shown in Figure 4-11.
A Type 2 Modified Median Crossover Object Marker installation is detailed in Figure 4-13, below.
4-12
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Low Clearance Signs
Figure 4-13. Type 2 Modified Median Crossover Marker
Low Clearance signs (W12-2 and W12-2a) are used to warn road users of clearance less than 12 inches above the
statutory maximum vehicle height. Additional guidance on Low Clearance signs can be found in Section 2C.27 of the
MUTCD. Contact NDOT’s Structures Group to verify clearances and check with NDOT’s Roadway Design Division or
other responsible project designer to see if roadway bed height will be modified through the underpass. Only use
W12-2a if there is a fitment issue with W12-2. Low Clearance signing must follow the conditions presented:
•
For bridges over an interstate or US designated route such as US 95 or US 395, an MVU sign is required if
MVU is less than 16.0’.
•
For bridges carrying an interstate or US designated route over city streets, Nevada State Routes, etc., an
MVU sign is required if MVU is less than 15.0’.
•
Placing signs on structures is discouraged. If an existing sign is on a structure do not disturb and supplement
with ground mounted sign.
Roadway and Weather Condition Signs
Warning signs used to inform the road user of the conditions of the roadway are called Roadway and Weather
Condition signs, which can be found in Section 2C.32 and 2C.35 of the MUTCD. Figure 2C-6 in the MUTCD provides
examples of sign panels of Roadway and Weather Condition signs and plaques. Surface Condition signs are used to
inform the road user of conditions of the roadway pavement. These signs include Slippery When Wet (W8-5), Loose
Gravel (W8-7), Rough Road (W8-8), Uneven Lanes (W8-11), Bridge Ices Before Road (W8-13), and Fallen Rocks
(W8-14). Surface Condition signs should be placed in advance of the affected section of roadway and at appropriate
intervals along the road where the condition still exists. Supplemental plaques with legends such as ICE, WHEN
WET, STEEL DECK, or EXCESS OIL may be used with the Slippery When Wet sign in areas that frequently
experience these conditions. Weather condition signs may be used in areas where there is a risk of flooding, winds,
fog, and snow. In high elevation areas, depth gauges should be placed on the side of the road to indicate depth of
snowpack in the winter months.
Object Markers should be installed to delineate bridge ends, underpass abutments, and all other obstructions closely
adjacent to the edges of the roadway. Object Markers may be omitted when guardrail or barrier rail protects the
obstruction. Figure 4-14 from detail DM-4 specifies the installation for Type 3 Object Markers on bridges, piers, and
abutments.
Figure 4-14. Type 3 Markers for Bridges, Piers, and Abutments
Advanced Traffic Control and Intersection Warning Signs
Advanced Traffic Control signs are used to warn the road user of upcoming stop signs, traffic signals, or yield signs.
These advanced signs are installed on an approach where visible distance is not sufficient to permit the road user to
respond to the traffic control device in an adequate time, as noted in Table 2C-4 in the MUTCD. The visibility criteria
for a traffic control signal should follow Table 2D-2 of the MUTCD. Figure 2C-6 in the MUTCD also provides examples
of Advance Traffic Control signs and plaques.
Intersection Warning signs should be used to indicate the general configuration of the upcoming intersection such as
a roundabout, crossroad, side road, T-intersection, or Y intersection. Intersection Warning signs are used when there
is limited sight distance, previous crashes, or engineering judgement. The signs shall be placed a minimum of 100
feet in advance of the intersection. FHWA notes that these signs should be applied to lower volume routes with less
than 25,000 average annual daily traffic (AADT). These signs are shown in Figure 2C-9 in the section 2C.46 of the
MUTCD.
Coordinate with the District Traffic Engineer for installation of Advanced Traffic Control and Intersection Warning
signs.
Runaway Truck Ramp
Where runaway or escape truck ramps are installed, warning signs are to be located approximately at 2 miles, 1 mile
and ½ mile in advance of the start of the ramp. In addition, a sign will be placed at the gore. For the sign panels to be
used in each location, reference Figure 2C-4 in the MUTCD.
Warning Signs at Grade Crossings
Advance Warning signs for highway/rail grade crossings should be used on each highway in advance of every
highway/rail crossing and every highway/light rail transit grade crossing in semi-exclusive alignments, except for the
following circumstances:
4-13
SECTION 4. SIGNING
•
On an approach to a grade crossing from a T-intersection with a parallel highway if the distance from the
edge of the track to the edge of the parallel roadway is less than 100 feet and W10-3 signs are used on both
approaches of the parallel highway;
•
On low-volume, low-speed highways crossing minor spurs or other tracks that are infrequently used and
where road users are directed by an authorized person on the ground to not enter the crossing at all times
when approaching rail traffic is about to occupy the crossing;
•
In business or commercial areas where active grade crossing traffic control devices are in use; or
•
Where physical conditions do not permit even a partially effective display of the sign.
4.4.4.
should be consistent on any class of highway. Refer to Table 2E-2 for the minimum letter and numeral sizes for
expressway guide signs according to interchange classification, Table 2E-3 for the minimum letter and numeral sizes
for expressway guide signs according to sign type, Table 2E-4 for the minimum letter and numeral sizes for freeway
guide signs according to interchange classification, and Table 2E-5 for the minimum letter and numeral sizes for
freeway guide signs according to sign type in Chapter 2E of the MUTCD.
Arrows on Guide signs are used for lane assignment or to indicate the direction toward a designated route or
destination. Guidelines for sign arrow dimensions based on sign text size and text lines are available in Nevada Sign
Supplement (2006), pages 6-1 through 6-10. On overhead Guide signs, a down arrow should be positioned over the
center of the lane and point vertically downward when indicating the lane to follow. On overhead Guide signs, down
arrows should only be used when identifying the lane or lanes required to reach a designated location. If down arrows
are used, only one arrow is permitted per lane. Curved-stem arrows are used for driver paths to destinations involving
left-turn movements on approaches to circular intersections. Arrows used for interchange guide signs should comply
with Section 2D.08 and Section 2E.19 of the MUTCD.
Guide Signs and Route Markers
General
As noted in the MUTCD, Guide signs are essential to providing road users with direction along streets and highways,
informing them of intersecting routes, and directing them to cities, towns, villages, or other important destinations.
Guide signs also can be used to identify nearby rivers, streams, lakes, parks, forests, and historical sights. The
purpose of a Guide sign is to give the most simple, direct instructions. Guide signs can include Highway Route
Markers, Mile Markers, Exit signs, Toll Road signs, and more.
Conventional Road Signs
Route Signs and Auxiliary Signs
Guidance on Route signs and Auxiliary signs can be found in Chapter 2D of the MUTCD. All numbered highway
routes should be identified by Route signs and Auxiliary signs. Typically, route signs are mounted in assemblies with
Auxiliary signs. Refer to the Standard Highway Signs and Markings book for designing Route signs. All interstate
routes should be designated with Interstate Route signs (M1-1), as well as with Route sign assemblies for intersecting
highways. Route sign assemblies consist of a Route sign and Auxiliary sign that further identifies the route and
direction. Route sign assemblies should be installed on all approaches to numbered routes. Typical Route Marker
assemblies can be found on Sheet Detail TRS-3 in the most current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge
Construction. Figure 4-15 through Figure 4-17 show examples of typical Route and Auxiliary signs.
All Guide signs, including those that are ground-mounted and on overhead supported, must be placed in accordance
with Chapter 2 of the 2009 MUTCD and need to be coordinated with utilities, lighting, equipment, roadside features,
landscaping, and more to ensure adequate sight distance and to avoid conflicts.
The ground-mounted and overhead support sign fonts, text sizes, arrows, shields, colors, and borders must be
designed in accordance with Chapter 2D and Chapter 2E of the 2009 MUTCD, 2004 FHWA Standard Highway Signs
(2012 supplement), and the NDOT Sign Supplement 2006.
Figure 4-15. Typical Route and Auxiliary Road Signs
Designing Sign Panels
NDOT’s Sign Supplement 2006 provides engineers and designers with a reference for sign panel designs that are
specific to Nevada, and it is a supplement to FHWA’s Standard Highway Signs manual. Design specifications also are
found in the most current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction.
Retroreflectivity
Retroreflectivity is essential for the nighttime visibility of signs and for ensuring the safety of road users. Minimum
retroreflectivity values for Traffic signs are included in the MUTCD. The MUTCD specifies that Warning signs must
illuminate to show the same shape and similar color during both the day and night. NDOT Standard Specifications
requires the use of Type IV, IX, or XI reflective sheeting material for ground mounted guide sign installations, Type IV
reflective sheeting for background material, and Type IX or XI reflective sheeting for legend on overhead Guide sign
installations. For more details, reference Section 4.4.1.
Shapes and Sizes
Conventional road Guide sign sizes are shown in Table 2D-1 in Chapter 2D of the MUTCD. Freeway and expressway
Guide sign sizes are shown in Table 2E-1 in Chapter 2E of the MUTCD. Guide signs are rectangular in shape.
Figure 4-16. Interstate Highway and Interstate Business Loop (M1-1) Signs
Lettering, Legends, and Arrows
Guidance for the design of letters, numerals, route shields, and spacing is found in the Design Guidelines of the
Standard Highway Signs and Markings book. A combination of upper-case and lower-case letters should be used for
names of places, streets, and highways on conventional roads. All other word legends on conventional road Guide
signs should be upper-case letters. The principal legend on Guide signs should be in letters and numerals at least 6
inches in height for all upper-case letters, or a combination of 6 inches in height for upper-case letters and 4.5 inches
in height for lower-case letters. On low-volume roads with speeds of 25 mph or less, and on urban streets with speeds
of 25 mph or less, the principal legend should be in letters at least 4 inches in height for all upper-case letters, or a
combination of 4 inches in height for upper-case letters and 3 inches in height for lower-case letters. Lettering sizes
4-14
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-17. Two-Digit and Three-Digit State Highway Route (M1-5) Marker
from US or state numbered routes to the business section of towns, or to other destinations reached by unnumbered
routes. In high-speed areas, Destination signs should be located 200 feet or more in advance of the intersection.
The letter heights and fonts for Distance signs for 3 lines (D2-3) on arterials with speeds greater than 50 mph shall
use 8" D with 6” interline spacing and less than 50 mph shall use 6" D with 4.5” interline spacing.
Destination and distance signs can also be placed in rural locations along the right side of the travel way. The letter
height and font shall be 13.33” E Mod with 10” interline spacing.
Freeway and Expressway Signs
Figure 4-18, from Section 2D.26 of the 2009 MUTCD, shows the Advance Turn and Directional Arrow Auxiliary signs.
Freeway and expressway signs are used for the benefit of road users who are not familiar with the route or area. The
signage provides road users with clear instructions for orderly progress to their destination. Additional guidance on
Freeway and Expressway signs can be found in Chapter 2E of the MUTCD. The MUTCD specifies that Guide signs
on freeways and expressways should serve the following distinct functions:
Figure 4-18. Advance Turn and Directional Arrow Signs
•
Give directions to destinations, or to streets or highway routes, at intersections or interchanges;
•
Furnish advance notice of the approach to intersections or interchanges;
•
Direct road users into appropriate lanes in advance of diverging or merging movements;
•
Identify routes and directions on those routes;
•
Show distances to destinations;
•
Indicate access to general motorist services, rest, scenic, and recreational areas; and
•
Provide other information of value to the road user.
Ground-Mounted Sign Installation
The ground-mounted sign supports need to be designed in accordance with the most current NDOT Standard Plans
for Road and Bridge Construction. Refer to Section 4.4.16 in this document for more information. Roadside barriers
will be provided for protecting all double post, braced, and non-breakaway supports within the clear zone.
Source: MUTCD, Figure 2D-5
Junction Auxiliary signs (M2-1) should be mounted at the top of an assembly, directly above the route sign, the sign
for an alternative route that is part of the route designation, or above the Cardinal Direction Auxiliary sign, where
access is available only to one direction of the intersected route. The minimum size of the Junction Auxiliary sign is 21
inches x 15 inches for compatibility with Auxiliary signs carrying arrow symbols. Cardinal Direction Auxiliary signs are
used to indicate the general direction of the entire route, specifically North, East, South, or West. The Junction XXX ½
Mile sign (GNV1-4) below (see Figure 4-19) should be used in addition to the advance junction assembly as shown in
the MUTCD. Only use the shield of the intersected route, in advance from ½ mile to 5 miles.
Overhead Guide Sign Installation
The overhead Guide sign structures need to be designed according to the details OS-1 through OS-16 of NDOT’s
Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction. If the sign falls outside of the standards shown in the figures, a
special sign structure will need to be designed by a structural engineer and submitted with the plans for NDOT
approval. Specifications for the design and construction of structural supports should meet AASHTO standards.
overhead Guide signs will be located a minimum of 800 feet beyond overhead structures and 800 feet of space will be
maintained between subsequent Guide sign locations. When there is less than 800 feet between interchanges,
Interchange Sequence Series signs should be used instead of Advance Guide signs.
Figure 4-19. State Highway Advance Junction Sign
Interchange Exit Signing
Guidance on signing interchange exits can be found in Chapter 2E of the MUTCD. Interchange exit numbering
provides the proper orientation for the road user on a freeway or expressway. Interchange numbering should be used
in signing each freeway interchange with an Advance Guide sign, Next Exit (E1-5P) plaque, Exit Direction (E13-2)
sign, and Exit Gore (E5-1) sign. The exit number should be displayed on a separate panel at the top of the Advance
Guide or Exit Direction sign.
Advance Guide signs provide the road user with advance notice of an exit point with principal destinations served by
the next interchange and the distance to that interchange.
Destination and Distance Signs
Next Exit plaques are typically used where the distance to the next interchange is unusually long to inform the road
user of the distance to the next interchange.
Destination and Distance signs are used to provide the road user information concerning the destinations that can be
reached by way of numbered or unnumbered routes. Destination signs should be used at the intersections of US or
state numbered routes with interstate, U.S., or state numbered routes and at points where they serve to direct traffic
4-15
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-22. Exit Panels, with Dimensions
Exit Direction signs should be used at major and intermediate interchanges to repeat the route and destination
information that was displayed on the Advance Guide sign.
Figure 4-20 represents examples of Interchange Exit signs.
Figure 4-20. Interchange Exit Sign
Exit Gore signs are used to indicate the direction of the exiting point or departure from the main roadway. The gore,
where the sign should be placed, is the area located between the main roadway and the ramp just beyond where the
ramp branches.
Single-Lane Exit Signing (Lane Drop)
Additional guidance on signing for a lane drop can be found in Section 2E.24 of the MUTCD. Major Guide signs for all
lane drops at interchanges are to be mounted overhead. An Exit Only (E11-1) sign panel will be used for all
interchange lane drops at which the through route is carried on the mainline.
Interchange Sequence Signs
Figure 4-21 shows interchange exit signs for single-lane exits with a dropped lane.
Interchange Sequence signs (see Figure 4-23) are used when interchanges are closely spaced together, particularly
through large urban areas where Guide signs cannot be adequately spaced. Interchange Sequence signs identify the
next two or three interchanges and the distance to the nearest ¼ mile. In many instances, Interchange Sequence
signs are mounted in the median on butterfly structures, and sign panels can be mounted back-to-back on the same
structure for efficient placement.
Figure 4-21. Single-Lane Interchange Exit with Dropped Lane
Figure 4-23. Interchange Sequence Sign
Exit Panel
Figure 4-22 shows the NDOT standard for specific dimensions for Exit Panels.
4-16
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-24. Placement of Interchange Sequence Signs
The overhead Arrow-per-Lane Guide sign design also should be considered for multi-lane exits with an option lane at
intermediate interchanges. Signing for multi-lane exits at minor interchanges that have an optional exit lane or at
intermediate interchanges that have an optional exit lane at which it has been determined that the overhead Arrowper-Lane Guide sign design is not warranted should use a combination of conventional Guide signing and Regulatory
Lane-Use signing. Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Guide signs are used when an option lane is present at freeway and
expressway multi-lane exit interchanges and splits. At the exit, overhead Arrow-per-Lane Guide signs should be
located at or in the immediate vicinity of the point where the exiting lanes begin to diverge from the through lanes. At a
split, overhead Arrow-per-Lane Guide signs should be located at the point where the approach lanes begin to diverge
from one another.
System-to-System Interchange Signing
System-to-System Interchange signs only include the route shield, cardinal direction, the name of the next control city
on the route, and the arrows indicating the lane direction. Overhead signs should be located 1 mile in advance of the
split and at the gore of each connecting ramp. The direction of a freeway and major destinations or control cities
should be clearly identified through the use of appropriate destination legends. Control cities are destinations
associated with each freeway that are determined by the state of Nevada and are important to the quality and
continuity of the freeway system.
Figure 4-25 shows an example of a System-to-System Interchange arrow-per-lane sign.
Figure 4-25. System-to-System Interchange Sign
Detour Signing
Construction closures require Detour signs and Advance Guide signs, as applicable. Detour signs should always be
well-maintained and visible. Construction closures of intersections that require detours need Advisory and Advance
Warning signs and message boards on other freeways, roadways, and streets up to five roadway miles from the
project. See the traffic control section for more information regarding detour signing.
Sign Lighting
In accordance with NDOT’s Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction and Standard Plans for Road
and Bridge Construction, sign lighting and luminaire retrieval systems must be provided for all system-to-system
interchange overhead Arrow-per-Lane Guide signs and for sign structures as determined by a lighting study or as
directed by NDOT. Conduit for the lighting must be installed in the foundation of the sign structure with a hand hole
placed near the base of the sign support with a grounding system included.
Signing for Option Lanes at Splits and Multi-Lane Exits
Signing for option lanes should follow the 2009 MUTCD guidance in Sections 2E.20 through 2E.23. On freeways and
expressways, either the overhead Arrow-per-Lane or Diagrammatic Guide sign should be used for all multi-lane exits
at major interchanges that have an optional exit lane that also carries the through route, as well as, for all splits that
include an option lane. Overhead Arrow-per-Lane or Diagrammatic Guide signs should not be used on freeways and
expressways for any other types of exits or splits, including single-lane exits and splits that do not have an option
lane.
4.4.5.
Preferential Lanes, Managed Lanes, and Ramp Meter Signs
Preferential and Managed Lanes
Chapter 2G of the MUTCD provides the latest guidance on signing for preferential and managed lanes. The NDOT
Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Design Manual provides more information on the required signage. Preferential
4-17
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-27. HOV Lane Access Opening Signing
lanes are used for special traffic uses, such as high-occupancy vehicles (HOVs), light rail, buses, taxis, or bicycles.
These lanes can be separated from the roadway with a barrier or buffer, such as a median or pavement markings.
Managed lanes are used to restrict access from the adjacent general-purpose lanes to designated locations only.
Table 2G-1 in the MUTCD specifies the minimum plaque sizes based on roadway type.
The following guidance is from the NDOT Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Design Manual. A Stop Here on Red
sign is to be placed on both sides of the entrance ramp at the stop bar. This sign is to have a 4’ mounting height.
Because one vehicle per green is the typical release rate, a 1 Vehicle per Green Each Lane sign (R10-29) is to be
placed on the signal mast arm for each general-purpose lane. For the HOV bypass lane, an HOV 2+ Only 1 Vehicle
per Green sign (RNV33-8) is to be placed on the signal mast arm above the HOV bypass lane. HOV signs for ramp
meters are to clearly indicate the HOV bypass lane so road users can make appropriate lane choices before lane
restrictions occur. An HOV 2+ Only When Metered sign (R3-11) is to be placed at the entrance of the HOV bypass
lane to indicate HOV restriction when metering is on. When dual left-turn lanes feed a ramp with one general-purpose
lane and one HOV bypass lane, an HOV 2+ Lane Ahead sign (R3-15) is to be used. A Motorcycles Allowed plaque
(W8-15P) is to be attached to the HOV signs. In some cases, the sign in the turn lanes won’t be used if all available
turn lanes lead to the HOV lane on the ramp. This is because drivers can get confused and think the turn lane is an
HOV lane or they get trapped in the HOV lane and are unable to merge.
Figure 4-26, below, is an example of how to sign for an HOV Lane exit.
Figure 4-26. HOV Lane Sign
Signing for HOV lane access openings should be as presented in the following Figure:
4-18
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Ramp Meters
Figure 4-28 Tourist-Oriented Directional Sign
All ramp meter signs are to be in accordance with the most recent editions of the MUTCD and Nevada Sign
Supplement 2006. Sign installation must conform to the most current edition of the NDOT Standard Plans.
Advance Warning signs provide road users advanced notice that ramps are metered. Advanced warning signs are to
be deployed with a 12-inch yellow flashing beacon that is activated during metered periods to alert road users of the
upcoming controlled ramp. For typical ramp metering (i.e., arterial to freeway), a Ramp Metered When Flashing sign
(W3-8) is to be posted on both sides of a ramp entrance and is to be visible from the adjacent arterial. For system-tosystem ramp metering, it is critical that sufficient advance warning for stopping distance and storage is provided for
road users. A recommended practice is to install a sequence of two signs on the system-to-system connector. A
Ramp Metered When Flashing sign typically is installed downstream (recommended at 100 feet) from the point of the
exit gore area. A Be Prepared to Stop sign (W3-4) with When Flashing plaque (W16-13P) is suggested to be installed
downstream of the Ramp Metered When Flashing sign, and the recommended placement would be at least 400 feet
to 600 feet downstream of the Ramp Metered When Flashing sign and at least 1,000 feet upstream of the stop bar.
4.4.6.
General Information Signs
General information signs provide miscellaneous information, such as state lines, city limits, other political boundaries,
time zones, stream names, elevations, landmarks or similar items of geographical interest, and safety and
transportation-related messages. Acknowledgement signs recognize a company, business, or volunteer group that
provides highway-related service. These signs can include adopt-a-highway programs, maintenance of a parkway or
interchange, or other beautification sponsorship programs. Spacing between Acknowledgement signs should follow
the guidance in Table 4-9. Acknowledgment signs should only be installed where adequate spacing is available
between the signs and other higher priority signs.
4.4.9.
Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) are traffic control devices used to manage, regulate, warn, and guide traffic by
informing road users of roadway conditions, including incidents, construction activities, lane closures, detours, and
travel times. They also support the dissemination of America’s Missing: Broadcast Emergency Response alerts,
national security, and emergency messages. Static signs can share the same sign structure as a dynamic sign. DMS
should not share structure with static signs except when thoroughly reviewed by the structure’s division. More
information on DMS can be found in Section 6.6.2., Dynamic Message Signs, of the NDOT Signing, Lighting, and ITS
Design Guide. Additional information on Changeable Message Signs (CMS) can be found in Section 625.02.03,
Changeable Message Signs, in the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
General information signs are only allowed in urban areas if the District Engineer approves. These signs are sensitive
to remove. In general, coordination with districts is necessary when coming across non-standard signs in this
category. Name-less general type signs should be used over named ones. For General Information signs:
1. Ask district for their preference;
2. Convert to generic when possible; and
3. Alert management if you think you can remove the sign.
4.4.7.
Speed feedback signs are used to show the speed of the vehicle in a specific location. The background of the “YOUR
SPEED” panel shall match the color of the sign that it is attached to.
Specific Service Signs
4.4.10. Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Signs
Specific Service signs are Guide signs that provide road users with business identification and directional information
for services and for eligible attractions. Eligible service categories are gas, food, lodging, camping, attractions, and
24-hour pharmacies. The MUTCD details in Chapter 2J that Specific Service signs should be installed between the
preceding interchange and at least 800 feet in advance of the Exit Direction sign at the interchange from which the
services are available. There should be at least an 800-foot spacing between the Specific Service signs, except for
Specific Service ramp signs. Specific Service ramp signs should be spaced at least 100 feet from the Exit Gore signs
and from the ramp terminal. Specific Service signs have a blue background, white border, and white legends of uppercase letters, numbers, and arrows. More information on the specific Nevada Logo Program can be found in Section
4.4.16.
4.4.8.
ITS Dynamic and Changeable Message Signs
Recreational and Cultural Interest Area signs are for attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general
public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. These recreational attractions can include parks,
campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas. The cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical
buildings or sites. These signs are brown in color with white lettering. The districts will work to install these signs, but
they are replaced as projects come through. Coordination with the districts is necessary to ensure the sign is still
valid.
The maximum number of symbols on a sign is limited to four symbols per assembly. Multiple assemblies may be used
if they are properly spaced and should be determined on a case-by-case basis. If the number of symbols exceed the
maximum, coordinate with the district to determine which symbols should be omitted.
Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs
Tourist-Oriented Directional signs are Guide signs with one or more sign panels that display the business
identification of and directional information for eligible business, service, and activity facilities. These signs are
handled by NDOT’s agreement with NV Logos.
Private recreational sites may not have their name used on a sign, however, symbols found in Chapter 2M of the
MUTCD may be used with a directional arrow as appropriate.
4.4.11. Emergency Management Signing
Emergency Management signs are used to guide and control highway traffic during an emergency. These signs can
include Evacuation Routes (EM-1, EM-1a), Area Closed (EM-2), Maintain Top Safe Speed (EM-4), Traffic Control
4-19
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-29. Inspection Station Signing
Point (EM-3), Permit Required (EM-5), Emergency Aid Center (EM-6a to EM-6d), and Shelter Directions (EM-7a to
EM-7d).
4.4.12. Pedestrian and Bicycle Signs
Pedestrian Regulatory signs can be found in Chapter 2B in the MUTCD. Pedestrian Regulatory signs should follow
the Regulatory sign color of white. Pedestrian Warning signs should be fluorescent yellow-green in color for school
zones only. Pedestrian signs should always be used in school zones for marked crosswalks. Within sign spacing
constraints, pedestrian crossing signs may be added by the designer at their discretion.
All Bicycle signs should be retroreflective for use on bikeways, including shared-use paths and bicycle lane facilities.
Refer to Chapter 9B in the MUTCD for more information on bicycle signs. overhead Bicycle signs should be placed a
minimum of 8 feet above the shared-use path. Post-mounted signs should be placed a minimum of 4 feet above the
shared-use path and placed a minimum of 2 feet from the edge of the shared-use path.
When a bicycle lane ends but bicycle route continues, shared use signing and markings need to be provided. NDOT
follows NACTO guidance on sharrow use.
Overhead trail signs should be coordinated with the local agency and the district. Perpetuate existing overhead trail
signs.
4.4.13. School Zone Signs
School zones and School crossing zones are signed with accordance to the MUTCD, Chapter 7B. School zone limits
and signage placement should be coordinated with District and the school district. Each school zone is marked with a
School Zone sign (S1-1), and a School Speed Limit 15 sign (S5-1) or School Speed Limit 25 sign is posted a
minimum of 300 feet from the edge of the school property. An End School Zone sign (S5-2) or Speed Limit sign is
placed at the end of each school zone. School zones are in effect from 30 minutes prior to the start of the education
day through 30 minutes after the education day ends, per Nevada State Law. The state law allows for the normal
speed limit through school zones outside of the education day hours. School Zone signs should be fluorescent yellowgreen in color. For more information regarding school zone signing, refer to NRS 484B.363. Prior to perpetuating
school signs, determine the school is open first.
At pedestrian crossings within a school zone, a School Crossing sign with a diagonal downward arrow is placed at the
crosswalk on each side of the road and a School Crossing sign with an Ahead plaque (W16-9P) is placed in advance,
according to the MUTCD. Marked crosswalks in school zones should be signed with pedestrian crossing signs.
A School Bus Stop Ahead (S3-1) sign should be installed in advance of locations where a school bus, when stopped
to pick up or drop off passengers, is not visible to road users for an adequate distance and where there is no
opportunity to relocate the school bus stop to provide adequate sight distance. Coordination with the District Traffic
Engineer and maintenance personnel should be considered. Signs should be revisited on all projects.
Table 7B-1 in the MUTCD specifies the school area sign size based on the roadway type. Signs in school zones shall
be retroreflective and use type XI retroreflective sheeting.
4.4.14. Inspection Station Signing
Inspection stations are checkpoints in the highway where trucks are inspected for law compliance purposes. These
stations are within the highway right-of-way and work by having the truck exit the highway and then return after the
inspection is completed. A series of signs are needed to inform the truck driver of an upcoming inspection station with
sufficient advanced notice, as shown in Figure 4-29.
The check station signs shall be placed at the gore, ½ mile, 1 mile, and 2 miles (optional). After choosing locations for
these signs, the designer will need to coordinate with SLI design lead for implementation in the project. The signs and
their flashers will be shown on the SLI sheets.
Like inspection stations signing, specific signing shall also be provided when screening for truck tires is available. This
screening is called the Tire Anomaly Classification System (TACS), where a detection system is installed in the
roadway and tires are evaluated for any unsafe conditions. Signing used for TACS stations is presented in Figure
4-30. The Trucks Must Use Right Lane signs will be all static with BEGIN and END plaques at the start and end of the
TACS detection locations.
4-20
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-30. Tire Anomaly Classification System (TACS) Signing
information can be found in the most current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction. These plans
provide a variety of traffic control methods, but do not include a layout for every conceivable work situation. The
MUTCD and most current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction provide the sequence of required
signs for temporary traffic control zones.
In the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 625 provides guidance on construction
signing, which consists of furnishing, maintaining, relocating, and removing temporary traffic control devices and
services as ordered for the control and protection of public traffic through the project. The orange reflective sheeting
used on rigid construction signs should be Type IX or XI fluorescent orange sheeting. The orange reflective sheeting
used on roll up construction signs should be Type VI fluorescent orange sheeting.
Advance Warning sign spacing based on speed is provided on sheet TC-1 in the most current NDOT Standard Plans
for Road and Bridge Construction. All Regulatory signs (R series) should be black on retroreflective white. All Warning
signs (W series) should be black on retroreflective orange. Warning signs should be a minimum of 3 feet x 3 feet for
speeds of 45 mph or less and R2-1 should be 3 feet x 4 feet. Warning signs should be a minimum of 4 feet x 4 feet for
speeds of 50 mph or greater and R2-1 should be 4 feet x 5 feet. Refer to the 2019 Work Zone Safety and Mobility
Implementation Manual for information on temporary speed reductions.
4.4.16. Nevada Signs
Nevada supplement signs may be used as needed, with no prior approval necessary unless the application is nonstandard. For a non-standard application, always discuss with the Principal SSTC engineer and District Traffic
Engineer for approval. When using specific signs that can be replaced with general signs from supplement, use the
general sign. Otherwise perpetuate signs from the sign supplement.
State Furnished Signs
A state furnished sign is one where the panel is produced in-house, by NDOT, and is provided to the contractor. A
form called Form 51 will need to be filled out when signs are to be installed in a contract. Examples of state furnished
signs include:
•
Welcome to Nevada
•
State parks
•
Historic marker ahead
•
Auto tour route
The bid item for state furnished signs will be 6270100 - INSTALL STATE FUNISHED SIGNS (LS) in the estimate. In
the sign summary “STATE FURNISHED” shall be added in the REMARKS column so they are quickly identifiable.
Signing at State Boundaries
At the boundaries of the state of Nevada and other adjoining states, the signing sequence shown in Figure 40-31 and
Figure 40-32 should be installed. The signs should be placed approximately 500 feet apart on conventional roadways
and 500 feet apart on freeways.
4.4.15. Temporary Traffic Control Zones
Temporary traffic control zones can include work zones, incident zones, or planned special events. Temporary traffic
control device information can be found in Chapter 6F of the MUTCD. Typical Nevada traffic control plans and
4-21
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Panel Types
Figure 4-31. Nevada Border Sign Package, Part 1
Standard Milepost panels (see Figure 4-33) are used for all urban applications. In rural areas, Standard Milepost
panels are used on all routes for designation of structures, culverts, and county lines. Standard Milepost panels are
used on interstate routes for designating county milepost locations. Standard mileposts are calculated as mileage
from county line to county line. The Standard Milepost panel size is 8 inches x 24 inches.
Figure 4-33. Milepost Signs
Enhanced Milepost panels (see Figure 4-34) are used on rural US and state routes. Enhanced Milepost panels are
whole numbers only and will replace the Standard Milepost panel. Enhanced Milepost panels are calculated as
mileage from county line to county line. The Enhanced Milepost panel size is 18 inches x 48 inches.
Figure 4-32. Nevada Border Sign Package, Part 2
Figure 4-34. Enhanced Milepost Signs
Enhanced Reference panels are used on all interstate routes. Enhanced Reference panels are whole numbers only
and will replace the Standard Reference Panel. Enhanced Reference Panels are calculated as cumulative mileage
from beginning to end of the route. Enhanced Reference panels are 18 inches x 54 inches in size.
Figure 4-35. Enhanced Reference Panels
Mileposts
Mileposts typically are installed 12 feet from the edge of pavement, and the bottom of the milepost sign should be 48
inches above the roadway. Milepost signs must be placed within 50 feet of the milepost location detailed in plans. On
undivided roads, two milepost panels are to be mounted back-to-back on a square metal post. The mileposts should
be on the right side of the roadway in the direction of increasing milepost numbers based on the milepost index.
Contact roadway systems to obtain stationing for mileposts. For divided and multi-lane roads with barrier separation,
aluminum mileposts should be mounted double sided on square metal posts and installed on the median barrier. On
divided and multi-lane roads without barrier separation, aluminum posts should be mounted on both sides of the
highway. Milepost and reference panel markers installation guidance can be found in NDOT’s Standard Plans for
Road and Bridge Specifications detail DM-3.
Standards for Placement
Placement of Milepost panels is illustrated in Figure 4-36. Standards for placement vary by type of road, as described
below:
Guideposts do not need a removal bid item but do need normal ground mounted bid item for placement (6270190).
4-22
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Urban roads: Highway intersections that are functionally classified as minor or principal arterials will have Standard
Milepost panels that are "band-strapped" or adhesively fixed to light poles, signal poles, telephone poles, etc., at the
intersection.
Name signs should be installed to identify important roads that are not otherwise signed. The MUTCD specifies
guidance on symbol and lettering based on speed limits and facility type. Street Name signs should be retroreflective
or illuminated to show the same shape and similar color during both the day and night. The MUTCD also states that
the legend and background should be of contrasting colors.
Two- or three-lane undivided roads: Enhanced Milepost panels will be placed on the right side of the road in the
cardinal direction with two enhanced mileposts mounted back-to-back. Install Standard Milepost panels on all
structures and at county lines.
Street name signs are only replaced in Right-of-Way. If doing work out of Right-of-Way, ask project coordinator if the
sign needs to be replaced. If it is out of the Right-of-Way, ensure the sign maintenance is going into local agency
agreement and local agency is maintaining, Street Name signs should be designed to correct agency standard.
Divided and multi-lane non-interstate roads with barrier separation: Enhanced Milepost panels will be mounted on the
right side of the road facing approaching traffic. Enhanced Milepost panels may be mounted back-to-back on the
median barrier rail when physical constraints prevent installation on the right side. Install Standard Milepost panels on
all structures and at county lines.
Table 4-13 specifies the recommended minimum letter heights on Street Name signs.
Table 4-13. Minimum Letter Height on Street Signs
Divided and multi-lane non-interstate roads: Enhanced Milepost panels will be mounted on the right side of the road
facing approaching traffic. Install Standard Milepost panels on all structures and at county lines.
Interstate roads: Enhanced Reference panels and Standard Milepost panels will be mounted on the right side of the
road facing approaching traffic. Install Standard Milepost panels at one-mile intervals, on all structures, and at county
lines. Enhanced Reference panels may be mounted back-to-back on the median barrier rail when median barrier
separation is present and physical constraints prevent installation on the right side.
Figure 4-36. Placement of Milepost Panels
Type of
Mounting
Type of
Street or
Highway
Speed Limit
Overhead
All Types
Post-mounted
Recommended Minimum Letter Height
Initial Upper-Case
Lower-Case
All speed limits
12 inches
9 inches
Multi-Lane
More than 40 mph
8 inches
6 inches
Post-mounted
Multi-Lane
40 mph or less
6 inches
4.5 inches
Post-mounted
Two-Lane
All speed limits
6 inches*
4.5 inches*
* On local two-lane streets with speed limits of 25 mph or less, 4-inch initial upper-case letters with 3-inch lower-case letters
may be used.
Street Name signs can be installed along with stop signs on the same pole assembly. Ensure sign area is appropriate
for pole type. Large Street Name signs can be the major sign on the assembly. The sign shall be white letters and
numbers on green background, except for the City of North Las Vegas, where the background is blue. Sign height
should be 12 inches for major streets and 9 inches for minor streets, with a minimum length of 32 inches and
maximum length of 60 inches. Standard Drawing No. 250 presented by the Regional Transportation Commission
(RTC) of Southern Nevada presents the applicable sign and lettering sizes for Street Signs on stop signs.
Installation details for Street Name signs on signals or luminaires can be found in the most current NDOT Standard
Plans for Road and Bridge Construction. Street Name signs can be installed hanging from signal mast arm, hanging
from the signal pole, or directly mounted to the signal mast arm. Signs on signal poles are designed by SLI. Figure
4-37, below, outlines three installation methods for Street Name signs on mast arms. Street Name signs should have
a green background with white lettering. If a border is used, it should be the same color as the lettering.
Mounting at County Lines
Mount county cumulative mileposts for both the ending and beginning counties at the county line, side by side on
separate or a combined post. Mount a county name sign per NDOT’s Sign Supplement 2006.
Street Name Signs
Section 2D.38 in the MUTCD provides additional guidance on Street Name signs. In urban areas, Street Name signs
should be installed at all street intersections regardless of other route signs that may be present. In rural areas, Street
4-23
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Historical Markers
Figure 4-37. Installation of Street Signs on Signals or Luminaires
Nevada uses Historical Markers for monuments dedicated to individual or geographical areas of significance to
Nevada history. Historical Markers are a state-furnished item. NDOT is only responsible for placing the Historical
Marker ahead sign, not placing the Historical Marker itself. When replacing or adding a new historical marker, contact
Nevada State Historical Preservation Office (SHPO).
State Park Signs
State Park signs are destination signs used to identify the presence of a State Park area/facility. When designing a
State Park sign, the following options are accepted:
1. Rectangular with white legend and border on a green background.
2. Rectangular with a white legend and border on a brown background.
3. Trapezoidal with a white legend and border on a brown background.
Figure 4-39 shows examples of brown background State Park Signs:
Figure 4-39. Brown Background State Park Signing Examples
Median Crossover Signing
A detailed drawing of signing placement for Median Crossover signs can be found in the detail MC-1 of the most
current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction. Median crossovers should be signed for all paved
crossovers that are spaced at least 0.25 miles apart. Refer to the Emergency Cross-Over section of the Roadway
Design Guide, which also references 8.3.2 Medians of the 2018 Green Book. Mounting height to bottom of Authorized
Vehicles Only sign (RNV17-1) should be 6 feet from the ground. Type XI reflective sheeting should be used on sign
installations and Type 2 Modified Object Markers. Place six Type 2 Modified Object Markers, one 500 feet in advance
of the median crossover and one on each side of the crossover for both directions as shown on Figure 4-38. Place
Type 2 Modified Object Markers 6 feet from the edge of pavement. Additional guidance on Crossover signs can be
found in Section 2D.54 of the MUTCD and detail DM-4 in the most current NDOT Standard Plans for guidance on
Object Marker installation at median crossovers.
Perpetuate existing signs. Signs for state parks may be added at the designer’s discretion. Guide signs for State
Parks shall use the state parks symbol. When using a sign that includes the state parks symbol, panels will be statefurnished.
Figure 4-38. Median Crossover Signing
The State Park logos are proprietary. When NDOT wants to include the state park logo on a sign, it will be state
furnished. Contact Ryan Clark in the sign shop for questions and when a sign with a State Park logo is needed.
National Historic Trails
Signs with specific symbols are utilized in Nevada for their National Parks, like the California National Historic Trail
and Pony Express National Historic Trail.
Figure 4-40 shows examples of the signs used for the California National Historic Trail and Pony Express National
Historic Trails. Auxiliary signs with brown background and white letters can be attached along with these signs.
4-24
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-40. California & Pony Express National Historic Trail Signs
•
Any community with a population of 20,000 or more.
•
Any community with a Business Loop and/or Logo Signing. The only exception to this would be if that
community did not have available all of the following services: gas, food, lodging, phone, and camping. In this
case, service signing may be provided for the services available.
Interstate minimum sign spacing of 800 feet will not be violated. Approved service signing on primary or secondary
routes will be placed approximately ¼ mile in advance of the approach to the business.
For questions concerning the Logo Sign program, contact Bryan McDaniels at bmcdaniel@interstatelogos.com or
775-323-8787 (office) or 775-233-9369 (cell). The NDOT contact with this program is the Principal ITS Programs
Engineer.
Rules for Specific Services
Visitors in vehicles can use specific routes called Auto Tour Route which run parallel to the historic routes of these
trails. A sample of the signing use for the Auto Tour Route is shown in the figure below.
Gas/Diesel:
Figure 4-41. Auto Tour Sign for Route for California Trail and Pony Express
•
Maximum distance to a service is two miles, except for bypassed communities where service is not available
at the same or lesser distance on the through road (freeways & expressways).
•
The service includes gas, oil, tire repair, radiator water, drinking water, telephone, and restrooms during all
services hours.
•
Continuous operation at least 12 hours per day, 7 days a week.
Food or Lodging:
•
Licensed or approved by governing body where applicable.
•
Telephone
•
Food establishments must be opened to serve three meals per day, seven days per week.
•
Telephone: Continuous operation 24 hours per day at locations where a phone would not be expected.
Hospital:
Wayfinding Signs
•
Community Wayfinding Guide signs are part of a coordinated and continuous system of signs that direct tourists and
other road users to key civic, cultural, visitor, and recreational attractions and other destinations within a city or a local
urbanized or downtown area. Figures 2D-18 through 2D-20 in the MUTCD illustrate various examples of the design
and application of Community Wayfinding Guide signs. NDOT does not provide any wayfinding signs. Guidance on
Wayfinding signs can be found in Section 2D.50 of the MUTCD.
Continuous emergency care capability, with a doctor on duty 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Camping:
Logo Sign Program
Nevada Logos, Inc., is responsible for the administration and operation of the Nevada Logo sign and the TouristOriented Directional sign programs for NDOT. The MUTCD specifies these signs as Specific Service Signs, and more
information can be found in Chapter 2J of the MUTCD. The MUTCD specifies that eligible service categories may only
include gas, food, lodging, camping, attractions, and 24-hour pharmacies.
•
Licensed facilities with drinking water or approved by appropriate government agency.
•
Facility is no more than 15 miles from the freeway exit.
•
Adequate parking accommodations.
•
Modern, sanitary facilities and drinking water.
•
Signs will be removed during off season if operated on a seasonal base.
The Next Services ____ Miles plaque (D9-17P) should only be used when the next services exceed 25 miles. The
next services should be a minimum of gas and food, as outlined above. These plaques will be used only on freeways
and expressways.
Service signing will only be considered at interchanges where the motorist may exit the freeway or expressway on a
relatively easy route, return, and continue travel in the same direction.
All distances from the freeway in establishing service signing will use the interchange milepost as the point of
beginning.
Service signing may be considered on primary and secondary routes where the business premises are not visible
within ¼ mile of the roadway.
Service signing will not be provided if the following conditions exist:
4-25
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Alternative Fuels Corridor and Electric Vehicle (EV) Signing
•
In 2016 the FHWA issued a memorandum with guidance for alternative fuel corridors following the designation of
national plug-in electric charging, hydrogen, propane, and natural gas fueling corridors in strategic locations along
major highways to improve the mobility of alternative fuel vehicles. Following this designation, new signing had to be
prepared. The following Figure presents example signing for Alternative Fuel Corridor (D18-1) and LP Gas Next Right
(GNV38-1):
The name of the operating agency, community, group, or enterprise will not appear on the legend of any
highway sign.
Welcome Center Signing
•
Figure 4-42. Alternative Fuel Corridor and LPG Signing
The Welcome Center must have reasonable access from an existing interchange and be a maximum of ½
mile from the interchange.
Adopt-A-Highway Program
The Adopt-A-Highway Program for community service groups and individuals applies to many types of highways.
District Coordinators are responsible for coordinating adopted segments of highways with the individual or groups. On
occasion, certain segments of highway are not suitable for volunteers because of traffic volumes, shoulder size,
visibility, terrain, side banks, access, frequency of pick-ups, or other safety reasons. NDOT determines which sections
of highway are adoptable.
The Adopt-a-Highway program has been suspended in District 2 and District 3 and now runs through a permitting
process. The signs are only allowed on state routes and US routes, not interstate. These signs are not replaced in
SSTC projects. Sponsor-A-Highway Program, which involves sponsors paying for the road to be professionally
cleaned, is operated by the PIO office. SSTC and the District Traffic office review and approve these signs through
the permit process.
Roadside Memorials
FHWA’s 2016 memorandum states that Alternative Fuels Corridors signs are not required. Rather, States and local
authorities should determine whether to use such signs on Federally designated Alternative Fuels Corridors.
Roadside memorials are governed by the most current Roadside Memorial Marker and Honorary Highway Naming
Program Guideline. Approval from the Principal SSTC engineer is required prior to placing a new Roadside Memorial
Marker or Honorary Highway Naming sign.
Nevada’s Electric Highway (NEH) initiative provides electric vehicle (EV) fast-charging infrastructure along a variety of
US Routes and Interstates along the State. The following Figure presents EV Charging Station signs:
Memorial Highways
Memorial Highways are roadways dedicated to honor those who have served in our nation’s military. These signs
should be replaced in kind and follow the MUTCD letter height requirements based on road speed. A list of memorial
highways in Nevada are as follows:
Figure 4-43. EV Charging Station and Parking Signs
•
US 95
Purple Heart Highways
Purple Heart highways are a symbolic and honorary road system to give tribute to veterans who have received the
purple heart. Purple Heart signs should be replaced when found and coordinated with the district before adding. The
following are Purple Heart Highways in Nevada:
•
I-11
•
I-80
Wildlife/Animal Signs
To install Wildlife warning signs and supplemental plaques (open range, next XX miles, etc.), Crash and Carcass data
should be requested from Traffic Safety at crashinforequests@dot.nv.gov with the route and milepost from/to or cross
streets of the project. This data should then be sent to “Large Mammal Mitigation Specialist” Nova Simpson with the
request. With approval from the Chief Traffic Ops Engineer and the Large Mammal Mitigation Specialist, a Wildlife or
Animal Solar Flashing Warning sign should be placed (to be designed by SLI). Panels on existing flashing installations
will be replaced by the sign designer. The location of wildlife signs should be consulted with the District Traffic office
before placement in a project, even if a sign already exists.
If a charging station is on NDOT R/W or if NDOT is working with vendors to place charging stations, SPCL sign for EV
charging stations should be used at each charging space.
For information on EV sign sizes, see Table 2I-1 of the MUTCD.
For information on regulatory signs for EV Parking Facilities signing, see FHWA’s 2013 memorandum “Regulatory
Signs for Electric Vehicle Charging and Parking Facilities”.
Wildlife signs will have a supplemental flasher (1W1C). Livestock signs shall only use an LED border without a
flasher.
Tourist Information Center Signing
•
The Tourist Information Center must be located within 5 miles from the highway.
4-26
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Figure 4-45. NDOT Scenic Route Signs
For installation of Open Range plaques, contact Nova Simpson.
Cattle Guard Ahead signs (WNV140-1) are used in locations with real cattle guards and speeds over 45 mph. A
distance plaque under the Cattle Guard ahead sign may need to be used in certain situations and will need to be
checked with District Traffic on a case-by-case basis.
Higher Education Signs
NDOT will sign for any accredited institution of higher education that provides multiple fields of study. Other
institutions may be signed with the approval of the Chief Traffic Operations Engineer.
DMV/Museums
The district and local agency should be in concurrence with installing DMV and Museum signs. Coordination may be
necessary with upper management.
National Scenic Byways
National Scenic Byway signs (D6-4) (see Figure 4-44) are used on roads designated by the U.S. Secretary of
Transportation as National Scenic Byways or All-American Roads based on their archaeological, cultural, historic,
natural, recreational, or scenic qualities. State or local highway agencies may install the National Scenic Byways signs
at entrance points to a route that has been recognized. This program has currently been defunded by the federal
government and suspended. Scenic Byways signs should not be disturbed. If the sign needs replacement, talk to the
District Traffic Engineer or the local maintenance crew on replacing the sign. Section 2D.55 in the MUTCD provides
additional guidance on National Scenic Byways.
Agricultural Signs
Section 2C.49 of the MUTCD includes vehicular traffic warning signs for farm equipment (W11-5,5a) which are used
to alert road users of unexpected entries into the roadway. These signs should only be used at locations where the
road user’s sight distance is restricted, or the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected per the
MUTCD. Refer to the NDOT’s 2006 Sign Supplement for additional agricultural signs, such as, the Quarantine Area
sign (RNV15-1) and Rental Trucks and Vehicles with Livestock Must Stop sign (RNV13-1).
Figure 4-44. National Scenic Byway Sign
Chain Station Signs
Several highways with elevations over 3,000 feet throughout the state require chains for vehicles under certain
conditions. Only four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive vehicles with snow tires and all vehicles with approved tire chains
are allowed when chain requirements are in place.
The R2 modified sign (When Flashing Chains or 4WD / AWD with Snow Tires) may need to be placed prior to chain
up areas and include flashers. The sign is to be placed when entering an area that commonly requires chains, for
example. if the chain up area is part way up a hill, at bottom of hill, or at the last major intersection. Check with District
and SLI before placement of any R2 Mod chains/flashers signs.
Refer to the NDOT Sign Supplement 2006 for more details on the signs in Figure 4-45 and Figure 4-46. Detail CA-1 of
the most current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction provides the signing layout for paved chain
areas.
NDOT also utilizeds unique scenic byways signs in Nevada (see Figure 4-45).
Figure 4-46. Chain and Snow Tire Signs
4-27
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Daytime Headlight Signs
Daytime Headlight signs (RNV8-1 and RVN8-2) should be replaced when found. Follow the most recent Traffic
Operations and Safety Study Process document for guidance on addition or removal of these signs. The following
figures are the RVN8-1 and RVN8-2 signs from the NDOT Sign Supplement 2006.
Headlight signs are not applicable on roads with more than one through lane in each direction. Check headlight signs
after daytime headlights section is ended are not needed in designated sections as considered by the local agency.
The signs may need to be added to side streets and will need to check with the local agency.
Figure 4-49. Daytime Headline Signs
Figure 4-47. Chain Station Sign
Nevada’s Infinity Highway Signs
Nevada’s US Parkway highway extension is an 18-plus mile portion between I-80 and US-50 and has been given the
name of Infinity Highway. Existing signs should be replaced when found.
US-50 Bike Route Sign
The Nevada US-50 Bike Route is part of the U.S. Bicycle Route System (USBRS), which is the largest official bike
system in the U.S. The USBRS connects to major metropolitan areas, national and state parks, and other key
destinations.
Truck, Passing, or Climbing Lanes Signs
While the main purpose of a passing lane is to provide overtaking opportunities on two-lane highways for any vehicle,
truck climbing lanes are designated lanes which allow slower travel for large vehicles or trucks that are ascending a
steep grade. Section 2D.51 of the MUTCD provides guidance on Truck, Passing, or Climbing Lane Signs (D17-1 and
D17-2). The following figures are examples of the signs used for Truck, Passing, or Climbing Lanes. These signs
should be installed in advance of the lane.
The route numbering system is in place to simplify travel between states on facilities that have been identified as
being suitable for cycling. On projects along or adjacent to US-50, bike route signing shall be placed after major
intersections and junctions, throughout towns and cities, and other locations deemed necessary by the NDOT bike
and pedestrian group.
Figure 4-48. Truck, Passing, or Climbing Lanes
US-50 Route in Nevada connects with Utah and California, and the official sign (M1-9 Alternate) is as presented in
Figure 4-49.
Figure 4-50. US-50 Bike Route Sign
*The words PASSING or CLIMBING may be substituted for the word TRUCK on the D17-1 and D17-2 signs.
Highway Advisory Radio (HAR) Signs
Existing Highway Advisory Radio (HAR) signs should be replaced if designer confirms radio station is still valid.
Contact Senior Planning and Operations Project Manager to confirm HAR validity. If radio station has been taken
down, replace with D12-5 road condition/511 sign. Existing 511 signs should be perpetuated when possible.
No Engine Brake Signs
No engine brake signs (RNV16-1) shall not be used in District 1. They may be used in District 2 and 3 if local
ordinance supports and District Traffic agrees with placement.
4-28
SECTION 4. SIGNING
4.4.17. Ground-Mounted Sign Supports/Posts
Table 4-14. Post Selection Chart
Ground-Mounted Sign Location
The horizontal clearance of a ground-mounted sign should not be less than 12 feet between the edge of travel way
and edge of sign panel (see Figure 4-50). If a shoulder is wider than 6 feet, the minimum horizontal clearance should
be 6 feet from the edge of shoulder. In urban areas, a smaller clearance may be used where necessary.
Figure 4-51. Ground-Mounted Sign Placement
Post Types
The post types are calculated based on the total sign panel area in square feet and height to the center of the largest
sign on the post. See the post selection chart in Table 4-14, below. The height is calculated using slope at the sign
location, edge of pavement elevation, elevation at the sign location, mounting height, and height of the sign panel(s).
For sign-post lengths, refer to the details from the most current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge
Construction presented below.
•
TRS-11: Square Metal Posts (Post Type A and B)
•
TRS-13: Single Round Metal Post Unbraced (Post Type C) and Double Round Metal Post Unbraced (Post
Type D)
•
TRS-20: Double Round Metal Post Braced (Post Type E)
•
TRS-24: Double Post Braced for Timber Gore Signs
Sign Mounting Heights
The minimum mount heights for single signs and multiple signs based on the roadway facility are described in Table
4-15 and also provided on TRS-1 detail from the most current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge
Construction and Section 9B.01 of the MUTCD for multi-use paths mounting heights. Coordination with NDOT’s
project coordinator may be necessary.
4-29
SECTION 4. SIGNING
Table 4-15. Sign Mount Height
•
Single Signs
Multiple Signs
Freeways and Expressways
7 feet
8 feet (M)
5 feet (S)
Commercial Residential Curb and
Gutter
7 feet
7 feet (M)
6 feet (S)
Rural Roads and Interchange Ramps
7 feet
7 feet (M)
6 feet (S)
Freeway Entrance Assembly
2 feet
2 feet (S)
Chevrons and One Way
4 feet
N/A
Median Crossover Signing
N/A
Refer To Figure 4-38
Barrier Rail Mounted Signs
7 feet
7 feet
Pedestrian Accessible Signs
7 feet
7 feet
Stop signs with Street name above
7 feet
7 feet
Multi-Use Path
4 feet
4 feet
All sign supports must be of breakaway design, except when protected by longitudinal barriers or placed
outside the clear zone. Coordination with NDOT’s Roadway Design Division is necessary. Refer to the current
edition of the AASHTO Roadside Design Guide for clear zone standards.
Sign Islands
Sign islands, which are used in locations where the slope of the existing ground is greater than 6:1, have minimum
requirements for placement based on the number of posts used in the construction, and whether they are braced or
unbraced sign assemblies. Sign Islands should be constructed per Section 203 of the 2014 Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction. Figure 4-52 shows various cross sections of sign islands.
Figure 4-53. Types of Sign Islands
(M) Major Sign (S) Secondary Sign
Exit number panels on overhead signs do not constitute multiple panel assemblies, and the exit number panel is
ignored for mounting height purposes. This is also the case for street name signs on stop signs.
Placement of signs in areas that have a slope—locations where there may have been excavation work or where there
may be an embankment—is shown in Figure 4-51, below.
Figure 4-52. Placement of Signs in Excavation or Embankment Areas
Additional guidelines based on Figure 4-51 are listed below.
•
If the height (h) is greater than 17 feet, a special design may be needed.
•
The maximum vertical clearance (VC) for a single sign is 10 feet and for two signs is 11 feet.
•
The minimum corner clearance (CC) is 1 foot.
Sign islands are required when h is greater than 15 feet, or sign slope is steeper than 6:1, or when required in the
contract plans.
Refer to detail TRS-10 in the most current NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction for additional
guidance. Sign islands are to be compacted to 95%. Undivided routes are to use a 10:1 slope and divided routes are
to use a 6:1 slope. Coordination with NDOT’s Roadway Design Division is necessary.
4-30
SECTION 4. SIGNING
4.4.18. Overhead Sign Supports
Structure Design
Additional guidance on special structural analysis can be found in NDOT’s Structures Manual, which was prepared
based on the 4th Edition of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and NDOT’s Standard Plans for Road
and Bridge Construction details OS-1 through OS-41 for overhead signs. Chapter 23.5, Sign, Signal, and Lighting
Structures, in the NDOT Structures Manual, notes that these structures should follow AASHTO Standard
Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals. Guidance on designing
roadside sign supports can be found in NDOT’s Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction details OS-1 to OS41, which are based on AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and
Traffic Signals design specifications. The construction specifications are based on NDOT’s Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction. Overhead sign panels cannot be taller than an existing overhead sign structure but
can be as wide as the existing truss. The lifespan of an overhead sign structure is 50 years. Overhead signs should
meet a minimum clearance of 18 feet from the roadway. Overhead signs should meet the following requirements:
Loading:
•
Wind Importance Factor, lr = 1.0
•
Wind Speed = 90 mph
•
Ice Load = 3 psf
•
Seismic Acceleration Coefficient = 0.40
•
Soil type for seismic design = III
•
Fatigue loading, fatigue importance factor, lf = 1.0
Structural Steel:
•
Structural steel plates and shapes shall conform to AASHTO M270 Grade 36 or ASTM A36.
•
Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A53, Type S, Grade B.
•
Steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B.
•
Hot dip galvanize structural steel safter fabriciation in accordance with ASTM A123.
Unit Stresses:
•
Structural Steel: FY = 36 ksi
•
Concrete pedestal, class A or AA: F’C = 4000 psi
•
Concrete pile, class D or DA: F’C = 4000 psi
•
Reinfocring steel: ASTM A615, Grade 60
•
Footing pressure = 1 ¼“ tons/sq. ft.
4.4.19. Connected and Autonomous Vehicle Signing Technology
Vehicle to infrastructure (V2I) connectivity could allow a Connected and Autonomous Vehicle (CAV) that is in an
incident to transmit incident data—time of incident, type of crash, severity—through a roadside infrastructure device to
system operators, who then broadcast regional warnings. Simultaneously, incident data could be transmitted directly
to emergency dispatchers for emergency response. Sensors on street signs would send signals to autonomous
vehicles, which would help the vehicle navigate through the roadways.
4-31
STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
5.1.
General
5.1.1.
A project’s scope can be defined as the set of design parameters that precisely satisfy the purpose and need of the
project. A poorly identified scope that is broader than the purpose and need will result in an unnecessarily high project
budget and extended schedule, while a scope that falls short will yield a project that doesn’t accomplish what is
needed and may include many addenda. While an accurate project scope is difficult to identify early in development, a
careful, multidisciplinary examination of the purpose and need will produce a solid foundation upon which project
development can occur.
Roadway pavement markings provide visual guidance and information to road users. Pavement marking uniformity
promotes driver compliance and minimizes confusion. This uniformity can be accomplished through the use of
applicable design standards, including those found within:
•
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) A Policy on Geometric Design
of Highways and Streets (the “Green Book”)
•
Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)
•
Current edition of the Nevada Department of Transportation (NDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction
•
Current edition of the NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction
•
NDOT Road Design Guide (Current Edition)
•
U.S. Department of Transportation (USDOT) uniformity requirements
During initial scoping, the client should review and update the checklist presented in Figure 3-1 and consider the
following information, so potential changes to the project scope can be dealt with as they emerge. This will allow
the scope, represented by the preliminary plan, to be as accurate as possible. The answers to the questions
below may vary based on which NDOT District the project is located within.
This section contains discussions, illustrations, and examples of the design elements that are necessary to develop
effective striping plans. This section does not provide striping design, but rather striping policy interpretation. Striping
design is the responsibility of Roadway Design Division.
In addition to the information contained in this section, there are several standard references that may prove valuable
to the striping engineer and designer. These references are listed in Section 1.6, References.
Chapter 3A—General
•
Chapter 3B—Pavement and Curb Markings
•
Chapter 3C—Roundabout Markings
•
Chapter 3D—Markings for Preferential Lanes
•
Chapter 3E—Markings for Toll Plazas
•
Chapter 3F—Delineators
•
Chapter 3G—Colored Pavements
•
Chapter 3H—Channelizing Devices Used for Emphasis of Pavement Marking Patterns
•
Chapter 3I—Islands
•
Chapter 3J—Rumble Strip Markings
•
What type of pavement marking application will be required for this type of road?
•
Will raised pavement markers be required?
•
Will pavement markings need to be recessed?
•
Is contrast striping needed?
•
Does the intersection geometry call for pavement marking line extensions?
•
Are there proposed crosswalks that need to be marked?
The items above are in no way a complete list of information that needs to be considered within the scope of work for
a pavement marking project, but they can be used as a starting point. From a design perspective, the items listed
above are for information only and do not fall under the purview of a designer or engineer. Typically, these items are
considered by the Project Manager and the Principal Traffic Operations Engineer.
Part 3, Markings of the MUTCD of the MUTCD includes information related to the function and purpose of markings,
standardized applications of markings, and design standards. Delineation, islands, and rumble strips are also
included. Part 3, Markings of the MUTCD has detailed pavement marking requirements divided into the following
chapters:
•
Project Scoping
5.2.
Design Criteria and Standards
5.2.1.
Regulations, Codes, and Jurisdictional Policies
All pavement marking plans, materials, and workmanship must conform to the American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM), the MUTCD, the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) A
Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (the “Green Book”), NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge
Construction, NDOT Road Design Guide (Current Edition), FHWA’s Standard Highway Signs Manual, NDOT
Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Design Manual, AASHTO Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, and
any local ordinances or maintaining agency requirements that may apply.
In addition to the above requirements, materials, equipment, and installation/construction procedures must conform to
the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Where specific products or
materials are designated for specific agencies, only those items will be allowed for those agencies.
5.2.2.
While the MUTCD is used as the standard, engineering judgement and/or studies should be considered. Pavement
marking applications on roadway geometric designs should be coordinated with NDOT’s Traffic Operation personnel
to effectively provide guidance and information to efficiently and safely take the road user to the desired destination.
Bid Items
Refer to Sections 632 to 635 of the current edition of the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction for
information such as painted pavement markings, pavement markers, pavement marking film, and temporary striping
tape and temporary painted pavement marking. The following, Table 5-1, represents the typical striping bid items.
MUTCD’s Interim Approval for Optional Use of Green Colored Pavement for Bike Lanes (2011) is used as reference
in this guide for bicycle lane green pavement marking guidance.
5-1
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Table 5-1 Typical Striping Bid Items
ITEM#
6320140
UOM
SQFT
SPCL
DESCRIPTION
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (VARIES)
6320150
LINFT
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (DOTTED WHITE)
6320160
LINFT
6320170
LINFT
6320180
LINFT
6320190
LINFT
6320220
LINFT
6320240
LINFT
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (6-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (8-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (12-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (24-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (8-INCH BROKEN
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (SOLID WHITE)
6320270
LINFT
6320290
LINFT
6320310
LINFT
6320340
LINFT
6320370
LINFT
6320390
LINFT
6320400
LINFT
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (8-INCH SOLID
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (12-INCH SOLID
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (24-INCH SOLID
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (SOLID YELLOW)
ITEM#
6320670
UOM
LINFT
SPCL
DESCRIPTION
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (SOLID YELLOW)
6320700
LINFT
6320720
LINFT
6320730
LINFT
6320740
LINFT
6320770
LINFT
6320800
SQFT
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (8-INCH SOLID
YELLOW)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (12-INCH SOLID
YELLOW)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (24-INCH SOLID
YELLOW)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (BROKEN YELLOW
W/SOLID YELLOW)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (DOUBLE SOLID
YELLOW)
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (VARIES)
6320810
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (DOTTED WHITE)
6320820
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (6-INCH DOTTED WHITE)
6320830
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (8-INCH DOTTED WHITE)
6320840
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (12-INCH DOTTED WHITE)
6320850
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (24-INCH DOTTED WHITE)
6320860
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (BROKEN WHITE)
6320880
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (8-INCH BROKEN WHITE)
6320900
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (SOLID WHITE)
6320915
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (6-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6320930
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (8-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6320950
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (12-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6320970
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (24-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6321000
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (SOLID YELLOW)
6321020
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (8-INCH SOLID YELLOW)
6321040
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (12-INCH SOLID YELLOW)
6320430
LINFT
6320460
SQFT
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (8-INCH SOLID
YELLOW)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (12-INCH SOLID
YELLOW)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (24-INCH SOLID
YELLOW)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE I) (DOUBLE SOLID
YELLOW)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (VARIES)
6320470
LINFT
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (DOTTED WHITE)
6321050
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (24-INCH SOLID YELLOW)
6320480
LINFT
6321059
LINFT
6320490
LINFT
6321070
LINFT
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (BROKEN YELLOW W/SOLID
YELLOW)
EPOXY PAVEMENT STRIPING (DOUBLE SOLID YELLOW)
6320500
LINFT
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (6-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (8-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (12-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (24-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (BROKEN WHITE)
6321090
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (8-INCH DOTTED WHITE)
6321100
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (6-INCH DOTTED WHITE)
6321120
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (BROKEN WHITE)
6321140
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (8-INCH BROKEN WHITE)
6321160
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (SOLID WHITE)
6321190
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (8-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6321210
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (12-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6321225
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (24-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6321250
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (SOLID YELLOW)
6321262
SQFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (VARIES)
6321280
LINFT
6321300
LINFT
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (BROKEN YELLOW W/SOLID
YELLOW)
POLYUREA PAVEMENT STRIPING (DOUBLE SOLID YELLOW)
6330100
EACH
NON-REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
6320510
LINFT
6320520
LINFT
6320550
LINFT
6320570
LINFT
6320588
LINFT
6320600
LINFT
6320620
LINFT
6320640
LINFT
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (8-INCH BROKEN
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (SOLID WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (6-INCH SOLID
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (8-INCH SOLID
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (12-INCH SOLID
WHITE)
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT STRIPING (TYPE II) (24-INCH SOLID
WHITE)
5-2
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
ITEM#
UOM
6330110
6330120
6330140
6330150
6340400
6340410
6340420
6340430
6340440
EACH
EACH
EACH
EACH
SQFT
SQFT
LINFT
LINFT
LINFT
6340450
LINFT
6340460
LINFT
6340470
LINFT
6340490
LINFT
6340500
LINFT
6340510
6340530
6340550
LINFT
LINFT
LINFT
6340570
LINFT
6340580
LINFT
6340600
LINFT
6340620
LINFT
6340640
LINFT
6340650
LINFT
SPCL
DESCRIPTION
REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS (TEMPORARY)
TEMPORARY LANE LINE MARKERS (WHITE)
TEMPORARY LANE LINE MARKERS (YELLOW)
PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (VARIES)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (6-INCH)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (12-INCH)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (DOTTED WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (6-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (8-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (12-INCH DOTTED
WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (6-INCH BROKEN
WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (8-INCH BROKEN
WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (SOLID WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (6-INCH SOLID WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (8-INCH SOLID WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (12-INCH SOLID
WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (24-INCH SOLID
WHITE)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (SOLID YELLOW)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (8-INCH SOLID
YELLOW)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (12-INCH SOLID
YELLOW)
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE (TYPE 2) (24-INCH SOLID
YELLOW)
5.3.
Types of Pavement Markings used in Nevada
5.3.1.
NDOT Pavement Markings by District
•
Epoxy: a two-component material consisting of a pigmented resin base and a hardener used to increase
durability. Pigments are utilized to impart color to the marking. When spraying paint, the markings should
have uniform thickness with uniform distribution of glass beads throughout the line width.
•
Waterborne: paint where water is primarily a diluting agent. Resin emulsion in solution is held with other
components until the paint has been applied. Waterborne paint markings and glass beads shall be uniformly
distributed throughout the line width.
•
Polyurea: a two-component material system that is a variation of epoxy. It is designed to cure hard. When
spraying paint, the markings should have uniform thickness with uniform distribution of glass beads and
reflective elements throughout the line width.
There are two methods for applying reflective media. These are:
o
Double drop with glass sphere method
o
Double drop with glass sphere and reflective element method
The following figure shows examples of the appearance of painted pavement markings:
Figure 5-1. Paint Pavement Marking Examples
Pavement markings in Nevada consist of either paint or film material.
Paint Material and Application
Source 1: FHWA Report – Pavement Marking Demonstration Projects: State of Alaska and State of Tennessee (2013)
Source 2: NDOT field photo
Pavement marking paint is typically sprayed on the pavement surface and can be either water or solvent based
material. Paint shall be sprayed with a system capable of spraying both yellow and white paint, mounted on a truck of
sufficient size and stability, and having an adequate power source to produce lines of uniform dimension and prevent
application failure. Paint material can be categorized as follows:
5-3
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Paint Pavement Marking Removal
Figure 5-3. Pavement Marking Tape Examples
Painted pavement markings on surfaces to remain shall be completed by hydro blasting. Perform removals on all
other surfaces by approved methods. Damage to pavement surfaces, joint material and bridge joints have to be
avoided when removing paint markings.
Film Material and Application
Film material for pavement marking consist of thermoplastic and pavement marking tape. Film material can be
categorized as follows:
•
Thermoplastic: blend of solid ingredients that become liquid when heated and melted. Thermoplastic
materials shall be capable of application on asphaltic surfaces and Portland cement concrete surfaces. When
installed, the markings shall be straight with sharp edges. The marking also should be of the specified color,
width, and thickness; with uniform retroreflectivity and proper bonding to pavement. Thermoplastic material is
categorized by either hot applied or preformed.
o
Hot applied thermoplastic: May be applied by either spray or extruded methods in a single uniform
layer.
Source 1: NCSITE Back to Basics Webinar: Pavement Markings (2020). Website:
https://ncsite.org/meetinginfo.php?id=11&ts=1599788697
Source 2: NDOT field photo
Preformed Thermoplastic: Preformed thermoplastic is applied by melting the preformed
thermoplastic using flame from a propane-type torch, according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations, to bond the traffic markings permanently in place.
Film Pavement Marking Removal
Pavement marking film is to be removed either by grinding, by using equipment that uses a combination of chemical
and high-pressure water, or by any other approved means. When removing pavement marking film (either with RPMs
or no RPMs) care shall be exercised to prevent excessive damage to pavement surface.
The following figure shows examples of the appearance of thermoplastic pavement marking:
Figure 5-2. Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Examples
•
Pavement Marking Film Removal with no RPMs: When RPMs are not present, pavement marking film is to
be removed in such a manner that there’s no residue that may interfere with the ability of the surface
treatment to adhere to the existing pavement.
•
Pavement Marking Film Removal with RPMs: When RPMs are present, remove pavement marking film
and RPMs by approved means in such a manner that no residue can interfere with the ability of the surface
treatment to adhere to the existing pavement.
Depressions caused by the removal of RPMs shall be filled with approved material, and any standing water removed
before filling. Material is to be compacted flush with the pavement surface.
5.3.2.
NDOT District Map—Longitudinal Pavement Markings
There are three NDOT districts, and these use specific longitudinal pavement markings as shown in Figure 5-4 below.
When there are questions about marking type, contact the District’s Traffic personnel about preference.
Source: FHWA Report – Pavement Marking Demonstration Projects: State of Alaska and State of Tennessee (2013)
Pavement marking tape: thermoplastic laminate which is melted on the pavement surface using a heat source. The
following figure shows examples of the appearance of pavement marking tape:
5-4
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
5.3.3.
Figure 5-4. NDOT Longitudinal Pavement Markings used by District and County
Longitudinal Pavement Markings Used by Each Nevada District
Table 5-2. Longitudinal Pavement Markings Used by Each Nevada District
District
Number
1
Type of
Pavement Marking
Uses
Notes
RPM used in Clark County
urban areas
Exit ramp gore lines shall have
both markings and RPM’s.
RPM
•
•
•
Lane lines
Transitions
Gores
Polyurea
•
•
•
Edge lines
Bike lanes
Transitions
Epoxy
Some Interstate and National Highway
System (NHS) 2
Epoxy preferred outside of Las
Vegas urban limits.
Epoxy Paint
Interstate and National Highway System
(NHS) 2
• Lane lines
• Shoulders
• Gores
Waterborne Paint
(Type II)
When requested by District, shall be used
for roadways that are not Interstates or
NHS.
Epoxy paint to be used for all
longitudinal markings if doing open
grade1.
Epoxy Paint
Interstate and National Highway System
(NHS)
• Lane lines
• Shoulders
• Gores
N/A
Waterborne Paint
(Type II)
When requested by District, shall be used
for roadways that are not Interstates or
NHS.
N/A
2
3
•
•
•
Exit ramp gore lines shall have
both markings and RPM’s.
Note1: Open grade is a porous asphalt mix which provides large voids to allow water to drain.
Note2: NHS website: https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/planning/national_highway_system/nhs_maps/nevada/
5-5
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
5.3.4.
Transverse Pavement Markings Used in Nevada (All Districts)
5.4.2.
Transverse markings include words and symbols, shoulder markings, arrows, stop and yield lines, crosswalk
markings, and parking space markings, among others.
Center lines are yellow pavement marking lines used to delineate and separate traffic traveling in opposite directions.
Center Line Types
Table 5-3. Transverse Pavement Markings Used by Each Nevada District
District Number
Center Lines
Center lines shall be used as follows:
Type of Pavement Marking
Uses
Notes
Epoxy
Stop bars, crosswalks,
arrows, “ONLY”, and
railroad pavement
markings
Used on new
paving projects to
receive open
grade1.
•
Two-direction passing zone: Single broken yellow line. These are used where passing with care is
permitted for each direction.
•
Roadways that receive
other surface treatments
such as chip seals, micro
surfacing, and Portland
Cement Concrete
Pavement (PCCP)
Used only for
transverse (with
high elevation
exceptions)
One-direction no passing zone: Double yellow line with one solid yellow line and one broken yellow line.
These are used where passing with care is permitted for traffic traveling adjacent to the broken line but
prohibited for traffic traveling adjacent to the solid line. As seen in Figure 5-5, this configuration also is used
on two-way left-turn lanes. Two-way left-turn lanes are used where traffic can enter the lane from either
direction as part of a left turn maneuver. This lane also requires arrow markings.
•
Two-direction no passing zone: Double solid yellow line. These are used where passing is prohibited for
traffic traveling in either direction.
Stop bars, crosswalks,
arrows, “ONLY”, and
railroad pavement
markings
Epoxy paint to be
used for all
transverse
markings if doing
open grade1.
Roadways that receive
other surface treatments
such as chip seals, micro
surfacing, and Portland
Cement Concrete
Pavement (PCCP)
Epoxy paint to be
used for all
transverse
markings if doing
open grade1.
Stop bars, crosswalks,
arrows, “ONLY”, and
railroad pavement
markings
Used on new
paving projects to
receive open
grade1.
Roadways that receive
other surface treatments
such as chip seals, micro
surfacing, and Portland
Cement Concrete
Pavement (PCCP)
NA
Permanent Pavement Marking Tape (Type 2) 2
1
Thermoplastic Pavement Marking
Epoxy
Permanent Pavement Marking Tape (Type 2) 2
2
Thermoplastic Pavement Marking
Epoxy
Permanent Pavement Marking Tape (Type 2) 2
3
Thermoplastic Pavement Marking
Figure 5-5. Example of Two-Way Left-Turn Lane Markings
Note1: Open grade is a porous asphalt mix which provides large voids to allow water to drain.
Note2: Permanent Marking Tape (Type 2) is rarely used.
5.4.
Design Elements, Standards, and Practices
5.4.1.
Pavement Markings—Longitudinal
The MUTCD (Section 3A.01) states that markings on highways and on private roads open to public travel have
important functions in providing guidance and information to the road user.
Longitudinal markings generally are placed parallel and adjacent to the flow of traffic. Typical longitudinal markings
are center lines, lane lines, edge lines, and channelizing lines, among others.
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 3B-7
5-6
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
No-Passing Zone Development Process
For determination of passing zones in Nevada, coordination with NDOT’s Traffic Information will be required:
•
The 2018 technical report A Streamlined and Automated Procedure for Identifying No-Passing Zones Using Existing
Resources Available to the Nevada Department of Transportation provides the development process used by NDOT
to determine the location of no-passing zones.
Traffic Information Systems Division – C813
Christopher Wright
775-888-7443
cwright@dot.nv.gov
NDOT uses software that conducts sight obstruction evaluations, eliminating the need for the two-vehicle method
previously used. The two-vehicle method requires field work that is time consuming and requires a three-person crew
to perform.
Center Line Width
Table 5-4. Center Line Widths
Type of Roadway
Center Line Width
Interstates and freeways
8 inches
All roadway types; except interstates and freeways
4 inches
NDOT’s current process to determine no-passing zones relies on vehicle path datasets generated during asset
inventory surveys conducted along highways, which is part of an existing NDOT internal business process. A vehicle
with GPS is used, which generates datasets for latitude, longitude, and elevation values that can be used as a
surrogate to describe the geometry of the highway alignment. Using the dataset, the software creates a model of the
highway that automates the identification of theoretical line-of-sight obstructions based on input parameters from the
user.
With these data, candidate locations for no-passing zones are generated and selected. Datasets are owned and
collected by NDOT.
Center Line Use
5.4.4.
Center lines on all paved urban arterials and collectors shall be used when the following criteria are met:
•
Traveled way of 20 feet wide or more
•
Average Daily Traffic (ADT) of 6,000 vehicles per day or greater
Lane Lines (White)
Lane lines are white pavement marking lines used to delineate and separate traffic traveling in the same direction.
Lane line markings shall be used on all freeways, interstate highways, and local roadways. Refer to MUTCD Section
3B.04 for additional information on white lane lines.
Lane Line Types
See MUTCD (Section 3B.01) for additional scenarios where center lines are recommended.
Lane lines may consist of broken white lines, solid white lines, and dotted white lines shall be used as follows:
Center Line Spacing
When using broken yellow lines, lines shall be a 10-foot stripes, with a 30-foot gap between each line. When using
double solid yellow lines, the typical width between each line is 8 inches.
•
Broken white line (BWL), where crossing the lane line markings is permitted.
•
Solid white line (SWL), where crossing the lane line markings is discouraged. Wide solid lane line markings
may be used for greater emphasis.
5.4.3.
•
Dotted white line (DWL), where any of the following conditions exist:
No-Passing Zones
No-passing zones are locations where an engineering study indicates that passing a vehicle traveling in the same
direction must be prohibited. Longitudinal pavement markings communicate to drivers identified locations where there
is not enough clear sight distance available to safely complete a passing maneuver that requires entering the
opposing lane of traffic, overtaking a leading vehicle, and rejoining the initial lane. Due to topographic characteristics
of Nevada, no-passing zones are common due to limitations of available sight distance.
No-passing zones typically are marked using double solid yellow lines along the middle of the road.
Table 5-5 shows the selection of no-passing zones based on minimum sight distance as a function of the 85th
percentile speed.
•
Table 5-5. Minimum Sight Distance Requirements as a Function of 85th Percentile Speed
85th Percentile Speed
Minimum Passing Sight
Distance
85th Percentile Speed
Minimum Passing Sight
Distance
30 mph
500 ft
55 mph
900 ft
35 mph
550 ft
60 mph
1,000 ft
40 mph
600 ft
65 mph
1,100 ft
45 mph
700 ft
70 mph
1,200 ft
50 mph
800 ft
75 mph
1,300 ft
5-7
o
A deceleration or acceleration lane
o
Through lane that becomes a mandatory exit or turn lane
o
Two-lane exit ramp having an optional exit lane that also carries a through lane (as seen on NDOT
Standard Plans, ST-2)
o
Auxiliary lane 2 miles or less in length between an entrance ramp and an exit ramp
o
Auxiliary lane 1 mile or less in length between two adjacent intersections
Wide dotted white line, used where:
o
As a lane drop marking in advance of lane drops at exit ramps to distinguish a lane drop from a normal
exit ramp
o
In advance of freeway route splits with dedicated lanes
o
To separate a through lane that continues beyond an interchange from an adjacent auxiliary lane
between an entrance ramp and an exit ramp
o
As a lane drop marking in advance of lane drops at intersections to distinguish a lane drop from an
intersection through lane
o
To separate a through lane that continues beyond an intersection from an auxiliary lane between two
intersections
o
Bicycle lane line applications
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Acronyms for lane lanes shall not be used when calling out lines on plan sets.
Type of Roadway or Scenario
Lane Line Width
Auxiliary and dotted lines leading up to the gore
12 inches
Bicycle Lane Lines
6 inches
Figure 5-6. Lane Line Types Application Example
Lane Line Spacing
•
Broken white line: 10-foot stripe, with a 30-foot gap between each line.
•
Dotted white line:
o
At lane drops: 3-foot stripe, with a 12-foot gap between each line
o
At intersection turn lanes: 2-foot stripe, with a 4-foot gap between each line
o
At intersection through lane lines: 2-foot stripe, with a 4-foot gap between each line
o
End of bicycle lanes at intersections: 2-foot stripe, with a 4-foot gap between each line
Channelizing Lines
Channelizing white lines are used to separate traffic traveling in the same direction. These lines are either single
solid or double solid lines. Single solid channelizing lines typically are used, and these must be wider than edge
lines or lane lines. Double solid lines can be used in certain applications. Channelizing white lines typically are used
on roadway exit and entrance ramps and storage/turn lanes at intersections. Another use can be to separate through
traffic from an obstruction.
When median width allows it on intersection approaches, channelizing white lines can be used to separate left-turn
lanes from through lanes, giving drivers on opposing approaches a less-obstructed view of opposing through traffic.
When channelization width is greater than 18 inches, white crosshatch markings shall be used.
When applicable, crosshatch markings are used to discourage drivers from going over the channelized area.
Chevrons can be used as a crosshatch marking, with the point of each chevron facing toward approaching traffic.
Channelizing white lines typically are used on roadway exit and entrance ramps and storage/turn lanes at
intersections.
Exit Ramp Markings
The MUTCD (Section 3B.05) states that channelizing lines at exit ramps define the neutral area, direct existing traffic
at the proper angle for smooth divergence from the main lanes into the ramp and reduce the probability of colliding
with objects adjacent to the roadway. Exit ramps use channelizing lines to separate traffic from the gore area, and
white dotted lines. Figure 5-7 through Figure 5-10, and Table 5-7 provide exit ramp pavement marking examples for:
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 3B-11
Lane Line Width
Table 5-6. Lane Line Widths
Type of Roadway or Scenario
Lane Line Width
Interstates and freeways
8 inches
All US Routes and NV State Routes 140, 147, 160, 318,
431, 432, and 447
6 inches
Storage lane white lines
8 inches
5-8
•
Parallel Deceleration Lane
•
Parallel Deceleration Lane at Multi-Lane Exit Ramp
•
Lane Drop for Single Lane
•
Lane Drop for Auxiliary Lane Between Ramps
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-7. Exit Ramp Markings for Parallel Deceleration Lane
Figure 5-8. Exit Ramp Markings for Parallel Deceleration Lane at Multi-Lane Exit Ramp
*Chevron markings not
used in Northern
Districts (D2 and D3).
*Chevron markings not
used in Northern
Districts (D2 and D3).
Source: Clark County
Source: Clark County
5-9
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-9. Lane Drop Markings for Single Lane Exit Ramp
Figure 5-10. Lane Drop Markings for Auxiliary Lane Between Ramps
*Chevron markings not
used in Northern
Districts (D2 and D3).
*Chevron markings not
used in Northern
Districts (D2 and D3).
Source: Clark County
Source: Clark County
Entrance Ramp Markings
Table 5-7. Typical Drop Lane Pattern Lengths
Posted Speed (mph)
Length (ft)
45
560
50
640
55
720
60
800
65
880
70
960
75
1040
The MUTCD (Section 3B.05) states that channelizing lines at entrance ramps promote orderly and efficient merging
with the through traffic. Entrance ramps typically use channelizing lines to separate traffic in the gore area and white
dotted lines to merge traffic as shown in Figure 5-11 and Figure 5-12.
Source: Clark County
5-10
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Entrance Ramps with Acceleration Lanes
Figure 5-12. Entrance Ramp Markings for Tapered Acceleration Lane
Figure 5-11. Entrance Ramp Markings for Parallel Acceleration Lane
Source: Clark County
Source: Clark County
5.4.5.
Edge Lines
Edge lines are pavement markings used to delineate the right or left edges of a roadway. According to the MUTCD
(Section 3B.06), except for dotted edge line extensions, edge line markings shall not be continued through
intersections or major driveways. For minor driveways, edge line markings should not be broken. Edge lines will be
either white or yellow.
Edge Line Types
There are solid white edge lines, dotted white edge lines, and solid yellow edge lines. The MUTCD (Section 3B.06)
provides the standard on the type of edge line to use (if necessary):
5-11
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Solid yellow edge line, to delineate the left edge of a roadway or to indicate driving or passing restrictions
left of those markings on roadways of divided highways or one-way streets, or on any ramp in the direction of
travel.
5.4.6.
•
Solid white edge line, to delineate right edge of the roadway.
•
Dotted white edge line, to delineate edge line extensions through intersections or exit lanes.
•
Wide dotted white edge line, to delineate edge line extensions at roundabout entrance lanes.
Yellow painted median islands are used to separate traffic traveling in opposite directions. Pavement markings should
consist of two sets of solid double yellow lines with optional yellow diagonal crosshatch markings, as shown in Figure
5-13. Yellow diagonal crosshatch markings shall be used if sight distance or visibility is restricted, and emphasis on
the painted median (to discourage travel over it) is needed. Figure 5-13 show the optional yellow diagonal details for
painted islands.
•
Yellow Painted Median Island and Raised Median Island
Wide solid edge line markings may be used for greater emphasis.
Edge Line Width
Table 5-8. Edge Line Widths
Type of Roadway or Scenario
Edge Line Width
Interstate and freeways
8 inches
Rural roads1 with speeds greater than 40 mph,
roads with AADT of greater than 400 vehicles,
US Routes and NV State Routes 140, 147, 160,
318, 431, 432, and 447
6 inches
All other NV State Routes
4 inches
Note1: Rural/urban classification is determined by NDOT’s Functional Classification maps, and exact limits are available in the
milepost index.
6-Inch Edge Line Width
A statewide policy was approved by NDOT on December 14, 2021, to utilize 6-inch edge line striping for rural
roadways with an average annual daily traffic count greater than 400 vehicles, or for rural roadways with speeds
greater than 40 mph. See NDOT’s memorandum in Appendix H for more details, including 6-inch edge line
prioritization list for each district.
It has been shown that a transition from 4-inch edge line to 6-inch decreases all crash types on comparable rural
roadways. The 6-inch edge line has increased visibility which reflects more light to the driver’s eye, due to its
increased width.
Another benefit for 6-inch edge lines is the higher detection rate by autonomous vehicle sensors.
Edge Line Use
To determine if edge lines are required, roadway characteristics such as type of roadway, ADT, and width must be
analyzed. The MUTCD (Section 3B.07) states that edge lines shall be used when the roadway is classified as:
•
Freeway
•
Expressway
•
Rural arterials
Median Island Markings
See MUTCD (Section 3B.07) for additional edge line use information.
5-12
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-13. Yellow Painted Median Island Example
The optional yellow diagonal crosshatch marking on painted medians shall have 45-degree acute angles. The
distance of the diagonal crosshatch markings from center to center shall match the speed limit (posted or statutory) of
the road. Diagonal crosshatch markings width is determined by the speed limit:
•
Less than 45 MPH: minimum 8 inch
•
45 MPH or greater: minimum 12 inch
Based on the direction of traffic, pavement markings around islands shall be either white or yellow. Median island
nose markings shall follow NDOT Standard Plans ST-9. Nevada’s Southern District (D1) requires the use for RPMs
on median island noses.
For Nevada’s Northern Districts (D2 and D3), lane edge lines parallel to the raised median island are required and
should follow edge line width requirements mentioned in this guide. For a standard median nose, the median nose
shall be painted from the nose back 5 feet or to the first point of curve (P.C.), or point of tangent (P.T.), whichever is
greater with a Type 3 object marker placed at the center of the median nose. For a ramped median nose, the median
nose shall be painted on the entire ramped area. Median RPMs are not used for Nevada’s Northern Districts.
For Nevada’s Southern District (D1), lane edge lines parallel to the raised median island are not used. For a
standard median nose, the median nose shall be painted from the nose back 5 feet or to the first P.C., or P.T.,
whichever is greater. For a ramped median nose, the median nose shall be painted on the entire ramped area.
Median RPMs (Type D) are required.
Figure 5-14, Figure 5-15, Table 5-9, and Table 5-10 present the markings and number of RPMs used for both types of
median noses.
Standard Median Nose Markings
Figure 5-14. Standard Median Nose Paint and RPM Installation
Source: MUTCD, Figure 3B-5
Source: Modified from NDOT Standard Plans, ST-9
5-13
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Table 5-9. Standard Median Nose Spacing Table
Median Width (W1)
Number of Type D Raised Pavement Markers
per Median Nose
1 foot to 2 feet
3 for D1. None for D2 and D3
> 2 feet to 3 feet
4
> 3 feet to 4 feet
5
> 4 feet
1 each for every 1 foot of curb length
Additional guidance on approach end-treatments can be found in Section 3I.02 of the MUTCD. The end of islands first
approached by traffic should be preceded by diverging longitudinal pavement markings on the roadway surface, to
guide vehicles into desired paths of travel along the island edge.
5.4.7.
Extensions Through Intersections and Interchanges
Pavement marking extensions, “cat tracks”, can be used through intersections and interchanges, which help guide
vehicles by providing a continuous mark for the lanes. Section 3.9 of the NDOT Road Design Guide (2019 Edition)
provides additional details on lane alignment at intersections.
Extension Marking Use
The MUTCD, Section 3B.08, provides conditions for when extension markings should be used:
Note1: 1 raised pavement marker shall be placed on the P.C. and the P.T. of the median nose; all other spaced equally between
P.T. and P.C.
Note 2: Northern Districts follow striping requierments, but with no RPM installation.
•
Where highway design or reduced visibility conditions make it desirable to provide control or guide vehicles
through an intersection or interchange. For example: offset, skewed, complex, or multi-legged intersections,
curved roadways, etc.
•
Where multiple turn lanes are used, or where offset left-turn lanes might cause driver confusion.
Ramped Median Nose Markings
Figure 5-15. Ramped Median Nose Paint and RPM Installation
Extension Marking Types
When using pavement marking extensions, Section 3B.08 in the MUTCD provides guidance on the type of extension
markings to use. Pavement markings extended into or continued through an intersection or interchange area shall be
the same color and at least the same width as the line markings they extend. Below are conditions that warrant the
use of pavement extensions:
•
Dotted lines are used in 2-foot line segments with 4-foot gaps to extend longitudinal line markings through an
intersection or interchange area. Cat-tracks are required for all triple lefts, any major signalized intersections
(opposing dual lefts), and when opposing lefts (paths) are within 5’ of each other. Otherwise follow MUTCD.
Dotted edge line extensions may be placed through intersections or major driveways.
•
Solid lines can be used where greater restriction is required. Solid lane lines or channelizing lines should be
extended into or continued through intersections or major driveways. Solid lines shall not be used to
extend edge lines into or through intersections or major driveways. If there is no stop bar or yield bar,
the edge lines shall be continuous through the intersection. A major Driveway is defined by designer
judgement but usually includes gas stations, malls with 5 or more stores, and big box stores. For unpaved
routes and driveways that are not major, perpetuate existing condition.
Figure 5-16 through Figure 5-19 show different applications for extension markings through intersections.
Source: Modified from NDOT Standard Plans, ST-9
Table 5-10. Ramped Median Nose Spacing Table
Median Width (W2)
Number of Type D Raised Pavement Markers
per Median Nose
0 foot to 2 feet
None
3 feet
1 centered
> 4 feet
1 each – spaced 2’ +- on center
Note1: See Sheet DM-4 on NDOT Standard Plans for object marker details.
Note 2: Northern Districts follow striping requirements, but with no RPM installation.
5-14
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-16. Typical Pavement Marking Extension with Offset Lane Lines
Figure 5-18. Typical Dotted Line Marking Extensions into Intersection
Source: Modified MUTCD, Figure 3B-13A
Source: Modified MUTCD, Figure 3B-13C
Figure 5-17. Typical Marking Extension with Double Turn Lanes
Figure 5-19. Typical Dotted Line Markings to Extend Center and Lane Lines into Intersection
Source: Modified MUTCD, Figure 3B-13B
Source: Modified MUTCD, Figure 3B-13D
5.4.8.
Lane Reduction and Passing Lanes
Lane reduction transition markings are used to guide traffic through transitions areas where the number of through
lanes are reduced. Passing lane pavement markings are used on two-way roadways to inform road users of
acceptable locations to pass another vehicle traveling in the same direction.
5-15
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Lane Reduction Use
Table 5-11. Advance Warning Distance (D) and Taper Length (L) Values
The MUTCD, Section 3B.09, provides information on the use of lane reduction transition markings. Lane reduction
transition markings are used in the following scenarios:
85th Percentile
Speed, Posted or
Statutory (S), mph
Advance Warning
Distance (D), ft
1/4D, ft
3/4D, ft
Taper Length (T), ft
for 12-ft lane
25
325
81
244
125
30
460
115
345
180
Lane Reduction—Transition Taper
35
565
141
424
245
Transition taper length (T), merge length (M), and merge arrow (MA) placement in a lane reduction can be calculated
as follows:
40
570
143
428
320
45
775
194
581
540
50
885
221
664
600
55
990
248
743
660
60
1100
275
825
720
65
1200
300
900
780
70
1250
313
938
840
•
The number of through lanes is reduced because of narrowing of the roadway
•
A section of on-street parking in what would otherwise be a through lane.
•
For 45 mph or greater, T = WS. Where T = taper length (ft), W = width of the offset (ft), and S = 85th
percentile speed or posted or statutory speed limit (whichever is higher)
•
For less than 45 mph, T = WS^2/60. Where T = taper length (ft), W = width of the offset (ft), and S = 85th
percentile speed or posted or statutory speed limit (whichever is higher)
•
M = ¾*D. Where M = merge length and D = advance warning distance
•
MA = D/4. Where MA = merge arrow placement and D = advance warning distance
Passing Lanes
Figure 5-20 and
NDOT’s Standard Plans, ST-12, provide pavement marking guidance for a typical passing lane. As shown in Figure
5-22, passing lanes need to be combined with signs to warn of upcoming passing opportunity. Taper length is
determined by the posted speed limit and offset. Pavement markings for double yellow lines transition at the taper to
solid yellow with broken yellow. When the taper is complete and the new lane is completely added, then the two lanes
going in the same direction get divided by a broken white line, with the double solid yellow dividing the opposing traffic
lane. Merge arrow markings, as shown in NDOT’s Standard Plans, ST-4, will need to be in place before the lanes
start to taper back to the two-way, two-lane configuration.
Table 5-11 provide the standards for lane reduction markings.
Figure 5-20. Lane Reduction Markings for Northern Districts (D2 and D3)
5-16
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-21. Typical Passing Lane Pavement Markings
•
Barrier, for reversible lanes
•
Buffer, on left-hand side
•
Buffer, on right-hand side
As shown in Table 5-12, the MUTCD provides the standard edge line and lane line markings for preferential lanes.
Table 5-12. Standard Edge Line and Lane Line Markings for Preferential Lanes
Figure 5-22. Merge Arrow Marking
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-4
5.4.9.
Managed Lanes Pavement Markings
Source: MUTCD, Table 3D-1
A managed lane or preferential lane is a lane within a highway facility where operational strategies are proactively
implemented and managed in response to changing conditions. Managed lanes can be separated from generalpurpose lanes by one or more of the following methods:
•
Section 3D.02 of the MUTCD provides example applications of markings for managed lanes.
NDOT’s Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual, Section 1.6 (December 2013 Edition), states that for
contiguous lanes, lane line markings separating the managed lane(s) from the general-purpose lanes must be
Barrier, for non-reversible lanes
5-17
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
8 inches wide. The 8-inch criterion applies to both single and double white lane lines. Regular spacing of markings
within the managed lanes, such as HOV lane markings and word markings, are to be spaced approximately
every quarter mile (1,320 feet), with markings also being placed at strategic locations and along access openings to
and from adjacent general-purpose lanes.
Figure 5-25. Managed Lane Termination Examples
NDOT’s Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual, Section 1.3 (December 2013 Edition), provides guidance on
the beginning and termination of managed lanes. Most managed lanes are on the left side of the road. Design for
both beginning and termination treatment locations must consider proximity to existing or planned ramps from the
right side. A minimum of 800 feet “per-lane change distance” must be provided between ramps and the
beginning/termination of the managed lanes, as shown in Figure 5-24.
Figure 5-23. Per-Lane Change Minimum Distance
Source: NDOT’s Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual Part 3, Figure 1-11C
Source: NDOT’s Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual Part 3, Figure 1-6
Begin a managed lane similar to a lane addition condition. Striping also should be similar on the lane addition portion.
See examples on beginning of a managed lane in Figure 5-25.
When terminating a managed lane as a general-purpose lane, Figure 5-27 should be used as guidance.
Figure 5-26. Managed Lane Termination as a General-Purpose Lane Example
Figure 5-24. Beginning a Managed Lane Examples
Source: NDOT’s Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual Part 3, Figure 1-7
Managed lanes are typically oriented adjacent to the median to avoid conflicts with ramps from the right side and
associated merging. Median orientations limit ingress and egress and discourage road users from traveling short
distances on the managed lanes. NDOT’s Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual (December 2013 Edition)
provides additional information on simultaneous ingress/egress weave zones and separate ingress/egress slip lanes.
For more information on managed lanes design and types, see NDOT’s Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual
(December 2013 Edition).
Source: NDOT’s Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual Part 3, Figure 1-5
High-Occupancy Vehicle Lanes Pavement Markings
Terminating lanes are dependent largely on anticipated volumes. Downstream termination must be designed to merge
traffic into other lanes. If demand is high (typically more than 1,000 vehicles per hour), the managed lane should
continue as a general-purpose lane, with an outside general-purpose lane dropped farther downstream. Termination
treatment is to be determined based on a traffic operational analysis. Striping should follow the same design
guidelines as a regular lane drop downstream of the managed lane. See examples in Figure 5-26.
The MUTCD defines a high-occupancy vehicle (HOV) lane as any preferential lane designated for exclusive use by
high-occupancy vehicles for all or part of a day—including a designated lane on a freeway, other highway, street, or
independent roadway on a separate right-of-way. NDOT’s Managed Lanes and Ramp Metering Manual (December
2013 Edition) states that HOV lanes are dedicated to the exclusive use of HOVs, including buses, carpools, vanpools,
or a combination thereof, for at least a portion of the day.
5-18
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
HOV Lane Markings
An HOV lane requires pavement markings that will let drivers know of its presence. As shown in Figure 5-28 through
Figure 5-30, markings for Nevada HOV lanes on freeways are contiguous and shall consist of 8-inch double
solid white lane lines with an 8-inch gap and HOV diamond symbol lane markings (diamond symbol) every
1,320 feet. HOV diamond symbol markings also will need to be placed at strategic locations and along access
openings to and from adjacent general purpose-lanes. The length of the access zone must be a minimum of 2,000
feet.
Figure 5-29. HOV Symbol Marking Detail
Double Solid Line HOV Lane
Figure 5-27. Double Solid Lines for HOV Lanes
Raised Pavement Markers (RPM) are used in Clark County HOV lanes for broken white lines.
5.4.10. Ramp Metering
Ramp Metering General Information
Ramp meters are traffic signals placed where on-ramps enter freeways or other major thoroughfares. Ramp meters
work by having vehicles on the on-ramp to enter the freeway stop at the red light. When the light turns green, one car
can enter the freeway one at a time. Ramp meters alleviate the problem caused when many vehicles merge onto an
already-crowded freeway at once, where drivers on the freeway are forced to slow down to let cars enter from the
ramp, potentially causing sudden speed changes, backups, and crashes.
Ingress/Egress Point for Double Solid Line HOV Lane
Figure 5-28. Ingress/Egress Markings for Intermediate Access to HOV Lanes
Figure 5-30. Ramp Metering Illustration
Source: Atkins
5-19
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Ramp Metering Pavement Markings—Lines and HOV Markings
HOV Symbol Placement and Details
Figure 5-33. HOV Symbol Placement and Details
Ramp metering pavement markings typically consist of broken white lines, solid white lines, and a stop bar with
Raised Pavement Markers (RPM). See Figure 5-35 for stop bars using RPMs. When the ramp meter contains an
HOV lane, HOV pavement markings must be included, with the HOV marking. Quantities and distances depend on
the designed storage lane lengths. NDOT’s Standard Plans, ST-10, provide the design standards for ramp metering
without an HOV lane (see Figure 5-32) and ramp metering with an HOV lane (see Figure 5-33).
Ramp Metering without HOV Lane
Figure 5-31. Ramp Metering Markings without HOV Lane
Ramp Metering with HOV Lane
The distance between HOV symbol markings is given by the following formula:
Figure 5-32. Ramp Metering Markings with HOV Lane
𝐷𝐷 =
𝐿𝐿 − [(𝑀𝑀 + 1) × 13]
(𝑀𝑀 − 1)
where D = distance between markings, L = storage length as directed by the engineer, and M = number of markings.
Table 5-13. Number of Markings Determination
5-20
Storage Length in Feet (L)
Number of HOV Markings (M)
172 to 252
253 to 365
366 to 478
479 to 591
592 to 704
705 to 817
818 to 930
931 to 1,043
1,044 to 1,156
1,157 to 1,269
1,270 to 1,382
1,383 to 1,495
1,496 to 1,608
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Storage Length in Feet (L)
Number of HOV Markings (M)
1,609 to 1,721
1,722 to 1,834
1,835 to 1,947
16
17
18
When stop lines are used at an intersection, they should be installed no more than 30 feet or less than 4
feet from the nearest edge of the intersecting traveled way.
Stop lines at midblock signalized locations should be placed at least 40 feet in advance of the nearest signal
indication.
When stop lines are used in proximity to pedestrian crosswalks at controlled intersections, the minimum
distance from a stop line to crosswalk markings should be 4 feet (see Figure 5-36).
NDOT Standard Plans, ST-10, state the following:
•
The HOV symbol closest to the stop bar shall be installed 13 feet prior to the stop bar.
•
When calculating distance between markings, round to the nearest whole number.
•
When a typical lane reduction begins at the stop bar, omit merge arrow and lane end signs.
Figure 5-35. Minimum Distance from Stop Line to Crosswalk Marking
Ramp Metering Pavement Markings—Stop Bars
Ramp metering stop bars for Northern Districts (D1 and D2) shall be 24” wide and follow the guidance provided in
Section 5.4.12 of this guide. When RPMs are specified, Southern District (D1) uses RPMs at stop bar locations and
following NDOT Standard Plans, ST-10, as shown in Figure 5-35.
Figure 5-34. Ramp Metering RPM Stop Bar
Source: Modified NDOT Standard Plans, ST-7
Stop lines should be combined with Stop Here for Pedestrians signs if they are used at a crosswalk that
crosses an uncontrolled multi-lane approach.
Stop lines for crosswalks that cross an uncontrolled multi-lane approach should be placed 20 feet to 50 feet
in advance of the nearest crosswalk line, and parking should be prohibited in the area in between.
NDOT policy is to use stop lines at any paved approach in an urban area, at any paved road approach, and to
perpetuate existing stop bars. Always check with district for paved approaches in projects scope that do not
have stop bars.
•
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-10
5.4.11. Permanent Pavement Markings—Transverse
Transverse pavement markings are generally placed perpendicular and across the flow of traffic. Transverse
markings include stop lines, yield lines, crosswalk lines, speed reduction markings, words, arrows, etc.
5.4.12. Stop and Yield Lines
When yield lines are used at permanent non-signalized, non-stop controlled crosswalks, they should be 30
feet from the crosswalk markings, as shown in Figure 5-37.
Stop and Yield Line Use
According to the MUTCD (Section 3B.16), the following are the uses and exceptions for stop lines and yield lines:
•
Yield Lines: Used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to yield in compliance with a Yield
sign or a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign (R1-5 or R1-5a). Yield lines are also used at locations on
uncontrolled approaches where drivers are required by State law to yield to pedestrians. When yield lines are
used in an intersection, they should be installed no more than 30 feet or less than 4 feet from the
nearest edge of the intersecting traveled way. Yield bar placement on channelized right turns is to be
placed between 4’ and 30’ back from the crosswalk. Placement should be greater for turns with higher radii /
higher operating speeds, at the designer’s discretion.
Stop Lines: Used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to stop in compliance with a traffic
control signal. Stop lines may be used in compliance with a stop sign, Stop Here for Pedestrians sign (R1-5b
or R1-5c), or some other traffic control device that requires vehicles to stop.
5-21
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-36. Yield Lines at Non-Signalized, Non-Stop Controlled Crosswalks
•
Crosswalks at non-signalized intersections: These intersections can be controlled by stop or Yield signs.
When controlled by stop or Yield signs, crosswalk markings should be installed downstream of the sign
location. When vehicular traffic is not expected to stop (not controlled by a stop or Yield sign), advanced
warning signs should be in place for the crosswalk location. Markings should be installed following an
engineering study.
•
Crosswalks at non-signalized, non-stop locations: These crosswalks generally are not expected by
drivers since they are between intersections. Crosswalk markings at non-signalized, non-stop locations
should have adequate visibility and have warning signs to alert drivers of the upcoming pedestrian crossing.
On-street parking should be prohibited for these locations. Crosswalk markings should be installed following
an engineering study. See NDOT Standard Plans, ST-7, for details on Permanent (Typical) NonSignalized, Non-Stop Controlled Crosswalks per Nevada Districts.
Section 3B.18 of the MUTCD provides guidelines on when crosswalk markings should not be installed for roadways
that exceed 40-mph speeds.
Crosswalk Line Types and Width and Placement
Crosswalk marking types can be longitudinal lines or transverse lines with longitudinal lines inside. These lines are
installed in patterns to guide pedestrians and provide visible warning to drivers using the roadway.
Source: modified NDOT Standard Plans, ST-7
Yield lines should be combined with a Yield Here to Pedestrians sign if they are used at a crosswalk that crosses an
uncontrolled multi-lane approach.
•
Stop and Yield Line Width
•
Stop Lines = 24 inches wide
•
Yield Line = 24 inches wide (triangle symbol) with a height of 36 inches, with 1-foot intervals (as shown in
Figure 5-38)
Crosswalk longitudinal lines are 10 feet long and installed in a pattern. As shown in NDOT Standard
Plans, ST-7, Nevada’s District 1 longitudinal crosswalk spacing between lines varies (see Figure 5-39),
while Districts 2 and 3 require 2 feet between each line (see Figure 5-40). Section 3B-18 of the MUTCD
states that the gap between the lines should not exceed 2.5 times the width of the longitudinal lines.
Figure 5-38. Nevada District 1 Crosswalk Detail
Figure 5-37. Yield Bar Pavement Markings
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-7
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-7
5.4.13. Crosswalk and Parking Space Markings
Crosswalk markings are used to provide visible guidance to pedestrians and vehicles on the segments of roadway
where pedestrians are expected to cross. Crosswalk markings might be supplemented by contrasting pavement
texture, style, or color.
Crosswalk Line Use
To determine if crosswalk markings are needed at a specific intersection, an engineering analysis should be
performed. The following are descriptions for crosswalk use at various applications:
•
Crosswalks at signalized intersections: Markings should be installed following an engineering analysis.
Crosswalk markings at signalized intersections typically will be complemented by pedestrian signalization.
5-22
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-39. Nevada Districts 2 and 3 Crosswalk Detail
Figure 5-40. On-Street Parking Space Markings
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-7
•
Crosswalk Markings are Placed between pedestrian ramps across a midblock crossing or intersection, with
the crosswalks placed parallel with the lane lines and direction of travel. The crosswalk bars should line up
with the lane lines and center of each lane. Placing the crosswalk bars in the vehicles wheel path should be
avoided when possible.
o
A 4’ x 4” clear space is required between the curb and the first crosswalk bar. The center of the first
crosswalk should line up with the center of the ramp (4’ x 4’) clear space with 3’ on either side but can be
adjusted from 0’ to 6’ max or from 0’ to 4’ depending on ramp type.
For additional details and applications of longitudinal crosswalk locations in relation to sidewalks/ramps, see
NDOT Standard Plans, ST-7.
Parking Space Markings
Different types of on-street parking space markings can be used to delineate the area allocated to park vehicles.
Pavement markings for parking spaces shall be white and 6 inches wide. Figure 5-41 presents examples of typical onstreet parking pavement markings, with their respective distances between markings and to pedestrian crosswalks.
Source: MUTCD, Figure 3B-21
To accommodate on-street parking for persons with disabilities, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) states that
a 96-inch aisle is needed for a full-size handicapped parking space. This clearance can be achieved by opening
space on the sidewalk side of the parking space. ADA also accepts angled spaces as a method to accommodate
parking for handicapped. One in eight spots should be van accessible.
Handicapped parking spaces should have the international representation pavement marking symbol, which is shown
in Figure 5-42.
5-23
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-41. Handicapped Parking Space Pavement Marking Symbol
Table 5-14. Word Marking Examples
Typical Word Markings with Coverage Area
Word
Area (Sq. Ft.)
AHEAD
28.5
EXIT
17
MPH
18.5
PED
17
SCHOOL
32.5
STOP
21
XING
20.5
YIELD
22
HOV
16.5
ONLY
21
See NDOT Standard Plans, ST-8, for more details on individual word and number markings.
Symbol Markings
Source: MUTCD, Figure 3B-22
Certain messages for drivers can be communicated through symbol markings. According to the MUTCD’s Section
3B.20, symbol messages are preferable to word messages. NDOT Standard Plans, ST-4, provides information on
symbol markings, such as for bicycle lanes and HOV lanes. Symbol markings for Yield Ahead, parking space
accessibility, speed humps, and railroad crossings, among others, are found in Sections 3B.20 to 3B.25 of the
MUTCD and the Pavement chapter of the FHWA’s Standard Highway Signs (2004 Edition).
Detectable warning surfaces are required anytime there is a pedestrian access to a vehicle path. The Americans with
Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) contains design specifications and
placement for the detectable warning surfaces.
5.4.14. Word, Symbol, and Arrow Markings
Arrow Markings
Word, symbol, and arrow markings are used to guide, warn, and regulate traffic. The main guidance for word, symbol,
and arrow markings can be found in the MUTCD, NDOT Standard Plans, and FHWA’s Standard Highway Signs (2004
Edition) Pavement Markings chapter. These markings can be used to supplement signs and/or provide additional
emphasis.
Arrows are used to indicate mandatory or permissible movement in left, right turn, thru, or thru left/right lanes and twoway left-turn lanes. Sheets ST-4 and ST-5 of the NDOT Standard Plans show the allowed arrow marking dimensions
in Nevada. Section 3B.20 of the MUTCD provides guidance on different uses for lane arrows.
Unless stated otherwise in the MUTCD or any of the references mentioned above, word, symbol, and arrow
markings shall be white. According to the MUTCD, Section 3B.20, word, symbol, and arrow markings can be
categorized as:
•
Regulatory markings: Some examples: stop, Yield, lane-use arrows, wrong-way arrows, and the diamond
symbol for HOV lanes, among others.
•
Warning markings: Some examples: Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, School Xing, Ped Xing, R X R (railroad
markings), and lane-reduction arrows, among others.
•
Guide markings: Some examples: route numbers (route shield symbols and/or words), cardinal directions,
TO and destination names or abbreviations.
Wrong Way Driver / Ramp Arrow Pavement Markings
It is recommended that arrows be placed showing the direction of travel on off-ramps near the intersection terminal to
deter wrong way drivers. The same application is recommended for divided highways and one-way streets.
Storage Lane “ONLY” and Lane Arrow Markings
One of the uses for the “ONLY” word pavement markings and lane arrow markings is for guidance in drop lanes in
District 1 and 3. The “ONLY” pavement marking should not be used in an auxiliary lane, added turn lane, or thru lane
situations, only when a through lane turns into a right turn or left turn lane. “ONLY” markings shall not be used in
District 2. “ONLY” markings always should follow an arrow marking. Arrow markings shall be used for any type of turn
pocket, including two-way left-turn lanes. The following equation provides the number of markings used for arrow and
“ONLY” markings:
Word Markings
NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6, provides the following criteria to determine the number of arrows and “ONLY” markings
for storage lanes:
Following NDOT Standard Plans, ST-8, letters and numerals should be 8 feet in height. The width of each letter
varies from 1 foot to 4 feet. When word messages contain more than one line of information, the first word of the
message should be nearest to the road user. Word markings should not exceed three lines of information. See Table
5-14, below, for examples of commonly used word markings with their respective marking square feet totals.
5-24
•
Entrances to the storage lanes start with an arrow.
•
The arrow closest to the crosswalk shall be installed 8 feet prior to the stop bar.
•
When calculating distance between markings, round up to the nearest whole number.
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Lane-Drop Turn Pocket
See the criteria presented in Figure 5-43 to Figure 5-51, below.
Figure 5-45. Lane-Drop Turn Pocket Markings, Example 1
Dedicated Turn Pocket (also for right arrows, where applicable)
Figure 5-42. Dedicated Turn Pocket Arrow Markings, Example 1
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6
Figure 5-46. Lane-Drop Turn Pocket Markings, Example 2
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6
Figure 5-43. Dedicated Turn Pocket Arrow Markings, Example 2
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6
Figure 5-47. Lane-Drop Turn Pocket Markings, Example 3
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6
Figure 5-44. Dedicated Turn Pocket Arrow Markings, Example 3
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6
The following Figures show examples of “ONLY” pavement markings being used for an intersection approach and
when “ONLY” is not used for an intersection approach:
5-25
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-48. Example of “ONLY” Pavement Marking Use
Figure 5-49. Example of “ONLY” Pavement Marking Not Used
Source: Modified NCDOT Standard Plans, 1205.05
Source: Modified NCDOT Standard Plans, 1205.05
5-26
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Two-Way Left Turn Lanes
Single Storage Lane
Figure 5-50. Two-Way Left-Turn Lanes Arrow Markings
Figure 5-51. Single Storage Lane Details
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6
Source: Modified NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6
The distance between Arrow/ “ONLY” symbol markings is given by the following formula:
𝐷𝐷 =
For left and right-turn storage lanes, turn pockets pavement markings will be either at a reversing curve (radius) or
with a tangential taper (angle). Using engineering judgement, significant factors when deciding between reversing
curve or tangential taper are the type and speed of the road.
𝐿𝐿 − [(𝑀𝑀 + 1) × 8]
(𝑀𝑀 − 1)
Tangential taper is generally used on high-speed routes (45 mph or greater), while low speed/urban corridors are
more disposed to a reversing curve. In urban areas, sometimes the turn pocket length cannot be met, and a design
exception approval is needed for a short taper.
where D = distance between markings, L = storage length as directed by the engineer, and M = number of markings.
Table 5-15 presents the number of arrow and “ONLY” markings needed based on the storage lane length:
When reversing curve or tangential taper is used for left-turn lanes, use the same pavement marking principles as the
yellow painted median islands. Right-turn Lane uses the same pavement marking principles for the edge lines
pavement markings when either reversing curve or tangential taper is used. The figure below shows an example of
the reversing curve pavement marking location for left-turn lanes:
Table 5-15. Distance Between Arrow and "ONLY" Markings in Storage Lanes
Storage Length in Feet (L)
Number of Markings (M)
Arrow/ “ONLY”
96 to 280
3
281 to 456
4
457 to 632
5
633 to 808
6
809 to 984
7
985 or more
8
To determine the length of storage lane lines, guidance is presented from NDOT’s Standard Plans, ST-6, in Figure
5-52 and Figure 5-54.
5-27
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-52. Left-Turn Lane Reversing Curve Pavement Marking Radius
Figure 5-54. Examples of Elongated Route Shield for Pavement Markings
Source: FHWA’s Signalized Intersections: An Informational Guide – Safety. Website:
https://safety.fhwa.dot.gov/intersection/conventional/signalized/fhwasa13027/ch11.cfm
For more information on reversing curve and tangential taper, see AASHTO’s “Green Book” (2018), Chapter 9.
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 3B-25
Multiple Storage Lanes
Figure 5-53. Multiple Storage Lanes Details
Speed Hump Markings
Speed hump markings are used to enhance visibility and awareness of a speed hump present in the roadway. Speed
hump markings are 12-inch-wide white markings located on the speed hump. When the right conditions are
present, speed humps also can function as a crosswalk. Figure 5-56 shows options for pavement markings for speed
humps without crosswalks.
Figure 5-55. Speed Humps without Crosswalks Marking Options
Source: Modified NDOT Standard Plans, ST-6
Where applicable, install RPMs on white line markings for storage lanes.
Route Shield Pavement Markings
Route shield pavement markings are used to help guide users to their destinations. Route shield markers include
Interstate Shields, US Route Shields, State Route Shields, and other official highway routes. The MUTCD (Section
3B.20) provides examples of pavement marking shields. Route Shield application for Nevada is shown in Figure 5-55.
5-28
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-57. Typical Roundabout and Components
Source: MUTCD, Figure 3B.29
Figure 5-57 shows options for pavement markings for speed humps with crosswalks.
Source: NCHRP Roundabouts: An Informational Guide (Report 672), Exhibit 1-12
Figure 5-56. Speed Humps with Crosswalks Marking Options
A variety of pavement markings are used at roundabouts, with some being required while others are optional. While
the design of roundabouts can be unique, the following describes for typical design:
Single-Lane Roundabouts
The following pavement markings are typical for single-lane roundabouts (see Figure 5-59):
•
•
Edge Lines: 6-inch lines
o
Single white lines at approaches and inside roundabout. These are not required along curb and gutter but
recommended.
o
Single yellow lines along approach splitter island and around roundabout central island.
Center Lines: 6-inch lines
o
•
Wide Mini-Skip Entrance Lines: 8-inch lines
o
•
5.4.15. Roundabout Markings
•
5-29
Longitudinal white crosswalk lines upstream of roundabout entrance. Used only if roundabout is designed
for pedestrian travel.
Yield line symbols
o
A roundabout is a circular intersection where entry is controlled by yielding to vehicles travelling within the circle (see
Figure 5-58). Roundabouts eliminate head-on and angle crashes and reduce vehicular delays and stops.
Roundabouts require specific signs and pavement markings in advance and at the approaches to notify drivers and
communicate how to manage the roundabout configuration.
White gore lines at the splitter island nose, following the roundabout curvature.
Crosswalk Lines (longitudinal): see Section 5.4.13 of this guide for line dimensions.
o
Source: MUTCD, Figure 3B-30
Wide mini-skip white lines at the entrances to the roundabout, following the roundabout curvature.
Gore Lines: 8-inch lines
o
•
Double yellow lines at the approaches leading up to the splitter island.
Yield line symbols are optional for additional emphasis on yielding to vehicles inside the roundabout but
recommended.
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-58. Single-Lane Roundabout Markings
•
Yield line symbols
o
•
Yield line symbols are optional for additional emphasis on yielding to vehicles inside roundabout but
recommended.
Arrow markings
o
Fish-hook arrow markings with 2-inch black contrast (in PCCP applications) at roundabout approaches.
See NDOT Standard Plans, ST-5, for reference. Advance fish-hook arrows shall be located at the R3-8
(roundabout lane designation) sign locations.
Figure 5-59. Multi-Lane Roundabout Markings
Multi-Lane Roundabouts
The following pavement markings are typical for multi-lane roundabouts (see Figure 5-60):
•
•
Edge Lines: 6-inch lines
o
Single white lines at approaches and inside roundabout. These are not required along curb and gutter
locations but recommended.
o
Single yellow lines along approach splitter island and around roundabout central island.
Center Lines: 6-inch lines
o
•
•
The AASHTO Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities (2012, 4th Edition) states that a bikeway is a generic
term for any road, street, path, or way that in some manner is specifically designated for bicycle travel, regardless of
whether the facility is designated for the exclusive use of bicycles or is to be shared with other modes of
transportation. The types of bikeway design options include:
Solid white lane lines at approach/entrance to roundabout. Also used inside roundabout at locations
where traffic should stay in current lane.
Dotted Lines: 6-inch lines
o
Wide mini-skip white lines at the entrances to the roundabout, following the roundabout curvature.
o
Mini-skip white lines used inside roundabout at locations where lane change is allowed to reach the
desired destination.
Table 5-16. Bikeway Design Options
Gore Lines: 8-inch lines
o
•
5.4.16. Bicycle Facilities Markings
Lane Lines: 6-inch lines
o
•
Double yellow lines at the approaches leading up to the splitter island.
White gore lines at the splitter island nose, following the roundabout curvature.
Crosswalk Lines (longitudinal): see Section 5.4.13 of this guide for line dimensions
○
Longitudinal white crosswalk lines upstream of roundabout entrance. Used only if roundabout is designed
for pedestrian travel.
5-30
Bikeway Design Options
Bicycle Pavement Markings (Yes/No)
Shared Lanes with Markings
Yes
Shared Lanes without Markings
No
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Bikeway Design Options
Bicycle Pavement Markings (Yes/No)
Bicycle Lanes
Yes
Bicycle Boulevards
Yes
Share Use Path
Yes
Paved Shoulder
No
Figure 5-61. Bicycle Shared Lane Symbol with On-Street Parking
Shared use path markings can be found in Chapter 9 – Bicycle Facilities of the MUTCD
Bicycle Shared Lanes with Markings
The Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities defines a shared lane as a lane of a traveled way that is open to
both bicycle and motor vehicle travel. A marked shared lane has pavement marking symbols to provide a higher level
of guidance to bicyclists and motorists.
The MUTCD (Section 9C.07) states that shared lane markings should not be placed on roadways that have a speed
limit above 35 mph and shall not be used on shoulders or in designated bicycle lanes.
Shared lane markings (sharrow) should be installed immediately after an intersection and spaced at maximum
intervals of 250 feet. The shared lane markings should be placed on an alignment that represents a practical path of
bicycle travel under typical conditions. For some streets, this may be the center of a shared travel lane.
Source: Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, 4th Edition, Figures 4-5 and 4-6
Figure 5-61 and Figure 5-62 show typical marked shared lanes with no on-street parking and with on-street parking,
respectively. Both figures also show the required distances from the shared lane marking to the face of curb or edge
of traveled way (when no curb is present).
Figure 5-63, below, shows the dimensions for shared lane bicycle symbols.
Figure 5-62. Shared Lane Bicycle Marking Detail
Figure 5-60. Bicycle Shared Lane Symbol without On-Street Parking
Different types of transition areas for bicycle shared lanes will occur as part of roadway configuration varieties.
Striping for transition areas involving shared lanes must be performed in a way where safety is prioritized and where
the continuity of the bikeway network is achieved. Examples for bicycle shared lane transition areas include:
Source: Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, 4th Edition, Figures 4-5 and 4-6
5-31
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
•
Bicycle Lane Markings
Block intersection shared lane markings: installed to direct bicyclist to their respective cross street as
shown in the following figure. For this application the chevron marking orientation in the bicycle shared lane
symbol can be adjusted for wayfinding purposes to direct bicyclists along discontinuous routes.
Section 4.6.1 of the Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities defines a bicycle lane as a portion of the roadway
designated for preferential use by bicyclists. According to the Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, the
preferred operating width for a bicycle lane is 5 feet. When on-street parking is prohibited, the minimum width for
a bicycle lane can be 4 feet. Circumstances such as adjacent narrow parking lanes, high bicycle volumes, high-speed
roadways, high-volume roadways, etc., might make wider bicycle lanes (6 feet to 8 feet) more desirable. Figure 5-66
presents bicycle lane width options with on-street parking and without on-street parking.
Figure 5-63. Block Intersection Shared Lane Markings
Figure 5-65. Bicycle Lane Widths with On-Street Parking and
Bicycle Lane Widths Without On-Street Parking
Source: Urban Bikeway Design Guide, 2nd Edition. Website: https://nacto.org/publication/urban-bikeway-design-guide/bikewaysigning-marking/shared-lane-markings/
•
Combined right turn lane with bicycle shared lane marking: for this application shared lane markings are
installed inside the portion of a dedicated motor vehicle turn lane. With this combination approach, bicyclists
maintain comfort and priority in the absence of a dedicated bicycle through lane and motorists are
encouraged to yield to bicyclists when crossing into the narrow right-turn lane. The following figure shows an
example of a combined right turn lane following a transition from a bicycle lane to shared lane:
Figure 5-64. Combined Right Turn with Bicycle Shared Markings
Source: Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, 4th Edition, Figure 4-13
Bicycle lanes are separated from vehicle traffic by a solid white line 6 inches wide. The MUTCD (Section 9C.04)
states that a bicycle lane word, symbol, and/or arrow marking should be placed at the beginning of a bicycle lane and
at periodic intervals along the bicycle lane based on engineering judgement.
The Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, Section 4.7.2, recommends the following distances for bicycle
lane striping:
•
Suburban areas with long distances between intersections and little roadside activity: bicycle lane
symbols can be as far apart as 1,000 feet or more.
•
Urban areas where motorists make parking maneuvers across bicycle lanes or where there is
significant driveway density: may be appropriate to space the symbols as often as every 100 feet.
When the bicycle lane symbol marking is used in conjunction with word or arrow messages, it shall precede them, as
shown in Figure 5-67, as found in the NDOT Standard Plans, ST-4.
Source: Urban Bikeway Design Guide, 2nd Edition. Website: https://nacto.org/publication/urban-bikeway-design-guide/bikewaysigning-marking/shared-lane-markings/
5-32
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-66. Bicycle Lane Symbol and Arrow Detail
Figure 5-67. Intersection Bicycle Lane Pavement Marking Example
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-4
Bicycle lane markings typically change configuration at intersection approaches to mitigate vehicle/bicycle conflicts.
As mentioned in the MUTCD (Section 9C.04), a through bicycle lane shall not be positioned to the right of a right-turn
only lane or to the left of a left-turn only lane. In such situations, where a vehicle’s movement can create a conflict with
a bicycle’s through movement, 6-inch dotted lane lines shall be used. Figure 5-68 through Figure 5-71 show different
scenarios where dotted lines are used.
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 9C-1
5-33
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-68. Bicycle Lane Treatment at Right-Turn Only Lane
Figure 5-69. Bicycle Lane Treatment at Parking Lane into a Right-Turn Only Lane
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 9C-5
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 9C-4
5-34
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-70. Bicycle Lane Pavement Markings at Intersections
the context of the surrounding area (e.g., urban vs. suburban). Dotted lines are more important where there are more
right-turning vehicles.
Buffered Bicycle Lane Markings
Buffer space to separate the bicycle lane from adjacent motor vehicle lanes can be added as a safety measure.
According to the Urban Bikeway Design Guide (2014), buffers shall be marked with two solid white lines. A wide solid
double white line along both edges of the buffer space should be used where crossing is prohibited, while a wide solid
single line along both edges of the buffer space should be used where crossing is discouraged. For clarity, dashing
the buffer boundary where cars are expected to cross at driveways is recommended.
When the interior of the buffer area is 3 feet in width or wider, interior chevron markings shall be used.
Chevrons should consist of 4-inch lines angled at 30 degrees to 45 degrees with the longitudinal lines they
intersect, and striped at intervals of 10 feet to 40 feet. The chevron marking point shall be facing toward
approaching traffic. Bicycle lane symbol markings, wording, and arrows shall be used as with a conventional bicycle
lane. Figure 5-72 and Figure 5-73 show a typical buffered bicycle lane marking.
Figure 5-71. Bicycle Lane Buffer Markings
Source: Urban Bikeway Design Guide, 2nd Edition. Website: https://nacto.org/publication/urban-bikeway-design-guide/
Figure 5-72. Bicycle Lane Buffer Markings Example from Austin, Texas
Source: Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, 4th Edition, Figure 4-16
Dotted lines used in the figures above are intended to provide a reminder that merging movements can be expected
in the area. Following Section 4.8.1 of the Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, on approaches to
intersections that do not have right-turn-only lanes, bicycle lane lines are either solid or dotted or may be temporarily
dropped. The choice between solid or dotted lines should be based on factors such as volume of right-turning motor
vehicles, presence of bus stops, speed of motor vehicle traffic, types of vehicles that typically use the intersection, and
Source: Urban Bikeway Design Guide, 2nd Edition. Website: https://nacto.org/publication/urban-bikeway-design-guide/
5-35
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Green Colored Pavement on Bicycle Lanes
•
Green colored pavement can be used on bicycle lanes to improve the visibility of the lane and preferred position of
bicyclists in downtown or high-density areas. The preferred application for green pavement markings is for conflict
zones (dotted line markings where vehicles may cross or take the bike lane). According to Section 4.7.2 of the Guide
for the Development of Bicycle Facilities, green colored pavement can be installed for the entire length of the bicycle
lane, for only a portion or portions of the bicycle lane, or as a regular background behind standard MUTCD symbol
and word markings.
Use of this treatment requires written approval from FHWA in accordance with Section 1A.10 of the MUTCD. Approval
can be granted for a specific location, or for an entire jurisdictional area.
Green over the bike lane arrow and symbol is acceptable but is of second priority to green conflict zones. When green
colored pavement is installed as a rectangular background behind bicycle lane arrows and symbols, it should be 4
feet wide and 20 feet long for each pair of symbols along the bicycle lane. Figure 5-75 from NDOT Standard Plans,
Permanent Striping Details Bike Markings, presents the marking system.
The green colored pavement may be retroreflective, but there is no requirement or recommendation that it be
retroreflective.
Figure 5-74. Bicycle Lane Marking Green Color Pavement Background
In Nevada, the type of bicycle green pavement making material used by each District are:
•
District 1: Polyurea
•
District 2: Epoxy paint
•
District 3: Epoxy paint
If a pair of dotted lines is used to extend a bicycle lane across the beginning of a turn bay where drivers who
desire to turn must cross the bicycle lane when moving out of the through lane to turn, green colored
pavement may be installed between these lines as a supplement to the lines. Green colored pavement shall
not be used instead of these dotted lines to extend a bicycle lane across the beginning of a turn bay. The
green colored pavement may be installed for the entire length of the bicycle lane extension or for only a
portion (or portions) of the bicycle lane extension. The pattern of the green colored pavement may be dotted
in a manner that matches the pattern of the dotted lines, thus filling in only the areas that are directly between
a pair of dotted line segments that are on opposite sides of the bicycle lane extension.
Alternate bicycle green marking material to be approved by the District Engineer.
Figure 5-74 shows an example of a bicycle lane green color application.
Figure 5-73. Green Color Marking Example Application for Bicycle Lanes
Source: Urban Bikeway Design Guide, 2nd Edition. Website: https://nacto.org/publication/urban-bikeway-design-guide/
Source: Preliminary NDOT Standard Plans, Permanent Striping Details Bike Markings
The MUTCD’s Interim Approval for Optional Use of Green Colored Pavement for Bike Lanes (IA-14) limits the use of
green colored pavement to the following applications:
•
As a supplement to the other pavement markings that are required for the designation of a bicycle lane.
Green colored pavement shall not be used instead of the longitudinal line required or instead of the word,
symbol, and arrow pavement markings. The green colored pavement may be installed for the entire length of
the bicycle lane or for only a portion (or portions) of the bicycle lane. Green colored pavement may be
installed as a rectangular background behind the word, symbol, and arrow pavement markings in a bicycle
lane as a means of enhancing the conspicuity of these word, symbol, and arrow pavement markings.
•
If a pair of dotted lines is used to extend a bicycle lane across an intersection, driveway, or ramp, green
colored pavement may be installed between these lines as a supplement to the lines. Green colored
pavement shall not be used instead of these dotted lines to extend a bicycle lane across an intersection,
driveway, or ramp. The green colored pavement may be installed for the entire length of the bicycle lane
extension or for only a portion (or portions) of the bicycle lane extension. The pattern of the green colored
pavement may be dotted in a manner that matches the pattern of the dotted lines, thus filling in only the areas
that are directly between a pair of dotted line segments that are on opposite sides of the bicycle lane
extension.
When used, green colored pavement shall fill the entire width of the bike lane between the white 6-inch markings or
between the white 6-inch markings and EOP, as shown in Figure 5-76.
5-36
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-75. Bicycle Lane Dotted Green Lines
According to FHWA’s Highway-Rail Crossing Handbook, 3rd Edition, identical markings shall be placed in each
approach lane on all paved approaches to crossings where crossing signals or automatic gates are located, and at all
other crossings where the prevailing speed of highway traffic is 40 mph or greater. These markings may be omitted at
minor crossings or in urban areas if an engineering study indicates that other crossing devices provide suitable
control.
Typical pavement markings for railroad crossing approaches are broken yellow with solid yellow at both crossing
approaches, a solid white line parallel to the railroad tracks (for passive crossings), white stop lines or white
yield lines, and railroad pavement marking symbols. Figure 5-77 presents how a typical passive crossing should
look:
Figure 5-76. Passive Railroad Crossing Typical Markings and Signs
Source: Modified NDOT Standard Plans, RC-1
Source: Modified Preliminary NDOT Standard Plans, Permanent Striping Details Bike Markings
At passive crossings: A yield sign and yield markings should be used unless an engineering study determines a
stop sign and line is appropriate. Install 4-inch solid white lines 6 feet from the nearest track parallel to the tracks.
Yield (or stop) lines shall be installed 15 feet from the closest track.
See MUTCD’s Interim Approval for Optional Use of Green Colored Pavement for Bike Lanes (IA-14) Memorandum for
more application information.
At active crossings: A similar configuration as shown in Figure 5-77 is used, except railroad gates will be installed a
minimum of 12 feet from the center of the tracks, and the stop line is installed 8 feet from the railroad gate. Yield lines
are not used when railroad gates are present.
Bicycle Boulevards with Markings
A bicycle boulevard is a street segment that has been modified to accommodate through bicycle traffic and minimize
through motor traffic. A bicycle boulevard provides shared-lane markings where appropriate to alert drivers to the path
bicyclists need to take on a shared roadway. Section 4.10 of the AASHTO Guide for the Development of Bicycle
Facilities provides additional information on bicycle boulevards.
See NDOT Standard Plans, RC-1, for passive and active crossing pavement marking scenarios.
Pavement marking symbols consist of two 2-foot white lines, an X symbol, and RR text, as shown in Figure 5-78.
Bicycle Shared Use Paths with Markings
Figure 5-77. Typical Railroad Crossing Advance Pavement Markings
Shared use paths are adjacent to roadways with no or very few intersections or driveways. Between shared paths and
roadways, marked crosswalks are recommended. A wide yellow center line strip may be used to separate opposite
directions of travel where passing is inadvisable. This center line stripe should be dotted when there is adequate sight
distance for passing. Edge line striping, in the form of a wide white line, may be needed on shared use paths to alert
the path users of changing conditions or if the pathway design includes a separate area for pedestrian travel. Section
5.4 of the AASHTO Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities provides additional information on pavement
markings for shared use paths.
5.4.17. Railroad Crossing Markings
Pavement markings are used at railroad crossing approaches to supplement the regulatory and warning messages
alerting drivers to an upcoming railroad crossing location. Railroad crossings can be either passive or active.
Railroad crossings are considered passive when their main warning/safety devices are either signs and/or pavement
markings. A crossing will be considered active when the main warning/safety devices are flashers, gates, etc. Active
crossings also will need signs and pavement markings.
5-37
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, RC-1
Raised Pavement Marker Colors
5.4.18. Raised Pavement Markers—USED ONLY IN CLARK COUNTY
The color of the RPM will be determined by the pavement marking it will supplement or substitute for.
RPMs are installed on or in a road surface with the intention of guidance and/or to supplement or substitute for
pavement markings. The color of the RPM used will depend on the color of the marking it supplements or substitutes
for. As stated in Section 5.3.2 of this guide, District 1’s Clark County is the only Nevada area where RPMs are used.
Raised Pavement Marker Types
Non-Reflective Pavement Markers
•
Type A – Non-Reflective Yellow Marker
•
Type B – Non-Reflective White Marker
•
White/Clear RPMs: supplement or substitute for white markings.
•
Yellow RPMs: supplement or substitute for yellow markings.
•
Red/Clear RPMs: white markings to alert wrong-way drivers. Oncoming traffic will see a clear reflection, while
wrong-way driving traffic will see a red reflection.
•
Blue RPMs: used in the roadway at fire hydrant locations.
Reflective pavement markers also can be recessed in the pavement, if required.
Raised Pavement Marker Use
Non-reflective pavement markers used in Nevada are circular with a diameter of 4 inches, as shown in Figure 5-79.
RPMs for Lane Lines and Center Lines
Figure 5-78. Non-Reflective RPM
Clark County uses RPMs to supplement pavement markings in rural streets. For urban streets, highways, and
interstates, RPMs are used as a substitute for lane lines and center lines entirely. RPMs should not supplement
right-hand edge lines unless an engineering study or engineering judgment indicates its benefits. NDOT
Standard Plans, ST-1 and ST-2 provide information on RPM use and spacing on rural and urban streets.
The following figures represent examples of RPM use for an intersection approach with cat tracks markings and a
freeway segment with parallel deceleration lanes and multi-lane exit ramp, respectively:
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-1
Reflective Pavement Markers
•
Type C – One Way Clear Reflective Marker
•
Type D —Two Way Yellow Reflective Marker
•
Type E —Red/Clear Reflective Marker – Clear side should face oncoming traffic.
Reflective pavement markers used in Nevada are square with 4-inch sides, as shown in Figure 5-80.
Figure 5-79. Reflective RPM
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, ST-1
5-38
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-80. RPM use at Intersection Example
Figure 5-81. RPM use at Freeway Exit Ramp Example
5-39
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Contrast Striping
Some situations require the use of light-colored pavement, for example: concrete road on bridges. Based on the
MUTCD, Section 3A.05, black color may be used in combination with the pavement marking where a light-colored
pavement does not provide enough contrast with the markings. Black contrast striping can be used around white lines
and yellow lines, both for solid and dotted lines. Black contrast striping is required for roundabout fish-hook arrows (in
PCCP applications). See NDOT Standard Plans, ST-5, for details.
5.4.19. Recessed Striping, Contrast Striping, and Rumble Strip Markings
Recessed Striping
Recessed striping is used to increase protection to pavement markings from snowplow blades and shearing forces
from daily traffic. Recessed striping is recommended for routes over 5,000’ in elevation. Always confirm with District
Traffic and Roadway Coordinator.
When using black contrast striping, the black contrast should be 2 inches in width on both sides of the pavement
marking line, as shown in Figure 5-83 and Figure 5-84. Contrast striping should be assumed for concrete applications.
Always confirm with District Traffic and Roadway Coordinator.
While the recess (groove) provides the advantage of increasing the life expectancy of pavement markings, it can
create a safety hazard for motorcycles, bicycles, and pedestrians. The recess can trap water and debris, creating a
hazard when attempting to cross over the markings. Recessed markings should be used mainly for longitudinal
pavement markings (lane lines, edge lines, center lines, and gore lines). If considered, recessed stop lines and
crosswalks should be evaluated first. Recessed symbol markings and legends are not recommended.
Figure 5-82. Contrast Striping Details for Broken White Lines
Areas where recessed markings shall not be used are:
•
Bridge decks
•
Rumble strip locations
•
Road diet* locations
*Road Diets reduce the number of travel lanes by restriping and repurposing those lanes for other uses like bike lanes.
In Nevada, a 6-inch recessed striping is mandatory for US routes and the following State Routes:
•
SR-431
•
SR-432
•
SR-447
•
SR-318
•
SR-160
•
SR-147
•
SR-140
The recessed marking groove dimensions are as follows:
Figure 5-83. Contrast Striping Example, I-580, Nevada
Table 5-17. Recess Marking Groove Dimensions
Marking
Groove Width
Groove Depth
Groove Position
Longitudinal
Material width + 1inch, (+- 1/8 inch)
As recommended by
manufacturer, (+- 5 mils)
Center/lane lines: 2 inches from
joint line, (+- 1/8 inch)
Edge lines: on lane, 2-4 inch in
from the joint line, (+- 1/8 inch)
Edge lines for 14 feet paved
lanes: as directed by the
Engineer
Transverse
Material width + 1inch, (+- 1/8 inch)
As recommended by
manufacturer, (+- 5 mils)
In transverse marking exact
location
Source: Google Earth
5-40
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-85. Rumble Strip Detail for Solid Double Yellow Line
Contrast striping shall be placed on the road surface and will not be placed within the groove for recessed markings.
Rumble Strip Markings
To provide safer roadways, rumble strips are a way to help prevent head-on or sideswipe collisions and help correct
driving misdirection without the crash impact that can be experienced with concrete barriers. Rumble strips are cost
effective and have a relatively fast installation.
Rumble strips can be located outside of edge lines and/or center lines or they can be in the same milled-out location
as the edge lines and/or centerlines. When the edge lines and/or center lines are in the rumble strip milled-out
location, the name Rumble Stripes can be used.
Longitudinal Rumble Strips
o
Section 3J.01 of the MUTCD defines longitudinal rumble strips as a series of rough-textured or slightly raised or
depressed road surfaces intended to alert inattentive drivers through vibration and sound that their vehicle has left the
travel lane. Contact Traffic Safety Engineering (TSE) for need to use centerline and edge line rumble strips. If rumble
strips already exist, perpetuate them in the design.
Two-way traffic with passing zone:
Figure 5-86. Rumble Strips for Two-Way Traffic with Passing Zone
Longitudinal rumble strips (when used) in the state of Nevada are:
•
Center line rumble strips, mainly used on two-way roadway center lines to reduce head-on and sideswipe
collisions. Center line rumble strips are 16 inches wide, with each strip being 7 inches long and 1/2-inch to
5/8-inch deep, with a maximum radius of 1 foot. The distance between recesses is 5 inches measured
from the end of one recess to beginning of next recess.
Center line rumble strips shall not be placed in urban locations, nor on bridges or bridge approach slabs
unless specifically noted in the plans. When residences are within 1,000 feet, rumbles strips can be omitted.
NDOT Standard Plans, RS-3A, provides the different center line designs (see Figure 5-85 through Figure
5-90) based on roadway layout.
o
Figure 5-87. Rumble Strip Detail for Solid Yellow Line
Two-way traffic with no passing zone:
Figure 5-84. Rumble Strips for Two-Way Traffic with no Passing Zone
o
5-41
Two-way left-turn lane:
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-88. Rumble Strips for Two-Way Left-Turn Lane
o
Figure 5-90. Edge Line Rumble Strip for Two-Way Traffic
Bridge structure approach:
Figure 5-89. Rumble Strips at Bridge Structure Proximity
o
Roadway with approach:
Figure 5-91. Edge Line Rumble Strip Placement at Roadway with Approach
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, RS-3A
For more details on center line rumble strips at storage lanes and railroad crossings, see NDOT Standard
Plans, RS-3A and RS-3B.
•
Edge line rumble strips, typically installed along the shoulder near the travel lane. On divided highways,
rumble strips sometimes are installed on the median-side shoulder as well as on the outside shoulder. Edge
line rumble strips are 6 inches wide, with each strip being 7 inches long and 1/2-inch to 5/8-inch deep,
with a max radius of 1 foot. The distance between recesses is 5 inches measured from the end of one
recess to the beginning of the next recess. As shown in NDOT Standard Plans, RS-1, striping shall be
placed over the edge line rumble strip.
Edge line rumble strips shall not be placed in urban locations unless specifically designated in the plans. If
specified in the plans, then quiet rumble strips shall be used. Quiet rumble strips have the same dimensions
as regular edge line rumble strips, except that each rumble depth must vary from 1/32-inch to 5/8-inch.
Rumble strips shall be used on outside shoulders that are 1-foot wide or wider and shall be used on inside
shoulders with widths of 2 feet or more. Rumble strips may be continuous through all minor approaches but
shall be omitted across principal intersecting roadways.
NDOT Standard Plans, RS-1, provides the different edge line designs (see Figure 5-91 through Figure 5-93)
based on roadway layout:
o
Two-way traffic layout:
5-42
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Figure 5-92. Edge Line Rumble Strip Placement when a Dedicated Right-Turn Lane is Present
When striping is placed through the rumble strip, the markings visibility tends to improve since the unobstructed
portion of the pavement marking on the back wall of the rumble strip will reflect light back to the vehicle.
The following examples show edge line rumble stripes in daytime and nighttime conditions:
Figure 5-94. Examples for Daytime and Nighttime Rumble Stripes
When edge line rumble strips are desired in concrete pavement, these should be 16” wide, with a 12” gap
from edge of start of rumble to edge of start of next rumble. All rumble strip corrugation shall be 6’ minimum
from any concrete joint.
Source: FHWA’s Rumble Strips and Rumble Stripes, Website:
https://safety.fhwa.dot.gov/roadway_dept/pavement/rumble_strips/safety.cfm
Transverse Rumble Strips
NDOT Standard Plans, RS-4, provides the following standard for rumble strips on concrete pavement, as
shown in Figure 5-94.
Similar to longitudinal rumble strips, transverse rumble strips are rough-textured, or slightly raised or depressed road
surfaces intended to alert drivers. The purpose of transverse rumble strips is to alert drivers to unusual vehicular
traffic conditions, such as unexpected changes in alignment and conditions requiring a reduction in speed or a stop.
Figure 5-93. Edge Line Rumble Strips on Concrete Pavement
A typical transverse rumble strip, as presented by NDOT Standard Plans, RS-5, is shown in Figure 5-96.
Figure 5-95. Typical Transverse Rumble Strip
Transverse rumble strip width is the same as the lane width (from double yellow striping to white edge striping),
with each strip being 4 inches long and 3/8-inch deep. The distance between recesses are 12 inches from the end
of one recess to the beginning of the next recess. Spacing between rumble strips may be changed as directed by
the Engineer.
For additional information on transverse line rumble strips, including high-speed stop sign approach, see NDOT
Standard Plans, RS-5.
5.4.20. Delineators
For additional information on edge line rumble strips at ramps and structures, see NDOT Standard Plans, RS-2.
Delineators are retroreflective devices mounted on the roadway surface or at the side of the roadway in a series to
indicate the alignment of the roadway. These contain reflectors that are capable of retroreflecting light under normal
atmospheric conditions when illuminated by the high beams of standard automobile lights. According to MUTCD
Section 3F.01, delineators are particularly beneficial at locations where the alignment might be confusing or
unexpected, such as lane-reduction transitions and curves. Delineators are effective guidance devices at night and
during adverse weather.
Rumble Stripes
Edge line or center line placed through the rumble strips are called rumble stripes. Strips are painted with a
retroreflective coating which provides a series of benefits, such as:
•
Nighttime visibility improvement
•
Wet conditions visibility improvement
5-43
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Guideposts Retroreflective Components
Guideposts are a type of delineator where the reflector is attached to a post, which can be either flexible or rigid.
According to Section 4.13 of the NDOT Road Design Guide (2019 Edition), rigid guideposts are normally placed in
areas that have heavy snow removal, normally north of Tonopah. Flexible guideposts are used on all other areas in
the state. Preference must be requested from the District. Post details are found in NDOT Standard Plans, DM-1.
Typical post installations are shown in Figure 5-97 and Figure 5-98.
Reflector color shall conform to the color of the adjacent striped edge line. Section 3F.03 of the MUTCD states that
delineators on the left-hand side of a two-way roadway shall be white. When a guidepost is installed on exit ramps,
these shall have red reflective sheeting installed on the back of flexible guide posts and conform to Type XI as
specified in ASTM D4956 and a red cat eye reflectors installed on the back of rigid guide posts.
Figure 5-96. Rigid Post Delineator Details
Two types of reflectors are used on guideposts. Based on the type of post used (rigid or flexible), these are:
•
Type 1 Reflectors: To be used at ramps, due to the change in horizontal alignment. Type 1 reflectors consist
of one piece of 3” x 8” white or yellow Type XI retroreflective element. See Figure 5-99.
Figure 5-98. Type 1 Reflectors
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, DM-1
Figure 5-97. Flexible Post Delineator Details
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, DM-1
•
Type 2 Reflectors: To be used at approaches and acceleration/deceleration lanes. All approaches shall be
delineated with white Type 2 guideposts at the beginning and ending limits of the approaches. Type 4 and
Type 5 approaches will have an additional guidepost at each taper setback. See Figure 5-100.It is
recommended, but not required, to place a red retro-reflective button or strip on the back of the delineators.
Figure 5-99. Type 2 Reflectors
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, DM-1
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, DM-1
5-44
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
Guideposts Installation (Spacing)
•
Acceleration/deceleration lanes and ramps: spacing shall be 100 feet maximum for tangents and curves.
Guidepost installation will depend on factors such as roadway configuration, operating speed, and island or curb
presence, among other things. NDOT Standard Plans, DM-1, provides the following spacing guidelines:
•
Truck escape ramps: spacing shall be 50 feet.
•
Islands, curbs, and shoulder dikes: spacing shall be 20 feet minimum to 50 feet maximum.
•
Tangent sections and curves with radii greater than 10,000 feet: spacing shall be 400 feet on both sides of the
roadway.
•
Curves with radii of 10,000 feet or less: spacing shall be 20 feet minimum to 300 feet maximum.
o
Distance shall be measured along the center line of the roadway and projected perpendicularly across to
the inside and outside of the curve.
o
Guideposts shall be placed at the beginning and end of the curve, with spacing transitioned within the
tangent as shown in Table 5-18. “1st” indicates guidepost nearest curve, “3rd” is guidepost farthest away.
o
Spacing within curve as shown in Table 5-18.
If normal spacing is interrupted by features such as driveways, approaches, etc., the delineators may be moved a
maximum ¼ of normal spacing. Delineators falling within such features shall be eliminated.
Guardrail Reflectors
Guardrail reflectors consist of post mounted reflectors installed behind the face of the guardrail at spacings
determined by the radius of the curve. The proposed reflector post type (flexible or rigid) may be specified in the
contract. Reflectors shall be omitted on the flared sections of a guardrail. All reflectors shall be selected and installed
pursuant to the project plans and specifications or at the direction of the Engineer. For more information on reflectors,
including spacing, see NDOT Standard Plans, DM-2.
Table 5-18. Guidepost Spacing on Horizontal Curves
Based on the radius of the curve, 72-inch by 4-inch reflective markings may be needed along the face of guardrail
(outside of the radius from P.C to the P.T), as shown in NDOT Standard Plans, DM-5. These markings help with
visibility along the curve. Markings shall be omitted for radius of curve greater than 1,250-feet.
Maximum Spacing for Guideposts on Horizontal Curves Less than or Equal to 10.000’
Spacing in Advance of and Beyond Curve
Radius of Curve,
R
Spacing on Curve,
S
1st
2nd
3rd
50
20
40
60
120
150
30
60
90
180
200
35
70
105
210
250
40
80
120
240
300
50
100
150
300
400
55
110
165
300
500
65
130
195
300
600
70
140
210
300
700
75
150
225
300
800
80
160
240
300
900
85
170
255
300
1,000
90
180
270
300
1,200
100
200
300
300
1,400
110
220
300
300
1,600
120
240
300
300
1,800
125
250
300
300
2,000
130
260
300
300
2,500
150
300
300
300
3,000
165
300
300
300
5,000
210
300
300
300
10,000
300
300
300
300
Barrier Rail Reflectors
Barrier rail reflectors consist of reflective tabs installed on top of the barrier rail at spacings determined by the radius
of the curve. These reflective tabs shall be mounted at the angle specified by the manufacturer or as directed by the
Engineer. Reflector tabs shall be selected and installed pursuant to the project plans and specifications or at the
direction of the Engineer. For more information on reflector tabs, including spacing, see NDOT Standard Plans, DM-2.
Based on the radius of the curve, 72-inch by 4-inch reflective markings may be needed along the face of the barrier
rail (outside of the radius from P.C to the P.T), as shown in NDOT Standard Plans, DM-5. These markings help with
visibility along the curve. Markings shall be omitted for radius of curve greater than 1,250-feet.
Delineators for Median Crossover
Type 2 Modified Object Markers are used for delineation on median crossovers. See Sections 4.4.3 and 4.4.16 of this
guide for delineation details and placement (along with signing).
5.4.21. Pavement Markings for Connected and Autonomous Vehicles
NDOT is leveraging emerging technologies such as Connected and Autonomous Vehicles (CAV) to ensure the best
investments are made for the mobility and safety of its residents—keeping all of Nevada safe and connected.
Improvements to striping can complement CAVs by providing more durable materials, as well as 6” width for
increased machine detection.
Autonomous Vehicles (AVs) use information from radar, laser light, global positioning systems (GPS), odometry, and
computer vision to detect their surroundings. The vehicles can “sense” the road and everything around them. These
vehicles operate in isolation from other vehicles.
Connected Vehicles (CVs) communicate and share vital transportation information to other vehicles, roads, and
infrastructure. Communications systems provide a 360-degree awareness of nearby vehicles, connecting the vehicle
to its surroundings. These vehicles are not autonomous. A Connected and Autonomous Vehicle (CAV) leverages a
combination of on-vehicle sensors and connectivity with other vehicles and infrastructure.
As technology on CAVs keep progressing, so will the environment to make the technology work. According to
FHWA’s Synthesis of Pavement Marking Research (2015), vehicle manufacturers such as General Motors have
reported that pavement markings are one of the most significant infrastructure elements needed to guide AVs and
realize the estimated safety benefits of such vehicles (see Figure 5-102). This research also mentions the increased
interest in adding more technology to markings to increase their usefulness, such as magnetic markings or markings
with Quick Response (QR) codes or radio frequency identification (RFID) tags. Vehicles could read these enhanced
Note: Spacing for specific radii not shown may be interpolated from the Table 5-10 values or computed from the formula S = 3*(R50)^0.5. S refers to the delineator spacing, and R refers to the radius of the curvature. The minimum spacing should be 20 feet.
The maximum spacing on curves should not exceed 300 feet. In advance of and beyond a curve and measured proceeding away
from the end point of the curve, the spacing of the first delineator is 2S. The second is 3S, and the third is 6S; but in no case to
exceed 300 feet.
5-45
SECTION 5. STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKERS
markings and compute safe speeds for the specific vehicle and specific roadway conditions (as opposed to one
advisory speed that does not adapt to vehicles or roadway conditions).
Figure 5-100. CAV Connectivity to Pavement Markings Illustration
Source: ATSSA Policy on Road Markings for Machine Vision Systems for Operation of ADS, Website: https://www.reflectivesystems.com/atssa-policy-on-road-markings-for-machine-vision-systems-for-operation-of-adas/
5-46
This page intentionally left blank.
5-47
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
6.1.
General
(and included in the Scoping Meeting Report). The summary should also be updated and/or expanded on during the
Traffic Control meeting.
Temporary Traffic Control (TTC) is necessary any time the normal function of a road open to the public is impacted
because of construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and incidents. The main purpose of TC is to provide
safe movements for road users through the work zone areas, while protecting any worker, flagger, pilot vehicle, and
equipment within the work zone. TTC must accommodate all road users, which consist of motorists, transit, bicyclists,
and pedestrians. Uniformity in the design of a work zone TTC plan facilitates efficient traffic operations and reduces
the potential for driver confusion and incidents. This uniformity is accomplished through use of applicable design
standards, including those found within:
A traffic control meeting with Roadway Design Division, Construction, Traffic (SLI and SSTC) and Specification
Representatives will be scheduled between 60% and 90% design to develop the Limitations of Operations, Liquidated
Damages, Accommodations for Public Traffic, and the TTC Plan. The limitations of operations, liquidated damages,
and accommodations for public traffic imposed on projects will aid in establishing the types of TTC measures that will
need to be included in the bid documents. The design team will meet to determine constraints and requirements
necessary for the TTC plan and specifications. Following are the TTC design milestones:
•
Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)
Preliminary Review 30%—Concept plans submitted in full size plots.
•
Current edition of the Nevada Department of Transportation (NDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction
•
Current edition of NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction
Intermediate Review (60%)—Proposed TTCP requirements include: Phasing and staging diagram, traffic control
matrix, draft TMP, TTCP, detours, construction access and staging areas, temporary signal system and temporary
pavement details (as needed), specifications, and cost estimate.
•
Latest edition of the Transportation Research Board (TRB) National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(NCHRP) Report 581: Design of Construction Work Zones on High-Speed Highways
This section contains discussions, illustrations, and examples of the design elements that are necessary to develop
effective TTC design.
QA/QC Review (100%)—Proposed TTCPs reflect changes and updates to Intermediate (60%) Submittal. Quantities
are updated in plans and estimate (especially 108.04-limitations of operation). Plans shall include Phasing and
staging diagram, traffic control matrix, final TMP, TTCPs, detours, temporary traffic signals and temporary pavement
plan (as needed), specifications, and cost estimate.
These guidelines are intended for engineers, field technicians, field supervisors, and reviewers.
PS&E—Final submittal includes complete set of contract documents ready for construction.
In addition to the information contained in this section, there are several standard references that may prove valuable
to the TC engineer and designer. These references are listed in Section 1.6, References.
6.1.2.
PIO Notification for Signing
The sign designer will email the PIO office around 90% QAQC timeframe giving them basic project information so
they will be aware of what projects are upcoming. For most projects the PIO input will be social media and regular
media releases, but other projects may require more (especially large complex high traffic impact/high profile projects
or projects that will modify normal driver behavior like adding stop sign or traffic signals) and, and they can give more
input if they know ahead of time. The current PIO contacts are Meg Ragonese – D2 and Tony Illia D1. For D3 there is
not a specific PIO officer so please email both Meg and Tony.
Frequently used terms are defined as follows:
Maintenance of Traffic (MOT) is the framework in which to plan, design, and execute construction sequencing while
maintaining traffic through the work zone.
Temporary Traffic Control (TTC) includes all items necessary to regulate, guide, and provide information to road
users so they can safely travel through a work zone. TTC items include temporary parts of a work zone, such as:
signing, lighting, pavement markings, signals, warning signals, rumble strips, and devices.
6.1.3.
Project Scoping
A project’s scope is defined as a set of design parameters that satisfy the purpose and need of the project. A scope
that is broader than the purpose and need will result in an unnecessarily high project budget and extended schedule,
while a scope that falls short will yield plans that do not adequately mitigate project risk, which could impact cost
and/or the public. Therefore, a careful, multidisciplinary examination of the purpose and need will produce a solid
foundation upon which project development can occur.
Transportation Management Plan (TMP) is a project-specific plan, coordinated by design and construction
professionals, to identify implementation strategies in which to appropriately maintain and monitor traffic through
phased construction.
Construction Phasing is a balance between effective traffic management and efficient construction by sequencing
critical construction elements while maintaining safe work zones.
During initial scoping, the client should review and update the checklist presented in Appendix C of NDOT Work Zone
Safety & Mobility Implementation Guide and consider the following information, so potential changes to the project
scope can be dealt with as they emerge. This will allow the scope, represented by the preliminary plan, to be as
accurate as possible.
Work Zone is a shared space in which construction and the public coexist.
Temporary Traffic Control Plans (TTCPs) are comprehensive, strategic, and coordinated design plans prepared to
address changes in traffic patterns throughout phased construction.
•
In what way will the project affect existing traffic?
•
6.1.1.
Will road closures, detours, flaggers, and/or lane closures be needed?
•
Will the project cause traffic to be affected in a short-term or long-term manner?
•
What type of devices will be needed to guide traffic through the work-zone?
•
Are there time restrictions for work zone-related traffic pattern modifications?
•
What are the major project risks and how will these impact construction and maintenance of traffic?
Project Coordination Meetings
Early in the project, a preliminary design field survey will be performed. The maintenance of traffic summary shall be
completed to identify any existing barriers that may impact safety and mobility during construction. Barriers could
include locations that may require further study and coordination, creative management, design or construction
approaches, or increased right-of-way or construction costs. Any barriers will be presented at the Scoping Meeting
6-1
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
•
Transportation Management Plan
Are smart work zones necessary to improve traffic operations?
A TMP is a document that lays out a set of coordinated transportation management strategies and describes how they
will be used to manage the work zone impacts. A TMP is required on all projects and may be comprised of one or
more of the following elements:
The items above are not exhaustive, but they can be used as a starting point. From a design perspective, these items
are for information only and do not fall under the purview of a designer or engineer. Typically, these items are
considered by the Project Manager and the Principal Traffic Operations Engineer.
6.2.
Design Criteria and Standards
6.2.1.
Regulations, Codes, and Jurisdictional Policies
All TTC plans, materials, and workmanship must conform to the current standards established by:
•
TTC Plan
•
Transportation Operations (TO) Strategies
•
Public Information (PI) strategies
These elements are integrated into a single document that demonstrates an understanding of site-specific issues and
project requirements. TMPs are living documents and provide for updates and revisions throughout the project
lifecycle to address issues as they occur. For additional information on TMPs, see the latest edition of NDOT’s Work
Zone Safety & Mobility Implementation Guide”.
•
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
•
FHWA Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
•
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) A Policy on Geometric Design
of Highways and Streets (the “Green Book”)
•
AASHTO Roadside Design Guide
•
TRB Highway Capacity Manual: A Guide for Multimodal Mobility Analysis (HCM),
•
TRB NCHRP Report 581: Design of Construction Work Zones on High-Speed Highways
•
TRB NCHRP Report 350: Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway
Features, crashworthiness information
•
TRB Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH): An Update to NCHRP 350
•
NDOT Work Zone Safety & Mobility Implementation Guide
•
NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction
•
NDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
TTC Design Criteria
•
NDOT Qualified Products List (QPL)
The following is typical TTC design criteria:
•
NDOT Roadside Design Guide
•
Local ordinances or maintaining agency requirements that may apply
6.2.2.
TTC Plan Delivery
Lump Sum: Contractor provides a TTC Plan according to the parameters set by the Department in the project’s
special provisions. Typically, any aspects of the PI and TO Strategies are included in the specs and the Department
will develop those portions of the TMP. The TTC plan is provided by the contractor for approval by the Resident
Engineer (RE).
Lump Sum “Hybrid Method”: In addition to Lump Sum deliverable, the Department will provide various reference
documents that can include traffic control matrix, phasing diagram, and/or phases and stages that were anticipated
during development of the TTC concept.
Design-Build (DB): Design-Builder shall design and construct the Project in accordance with the applicable
requirements of the contract documents. The DB will and provide a TMP as part of the Project Management Plan in
accordance with the latest edition of NDOT’s Work Zone Safety and Mobility Implementation Guide.
1. Operating speed
2. Design vehicle (for turning movements)
Design Expectations
3. Number of lanes
4. Lane width
NDOT’s Work Zone Safety & Mobility Implementation Guide provides detail on the steps to follow for projects where
public roadway is involved. The first step for any proposed roadway project will be to determine if the project is
Significant or Non-Significant. The significance of a project is determined by the project’s characteristics, judged
against the minimum criteria required. The determination significance will help determine the needed mitigation of
work zone impacts that should be considered. Whether defined as Significant or Non-Significant, a TMP will have to
be completed for all projects having a work zone, unless classified as exempt.
5. Shoulder width
6. Construction access, including haul routes and construction staging areas
7. Decision sight distance or stopping sight distance
8. Elevation difference—difference between existing conditions and new improvements
The significance of a project will be determined by factors such as:
9. Slope—drainage
•
Project location
10. Work zone protection
•
Project duration
•
Annual Average Daily Traffic (AADT)
TTC Design Process Considerations
•
Lane closures
•
Delays
•
Qualitative characteristics of the project
The following are typical considerations when establishing TC concepts and plan:
1. Work zone safety
2. Stakeholders—emergency response agencies, traffic management center (TMC), jurisdictional
agencies, Traffic Incident Management (TIM)
6-2
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
3. Duration of work
•
Brush control/mulching (roadside), vegetation spraying (roadside)
4. Length of work zone
•
Litter removal, sweeping/debris removal
5. Traffic operations—signal timing, peak hour volumes during construction hours, storage lanes and
turning movements, speed harmonizing, queue warning, dynamic lane merging, dynamic ramp metering
•
Fence repair, erosion control
•
Drainage structure repair, ditch repair
•
Brine/snow removal, mowing
6. ITS technologies, flow detectors, closed-circuit television (CCTV), ramp meters
7. Other Active Traffic Management (ATM) technologies—highway advisory radio, wrong way detection,
connected vehicles (navigational guidance disruption for trailing vehicles not equipped with vehicle-toroadside communication systems)
For additional information on Exempt Projects, see the latest edition of NDOT’s Work Zone Safety & Mobility
Implementation Guide.
8. Adjacent projects—multiple construction projects within close proximity function as one big work zone
TMP Development Process
9. Complexity of construction phasing
The flow diagram in Figure 6-1 will facilitate the determination of the type of TMP to develop:
10. Constraints—narrow/no shoulder, emergency pullouts, emergency responders’ access
11. Existing risks that will be aggravated further with road construction
Figure 6-1. Transportation Management Plan (TMP) Type Flowchart
12. Major traffic generators—major community events
13. Availability of alternate routes
14. Drainage with respect to construction staging
15. Extreme weather—wind and flooding in southern Nevada
16. Utility adjustments—overhead power lines or other utilities in conflict with construction
17. Pedestrian/bicycle access
18. Local businesses or institutions impacted by work zone(s)
19. Paving material: asphalt concrete (AC) vs. Portland cement concrete (PCC)—timeline
20. Additional mapping to accommodate traffic control beyond project limits; existing pavement markings
that need to be removed beyond project limits to accommodate TC
21. ROW acquisition and/or temporary or construction easements
22. Guide signing
23. Construction notifications
Significant Projects
For a Significant Project, additional mitigation strategies should be implemented to reduce congestion and improve
safety within the work zone. When a project is classified as Significant, a high level of work zone impact mitigation is
required. As part of TMP strategies, a Significant Project will require Temporary Traffic Control (TTC) Strategies,
Transportation Operation (TO) Strategies, and Public Information (PI) Strategies. For additional information on
Significant Projects, see NDOT’s latest edition of the Work Zone Safety & Mobility Implementation Guide.
6.2.3.
Non-Significant Projects—Intermediate Project or Basic Project
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
The MUTCD has been administered by FHWA since 1971 and is the national standard for all Traffic Control devices,
which includes roadway pavement markings, highway and roadway signs, temporary traffic control, and traffic signals.
The MUTCD is recognized as the national standard for all traffic control devices installed on any street, highway,
bikeway, or private road open to public travel. This section of the MUTCD includes information related to the function
and purpose of temporary traffic control, standardized applications of TC, and design standards. Part 6 of the MUTCD
has detailed TTC requirements divided into the following Chapters:
Non-Significant projects requires fewer mitigation strategies than a Significant project. With a Non-Significant project,
the TMP planning and coordination will not be at the same level as a Significant Project and may only require one or
more TMP strategies beyond the basic TTC plan. Sometimes, a TTC plan will be the only requirement.
For additional information on Non-Significant Projects, see the latest edition of NDOT’s Work Zone Safety & Mobility
Implementation Guide.
•
Exempt Activities
Chapter 6A: General
•
Chapter 6B: Fundamental Principles
Some maintenance activities will not require a TMP and are considered exempt. This category applies to the following
maintenance activities:
•
Chapter 6C: Temporary Traffic Control Elements
•
Chapter 6D: Pedestrian and Worker Safety
6-3
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
•
Chapter 6E: Flagger Control
•
Chapter 6F: Temporary Traffic Control Zone Devices
•
Chapter 6G: Type of Temporary Traffic Control Zone Activities
•
Chapter 6H: Typical Applications
•
Chapter 6I: Control of Traffic Through Traffic Incident Management Areas
Existing speed limits shall remain in effect through the work zone on state highways except where the work zone
activities would create a condition where safety is compromised if existing speed limit is retained.
Some conditions that may justify a speed reduction include:
Reduced lane widths
•
Reduction in the number of lanes and/or shifting lanes
•
Uneven surfaces
•
Temporary surfaces such as roadbed modifications, cement treated bases, chip seals, etc.
6.3.1.
Temporary Traffic Control Goals
Road user (public) and worker safety are essential aspects for any type of roadway work, such as highway
construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and/or management of traffic incidents. A TTC design is needed for
such occasions. Work zone safety is achieved by:
Speed Reductions
•
Fundamental Principles of Temporary Traffic Control
Work Zone Safety
The MUTCD is a federally accepted guideline; however, engineering judgement or studies also should be considered.
Sign applications for temporary traffic control on roadway geometric designs should be coordinated with NDOT Traffic
Operations to effectively place signs that provide the road user with essential regulatory information, warning,
guidance, or other pertinent information provided by signs.
6.2.4.
6.3.
•
Providing safe work zone design by using protective measures where possible and practical
•
Providing safe work zone design by using the same basic safety principles used to design permanent
roadways
•
Using available intelligent transportation systems (ITS) and enforcement strategies to enhance safety
•
Employing incident management strategies during design and construction
•
Conducting investigations on work zone crashes and implementing improvements where appropriate
•
Following guidelines for speed limit reductions in work zones
•
Providing a continuous, safe working environment by monitoring and maintaining work zone devices during
construction
•
Providing public information for work zones
Project Efficiency and Mobility During Construction
Section 6B.01 of the MUTCD states that plans and coordination with transit and highway agencies, law enforcement,
and other emergency units, utilities, schools, and railroad companies might be needed to reduce unexpected and
unusual road user operation situations. In some cases, during TTC activities, commercial vehicles might need to use
different routes than passenger vehicles following roadwork changes.
Projects with an existing speed limit greater than 55 miles per hour (mph) may be temporarily reduced by 10 mph or
to 55 mph, whichever is lower. If approved, the limits and operational benefits of the temporary reduced speed limit
will be incorporated into the TMP.
Reducing the regulatory speed on state highways lower than 55 mph requires approval of the Chief Traffic Operations
Engineer (CTOE) and Executive Leadership Team (ELT). Any temporary speed reductions that result in a speed
greater than or equal to 55 mph requires approval from the CTOE. A speed reduction request describing this change
should be made by email to the Principal SSTC engineer. The email should include the following sections: project
description, reduction limits, project limitations, justification for the reduction, mitigations, and the TMP Team. The
email should also include a completed speed reduction form (see Appendix A for Speed Reduction Form). A
recommendation describing this change should be forwarded by Traffic Operations to the Director’s Office for
approval.
Mobility and access through a work zone can be achieved by:
The temporary regulatory speed limit should not be left in effect beyond the daily hours of operations unless the
conditions for which the speed reduction was implemented continues to exist, or channelizing devices are required to
route traffic though the work zone area.
•
Considering innovative technologies, including ITS, for advancement of mobility in work zones
•
Considering all possible alternatives to minimize work zone delay and perpetuate traffic flow
•
Maintaining bicycle, pedestrian, and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) access through and around work
zones
Economical and Timely Delivery of a Project
Effective TTC design is a key element for an economical and timely delivery of a project. Key points for a project
economical and timely delivery are:
All device spacing shall be designed based on work zone speed. Regulatory speed limit signs shall be covered when
reduced speed limits are in effect. Additional regulatory speed limit signs shall be installed at the end of the work zone
to inform motorists to resume the normal speed.
•
Work zone impacts during design shall be considered by the development of TMPs.
•
Innovative technologies and techniques shall be used when appropriate to accelerate project construction.
•
Work zone activities and operations shall be coordinated with public agencies and other stakeholders.
TTC design will be required to implement speed limit reduction strategies such as speed feedback signage, lane
narrowing signs, flashing beacons, smarter work zone system elements, temporary rumble strips, and/or changeable
message signs.
Continuously Assess and Improve Work Zone Strategies, Practices, and Procedures
For more information, see NDOT’s Work Zone Safety and Mobility Implementation Guide latest edition.
Work zone strategies, practices, and procedures can be assessed and improved by:
6-4
•
Evaluating, documenting, and implementing successes via work zone inspections, crash data, and
performance monitoring of work zone impact management strategies
•
Providing and disseminating essential TTC design and operations information to TTC professionals
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Providing work zone personnel with training commensurate with their level of responsibility
•
Item#
UOM
SPCL
Description
6240260
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (HYDRAULIC CRANE)
6240270
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (TRANSPORT TRUCK)
6240280
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (DUMP TRUCK)
6240290
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (BUCKET TRUCK)
TTCPs are prepared for the management of traffic through a work zone. They shall follow NDOT and federal
standards and guidance for the layout and placement of traffic control devices, signs, and related equipment for the
project. The degree of detail in the TTCPs depends on the project complexity and traffic interference with construction
activity.
6240300
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (WATER TRUCK)
6240310
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (PICKUP TRUCK)
6240320
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (PNEUMATIC TIRED ROLLER)
TTCPs shall contain a summary of quantities for signs/devices, bid items list, general notes, project location, work
matrix, plan phasing, detours (when applicable), temporary signal details (when applicable), and temporary pavement
details.
6240350
LINFT
RENT EQUIPMENT (TAMPING ROLLER)
6240360
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (VIBRATORY ROLLER)
6240370
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (STEEL WHEELED ROLLER)
6240380
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (RUBBER TIRED ROLLER)
6240390
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (SHEEPSFOOT ROLLER)
6240400
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (ELEVATING SCRAPER)
6240410
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (WHEEL TRACTOR, UTILITY)
6240420
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (BACKHOE)
6240430
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (SKID LOADER WITH 6-INCH DIA. AUGER)
6240440
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (SWEEPER)
A TTC Supervisor and Uniformed TTC Officer are required on all projects. Itemized TC will use bid items, however
Lump sum TC delivery, or Hybrid Lump Sum delivery will use 6250490 for all TC bid items except 6240130 and
6270140 for Uniformed Traffic Control Officer and Traffic Control Supervisor. If using lump sum traffic control instead
of itemized bid items use 6250490 along with 6240130 and 6270140.
6240450
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (CRANE)
6240460
EACH
RENT EQUIPMENT (PROFILOGRAPH)*
6240470
EACH
RENT EQUIPMENT (ASPHALT CONTENT TESTER)
6240480
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR)
Table 6-1. TTC Bid Items
6240490
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (COMPRESSOR)
6240500
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (JACK HAMMER)
6240510
MONTH
SPECIAL
RENT EQUIPMENT (MOBILE OFFICE SPACE)
6240520
LS
SPECIAL
RENT EQUIPMENT (SURVEY EQUIPMENT)
6240530
MONTH
SPECIAL
RENT EQUIPMENT (OFFICE SPACE)
6240532
FA
SPECIAL
TOWING SERVICE
6240534
FA
SPECIAL
TRAFFIC INCIDENT RESPONSE
6250050
DAY
6.4.
Temporary Traffic Control
6.4.1.
Temporary Traffic Control Plans
See Chapter 8: Plan Preparation from NDOT Design Manual for more information.
Bid Items
Table 6-1 provides a list of TTC Bid Items. Refer to Section 624 of the latest edition of NDOT Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction for more information on accommodation of public traffic-related bid items. Section
625 includes information related to traffic control devices. Sections 635 and 636 provide information related to
temporary striping.
Item#
UOM
SPCL
Description
2021290
LINFT
REMOVE PAINTED TRAFFIC LINE
6231580
LS
TEMPORARY OVERHEAD SIGNAL SYSTEM
6240100
FA
DETOURS
6240110
HR
FLAGGER
6240120
FA
FLAGGER
6240130
FA
6270140
DAY
TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR
6240150
HOUR
PILOT CAR
6240160
FA
SPECIAL
MAINTAIN BASE
6240170
FA
SPECIAL
MAINTAIN SURFACE
6240180
FA
SPECIAL
MAINTAIN HAUL ROAD
6240190
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (MOTOR GRADER)
6240200
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (GRADALL)
6240210
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (TRACTOR CRAWLER WITH SCRAPER)
6240220
HOUR
6240230
HOUR
6240240
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (RUBBER-TIRED TRACTOR WITH SCRAPER)
RENT EQUIPMENT (TRACTOR CRAWLER WITH DOZER AND/OR
RIPPER)
RENT EQUIPMENT (LOADER)
6240250
HOUR
RENT EQUIPMENT (SPECIAL LOADER)
SPECIAL
UNIFORMED TRAFFIC CONTROL OFFICER
6-5
RENT TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICE MAINTENANCE
6250100
LINFT
6250110
EACH
SPECIAL
RENT CONSTRUCTION BARRICADES (TYPE I)
6250120
LINFT
6250130
EACH
RENT CONSTRUCTION BARRICADES (TYPE IIIB)
6250140
EACH
RENT TRAFFIC CONES
6250150
EACH
RENT FLASHING BEACONS
6250160
EACH
RENT TRAFFIC DELINEATORS
6250170
EACH
RENT BARRICADE WARNING LIGHTS (TYPE A)
RENT CONSTRUCTION BARRICADES (TYPE II)
SPECIAL
RENT CONSTRUCTION BARRICADES (TYPE IIIA)
6250180
EACH
RENT BARRICADE WARNING LIGHTS (TYPE B)
6250190
EACH
RENT BARRICADE WARNING LIGHTS (TYPE C)
6250200
EACH
RENT HIGH LEVEL FLASHING BEACONS
6250210
EACH
SPECIAL
RENT CONSTRUCTION LIGHTS
6250220
EACH
SPECIAL
RENT PORTABLE OVERHEAD LIGHT
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Item#
UOM
SPCL
Description
Item#
UOM
SPCL
Description
6250230
EACH
RENT CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
6350190
LINFT
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (8-INCH WIDTH)
6250240
DAY
RENT CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
6350200
MILE
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (8-INCH WIDTH)
6250241
EACH
RENT CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN, TYPE 1
6350210
LINFT
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (12-INCH WIDTH)
6250244
EACH
RENT PORTABLE TRAFFIC SENSOR
6350220
MILE
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (12-INCH WIDTH)
6250250
EACH
RENT ARROW BOARD (TYPE A)
6350230
LINFT
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (24-INCH WIDTH)
6250260
EACH
RENT ARROW BOARD (TYPE B)
6350240
LINFT
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (BROKEN)
6250270
EACH
RENT ARROW BOARD (TYPE C)
6350250
LINFT
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (SOLID)
6250280
EACH
RENT TRAFFIC CONES (ILLUMINATED)
6350260
LINFT
6250290
EACH
RENT CONSTRUCTION SIGN LIGHTS
6250300
EACH
RENT BARRIER MARKER DRUM
6350270
LINFT
6250310
EACH
RENT TRAFFIC DRUMS
6350280
LINFT
6250320
EACH
RENT TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEM
6350290
SQFT
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (SOLID WHITE)
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (BROKEN YELLOW
W/SOLID YELLOW)
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (DOUBLE SOLID
YELLOW)
TYPE 1 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (VARIES)
6250330
EACH
RENT VERTICAL PANELS
6350300
LINFT
TYPE 2 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE
6250340
EACH
RENT SPECIAL VERTICAL PANEL
6350310
STA
TYPE 2 TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (PILOT LINE)
6250350
DAY
RENT TRUCK-MOUNTED IMPACT ATTENUATOR
6360100
LINFT
REFLECTIVE LIQUID
6250360
EACH
RENT TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR
6360110
POUND
TRAFFIC BEADS
6250420
EACH
RENT TRUCK-MOUNTED IMPACT ATTENUATOR
6360120
LINFT
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (DOTTED WHITE)
6250430
EACH
RENT SPECIAL GUIDE POST (POSTS ONLY)
6360130
MILE
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (DOTTED WHITE)
6250440
EACH
RENT SPECIAL GUIDE POST (BASES ONLY)
6360140
MILE
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (6-INCH WHITE)
6250450
EACH
RENT SPECIAL GUIDE POST (POSTS AND BASES)
6360150
LINFT
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (8-INCH DOTTED WHITE)
6250460
EACH
RENT BARRIER TRANSFER AND TRANSPORT MACHINE
6360160
LINFT
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (BROKEN WHITE)
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (BROKEN WHITE)
SPECIAL
6250470
EACH
RENT TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
6360170
MILE
6250480
EACH
RENT OVERHEIGHT VEHICLE DETECTOR
6360180
LINFT
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (SOLID WHITE)
6250490
LS
RENT TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
6360190
MILE
TYPE I TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (4-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6250500
SQFT
RENT CONSTRUCTION SIGNS
6360200
LINFT
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (8-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6250510
LINFT
RENT PORTABLE PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL
6360210
MILE
TYPE I TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (8-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6250520
LINFT
RENT LIGHTED GUIDANCE SYSTEM
6360220
LINFT
TYPE I TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (12-INCH SOLID WHITE)
6250530
LINFT
RENT TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SCREEN
6360230
LINFT
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (8-INCH DOTTED YELLOW)
6250540
LINFT
RENT WATER FILLED BARRIER
6360240
MILE
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (BROKEN YELLOW)
6250550
SQFT
CONSTRUCTION SIGNS (STATE FURNISHED)
6360250
LINFT
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (SOLID YELLOW)
6250560
EACH
SPECIAL
RENT PORTABLE TRANSVERSE RUMBLE STRIP
6360260
MILE
TYPE I TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (4-INCH SOLID YELLOW)
6250570
EACH
SPECIAL
WORK ZONE VEHICLE DETECTOR (STATE FURNISHED)
6360270
MILE
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (8-INCH SOLID YELLOW)
6250600
EACH
SPECIAL
RENT DRIVER FEEDBACK SIGN
6360280
LINFT
6350100
EACH
TEMPORARY ARROWS
6350110
LINFT
TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE
6360290
LINFT
6350120
LINFT
TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (6-INCH WIDTH)
6360300
MILE
6350130
LINFT
TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (8-INCH WIDTH)
6360310
LINFT
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (12-INCH SOLID YELLOW)
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (BROKEN YELLOW W/SOLID
YELLOW)
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (BROKEN YELLOW W/SOLID
YELLOW)
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (DOUBLE SOLID YELLOW)
6350140
LINFT
TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (12-INCH WIDTH)
6360320
MILE
6350150
STA
TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (PILOT LINE)
6350160
STA
TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (PILOT LINE - 15 FOOT SPACING)
6350170
STA
TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (PILOT LINE - 25 FOOT SPACING)
6350180
STA
TEMPORARY STRIPING TAPE (PILOT LINE - 50 FOOT SPACING)
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (DOUBLE SOLID YELLOW)
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (6-INCH DOUBLE SOLID
6360330
MILE
YELLOW)
6360340
SQFT
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (VARIES)
SPECIAL: additional write-up will be needed. It is not covered by the Standard Specifications.
6-6
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
6.4.2.
Temporary Traffic Control Zones
Figure 6-2. Typical TTC Zone Areas
A TTC zone is an area of highway where road user conditions are changed; therefore, measures must be taken to
facilitate road user traffic. Per Section 6C.02 of the MUTCD, changes in road user conditions that warrant TTC zones
are:
•
Work Zone: Area of a highway with construction, maintenance, or utility work activities. A work zone typically
is marked by signs, channelizing devices, barriers, pavement markings, and/or work vehicles. Work zones
extend from the first warning sign or high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights on a vehicle to
the END ROAD WORK sign (G20-2) or the last TTC device.
•
Incident Zone: Area of a highway where TTC devices are imposed by authorized officials in response to a
traffic incident. It extends from the first warning device (such as a sign, light, or cone) to the last TTC device
or to a point where road users return to the original lane alignment and are clear of the incident.
•
Planned special event: Often creates the need to establish altered traffic patterns to handle the increased
traffic volumes generated by the event. The size of the TTC zone associated with a planned special event can
be small, such as closing a street for a festival, or can extend throughout a municipality for larger events. The
duration of the TTC zone is determined by the duration of the planned special event.
6.4.3.
Components of Temporary Traffic Control Zones
TTC zones mostly are divided into the following four areas:
1. Advance Warning Area: tells traffic what to expect ahead.
2. Transition Area: moves traffic out of its normal path.
3. Activity Area: area where work takes place.
4. Termination Area: lets traffic resume normal operations.
Figure 6-2 represents each TTC zone area.
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 6C-1
For more details on TTC zones, see NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction, which include a variety
of TTC methods, but do not include a layout for every conceivable work situation. Typical applications should be
altered when necessary to fit the conditions of a TTC zone.
Advance Warning Area
The advance warning area is the highway section where drivers are warned and prepared about an upcoming work
zone or incident area. The roadway speed limit shall be considered when designing an advance warning area to
provide enough driver reaction time from the point at which drivers see the advance warning (signs or high-intensity
lights on a vehicle) to safely perform any necessary maneuvers before getting to the activity zone area.
6-7
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Table 6-3. Merging Taper Length and Channelizing Device Spacing
Advance warning sign type and spacing vary according to the roadway and work zone configuration, as shown in
NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction TC-2 to TC-20. Table 6-2 is used for Nevada work zones to
determine advance sign spacing:
Speed
(mph)
Table 6-2. Advance Warning Sign Spacing
Distance Between Signs (ft)
Length for Merging Taper (L)
Lane Width
Taper and Channelization
Device Spacing (ft)
10 ft
11 ft
12 ft
20
80
80
80
20
25
125
125
125
25
Speed
(mph)
0-20
A
B
200
200
30
150
180
180
30
25-30
200
300
300
300
35
210
245
245
35
35-40
400
400
400
40
280
320
320
40
45-50
600
600
600
45
450
495
540
45
55-80
1000
1600
2640
50
500
550
600
50
55
550
605
660
55*
60
600
660
720
60*
65
650
715
780
65*
70
700
770
840
70*
75
750
825
900
75*
80
800
880
960
80*
C
Note: see Figure 6-2 for reference
Typically, distances for advance warning signs on freeways and expressways are longer since drivers are not used to
interrupted flow. Because of this, the closest sign to the TTC zone should be placed 1,000 feet or more for freeways
and expressways.
Common advance warning signs used on work zones involving lane closures are:
•
WNV 16-2: BEGIN WORK ZONE
Note: see Figure 6-2 for reference
•
W20-1: ROAD WORK AHEAD
•
W20-5 (L or R): (LEFT or RIGHT) LANE CLOSED AHEAD
*On rural interstate highways where the speed limit is 55 mph or greater, the channelization device spacing (except for tapers) may
be increased to 80 feet. When increased device spacing is used, three drums shall be placed diagonally at one-half mile
increments to indicate the lane is closed.
•
W4-2 (L or R): merge symbol
To calculate shifting taper and shoulder taper length, the following equations must be used:
Transition Area
•
The transition area is the highway section where road users must maneuver out of their normal path to travel through
a work zone area. Tapers in transition areas typically are used as a method of channelization by using a series of
channelizing devices and/or pavement markings to move traffic out of the normal path. The types of tapers found in
transition areas are:
•
Flagger taper: used during flagging operations. Department requires 100’ for taper behind flagger.
•
Merging taper: used when drivers are required to merge into common road space.
•
Shoulder taper: used on high-speed roadway where shoulders are part of the activity area and are closed or
when improved shoulders might be mistaken as a driving lane.
•
•
Where:
•
Drums
•
Temporary barrier rail
𝟏𝟏
Shoulder Taper Length (ft) = 𝑳𝑳
𝑊𝑊𝑆𝑆 2
60
𝟑𝟑
; where L = taper length (ft), W = width of lateral shift (ft) and S = speed (mph)
b) Speed limit ≥ 45 mph; 𝐿𝐿 = 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊; where L = taper length (ft), W = width of lateral shift (ft) and S = speed (mph)
If lane width reduction of less than 11 feet is required by the work zone, an evaluation shall be prepared with approval
of the Chief Road Design Engineer.
To redirect traffic on mobile work operations, vehicle-mounted traffic control devices are used such as arrow boards,
portable changeable message signs, and high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights.
For stationary transition areas, the tapered section shall be performed by using channelizing devices such as:
Cones
𝟐𝟐
a) Speed limit ≤ 40 mph: 𝐿𝐿 =
Shifting taper: used when a lateral shift in the roadway is needed.
•
𝟏𝟏
Shifting Taper Length (ft) = 𝑳𝑳
Activity Area
The activity area in a work zone is the area where the work activity takes place. It can be either stationary or may
move as work progresses. The components of an activity area are:
Details of channelizing devices are found in Section 6.4.7 of this guide.
•
Table 6-3 presents NDOT’s required merging taper length and channelizing device spacing based on the roadway
speed limit, which applies to different work zone configuration scenarios, as shown on NDOT Standard Plans for
Road and Bridge Construction TC-2 to TC-20.
Work space: area where work activities take place. It is set aside for workers, equipment, and material. Work
spaces usually are delineated for road users by channelizing devices or temporary barriers (to exclude
vehicles and pedestrians). Material cannot be stored in a work space, but can be staged.
•
Traffic space: location where traffic is allowed to pass through the activity area.
6-8
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
•
Section 3.1.3 of NCHRP Report 581 states that the capacity of the diversion generally should be close to or
equal to that of the approach roadway to avoid substantial delay, queue formation, or trip-length extension.
The geometry of the diversion and associated TTC should consider traffic characteristics on the approach
roadway.
Buffer space (longitudinal and lateral): provides protection for traffic and workers. Buffer space shall never
be used as a work activity area nor used to store equipment, vehicles, or materials.
Longitudinal buffer space length is dependent on the speed limit for the work zone area. Table 6-4 shows these
values:
6.4.4.
Table 6-4. Longitudinal Buffer Length
Speed
(mph)
20
Longitudinal Buffer Space
Length (ft)
115
25
155
30
200
35
250
40
305
45
360
50
425
55
495
60
570
65
645
70
730
75
820
80
920
These guidelines are intended to clarify which Smart Work Zone (SWZ) system(s) may be appropriate on a project.
SWZs consist of technology or a combination thereof that can be used to improve the operations within and around
the work zone. These systems can be used to collect, communicate, and archive raw data for determining
performance measures. The information can be used to reduce delays, maximize safety for contractors and motorists,
and provide real-time data to understand the traffic operations and implement necessary changes.
The existing Active Traffic Management (ATM) system sites/Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) will be used to provide
notification for all construction closures and lane shifts. SWZs or work zone ITS are useful tools to establish
communication and connect a single project and/or multiple projects within a valley, corridor, network, or region, and
possibly across multiple agency jurisdictions. It can minimize work zone traffic impacts and can be used to convey
information to drivers regarding work zone roadway conditions and use of detour routes. Construction closures and
lane shifts should involve NDOT, the Regional Transportation Commission (RTC), and local agencies to coordinate
the use of ATM sites/DMSs. Construction closure and lane shift notification displayed will come from the Freeway and
Arterial System of Transportation (FAST) message library.
Components of Smart Work Zones
SWZ components generally are designed for portable operation and are pre-engineered to work as a system linked
together. The portable design enables easy relocation during changing traffic patterns. Some of the SWZ components
include:
Termination Area
A termination area is the section downstream of the work area where road users are returned to their normal driving
path. Road users can be informed of the return to normal operations through signing such as END ROAD WORK,
Speed Limit, etc. As an option, termination areas may have:
•
Buffer space (longitudinal): located downstream of the work area.
•
Downstream taper: downstream of work area and longitudinal buffer space (if used). The downstream taper
in the termination area provides a visual cue to the driver that access is available back into the original lane or
path that was closed. Section 6C.08 of the MUTCD states that if used, a downstream taper should have a
minimum length of 50 feet and a maximum length of 100 feet with devices spaced approximately 20 feet.
Detours and Diversions
•
Changeable Message Signs (CMSs)—Shall be used to provide public notification before a major change in
roadway configuration, speed reduction, or traffic patterns.
•
DMSs—The contractor or NDOT can coordinate with RTC on the use of existing DMSs to provide notification
of construction closures and lane shifts.
•
Traffic Management Center (TMC)—is a control center for the freeway and arterial management system. It
monitors and controls the traffic flow throughout Clark County and the cities of Las Vegas, North Las Vegas,
Henderson, Boulder City, Mesquite and Laughlin.
•
Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)—Can be used if the work zone needs monitoring by the TMC, local
enforcement authorities, or the contractor. A trailer-mounted CCTV can be used to surveil and provide
situational awareness of the conditions within the work zone. CCTV images can confirm incidents and/or
identify roadway damage, debris, or cargo spills.
•
Detection Systems—Devices such as smart cones, arrow boards, and CMS can be used to improve work
zone safety and congestion. There are a variety of smart devices, some of which can provide valuable data
such as global positioning system coordinates and traffic speeds. Real-time data that can be communicated
to the public include delay times and lane closures so that travelers can make different choices.
There are times when road users must be rerouted because of a work zone. Two types of reroutes are:
•
Detour: Temporary rerouting of road users onto an existing highway to avoid a temporary traffic control zone.
Temporary signing must be installed over the entire length of the detour so that road users can easily use
existing highways to return to the original highway.
SWZ Systems
SWZ systems produce and act on information that is derived from various sources of data. Detection monitors traffic
on the approaches to and within construction work zones. Information is then presented to approaching motorists so
they can make informed decisions. The information also can be sent to the TMC or monitoring and/or archived to
measure performance and understand traffic operations. SWZ systems provide the following advantages:
Section 3.1.2 of NCHRP Report 581 states that detours should be carefully evaluated to ensure that they can
accommodate the volume and types (configuration, size, and weight) of detoured vehicles. Mitigation may
include temporary changes to TC (like signal timing and signs) and remedial pavement and bridge work.
When proposing a detour, costs to motorists due to added trip length will be evaluated.
•
Smart Work Zones
•
Diversion: Temporary rerouting of road users onto a temporary highway or alignment placed around the work
area that reconnects with the permanent infrastructure of the designated route. Construction of new,
temporary roads are needed for diversions. Diversions typically provide less traffic separation from
construction when compared to detours.
6-9
Traffic Signal Modifications and Signal Timing Changes can be coordinated with NDOT and local
agencies to maintain or improve traffic operations during construction.
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
•
•
Temporary Queue Detection System continuously monitors traffic on the approaches and within
construction work zones to detect slowed or stopped traffic. This information is displayed to allow motorist to
make informed decisions and take an alternate route.
Temporary Speed Monitoring uses sensors to measure vehicle speeds approaching the work zone. Speed
data are then presented immediately to the motorist. Driver feedback signs can be used to mitigate excessive
speeds. Reports can be generated and studied to determine the time of day experiencing high-speed and
determine measures to mitigate the potential for crashes.
•
Temporary Construction Equipment Alert delivers immediate information to motorists about construction
vehicles and equipment that are entering the highway from a work zone.
•
Temporary Travel Time Monitoring System continuously monitors travel times through a work zone, and
then presents this information in advance to approaching motorists, giving them time to make informed
decisions and take an alternate route. This system can be a valuable tool used to assess the traffic operations
in a work zone or compare speeds in the work zone to alternate routes.
•
Temporary Incident Detection System uses sensors and/or video to detect crashes and other incident
conditions within a work zone and then communicates that information to the local TMC and/or to emergency
response agencies. The alerts then are confirmed remotely using live streaming video. Reducing response
time to an incident can reduce the additional crash risks and prompt a faster return to smooth traffic flow.
•
•
Duration of use
•
Reporting methods and times
•
Integration with other systems
•
Detailed needs for TMC, emergency responders, or any other platform/partner
•
Special provisions
•
Bid quantities
6.4.5.
Pedestrian and Worker Safety
The primary function of TTC is to provide reasonably safe and efficient movement for road users through or around
TTC zones while at the same time protecting workers, emergency responders, and equipment. Improving safety and
mobility are two key performance measures in NDOT’s Strategic Plan. The following are two main considerations for
safety and mobility in a work zone:
Pedestrian and Worker Safety Considerations
•
Temporary Over-Height Warning System detects vehicles or loads that are too tall to clear physical
limitations, such as low bridges or falsework in a work zone. A warning message is activated and displayed
when approaching vehicles exceed the height limit. DMS or fixed signs with flashing beacons are triggered
instantly when any over-height vehicle is detected. The detection devices can be linked to the TMC.
Provide a safe work zone design by using positive protection measures where possible and practical. The
FHWA defines positive protection devices as containing and/or redirecting vehicles and meeting the
crashworthiness evaluation criteria contained in NCHRP Report 350.
Positive protection measures include, but are not limited to:
Design Process
Determining if a SWZ is appropriate or beneficial to propose depends on multiple factors. When designing for a SWZ,
it is important to consider the following factors:
o
Temporary portable precast concrete barrier rail (PPCBR), which will be used to separate pedestrian
traffic from the work zone and vehicular traffic. PPCBR shall be end-connected (rod and loop connection)
and anchor-pinned in accordance with NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction detail
number RB-47A and RB-47B.
o
Flared barrier rail at all upstream ends of TTC zones should include properly installed and maintained
crash cushions.
•
Stakeholders—emergency response agencies, TMC
•
Duration of work zone
•
Existing traffic operations—traffic modeling to estimate the queue
•
Existing ITS systems that can be used during the temporary condition
•
Protect work zone setup, traffic switches, and removal.
•
Adjacent projects—multiple construction projects within close proximity function as one big work zone
•
Perform work during nighttime or off-peak hours.
•
Complexity of TTC
•
Use accelerated construction techniques.
•
Heavy vehicles—disrupt the flow of travel and cause a speed differential
•
•
Constraints—narrow/no shoulder, emergency responders’ access
Provide safe work zone design by using the same safety principles that are used for permanent roadway
design.
•
Existing risks that will be aggravated further with road construction
•
Maintain bicycle, pedestrian, and ADA access through and around work zones.
•
Major traffic generators—speedway or arena
•
Availability of alternate routes
•
Review of existing drainage with respect to construction staging
•
Extreme weather—wind and flooding in southern Nevada
•
Connected vehicles—navigational guidance disruption for trailing vehicles not equipped with vehicle-toroadside communication systems
Positive protection guidelines and appropriate measures needed for a project are determined in TC meetings
between the Engineer, Roadway Design, Construction and Traffic Operations.
Design Plans
Design plans that incorporate SWZ technology shall include the following SWZ information:
•
•
Detailed location of SWZ equipment and components to be installed
6-10
o
Pedestrians should be separated from the worksite by appropriate devices that maintain the
accessibility and detectability for pedestrians with disability. The temporary facilities shall be
detectable and shall include accessibility features consistent with the features present in the existing
pedestrian facility. A continuous detectable edging should be provided throughout the length of the
facility such that it can be followed by pedestrians using long canes for guidance.
o
Bicyclists and pedestrians should not be exposed to unprotected excavations, open utility access,
overhanging equipment, or other such conditions. If a designated bicycle route is closed because of
the work being performed, a signed alternate route should be provided. Bicyclists should not be
directed onto the path used by pedestrians.
o
For more information on work affecting pedestrian and bicycle facilities, see Sections 6D and
Sections 6F.74 and 6G.05 of the MUTCD.
Enforce environmental restrictions such as noise and dust.
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
•
Avoid or mitigate temporary drainage and ponding in the work area or on pedestrian paths.
•
Employ incident management strategies during design and construction.
•
Follow guidelines for speed limit reductions in a work zone.
A Uniformed Traffic Control (UTC) officer or flagger must be present at all times during the use of a AFAD to maintain
control of the lane closure and equipment.
AFADs provide a safety enhancement to a work zone because they allow the flagger’s position to be moved away
from traffic, such as behind a guardrail, and the flagger remotely controls the flagging device.
Accessibility Considerations
•
Critical vertical clearances—any vertical clearance over the traveled way that is less than 16 feet
•
Ingress/egress, business, and ramp access
•
Entrance/exit ramps, acceleration, and deceleration lengths
•
Full road closures
•
Full or partial detours or diversions
•
Interchange speed and decision points
•
Temporary striping—number of lanes, widths, and markings; striping between TTC phases should be
completely removed without causing significant roadway scarring using approved NDOT methods. Scarred
road surface may be mistaken for striping, especially during weather events, which may misdirect motorists.
•
ITS/ATM systems for advanced mobility in work zones
•
Large vehicle accommodations
•
Emergency vehicle access
•
All possible alternatives to minimize work zone delay and perpetuate flow
6.4.6.
All AFAD applications must adhere to the MUTCD, Section 6E.04, 6E.05, and 6E06. AFADs must satisfy the
standards set in NCHRP Report 350 and the AASHTO Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware. AFADs shall only be
used in situations where there is one lane of approaching traffic that needs to be controlled.
When deciding whether to use AFADs, consider:
Flagger Control
The use of a flagger to control traffic should be considered to provide additional safety for road users and personnel
within the work zones. Flaggers are used to direct traffic within the right-of-way limits of the project, or at points where
hauling equipment enters and leaves the public traffic stream while hauling from deposits (except commercial
sources) outside or within the project limits.
Flaggers need to be certified by NDOT before working on NDOT projects. Certification shall be from an approved
NDOT flagger training.
Hand-Signaling Flagger Devices
Flaggers shall use a combination stop/slow sign paddle. The stop/slow paddle shall be at least 18 inches wide with
series “C” letters at least 6 inches high and have a rigid, fixed handle that is at least 5 feet long from the bottom of the
paddle to ground level. When used at night, the stop/slow paddle shall have Type IX or XI reflective sheeting that
conforms to the NDOT Standard Specifications in Subsection 716.03.01 for the background, letters, and borders on
the faces of the stop/slow paddles. Red flags shall be a minimum of 24 x 24 inches square and shall be securely
fastened to a staff that is approximately 36 inches long. Use of flags should be limited to emergency situations or at
low-speed and/or low-volume locations that can be best controlled by a single flagger.
Automated Flagger Assistance Devices
Automated Flagger Assistance Devices (AFADs) are remotely operated temporary traffic control devices that are used
to improve the safety of flagging operations. Automated portable traffic signals may be used to provide clarity and
improve driver compliance in TTC zones such as: temporary haul road crossings, temporary one-way operations
along a one-lane, two-way highway, temporary one-way operations on bridges, reversible lanes, and intersections.
The only type of AFAD allowable by NDOT is an automated portable traffic signal, equipped with three 12-inch faces
(red, yellow, and green) on signal head(s). These devices are intended to direct and control traffic using only one
person per device.
6-11
•
Duration of Work—AFADs typically are used for short-term or intermediate-term lane or road closures such
as bridge maintenance, haul road crossings (see Figure 6-5), guardrail repair, and pavement patching. Longterm use is discouraged. If used during nighttime operations, the AFAD must adhere to standards set in the
MUTCD, Section 6E.08.
•
Placement of AFADs—It is preferable to place the AFAD within the shoulder, but it may encroach on the
traveled lane if there is appropriate sight distance available. The arm is not to extend into the travel lane.
•
Traffic Volume—AFADs are best used at low-volume locations that can be controlled by a single flagger per
device.
•
Operational Considerations—Limit the distance to 1,000 feet between flagging stations controlled by two
AFADs or one AFAD and one flagger.
•
Lane Configuration—AFADs work best when there is only one lane of approaching traffic that needs to be
controlled.
•
Flagger Safety—AFADs are not to be used to replace trained flaggers or traffic signals but are to be used to
improve the safety of flagging operations.
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Figure 6-3. Example of the Use of a Stop/slow Automated Flagger Assistance Device (AFAD)
Figure 6-4. Example of the Use of a Red/Yellow Lens Automated Flagger Assistance Device (AFAD)
Source: MUTCD, Figure 6E-2
Source: MUTCD, Figure 6E-1
6-12
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Flagger Stations
Figure 6-5. Haul Road Crossing (TA-14)
Flagger stations shall be preceded by an advance warning sign or signs. Except in emergency situations, flagger
stations shall be illuminated at night. Flagger station placement should be located to provide safety for the flagger and
visibility for the road user. The work zone taper shall start 100 feet downstream of the flagger location. Flagger
stations shall be located to provide sufficient distance for road users to stop at the intended stopping point. Stopping
sight distances as a function of speed can be found in the following table. These distances may need to be increased
for downgrades, horizontal curves, or visibility issues.
Table 6-5. Stopping Sight Distance as a Function of Speed
Source: MUTCD, Table 6E-1
See MUTCD Section 6E, Flagger Control, for more guidance.
6.4.7.
Temporary Traffic Control Devices
TTC devices regulate, warn, or guide road users in the proximity of a work zone location. Devices and materials used
should adhere to NDOT’s Qualified Products List (QPL), which include reflective markers, portable CMSs, temporary
impact attenuators, truck-mounted impact attenuators, water-filled barrier rails, portable beacon light systems,
portable sign supports, and barricades. All Category 1 devices (e.g., cones, barrels, and delineators) shall be certified
and compliant to AASHTO’s Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH) evaluation criteria.
The types of TTC devices used for work zone include:
Source: MUTCD, Figure 6H-14
6-13
•
Signs
•
Speed feedback signs
•
Channelizing devices
•
Arrow boards
•
Changeable message signs
•
Pavement markings and raised pavement markers
•
Temporary transverse rumble strips
•
Temporary traffic barriers
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
•
Delineators
•
Temporary impact attenuators
•
Lighting devices / flashing beacons
•
Signals
border on a fluorescent pink background. Larger-than-standard-size signs should be used, with enlarged
symbol or legend where road user conditions require greater emphasis.
Supplemental plaques with a distance legend may be mounted below the TTC warning sign when distances
are not displayed on the warning sign. A plaque with the word AHEAD may be used as an alternative to a
specific distance on advance warning signs. For additional emphasis, warning lights or flags may be attached
to warning signs.
It is required by the FHWA that these TTC devices shall meet the crashworthy performance criteria contained
in NCHRP Report 350, Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway
Features.”
Figure 6-7 shows examples of TTC warning signs and plaques.
Figure 6-7. TTC Warning Sign & Plaque Examples
Reflective sheeting on TTC devices shall be kept clean. Any scratches, rips, and/or tears in the sheeting must be
repaired or otherwise be replaced. Sheeting retroreflection shall be kept at no less than 50 percent of the minimum
Coefficient of Retroreflection values required in Subsection 716.03.01 of the NDOT Standard Specifications.
TTC Signs
TTC signs are used to convey messages to road users both approaching a work zone and leaving a work zone (when
applicable). TTC signs can convey messages to road users by words, symbols, and/or arrows. Sign panels shall be
made of steel, aluminum, wood, or other approved material of a sound, durable nature. The materials will be of such
quality to perform the job for which they are intended and are subject to approval. Signs that are dirty, dull, have
flaking or peeling reflective sheeting, or are otherwise marred will have to be repaired or replaced.
For more information on TTC warning signs, see Sections 6F-16 and 6F-17 of the MUTCD.
•
Types of TTC Signs
The three categories of TTC signs used are:
•
Regulatory Signs: These signs inform road users of traffic laws or regulations and indicate the applicability
of legal requirements that would not otherwise be apparent. A public agency or official with jurisdiction shall
authorize regulatory signs.
Guide Signs: These signs are placed along highways to provide road users with information to help them
along their way through the work zone. Per Section 6F.55 of the MUTCD, guide signs used in work zones, as
needed, are:
o
Standard route markings, where temporary route changes are necessary
o
Directional signs and street name signs
o
Special guide signs relating to the condition or work being performed
If additional temporary guide signs are used in work zones, they shall have a black legend and border on an
orange background. When used for traffic incident management situations, TTC guide signs may have a
black legend and border on a fluorescent pink background.
TTC regulatory signs have a black legend and border on a white background. Red is used only for the circle
and slash or other red elements of some TTC regulatory signs.
Following Section 6F.07 of the MUTCD, if a work zone requires regulatory measures different from those in
the existing zone, the existing permanent regulatory devices shall be removed or covered and superseded by
the appropriate temporary regulatory signs. This change shall be made in compliance with applicable
ordinances or statutes of the jurisdiction.
Figure 6-8 shows examples of TTC guide signs:
Figure 6-8. TTC Guide Signs Examples
Figure 6-6 shows examples of TTC regulatory signs and plaques.
Figure 6-6. TTC Regulatory Sign & Plaque Examples
For more information on TTC guide signs, see Section 6F-55 of the MUTCD.
TTC Sign Supports
Temporary sign supports are either fixed, portable, or removable.
Fixed supports typically are used for long-term projects and shall meet the breakaway requirements for permanent
installations. These supports shall conform with NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction
requirements for ground-mounted sign supports.
For more information on TTC regulatory signs, see Sections 6F.05 to 6F.07 of the MUTCD.
•
Warning Signs: These signs notify users of specific situations or conditions on or adjacent to a roadway that
might not otherwise be apparent. These signs are placed in advance of the work zone at varying distances
depending on roadway type, condition, and posted speed.
Portable or removable types of mounting may be used for signs that are required intermittently or that are moved
frequently. The mounting shall be heavy enough not to turn over in the wind, and its base shall not be appreciably
wider than the sign. These supports shall be designed in a way that is safe if impacted by a vehicle. A typical low-level
support is the X-base design, which is mounted on metal legs as shown in Figure 6-9, below.
TTC warning signs have a black legend and border on an orange background, except for grade crossing
advance warning sign and signs that are required or recommended to have fluorescent yellow-green
backgrounds. For traffic incident management situations, TTC warning signs may have a black legend and
6-14
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Figure 6-9. Low-Level TTC Sign Support
Figure 6-10. Traffic Cone Dimensions
Source: modified NDOT Standard Plans, TC-21
Traffic Drums
Traffic drums are used commonly to channelize or delineate road user flow. They also may be used alone or in
groups to mark specific locations. In Nevada, traffic drums are used on all interstate and NHS routes.
Source: AASHTO Roadside Design Guide (2011), Figure 9-39
Traffic drums have an advantage over traffic cones because they are more visible and tend to get better road user
respect. Drums shall be constructed of lightweight, deformable materials and should not be weighted by sand, water,
or any material to the extent that would make them hazardous to road users or workers when struck.
TTC Channelizing Devices
Channelizing devices are used to warn and safely guide road users through all the components of a work zone.
Section 6F.63 of the MUTCD states that channelizing devices provide for smooth and gradual traffic flow from one
lane to another, onto a bypass or detour, or into a narrower traveled way. They also are used to channelize vehicular
traffic away from the work zone, pavement drop-offs, pedestrian or shared-use paths, or opposing directions of
vehicular traffic. When possible, devices should be set back 1 foot to 2 feet from the edge of the traffic lane.
When using drums, a certificate of compliance must be provided by the manufacturer attesting that the drums used
meet the evaluation criteria for crash tests and/or engineering analysis found in NCHRP Report 350. Warning lights
may be added to drums.
Drums shall be reflectorized with Type IV or better fluorescent orange reflective sheeting. The markings on drums
shall be horizontal, circumferential, alternating orange and white retroreflective stripes, as shown in Figure 6-11,
below.
For areas with frequent fog, snow, visual distractions, or severe roadway curvatures, warning lights may be added to
channelizing devices.
Typical channelizing devices are traffic cones, traffic drums, barricades, tubular markers, barriers, and temporary lane
separators. Below are the specifications for each of these channelizing devices.
Figure 6-11. Drum Dimensions
Vertical panel channelizing devices are not used by NDOT.
Traffic Cones
Traffic cones typically are used on roadways where speed limits are below 50 mph. Traffic cones shall not be used on
interstates or National Highway System (NHS) routes. Rolling operations, such as marking, may use cones if
approved during the TC meeting.
When using cones, a certificate of compliance must be provided by the manufacturer attesting that the cones used
meet the evaluation criteria for crash tests and/or engineering analysis found in NCHRP Report 350. Traffic cones
shall be predominantly orange and shall be made of a material that can be struck without causing any damage to the
impacting vehicle. When attachments are added to the cones, these shall comply with NCHRP Report 350 testing
criteria.
Traffic cones shall be reflectorized with Type IV or better fluorescent orange reflective sheeting. These shall have a
minimum of two orange and two white stripes, with the top stripe being orange.
Figure 6-10 presents an example of a traffic cone and dimensions as used in Nevada.
Source: modified NDOT Standard Plans, TC-21
6-15
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Barricades
Figure 6-12. Type I Barricade Dimensions
Barricades are portable or fixed devices having one to three rails with appropriate markings (stripes) used to control
road users by closing, restricting, or delineating all or a portion of the right-of-way.
The stripes on barricade rails shall be alternating orange and white retroreflective stripes sloping downward at 45degree angles in the direction road users are to pass. Section 6F.68 of the MUTCD presents the following barricade
stripe guidance:
•
Where barricades extend entirely across a roadway, the stripes should slope downward in the direction
toward which road users must turn.
•
Where both right and left turns are provided, the barricade stripes should slope downward in both directions
from the center of the barricade or barricades.
•
Where no turns are intended, the stripes should be positioned to slope downward toward the center of the
barricade or barricades.
When used in high-speed highways or areas with high winds, weighting devices may be used on barricades.
Sandbags are permitted as weighting devices, as long as a low center of gravity is maintained, as approved. The use
of rocks, asphalt or concrete pieces, construction materials, and other debris as weighting devices is prohibited.
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 6F-7
For more information on Type I barricades, see MUTCD Section 6F.68.
Barricades are classified into three categories, as follows:
2. Type II Barricades: Used where road user flow is maintained through the work zone and may be used
in a series for channelizing traffic. It is prohibited to use Type II barricades to prevent vehicle traffic from
entering a closed portion of roadway. These barricades often are used on freeways and expressways or
other high-speed roadways.
1. Type I Barricades: Used where road user flow is maintained through the work zone and may be used in a
series for channelizing traffic. It is prohibited to use Type I barricades to prevent vehicle traffic from entering a
closed portion of roadway. These barricades normally are used on conventional roads or urban streets.
Type II barricades consist of two striped rails.
Type I barricades consist of one striped rail and may contain other unstriped horizontal rails, as necessary, to
provide stability.
Table 6-7 and Figure 6-13 provide Type II barricade rail striping details and barricade dimensions.
Table 6-6 and Figure 6-12 provide Type I rail striping details and barricade dimensions.
Table 6-7. Type II Barricade Striping
Table 6-6. Type I Barricade Striping
Type II Barricade Striping
Width of
Stripes
Type I Barricade Striping
Width of
Stripes
Number of
Retroreflective
Rail Faces
Rail Length < 3’ = 4”
Number of
Retroreflective
Rail Faces
Rail Length ≥ 3’ = 6”
2 (one for each direction)
Source: modified NDOT Standard Plans, TC-21
Source: modified NDOT Standard Plans, TC-21
6-16
Rail Length < 3’ = 4”
Rail Length ≥ 3’ = 6”
4 (two for each direction)
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Figure 6-13. Type II Barricade Dimensions
Figure 6-14. Type IIIB Barricade Dimensions
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 6F-7
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 6F-7
For more information on Type IIIB barricades, see MUTCD Section 6F.68
For more information on Type II barricades, see MUTCD Section 6F.68.
Direction Indicator Barricades
Direction indicator barricades consist of a One-Direction Large Arrow sign (W1-6) mounted above a diagonal striped,
horizontally aligned, retroreflective rail. NDOT does not typically use direction indicator barricades, instead a
Type IIIB barricade with a sign mounted on it (if allowed by MASH testing) is typically used.
3. Type IIIB Barricades: Used to close or partially close a road. When used at a road closure, Type IIIB
barricades may be placed completely across the roadway or from curb to curb. Signs can be mounted
on Type IIIB barricades, but they should not cover more than 50 percent of the top two rails or 33
percent of the total area of the three rails. Signs shall be 1-foot minimum from the ground. A sign with a
barricade is considered a system, which together must meet the NCHRP Report 350 requirements for
crashworthiness.
These barricades may be used in tapers, transitions, and other areas where specific directional guidance to drivers is
necessary. If used, they should be placed in a series to direct the driver through the transition and into the intended
travel lane.
Type IIIB barricades should not be placed parallel to traffic within the clear zone unless that particular model
has been successfully crash tested in that orientation.
Table 6-9 and Figure 6-15 provide direction indicator barricade striping details and barricade dimensions.
Type IIIB barricades consist of three striped rails.
Table 6-9. Direction Indicator Barricade Striping
Table 6-8 and Figure 6-14 provide Type IIIB barricade rail striping details and barricade dimensions.
Direction Indicator Barricade Striping
Table 6-8. Type IIIB Barricade Striping
Type IIIB Barricade Striping
Width of
Stripes
6”
Number of
Retroreflective
Rail Faces
3 (one direction only)
Source: modified NDOT Standard Plans, TC-21
6-17
Width of
Stripes
4”
Number of
Retroreflective
Rail Faces
1 (one direction only)
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Temporary Traffic Barriers
Figure 6-15. Direction Indicator Barricade Dimensions
Section 6F.85 of the MUTCD defines a temporary traffic barrier as a device designed to help prevent penetration by
vehicles while minimizing injuries to vehicle occupants, and to protect workers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.
Temporary traffic barriers by themselves are not TTC devices. They can serve as TTC devices only when both of the
following conditions apply:
•
Traffic barriers are placed in a position identical to a line of channelizing devices.
•
Traffic barriers are marked and/or equipped with appropriate channelization features to provide guidance and
warning both day and night.
When used to channelize vehicular traffic, traffic barriers shall be supplemented with one or more of the
following:
Delineation
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 6F-7
o
o
Pavement markings
For more information on direction indicator barricades, see MUTCD Section 6F.69.
o
Channelizing devices for improved daytime and nighttime visibility
When used as TTC devices, temporary traffic barriers also provide protection to the work zone. To use temporary
traffic barriers as TTC devices, they must be crashworthy.
Tubular Markers
Tubular markers are used only where space restrictions do not allow for the use of other more-visible devices. Section
6F.65 of the MUTCD states that tubular markers may be used effectively to:
When used for channelization, they should be of a light color for increased visibility. Warning lights or steady-burn
lamps may be mounted on temporary traffic barrier installations.
•
Divide opposing lanes of road users.
•
Divide vehicular traffic lanes when two or more lanes of moving vehicular traffic are kept open in the same
direction.
Temporary traffic barriers should not be used for a merging taper except in low-speed urban areas. When used for a
merging taper or for a constricted/restricted work zone, the taper shall be delineated.
•
Delineate the edge of a pavement drop-off where space limitations do not allow the use of larger devices.
For more information on temporary traffic barriers as TTC devices, see MUTCD Section 6F.70 and Section 6F.85.
Tubular markers shall be predominantly orange and be made of a material that can be struck without causing damage
to the impacting vehicle. To stabilize tubular markers, they should be affixed to the pavement, have a weighted base,
or have a weighting device such as sandbag rings.
Temporary Lane Separators
Temporary lane separators may be used to divide opposing vehicular traffic lanes, and to divide two or more lanes
open in the same direction. Temporary lane separators can be supplemented with any of the approved channelizing
devices such as tubular markers and opposing traffic lane dividers. When supplemented by one of these devices, the
devices shall be retroreflectorized. If channelizing devices are not used, the temporary lane separator shall contain
retroreflectorization.
For nighttime use, tubular markers shall be retroreflectorized.
Figure 6-16 shows tubular marker dimensions, striping, and applications.
Temporary lane separators are used to:
Figure 6-16. Tubular Marker Dimensions and Striping Details
•
Channelize road users
•
Divide opposing vehicular traffic lanes
•
Divide lanes when two or more lanes are open in the same travel direction
•
Provide continuous pedestrian channelization
The maximum height of temporary lane separators is 4 inches with a maximum width of 1 foot. Sides shall be sloped
to facilitate crossover by emergency vehicles.
For more information on temporary lane separators, see MUTCD Section 6F.72.
Arrow Boards
Arrow boards are used in combination with appropriate signs, channelizing devices, or other TTC devices to assist in
merging and controlling road users through or around a work zone. Arrow boards are mounted on a vehicle, trailer, or
other suitable support.
Source: MUTCD, modified Figure 6F-7
For more information on tubular markers, see MUTCD Section 6F.65.
6-18
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Arrow Board Types
Figure 6-18 shows an `example of a flashing double arrow.
Arrow boards in Nevada are categorized into three types and type selection is based on the posted speed limit, as
shown in Table 6-10.
Figure 6-18. Flashing Double Arrow Example
Table 6-10. Arrow Board Types
Arrow Board
Type
A
Minimum Size (inches)
Posted Speed
48 x 24
30 mph or less
B
60 x 30
35 mph to 50 mph
C
96 x 48
55 mph or more
3. Flashing Caution/Alternating Diamond Caution: Used to advise caution by road users because of:
a. Shoulder work
b. Blocked shoulder
Source: modified NDOT Standard Plans, TC-1
c.
Roadside work near the shoulder
Portable changeable message signs may be used to simulate an arrow board display.
d. Temporary closure of one lane on a two-lane, two-way roadway
Arrow Board Operating Modes
Figure 6-19 shows examples of the flashing caution/alternating diamond caution arrow boards.
Based on the type of message conveyed to the road user, arrow boards operate in three modes:
Figure 6-19. Examples of Flashing Caution/Alternating Diamond Caution
1. Flashing Arrow/Sequential Arrows/Sequential Chevrons: Used for stationary or moving lane closures to
advise approaching traffic along major multi-lane roadways in situations involving one or more of these
scenarios:
Flashing Caution examples:
a. heavy traffic volumes
b. high speeds
c.
limited sight distances
Alternating Diamond Caution example:
d. locations and conditions where road users are less likely to expect lane closures
Figure 6-17 shows examples of flashing arrows/sequential arrows/sequential chevrons.
Figure 6-17. Examples of Flashing Arrow/Sequential Arrows/Sequential Chevrons
Flashing arrow example (for right arrow, merge right):
Arrow Board Illumination
Arrow board illumination shall be used at full brilliance in daytime operations and dimmed when used for nighttime
operations. Arrow boards shall be capable of at least 50-percent dimming from full brilliance.
If a vehicle is displaying an arrow board, it shall be equipped with high intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe
lights.
Sequential arrows example (for right arrow sequence, merge right):
Arrow Board Placement and Removal
Arrow boards shall be used in combination with signs, channelizing devices, or other TTC devices required for the
type of work zone configuration.
Sequential chevrons example (for right chevron sequence, merge right):
2. Flashing Double Arrow: Used on multi-lane roadways where traffic will have to merge either to the
right lane or left lane.
6-19
•
Single Lane Closure: For a stationary single lane closure, the arrow board should be located on the shoulder
at the beginning of the merging taper. Where the shoulder is narrow, the arrow board should be in the closed
lane.
•
Multiple Lane Closure: For multiple lane closures, a separate arrow board shall be used for each closed
lane. If the first arrow board is placed on the shoulder, the second arrow board should be placed in the first
closed lane at the upstream end of the second merging taper. If the first arrow is placed in the first closed
lane, the second arrow board should be placed in the second closed lane at the downstream end of the
second merging taper.
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Temporary Pavement Marking Application
When an arrow board is not being used, it should be removed. If not removed, then it should be shielded. If it cannot
be shielded, the least desirable option is to leave the arrow board in place but delineated with retroreflective TTC
devices.
When applying temporary pavement markings, they shall connect to and match the existing markings at both ends of
the work zone.
Changeable Message Signs
Temporary pavement markings shall not remain in place for more than 14 days after the application of the pavement
surface treatment or construction of the final pavement surface.
Changeable message signs are used in work zones to warn and advise road users of unexpected situations caused
by a work zone. Mounting for changeable message signs shall be by transportable truck or trailer mounted.
•
Changeable message signs are most used on high-density urban freeways, but they can be used on any type of
highway requiring advance warning and information.
Some applications of the need for changeable message signs are:
•
Closure of roadway, lane, or ramp
•
Incident management
•
Width restriction information
•
Speed control or reductions
•
Advisories on work scheduling
•
Road user management and diversion
•
Warning of adverse conditions or special events
•
Other operational control
Temporary Paint: Shall be applied by single application on a clean and dry surface with a machine capable
of dispensing beads immediately after paint is applied. Minimum thickness for non-open graded surfaces shall
be 8 mils when dry. Minimum thickness for open-graded surfaces shall be 6 mils when dry (measured without
beads).
Type II beads are to be applied if the paint type is epoxy or polyurea.
•
Temporary Striping Tape: Shall be applied by tamping the tape down immediately after application. Surface
shall be dry and free of oils, grease, dust, and dirt.
Temporary striping used on interstate and full control of access freeways shall be 4 inches wide for edge and
lane lines, 8 inches wide for ramp gore lines, and 12 inches wide for stop bars and cross walks. Temporary
striping used on other roads shall be 4 inches wide, except stop bars and cross walks which shall be 12
inches wide. Place railroad markings according to the Standard Plans.
Temporary Raised Pavement Markers
Temporary raised pavement markers (RPMs) used for centerlines shall have yellow bodies and yellow reflective
sheeting on both sides. When used for lane lines or edge lines, RPMs shall have the same body and reflector color as
required by the permanent striping, and the reflective sheeting will be required only on the side that faces oncoming
traffic.
The message boards in changeable message signs shall be capable of:
Temporary RPMs may be used in work zones to supplement pavement markings. When used in work zones, RPM
application and type of RPM shall follow the NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction.
•
Displaying three lines of message text
•
Each line displaying 8 characters of 5 x 7 font (12-inch) minimum height
•
Bulb-type, LCD, LED, or electromagnetic disk matrix
Temporary Traffic Barriers
•
Self-illuminating during nighttime
Temporary traffic barriers help prevent penetration by vehicles into the work zone area to protect workers, bicyclists,
and pedestrians from errant vehicles. Temporary traffic barrier evaluation should be discussed during the Preliminary
Design Field Study (PDFS) and TC meetings. Some factors when evaluating the use of temporary traffic barriers are:
The Engineer will instruct on how to program the changeable message sign and will have the programming manual
for information purposes.
Temporary Pavement Markings and Raised Pavement Markers
Temporary pavement markings are placed within work zones to provide road users with a clearly defined path of
travel through the work zone. These may be needed because of existing permanent marking being removed or
obliterated during the work activities. All temporary pavement marking lane lines, including parallel,
acceleration/deceleration lanes for ramps and intersection auxiliary lanes, pavement marking components (such as
color, size, location, and material type) shall be in accordance with NDOT Standard Plans. Temporary traffic control
plans shall provide temporary striping, striping tape, or reflective lane markers for any traffic shifts out of existing lane
markings. All conflicting striping shall be removed in its entirety.
•
Traffic volume
•
Traffic operating speed
•
Offset – the minimum horizontal clearance shall be 2 feet from the travel way to the face of the barrier.
•
Duration of work
Temporary traffic barriers generally are used when longitudinal drop-offs exceed 3 inches with speeds greater than 35
mph.
Section 6F.85 of the MUTCD provides the four primary functions of temporary traffic barriers, which are:
When it is not possible to provide a work zone clear path with pavement markings, then warning signs, channelizing
devices, and delineation shall be used.
1. To keep vehicular traffic from entering work areas, such as excavations or material storage sites.
2. To separate workers, bicyclists, and pedestrians from motor vehicle traffic.
Temporary Pavement Marking Types
3. To separate opposing directions of vehicular traffic.
Temporary pavement markings can be either paint or striping tape. Based the on proposed permanent striping,
temporary paint can be either epoxy, waterborne, or polyurea. Temporary striping tape shall be Type 1, unless Type 2
is approved for use on appropriate areas
4. To separate vehicular traffic, bicyclists, and pedestrians from the work area, including false work for
bridges and other exposed objects.
6-20
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Low Profile Impact Attenuators
When used in work zones, temporary traffic barriers shall be supplemented with standard delineation, pavement
markings, or channelizing devices if they are used to channelize vehicular traffic.
Low profile impact attenuators may be specified where sight distance is an issue, such as around approaches or
intersections.
Temporary traffic barriers used in Nevada work zones are:
•
Portable precast concrete barrier rail
•
Water-filled barrier rail
Temporary Traffic Screen
Temporary screens are used in work zones to increase driver/worker safety by blocking the road users’ view of work
zone activities that can be distracting and by reducing headlight glare from oncoming motor vehicle traffic. Vehicle
flow also might improve as the screens discourage gawking from oncoming motor vehicle traffic.
Portable Precast Concrete Barrier Rail
When used, temporary traffic screens are mounted on top of temporary traffic barriers and used for limiting two-way
motor vehicle traffic visibility, deterring pedestrian crossovers, and protection from debris entering the work zone, as
shown on Sheet RB-48 of the NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction.
Portable precast concrete barrier rail shall follow the standards shown on Sheets RB-47A and RB-47B on the current
edition of NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction.
Portable precast concrete barrier rail generally is used when longitudinal drop-offs exceed 3 inches with speeds
greater than 35 mph. The use of portable precast concrete barrier rail is evaluated on a case-by-case basis and
should be discussed during the PDFS and traffic control meetings.
Areas that might justify the use of temporary traffic screens are:
When used, portable precast concrete barrier rail shall be Type F, as shown in Figure 6-20, below.
Figure 6-20. Typical Portable Precast Concrete Barrier (Type F)
•
Crossovers
•
Horizontal curves
•
Restrictive lanes
•
Shoulder work
•
Tapers adjacent to work areas, such as bridge deck repair sites
Installation of temporary traffic screens on work zones depends on factors such as:
•
Crash experience
•
High nighttime traffic volumes
•
Complaints from the public
•
Highway geometry
•
Distance from opposing traffic
•
Lane-width restrictions
•
Delineation washout
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, RB-47B
•
Work-area distractions
Portable precast concrete barrier rail shall be painted white with paint conforming to Subsection 714.03.03 of NDOT
Standard Specifications. Two-way reflectors shall be placed on top and in the center of each portable precast
concrete barrier rail section. Reflective markers shall be listed in the QPL.
•
Worker proximity
Screens shall be placed on the work area side of the temporary railing where traffic will be only on one side of the
temporary railing. The screen may be placed on either side of the pipe support where traffic will be on both sides of
the temporary railing.
The Designer must use caution with portable barrier rail at intersections and approaches. It is important to check site
distance issues that may arise during construction when barrier rail may be installed.
Appropriate end treatment must be selected for the portable precast concrete barrier rail.
For more information on temporary traffic screen installation, see Sheet RB-48 of NDOT Standard Plans for Road and
Bridge Construction.
Water-Filled Barrier Rail
Delineators
Water-filled barrier rail may be substituted for the portable precast concrete barrier when the regulatory speed limit is
appropriate and when the specific use is approved. Water-filled barrier rail shall be filled with water prior to the
beginning of work in the area to be protected by the rail. Water spillage must always be avoided on the traveled way.
Delineators may be used to emphasize the roadway alignment and vehicle path through the TTC zone. When used,
they shall be combined with or supplement other TTC devices.
The reflecting unit of delineators shall be approximately 4 feet above the near roadway edge and shall be mounted on
a crashworthy support.
Place two-way reflectors on top of the water-filled barrier rail at a maximum spacing of 20 feet.
6-21
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Figure 6-22. Water-Filled Impact Attenuator
Colors for delineators used along both sides of two-way streets and highways and the right-hand side of one-way
roadways shall be white. When used along the left-hand side of one-way roadways, these shall be yellow.
For more information on delineators, see Chapter 3F, Delineators, of the MUTCD.
Temporary Impact Attenuators
Temporary impact attenuators are systems designed to mitigate the effects of errant vehicles that strike obstacles,
either by smoothly decelerating the vehicle to a stop when hit head-on, or by redirecting the errant vehicle.
Temporary impact attenuators are used in work zones to help protect the vehicle drivers from the exposed ends of
barriers, fixed objects, shadow vehicles, and other obstacles. Applications for temporary impact attenuators are for
stopping or redirecting errant vehicles. Temporary impact attenuators shall be approved for speeds up to the design
speed shown in the contract documents.
Source: Website: //www.lindsay.com/usca/en/infrastructure/brands/barrier-systems/solutions/crash-cushions/absorb/
There are two types of temporary impact attenuators: stationary and truck-mounted.
3. Sand barrel impact attenuator (see Figure 6-23).
Figure 6-23. Sand Barrel Impact Attenuator
Stationary Impact Attenuator
Stationary impact attenuators are used in the same manner as permanent highway installations. These shall be
designed for the specific application intended.
Three types of temporary stationary impact attenuators are used in Nevada:
1. Steel impact attenuator with energy-absorbing cartridge (see Figure 6-21).
Figure 6-21. Steel Impact Attenuator
Source: Website: //pss-innovations.com/safety-products/crash-cushions-channelizers-drums/crashgard®-sand-barrel-system
Truck-Mounted Impact Attenuator
Section 6F.86 of the MUTCD states that truck-mounted attenuators are energy-absorbing devices attached to the rear
of shadow trailers or trucks. If used, the shadow vehicle with the attenuator shall be in advance of the work area,
workers, or equipment to reduce the severity of rear-end crashes from errant vehicles.
The shadow truck used shall be equipped with truck-mounted impact attenuators with rear-mounted black and high
intensity yellow chevron stripes and a standard trailer lighting system, including brake lights, turn signals, and two
yellow rotating beacons mounted on opposite rear corners of the truck at approximately 4.5 feet from ground level.
Shadow trucks should be positioned at a safe distance in advance of the workers or equipment being protected, but
close enough to where errant vehicles cannot travel around the shadow truck and strike the protected workers and/or
equipment.
Source: Website: //hillandsmith.com/products/smart-cushion/
2. Water-filled impact attenuator (see Figure 6-22).
Figure 6-24 presents an example of a truck-mounted impact attenuator.
6-22
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Figure 6-24. Truck-Mounted Impact Attenuator
Figure 6-25. Warning Light
Source: Highway Signals Webpage. Webpage: http://www.highwaysignals.com/barricade-and-warning-lights/
Portable Balloon Lighting
Portable balloon lighting shall be used to illuminate work zone approaches, lane shifts, merge/lane reduction tapers,
new roadway geometrics, etc.
Portable balloon lights are trailer mounted and shall be a minimum of 2,000 watts with a metal halide lighting source.
Units shall be self-sufficient and capable of operating continuously from one hour before sunset to one hour after
sunrise. When using as construction lights, caution must be taken to not produce glare which disables visibility for
road users, flaggers, or workers.
Source: Website: //www.traffixdevices.com/products/attenuators/scorpion-tma
Lighting Devices
When used, lighting devices supplement retroreflectorized signs, barriers, and channelizing devices. The need for
lighting devices in a work zone shall be determined based on engineering judgement. Most common work zone
lighting devices are warning lights, balloon lighting, and portable beacon light systems.
Figure 6-26. Portable Balloon Light
Warning Lights
Section 9.4.2.5 of AASHTO’s Roadside Design Guide defines a warning light as a portable, lens-directed, enclosed
light commonly mounted on barricades, drums, or advance warning signs. Warning lights mounted on signs or
channelizing devices shall be mounted in such a way that, if the sign or channelizing device is impacted by a vehicle,
the warning light does not fly off and penetrate the vehicle windshield.
There are three types of warning lights used in Nevada:
1. Type A: Low-intensity flashing warning lights. Type A warning lights are used for nighttime hours to warn road
users of an upcoming or past potentially hazardous area.
2. Type B: High-intensity flashing warning lights. Type B warning lights are used during daylight and
nighttime hours to warn road users of an upcoming potentially hazardous area.
3. Type C: Steady-burn warning lights. Type C warning lights are used during nighttime hours to delineate
the edge of the traveled way.
Source: ODOT Use of Additional Lighting for Traffic Control and Speed Reduction in Work Zones, Final Report SPR 791 (2018).
Warning lights may be used in either a steady-burn or flashing mode. Figure 6-25 presents an example of a warning
light.
Portable Beacon Light Systems
The flagger stations for stopping traffic at each end of a work zone that requires one-way traffic control operations
may be supplemented using a portable beacon light system. The portable beacon light system shall have a clear
warning beacon strobe light on top, an 8-inch diameter red light for stopping traffic, and an 8-inch diameter yellow light
for allowing traffic to proceed with caution. The light system is operated remotely by the flagger.
The lights shall be mounted on an adjustable support at approximately 10 feet from the bottom of the base to the top
of the beacon.
6-23
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Figure 6-27. Portable Beacon Light System
Temporary Transverse Rumble Strips shall be one of the following or approved equal:
1. ATM Removable Rumble Strips
2. RoadQuake 2 Temporary Portable Rumble Strips
For NDOT temporary transverse rumble strip typical application detail, see Appendix B.
6.4.8.
Other Work Zone Features
Guide Signing
Design shall provide guide signing to accommodate the TMP and associated TTC plan. All applicable advance guide
signs and exit direction signs shall always remain in place and free from obstruction of view to the motorist. Signs
should be clearly visible and provide clear direction and information to roadway users and comply with the MUTCD
requirements and the NDOT standards.
Pavement Edge Drop-Offs
Highway work such as pavement repairs, resurfacing, or shoulder work can create edge drop-offs on the pavement.
Drop-offs can become a safety hazard since an errant vehicle can lose control if it travels over an unexpected dropoff.
•
Temporary haul road crossings
Barrier rail is generally used when longitudinal drop-offs exceed 3” with speeds greater than 35 mph. The use of
portable barrier rail is evaluated on a case-by-case basis and should be discussed during the Preliminary Design Field
Survey (PDFS) and traffic control meetings. When a longitudinal drop-off exposed to public traffic is greater than 1
inch high, the drop-off shall be delineated, and signing must be installed to reduce the risk of errant vehicles traveling
over it. Pavement edge drop-offs greater than 3 inches need to be discussed in the TC meeting to determine how to
reduce drop-off height or protect against it. When a longitudinal drop-off is greater than 4 inches, an approved barrier
shall be installed or a 1:6 approved slope must be constructed (and maintained) in the drop-off location.
•
Temporary one-way operations along a one-lane, two-way highway
Drainage
•
Temporary one-way operations on bridges
Drainage shall be maintained at all times during all phases of construction work.
•
Reversible lanes
•
Intersections
Source: Website: https://dot.ca.gov/programs/construction/safety-traffic/flagging-handbook
Temporary Traffic Control Signals
Temporary traffic control signals typically are used in work zones, including:
6.4.9.
Type of Temporary Traffic Control Zone Activities
The type of TC required for a TTC zone will depend on the duration and location of work, and the type of work and
highway.
Temporary traffic control signals may be portable or temporarily mounted on fixed supports. For more information, see
Section 6F.84 of the MUTCD.
Duration of Work
Traffic signals, either temporary or permanent shall remain operational from the beginning of implementation to end of
implementation.
Duration of work is a significant factor in determining the number and types of devices necessary for a TTC work
zone. Duration of work is defined as the length of time to complete the work in one location.
Temporary traffic signals and lighting shall be provided to maintain operations and comply with the requirements of
the applicable governmental entities. Traffic signal communications should be maintained throughout the duration of
the work. Existing traffic signal interconnect and communications shall be maintained along with adequate vehicle and
pedestrian detection systems through project completion.
Mobile Operation
Work that moves intermittently or continuously and does not occupy the immediate area for more than 15 minutes is
considered a mobile operation. If work does not move more than one-half mile within an hour, the operation is not
considered mobile. Examples include mowing, striping, mechanical sweeping, TTC setup, and TTC removal.
Temporary overhead lighting shall be included at stop bar locations.
Short Duration
Temporary transverse rumble strips
Work that occupies a location for 15 minutes to 1 hour is considered short duration. Examples include delineator
repair and replacement, hand patching, and spray injection patching.
The use of Temporary Transverse Rumble Strips and advance warning signage for them will be required for lane
closure and/or as directed by the Engineer. Temporary rumble strips shall be spaced per the manufacturer
recommendations and placed such that the last rumble strip is located 250 feet prior to the “Lane Ends (Symbol)”
sign, “Work Zone Speed” limit sign, and/or “Flagger Symbol” sign (W20-7a) in the typical traffic control layout, unless
otherwise directed. Temporary Transverse Rumble Strips shall be installed and maintained in accordance with
manufacturer specifications.
Short-Term Stationary
Work that occupies a location for more than 1 hour but less than 12 hours within a single daylight period is considered
short-term stationary work. Examples include crack sealing, chip sealing, and patching.
6-24
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Intermediate-Term Stationary
•
Road user volumes
Work that occupies a location for more than one 12-hour daylight period and up to three days, or nighttime work
lasting more than 1 hour are considered intermediate-term stationary work. Examples include slab repair, culvert
replacement, and sub-grade repair.
•
Road vehicle mix (buses, trucks, cars, motorcycles, and bicycles)
•
Road user speeds
The following guidelines must be followed for the typical applications in Appendix C:
Long-Term Stationary
Work that occupies a location for longer than three days is considered long-term stationary work. Examples include
bridge damage repair and reconstruction.
•
All regulatory signs (R series) shall be black on retroreflective white.
•
All warning signs (W series) shall be black on retroreflective orange.
Nighttime Activities
•
Warning signs shall be a minimum of 3 feet x 3 feet for speeds of 45 mph or less; R2-1 shall be 3 feet x 4
feet.
•
Warning signs shall be a minimum of 4 feet x 4 feet for speeds of 50 mph or greater; R2-1 shall be 4 feet x 5
feet.
•
All device spacing shall be designed based on TTC zone speeds.
Work that occurs from 30 minutes before sunset to 30 minutes after sunrise is considered a nighttime activity.
Location of Work
The type and amount of TTC is dependent on the location of the work zone with respect to the travel way. The closer
the TTC zone is to the travel way, the more TTC is needed. Encroachment into the travel way involves the highest
level of TTC. Both the location and duration of work must be considered when planning the type and amount of TTC.
Figures for the various applications of TTC can be found in Section 6.4.10 of this guide.
One-Lane Closure
Multi-Lane Highway
Work Outside the Shoulder
For a one-lane closure on a multi-lane highway, signing and temporary traffic devices shall be used to safely merge
traffic from the closed lane into the open through lane by creating a taper, as shown in Figure C (Appendix C).
When closing a paved shoulder with a width of 8 feet or greater width, advanced warning signs ROAD WORK AHEAD
or SHOULDER WORK AHEAD should be placed according to NDOT Standard Plans. Channelizing devices or
temporary barrier rail shall be used to close the shoulder.
This same standard applies for lane closures adjacent to the median, where LEFT LANE CLOSED sign and
corresponding LANE ENDS sign (W9-1) are substituted.
TTC Device Placement, Cover, and Removal
Two-Lane, Two-Way Highway
When placing TTC devices along a work zone, devices shall be placed in sequential order starting from the advance
warning area and moving in the direction of traffic flow through the termination area. When removing TTC devices
along a work zone, follow sequential order starting from the termination area and moving opposite the direction of
traffic flow through the advance warning area.
For a one-lane closure on a two-lane, two-way highway, flaggers, signing, and temporary traffic control devices shall
be used to safely guide traffic to the opposite direction lane and through the TTC zone, as shown in Figure C
(Appendix C).
If work is suspended for short periods of time, temporary signs no longer appropriate shall be covered or removed.
For low-volume situations with short work zones on straight roadways where the flagger is visible to road users
approaching from both directions, a single flagger may be used.
During the progress of the work, certain signs may require covering when/if they temporarily do not apply to
conditions. Covers for temporary signs shall completely block out the message during the day or night. Burlap or
similar fabrics shall not be used as cover. Covers shall be securely fastened to prevent movement by wind action and
shall withstand the effects of weathering. Adhesive tape on the face of signs is prohibited.
At night, flagger stations shall be illuminated, except in emergencies.
One-Lane Closure with Temporary Barrier Rail
Multi-Lane Highway
TTC devices may be relocated as necessary. When no longer applicable or needed, TTC devices shall be removed
as soon as practical. However, TTC devices shall not be removed until the project is approved.
The use of temporary barrier rail should be based on engineering judgement. When used, temporary barrier rail shall
not be placed along the merging taper, but after the point where the lane has been completely closed with
channelizing devices and pavement markings, as shown in Figure C (Appendix C).
6.4.10. Temporary Traffic Control Typical Applications
Appendix C shows typical TTC applications as presented in NDOT’s Standard Plans for Road and Bridge
Construction. These applications do not include a layout for every conceivable work situation. Typical applications
should be altered when necessary to fit the conditions of a TTC zone. For additional information, refer to Chapter 6H,
Typical Applications, of the MUTCD.
For nighttime lane closures, Type C steady-burn warning lights may be placed on barrier rail parallel to the edge of
pavement and channelizing devices.
For long-term lane closures on facilities with permanent edge lines, a temporary edge line should be installed from the
upstream end of the merging taper to the downstream end of the downstream taper, and conflicting pavement
markings should be removed.
The following conditions affect the type of TTC procedure to establish:
•
Road configuration
Two-Lane, Two-Way Highway
•
Location of work
•
Work activity
•
Duration of work
For a one-lane closure on a two-lane, two-way highway, flaggers, signing, and temporary traffic control devices shall
be used to safely guide traffic to the opposite direction lane and through the TTC zone, as shown in Figure C
(Appendix C).
6-25
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Multi-Lane Closure
Shoulder Work
When more than one lane is closed, an arrow board per lane shall be used. A truck-mounted attenuator is used on
multi-lane closures to protect the work area. Figure C-8-5 (Appendix C) shows a typical TTC for multi-lane closures.
A typical application for shoulder work is presented in Figure C-8-10 (Appendix C), where a shoulder is closed with
channelizing devices and a truck-mounted attenuator is used.
Half-Road Closure on Multi-Lane Undivided Road
This application shall be used on minor roads having low speeds. For higher-speed traffic conditions, a lane closure
should be used.
Half-road closures on multi-lane undivided roads should merge traffic away from the work area by closing all lanes in
the respective direction and using an opposite direction lane to get through the work area, resulting in the closure of
the opposite direction lane, as shown in Figure C (Appendix C).
All lanes should be a minimum of 10 feet wide but can be 9 feet wide for short-term use on low-volume, low-speed
roadways with vehicular traffic that does not include longer and wider heavy commercial vehicles.
Pavement markings no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated as soon as practical to avoid driver
confusion within the TTC zone. For long-term situations, temporary markings shall be provided to clearly delineate the
temporary travel path. For short-term and intermediate-term situations where it is not feasible to remove and restore
pavement markings, channelization spacing shall be significantly close to each other to avoid driver confusion in the
TTC zone.
Haul Road
Multi-Lane Highway
Warning lights may be used to supplement channelizing devices at night.
Multi-lane highway TTC zones for haul roads shall provide safe conditions for access/egress to material deposit sites,
as well as for drivers on multi-lane highways. Figure C (Appendix C) shows the TTC application for haul roads with
material deposit sites on the right-hand side and on the left-hand side.
Truck-mounted attenuators may be used on the work vehicle and/or the shadow vehicle.
A flagger shall be present during haul road operations.
Multi-Lane Shift
When a road exclusively used as a haul road is not in use, Type IIIB barricades shall be used to close it. Flagger
symbol signs shall be covered when not in use.
Lane shifts are used when the work area extends into either the right-hand or left-hand lane of a divided highway, and
it is not practical, for capacity reasons, to reduce the number of available lanes. On a multi-lane shift, the existing
shoulder is used as a temporary lane, and it shall have a width of at least 10 feet.
Nighttime hauling activities shall be illuminated at the flagger stations, except in emergencies.
Two-Lane, Two-Way Highway
Barrier rails for multi-lane shifts shall not be placed along the shifting taper. The lane will first be shifted using
channelizing devices and pavement markings. For nighttime lane closures, Type C steady-burn warning lights may be
placed on channelizing devices and barrier parallel to the edge of pavement.
Two-lane, two-way highway TTC zones for haul roads shall provide safe conditions for access/egress to material
deposit sites, as well as for drivers on multi-lane highways. Figure C (Appendix C) shows the TTC application for haul
roads with material deposit sites on one side of the roadway.
Existing conflicting striping shall be removed, and temporary pavement markings installed before traffic patterns are
changed. For short-term stationary work, lanes may be delineated by removable pavement markings (pavement
marking tape).
Flaggers shall be present during haul road operations.
When a road exclusively used as a haul road is not in use, Type IIIB barricades shall be used to close it. Flagger
symbol signs shall be covered when not in use.
If the shoulder cannot accommodate trucks, these shall be directed to use the travel lanes.
Nighttime hauling activities shall be illuminated at the flagger stations, except in emergencies.
See Figure C-8-7 (Appendix C) for multi-lane shift application.
Typical Application for Hazards, Bumps, Drop-Offs, and Uneven Lanes
Median Crossover (Multi-Lane Divided Highway)
Loose Gravel/Dust Hazard
A median crossover on a multi-lane divided highway consists of moving traffic (following a road closure in one
direction) to a temporary road built over an existing median onto the opposing traffic lane and back into the roadway
downstream of the TTC zone. Figure C (Appendix A) presents the application of this TTCconfiguration.
For situations where there is loose gravel and dust following roadway activities, drivers are warned by following the
application in Figure C (Appendix C).
An arrow board shall be used for each closed lane.
Bumps
For long-term work on high-speed, high-volume highways, temporary traffic barrier rail shall be used to separate
opposing vehicular traffic.
In the presence of a bump due to roadway activities, signing shall be used to alert the driver of an upcoming bump.
Figure C-8-14 (Appendix C) shows the appropriate signs to use for this application.
Section 1A.aa of AASHTO’s “Green Book” design criteria shall be followed when the crossover follows a curve
alignment.
Shoulder Drop-Off
When a shoulder drop-off exists during non-working hours due to roadwork activities, the configuration shown in
Figure C-8-15 (Appendix C) shall be used. A SHOULDER DROP-OFF sign (W8-9) shall be installed upstream of the
drop-off and every mile along the drop-off area.
Exit Ramp Opening
When work is performed in the vicinity of an exit ramp kept open for traffic, the configuration shown in Figure C-8-9
(Appendix C) shall apply. By having the THRU TRAFFIC (WNV18-1) and EXIT RAMP (WNV25-1) signs after the lane
merge, drivers can decide to either go through by staying in the current lane or take the exit ramp by moving to the
right lane after the taper.
6-26
SECTION 6. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Uneven Lanes
Emergency Turnout Application
When uneven lanes exist during non-working hours due to roadwork activities, the configuration shown in Figure
C-8-16 (Appendix C) shall be used. An UNEVEN LANES (W8-11) sign shall be installed upstream of the drop-off and
every mile along the drop-off area.
Sheet TC-22 of NDOT Standard Plans for Road and Bridge Construction show the typical TTC application with
signing details for emergency turnout situations.
TTC Near Railroad Crossings
Typical Applications at Intersections
Extra care should be taken when roadway work activities are planned near railroad crossings. No vehicle shall be
stopped within 15 feet on either side of the closest and farthest rail because of TTC operations.
Intersection Outside Lane
Figure C (Appendix C) and Figure C (Appendix C) depict the TTC configuration for intersection work on the outside
lane on the far side of an intersection when flaggers are used and when flaggers are not used, respectively. By
closing the outside lane of the intersection approach, intersection through vehicles will be in the necessary lane before
approaching the TTC zone. If capacity is a problem due to the outside lane closure, vehicles shall be directed to other
roads or streets.
MUTCD, Chapter 6H, Typical Application 46 states that if the queuing of vehicles across active rail tracks cannot be
avoided, a uniformed law enforcement officer or flagger shall be provided at the grade crossing to prevent vehicles
from stopping within the grade crossing, even if automatic warning devices are in place.
Before any type of work starts, early coordination with the railroad company or light rail transit agency
should occur.
When used, flaggers shall direct road users within the intersection, and stations shall be illuminated at night (except
for emergencies).
See MUTCD, Chapter 6H, Typical Application 46 for more information on TTC work near railroad crossings.
Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs.
Some roadway widths might make it impossible to make certain turns when combined with the TTC zone, which might
require the prohibition of certain turns while the outside lane is closed.
The TTC configurations also show signing to guide pedestrians around the work zone.
Intersection with Median Island
Figure C (Appendix C) and Figure C (Appendix C) depict the TTC configuration for work on the left-turn lane pocket
on an intersection with a median island when flaggers are used and when flaggers are not used, respectively. The
left-turn lane pocket is completely closed with channelizing devices starting at the median island and ending
downstream of the work zone.
If left-turning movements on the left-turn pocket lane that has been closed are small and/or the gaps in opposing
vehicular traffic are frequent, left turns may be permitted on that approach.
When used, flaggers shall direct road users within the intersection, and stations shall be illuminated at night (except
for emergencies).
Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs.
Intersection with No Median Island
Figure C (Appendix C) and Figure C (Appendix C) depict the TTC configuration for work on the left-turn lane on an
intersection with no median island when flaggers are used and when flaggers are not used, respectively. The left-turn
lane is completely closed with channelizing devices that begin with a taper upstream of the work zone and end
downstream of the work zone.
If left-turning movements in the left-turn lane that has been closed are small and/or the gaps in opposing vehicular
traffic are frequent, left turns may be permitted on that approach.
When used, flaggers shall direct road users within the intersection, and stations shall be illuminated at night (except
for emergencies).
Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs.
6-27
This page intentionally left blank.
6-28
POLICY AND PROCEDURES
7.1.
General
•
TTC Plans: SSTC participates in the review of TTC plans but does not develop or dictate the development or
review of the TTC plan sheets. The TTC plan sheets go through the department’s internal review with Specs
section.
Specific design policies and procedures applicable to the design of signing, striping, and traffic control (SSTC) can be
found in Section 1 of the current edition of NDOT’s Road Design Guide. This reference also includes actions and
steps for effectively scoping, designing, awarding, and constructing NDOT-related SSTC projects.
Refer to the NDOT 2020 Plan Preparation Guide for additional details.
For detailed information regarding the roles and responsibilities of NDOT, FHWA, and other city, county, state, and
federal agencies as they relate to the design of highway infrastructure, refer to the current version of the NDOT Road
Design Guide.
When a review process is performed before officially submitting, a better-quality product will most likely be achieved.
The Quality Control (QC) review process will require at least two participants: one who produces the work element
and the other who will review the work element.
When designing for SSTC in the state of Nevada, certain NDOT design documents are available that take precedence
over the FHWA Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). The current editions of the NDOT Standard
Plans for Road and Bridge Construction, NDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, NDOT
Road Design Guide, and NDOT Sign Supplement are examples of such documents.
7.3.2.
7.2.
The Lead Technical Professional (LTP) is a Staff II designer within the SSTC section responsible for the work product
being reviewed.
The Quality Control Reviewer (QCR) is a Staff II designer within the SSTC section who must be qualified to have
created the work product. The QCR may be a project participant, but to make sure that the QC Review is independent
from the production of the work element, the QCR is precluded from having produced or directed the production of the
work product being reviewed.
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
The FHWA MUTCD is recognized as the national standard for all traffic control devices installed on any street,
highway, bikeway, or private road open to public travel. Non-compliance with the MUTCD ultimately can result in the
loss of federal-aid funds as well as significant increase in tort liability.
7.3.3.
Uniformity of traffic control devices is critical in highway safety and mobility, as well as cutting capital and
maintenance costs of TCDs for public agencies and manufacturers.
Figure 7-1. Quality Control Review Process
For more information on the MUTCD policy and procedures, see the Introduction chapter of the MUTCD (pages I-1 to
I-4).
For design purposes, designers can follow other manuals or guides, when found to be more specific or more
conservative.
7.3.1.
Signing, Striping, and Traffic Control Quality Control Review
Applicability
Design and review responsibilities differ based upon discipline. SSTC internal quality reviews are not the same as the
Department’s quality reviews. This manual is intended for designers in the SSTC section, and as such will define their
contribution for each.
SSTC’s reviews for different Signing, Striping and Traffic Control are as follows:
•
Signing Plans: SSTC does section internal reviews for signing plans and participates in the Department’s
internal review (with specs division).
•
Roadway Striping Plans: SSTC participates in review of Roadway’s striping sheets but does not develop or
dictate the development or review of the striping sheets. The striping plan sheets go through the Department’s
internal review with Specs section.
Quality Control Review Process
The quality control review process consists of several steps in which the QCR reviews the work produced by the LTP.
The steps for the quality review process are shown in Figure 7-1.
After the effective date of a new edition of the MUTCD or a revision thereto, or after the adoption thereof by the state,
whichever occurs later, new or reconstructed traffic control devices installed will be in compliance with the new edition
or revision.
7.3.
Responsible Review Participants
7-1
SECTION 7. POLICY AND PROCEDURES
Step 1—Project/Task Document by LTP
Figure 7-2. Quality Control Checklist Example
The project/task document is produced and assembled for review by the LTP. The review documents are prepared by
the LTP or under the LTP’s direction.
Step 2—QC Review by QCR
The QCR conducts the QC review, marking anything that requires further review or anything that is found to be in
error or is questionable.
Step 3—QC Comments Review by LTP
The LTP reviews the QC comments to confirm their validity. For those QC comments that are deemed questionable,
the LTP will coordinate with the QCR to discuss and better understand the issues.
Step 4—LTP Corrections/Revisions
After review, the LTP makes corrections and/or revisions to the document. After any changes have been made, the
LTP then reviews the resultant documents and validates that the comments, as agreed to, have been addressed and
incorporated.
Step 5—Changes Verified by QCR
Following the LTP’s confirmation that the QC comments have been addressed and incorporated, the QCR verifies the
results and confirms that the Step 2 comments have been appropriately interpreted. Any unaddressed or unresolved
issues identified will be coordinated with the LTP for final resolution and repeat QC process starting from Step 3, if
needed.
7.3.4.
Quality Control Tracking Checklist
The QC Review Process is identified and logged by using a QC tracking checklist. This QC checklist should be used
by the designer (consultant) to keep track of the QC process.
The QC checklist is inserted on the front sheet or title page of bound documents, and on every sheet for unbound
documents. When there are multiple work products or when work products have multiple disciplines involved,
separate tracking stamps are used for each work product/discipline/QCR to allow interpreting who has responsibility
for each element of the work product and its associated QCR.
The SSTC QC Review Process is illustrated and tracked by placing a check mark on each applicable QC item. Figure
7-2 shows an example for an SSTC QC checklist for Signing Plans.
7-2
PLAN PREPARATION
8.1.
General
are shown include buildings, roads, streets, railroads, rivers, streams, utilities, signs, trees, curbs, gutters,
sidewalks, etc. If relocation or disposition of these items is included in the project, the plan should show the
current and proposed location.
This section will assist the SSTC designer with developing contract plans that are consistent with NDOT Standards. It
offers solutions to common questions, but it is not intended to replace sound engineering judgment or knowledge.
Much of the information presented within this section can be found in the current edition of the NDOT Road Design
Guide.
•
Show alignments on each plan sheet with an arrow and alignment callout pointing to each alignment.
Frontage roads, ramps, detours, and other roads should have independent alignments.
•
The NDOT Plan Preparation Guide contains general information about the various submissions required and reviews
conducted during the development of the plan for a project. The Scope of Service also may contain specific
requirements for the project at hand. Generally, plan review will be conducted starting with intermediate-level design.
Place standard construction notes on the plans only if needed. Signing plans typically use more simplified
callouts including sign numbers and labels. Striping plans use station and offset callouts at locations where
striping begin, transition, change, and end. Traffic control plans use similar station and offset callouts for
temporary striping and barriers.
•
8.1.2.
Use insets to show a greater level of detail that cannot otherwise be seen with the scale used on the plan
sheet.
•
Place legends in the upper left corner of the plan sheet if needed.
•
Items that generally are labeled and dimensioned on the plans are items that do not have a construction note
or are not adequately covered with a legend.
8.1.1.
Plan Submittals and Project Development Reviews
Plan Sheets
The SSTC sheets show the necessary details for constructing the associated proposed signing, striping, and traffic
control systems. The NDOT Road Design Guide contains additional guidelines and details on plan sheet preparation.
8.1.3.
Format and Scale
8.1.4.
The plan sheets for SSTC design should adhere to the following guidelines.
•
The summary sheet font type is Arial, with the sub-headers from 10-point to 12-point font, and information on
each entry row at 11-point font. Adjustments to these guidelines are subject to project requirements.
•
Each sheet should be arranged so that major construction features appear on one sheet; for example, the
major portion of an interchange should appear on one sheet. Diagonal placement is satisfactory to obtain
better coverage, although this may necessitate breaks in the profile. Use match lines to retain accuracy and
clarity.
•
Whenever possible, orient plan sheets so that stationing progresses from left to right. However, if this cannot
be attained, the stationing can be oriented in a different direction. When stationing runs in the opposite
direction from the mileposts, the plans should read in the direction of the stationing.
•
Sheet numbering for the SSTC design must begin with TS1 (Signing), ST1 (Striping), or TC1 (Traffic Control).
Multiple sheets must be numbered accordingly (i.e., TS1, TS2, TS3, etc.)
•
Existing features—such as edge of pavement, culverts, ROW, and utilities—must be shown in green in the
Signing and Traffic Control design. New improvements—such as roadway geometrics, ROW, drainage, and
bridges—must be shown in black so that these features can be taken into account in the Signing and Traffic
Control design. SSTC design must be shown in black except Do Not Disturb (DND) signs, which appear in
green.
Plan Sheet Orientation and Color
Produce all SSTC plan sheets on 11-inch by 17-inch white paper. The sheets should be landscape oriented and
bound along the left edge. Make the left margin between 0.75 inch and 1 inch. The top, bottom, and right margins
should be between 0.25 inch and 0.5 inch. All SSTC plan sheets need to be printed at scale where applicable.
Proposed plan components generated by the SSTC designer are shown in black (color No. 0 in the NDOT color table.
When necessary, green may be used in the plans for existing topography, elements not affected by the design, and
elements and callouts set as Do Not Disturb. The green color standard to be used has an RGB color value of (0, 255,
0), color No. 2 in the NDOT color table. Grey is used for new work that is being added on other sheets and is relevant
to the work proposed on that sheet. Other colors may be substituted for clarity purposes on a case-by-case basis.
8.1.5.
Consultant Requirements
Each original contract sheet prepared by a consultant engineer’s firm should be prepared and submitted in
accordance with state law. The dimensions for the consultant advertisement logo are not to exceed 0.5-inch high by
3-inches long. It is to be placed on the location sketch in the lower right corner of the sheet unless the location sketch
and title sheet are combined, in which case the advertisement may be placed in the same location on the first typical
section sheet. If a consultant firm produces contract sheets only for specific functional areas, such as the bridge or
hydraulics sheets, then the advertisement may only be placed on the first sheet of that section.
8.1.6.
Title Sheets
•
Striping plans are to show less background information for clarity of striping design. Striping plans are to
exclude existing features, and the only additional new improvement linework to include is edge of pavement.
Existing linework will be used to show how proposed striping will match existing striping.
The purpose of the title sheet is to provide a general project location and a description of work to be performed, and
the SSTC project being constructed or improved. Refer to the current version of the NDOT Plan Preparation Guide for
details on Title Sheets.
•
Select a scale that is adequate to show all the necessary details, as governed by the topography and the
complexity of the work. Generally, the plan views should be printed to a scale of 1 inch = 100 feet, although
certain cases may require a larger or smaller scale. Cross section views typically should be printed to a scale
of 1 inch = 10 feet but may be adjusted to adequately show design elements.
8.1.7.
•
Show and label boundaries, including parks, forests, recreation areas, historic districts, military zones, tribal
lands, incorporated townships, counties and states, cities, and towns.
•
Only features that affect bidding, construction, and maintenance—which are essential for field orientation of
the plan—should be shown. Confine topography to that portion within the ROW and a small portion outside of
those limits as needed for clarity, such as side streets, approaches, parking lots, etc. Common features that
Index of Sheets
An Index of Sheets is placed in the upper left-hand corner of the title sheet and provides a listing of the type of sheets
within the contract.
8.1.8.
Key Map
A key map should be placed in the upper right-hand corner of the title sheet. The purpose of the key map is to show
where the project resides within the state.
8-1
SECTION 8. PLAN PREPARATION
8.1.9.
North Arrow
Microsoft Office Importer Tutorial
1. From the Axiom menu in MicroStation, click on the Microsoft Office Importer option.
A North Arrow should be located on the title sheet and provide the orientation for the design. The North Arrow is
typically green (color 18).
8.1.10. Project Number, County, and Design Unit
The project number, county information, and appropriate design unit should be provided by the NDOT Principal Traffic
Operations Engineer and placed in the upper right-hand corner of the title sheet.
8.1.11. Sheet Numbering
The sheet numbering for the title sheet begins with number 1. For SSTC designs, the sheet numbering shall include a
“TS” for signing sheets, “ST” for striping sheets, and “TC” for traffic control sheets.
8.1.12. Stamps
Final design plans will need to be stamped by a Professional Engineer who is registered in the State of Nevada. The
licensed engineer needs to be registered with the Nevada Board of Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors.
The stamps can be applied to each sheet manually, or by using a digital signature. According to the Nevada
Administrative Code, “A licensee with responsible charge of the work contained in a document … may have an
electronically prepared seal and digital signature applied to such a document which is electronically submitted,
released, or issued only if:
a) The files containing the document are locked electronically to prevent any changes to the document;
b) Secure encryption methods are in place to prevent the copying, transferring, or removing of the seal
and digital signature and to prevent changes to any electronic drawings after the document is
submitted, released, or issued; and
2. A pop-up window will open; click on the last icon, which is the “Settings” icon.
c) The licensee believes adequate protections are in place to prevent fraud or misuse of the digital
signature.”
The plans may have a designated space blocked off on each sheet for stamps to be applied to keep a consistent
position, but this is not required. Applying the stamp to an area on the sheet with open space or the least conflict with
linework is recommended.
8.1.13. Plan Schedules
The schedules provide the basis of the overall estimate of quantities that will be used by the contractor during the
project bid phase. Signing plans have sign summaries which include detail for both sign removals and sign
installation. Sign summaries also include details such as panel dimensions, post type, and sign location. Traffic
control sheets typically include traffic control device tabulations which include bid item numbers, item descriptions,
and a quantity per phase breakdown. Striping plans do not typically include a summary or schedule.
Importing Schedules into MicroStation
The plan schedule sheets for SSTC-related projects can be developed electronically in Excel spreadsheets. The use
of electronic plan schedules allows for a uniform look for all plan schedules. As an Excel file, these schedules can be
imported into MicroStation using standard copy/paste tools or imported using Axiom to allow for a linked file that can
be edited easily inside the MicroStation platform. If using NDOT Sign Summary Excel Sheet see Senior SSTC
designer on use, format, and printing instructions. The following tutorial provides step-by-step procedures using Axiom
to import the plan schedules.
8-2
SECTION 8. PLAN PREPARATION
4. Find and open the “.ini” file. At this point, the settings will be updated to NDOT standards.
3. Another pop-up window will open; click the File menu, then “Load Settings.”
5. Copy the Excel cells you want to import onto your clipboard.
6. In the MicroStation Office Importer tab, click on the first icon, which is the “Paste clipboard data into
MicroStation” icon.
8-3
7. A pop-up window will appear; change the text height and width to 0.75. This will be the NDOT text size
for a 100-scaled sheet.
8. To ensure the cells plot to the correct level, click the Formatting tab, check the Level box, and set the
drop-down menu to NWSAL: Plan Notes.
9. To edit the Excel file, click in the fourth icon in the Microsoft Office Importer tab, which is the “Manage”
icon.
The text width and height can also be changed by clicking on the Settings icon, then “Text” under Category,
then the “Size” tab. Make sure to save settings afterward.
8.1.14. Design Preferences
The following NDOT design preferences should be followed and applied to all SSTC Design Plans. The design
preferences provide the basis of design for different design elements for SSTC designs.
General Preferences
•
When placing graphics on the plans, place the graphic in a visible area with no background behind it. If this is
not possible, “clip” the background so the graphic is easily viewable with no background behind the graphic.
•
SSTC elements should be scaled appropriately on the plan sets (i.e., cantilever structure spans should be
sized to scale).
•
All new items will be shown in black in the design plans and schedules. All existing items will be shown in
green in the design plans and schedules. If installing new items into existing infrastructure, the symbol for the
infrastructure will be green, and the call out for the infrastructure will be black.
Signing Preferences
•
If there is a sign with a flashing beacon above and/or below the sign, the sign may be called out on the sign
sheets and everything involved with the flashing beacon (including a detail) may be called out on the SLI
sheets (i.e., chain-up sign, curve ahead sign). If SLI sheets are involved, reference to the correct SLI sheets
needs to be made in the remarks of the Sign Summary. In certain cases, signs with beacons will be paid for
with a 623 bid item and will not need to be shown on the Signing plan sheets.
•
If there is a sign with integral flashing lights built into the sign, the location of the sign should come from the
signing section but everything about the sign—lighting, installation, power, etc.—should be on the SLI sheets.
•
If there is a DMS structure (ground mounted or overhead), the information should be included in the SLI
sheets and not within the signing sheets.
•
Leader lines for all signs and sign removals should follow a similar angle for cleanliness when feasible, with
the sign number positioned in the middle at the angle.
•
Sign panels displayed on plan sheets do not need to be to scale but should be in relative proportion to each
other (with smaller signs appearing smaller) and remain consistent throughout the set when feasible.
Striping Preferences
•
8-4
Stripe removal sheets should include limited existing features (including edge of pavement, curb and gutter,
roadside barriers, guardrail, etc.as appropriate) to provide reference of striping position on the roadway but
avoid including unnecessary features that are farther from the roadway.
SECTION 8. PLAN PREPARATION
•
Guardrails and barriers
•
Plan notes: if there are notes specific to the sheet that are needed to describe a special circumstance on that
sheet, they should be included on the sheet, rather than on the Notes Sheet
The striping plan layout should be based on the post-construction condition. If the project is staged, each
stage must be shown separately, and the stages must be identified in the title block of the associated sheets.
•
Match lines along the centerline of any roadway should be avoided; reference the prior and next sheet where
the break occurs to the next sheet
•
Location control lines, stationing, and station designations will be shown. Lane widths will be dimensioned
from the alignment. The limits of each stripe should be marked with a “plus station” (i.e., +62) to the nearest
foot. When alignments are not available, it is acceptable to dimension from the edge of pavement.
•
Station equations; show the station equations along lines of survey, between the centerline of route and
baselines of roadways, crossings between routes and intersections of roadways; match lines are preferred to
“break lines”
•
Show all stripes, directional arrows, railroad crossing markings, special lane use symbols, chevrons, dual and
triple left-turn guidelines, dual right-turn guidelines, stop bars, and crosswalks. Special marking details, such
as new types of symbols, should be included in the permanent pavement marking sheets.
•
Proposed trees in areas adjacent to the proposed signs if landscaping is part of the project
•
Existing features in green; the north arrow (green, color 18) on all sheets
•
Mainline roadway horizontal orientation on the plan sheet; typically, the State Highway should be designated
as the mainline
•
Permanent striping detail sheets should include only existing linework approaching the beginning and ending
limits of the proposed striping. There should be a “Match Existing” callout defining the limits on both ends.
•
Raised pavement markers should only be used in District 1.
•
Traffic Control Preferences
•
Traffic control devices should be reused where possible to reduce cost.
•
Reference to the control line
•
Each phase or sequence of construction in the traffic control plans should show existing roadbeds and
roadbeds completed in a previous phase. Show the construction work zone, number of lanes, and direction of
traffic on each respective phase.
•
Access points
The CADD cell library that NDOT has developed for signing drafting should be used.
•
Work zones and traffic control devices will be clearly defined with appropriate symbols and area patterning.
Legends will be provided to define area patterning and symbols where appropriate.
8.2.2.
•
The traffic control plans will include temporary signing, temporary striping, pavement widening, temporary
drainage, and temporary lighting requirements. Modifications of existing traffic signals or installation of
temporary signals may be required for each phase of construction. If deemed necessary, electrical plan
sheets should be provided to cross-reference the appropriate electrical plans.
Documentation for the project should consist of the following:
•
•
1. Marked-Up Field Documentation. If a field evaluation is performed for a project, the marked-up field
documentation will need to be provided.
2. Sign post Calculations. Sign post information is available in the Sign Summary, but the calculations that
determine the size and type of signposts are not included. These calculations often are compiled in a
spreadsheet that should be provided.
Show all traffic control devices, including, but not limited to, construction signs, alterations to permanent signs
and special sign details, drums and/or cones, barricades, traffic barriers and crash cushions, arrow boards,
signal systems and changeable message boards, flagger stations and uniformed traffic control officers, and
pavement markings.
3. Milepost Verification. Milepost Verification can be verified by coordinating with the State Systems Manager
from Roadway Systems Section of NDOT. (Currently Patty Shinault, Kaitlin Cortes is an alternate).
A Traffic Control Matrix should be included in the Traffic Control Plans which typically includes bid item
numbers, item descriptions, and a quantity per phase breakdown.
8.2.
Signing Plans
8.2.1.
Required Information
4. Crash Data. Request Crash (crashinforequests@dot.nv.gov) and Carcass (Noel Haycock) data for
installations or removals of wildlife and livestock signing. Coordinate with Nova Simpson for any case of
wildlife or livestock signing.
5. Special Structure Details. Overhead signs that need a structure with dimensions beyond the available
standard designs will require a special structure design. Full details of each special structure design will be
required.
Plans must be prepared using the English unit system. Sign removal sheets and signing plan sheets are typically
prepared at a scale of 1 inch = 100 feet at a plan sheet size of 11 inches by 17 inches.
6. Wildlife Migration Information: Wildlife migration information from Environmental and/or Open Range info from
District Maintenance, especially where existing signage is on the project and if any additional or reduced
signing is needed.
Sign removal sheets and signing plan sheets should include the following information (where applicable):
•
Roadway stationing
•
Pavement and paved shoulder edges
•
Curb lines, curb ramps, raised medians and islands, and painted islands or similar channelization
•
Existing signs in the project area, and the planned disposition
•
County lines
•
Labels for each sign removal, existing sign, and proposed sign installation
•
Reference ROW
•
Proposed ROW
Required Documentation
8.2.3.
List of Sheets
For a normal NDOT project, the documentation of the work to be performed will consist of the plan sheets, the
specifications, and an estimate of quantities.
The Signing Plan typically is a portion of a larger highway construction project. In such cases, the Signing Plan will be
a section of the plan for the overall improvements and listed as such in the index of sheets that appears on the title
sheet. However, at times, the Signing Plan will constitute the entire project. In those cases, items normally not
included in the Signing Plan may be added (title sheet, location sketch, traffic control, etc.).
The signing portion of a plan usually consists of the following subdivisions, which are to appear in the order listed:
1. Sign Removals
8-5
SECTION 8. PLAN PREPARATION
2. Sign Locations
8. Slope—The slope of the ground at the location of the sign structure will be displayed here. The slope will be
denoted as a ratio, for example 10:1 or 2:1. Calculations are preliminary, and field adjustments can be made if
necessary.
3. Sign Panel Details
4. Overhead Structure Details (if applicable to the project)
9. Curb and Gutter—When there is curb and gutter adjacent to the sign structure, a “Y” will be populated in this
column. If there is no curb and gutter, then place an “N” in the cell. Identifying that there is curb and gutter will
provide more information related to the surface and slope at the sign location.
5. Special Details (if applicable to the project)
6. Milepost Index
10. Panel Size—The panel size includes the width (listed first) and the height (in inches) at that specific location.
7. Sign General Notes
11. Panel Area—The panel area is the total actual square feet of the sign panel. The area is calculated
automatically in the NDOT template from the values entered in the panel size column.
8. Sign Summary
12. New Bid Item Number—Denotes the specific NDOT bid item number associated with the sign structure and
post type.
Non-Standard Items
When required, sheets may be added to the signing plans to detail non-standard items, which are defined as those
items not covered adequately by the Standard Drawings.
13. Sign No.—The sign number displays the sign code associated with the sign panel located in the MUTCD or
the Nevada Sign Supplement for all standard signs. For non-standard signs, the code “SPCL” will be used to
denote “Special” and a reference to the specific detail sheet will be included in the remarks column.
A vandalism protection detail is a typical detail that can be included with the plan set when applicable. The vandalism
protection is used on overhead sign structures in urban areas.
8.2.4.
14. Panel Size (Removals)—The panel size includes the width and the height (in inches) at that specific location
for sign removals only.
Format and Scale
15. Panel Area (Removals)—The panel area is the total actual square feet of the sign panel for sign removals
only.
Prepare the plan sheets on a standard plan format. The scale must be such that all details are clear and legible.
Prepare the signing plans at a scale of no less than 1 inch = 100 feet. Display the proposed signing work with a
weight = 2, proposed roadway and supporting elements with a weight = 1, and existing elements and background with
a weight = 0. Arrange the signing callouts to avoid design linework and other conflicts for callout visibility. If
necessary, mask the design linework behind the callouts to enhance visibility.
8.2.5.
16. Removal Bid Item Number—Denotes the specific NDOT bid item number associated with the removal of the
specific sign structure and post type.
17. Sign Message—The sign message is a description of the text and symbols that display on the sign panel.
18. Sign Station—The sign station details the location of the sign along the roadway by calling out the alignment
name and the associated station to the nearest foot.
Sign Summary
The sign summary will include details for all sign removal and installation locations, including sign panel size, color,
legend, number of sign posts, sign post and base types, mounting height, sign messages, and stationing. The sign
summary is located at the end of the signing plan set and will have the sheet title Sign Summary. The format of the
sign summary shall follow the standard NDOT has set. NDOT may provide (at request) the template used for the sign
summary format. The example plans at the end of this section show the standard headings for the Sign Summary, as
follows:
19. Location—Denotes which side of the roadway the sign panel is located on based on the centerline of the
alignment looking up station. This typically is displayed as “LT,” “RT,” or “OH.”
20. Sign Number (New)—For all new sign installations, this column is populated with the sign number that is
designated on the plan sheets. Sign numbering is assigned referencing the sheet number and sign number
on sheet combined (e.g., 18-1 for sign #1 on sheet #18).
21. Sign Number (Removal)—For all sign removals, this column is populated with the sign removal number that is
designated on the plan sheets. The number includes an “R,” which helps emphasize a removal. Sign
numbering is assigned referencing the sheet number and sign number on sheet combined (e.g., 9-1R for sign
#1 on sheet #9).
1. Remarks—Denotes any special comments that apply to a particular sign or location. This can range from a
comment to reference a particular sheet or noting a specific element feature. If a funding participation
boundary is applicable, the information can be noted here.
2. Brace Length—The brace length (feet) is displayed when required for a double post braced sign structure.
Calculations are preliminary, and field adjustments can be made if necessary.
8.2.6.
Review Checklists
At every design stage, the Signing design plans will need to be reviewed against the appropriate design stage
checklist. The checklists for each stage can be located in full detail in the NDOT Road Design Guide. The SSTC
Designer should compare the Signing design plans to the checklist to ensure that all required design elements have
been incorporated into the plans at the appropriate stage. Any variances between the Signing design plans and the
checklist should be resolved, or a written explanation provided for the variance, prior to the official submittal. These
design checklists need to be completed by the SSTC Designer and submitted to the NDOT Principal Traffic
Operations Engineer along with the SSTC design plans for the appropriate design stage. NDOT has developed
standard review checklists, which include:
3. Post Length (Inner)—The Inner Post Length (feet) displays the entire post length of the inner post for a double
post sign or the post length for a single post sign. The post length is measured from the top to bottom,
including the post underground (typically 1 foot). Calculations are preliminary, and field adjustments can be
made if necessary.
4. Post Length (Outer)—The Outer Post Length (feet) displays the entire post length for the outside post when
there is a double post sign. If it is a single post sign, this column remains blank. Calculations are preliminary,
and field adjustments can be made if necessary.
5. # of Posts—Denotes the number of posts of the sign structure.
6. Type and Size—Describes the type and size of the sign post used; for example, 3” Round Post or 2.5” SQ 12
Gage Post. If the sign is on an overhead structure, it will be denoted here as “Overhead Mounted.”
7. Mounting Height—The mounting height (feet) will be displayed here for all ground-mounted sign structures.
This column will remain blank for overhead sign structure locations.
8-6
•
30% Preliminary Design Checklist
•
60% Intermediate Submittal Checklist
•
90% QAQC Submittal Checklist
•
100% Final Document Submittal Checklist
•
Project Review Checklist
SECTION 8. PLAN PREPARATION
The Project Review Checklist will need to be completed and submitted with every internal review at every stage of
design.
8.2.7.
format identical to the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction using
Microsoft Word, Arial font, size 10 (tables in font size 9). If it is necessary to specify materials or methods by brand or
trade name, refer to the Qualified Products List, detail in the Research Manual, dated 2003.
Specifications
General notes or special provisions are to be written consistently and completely, matching the current edition of the
NDOT Standard Specifications. The author of the notes should be familiar with the general format and writing style of
the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications as well as the contents of any sections directly related to the
proposed modification. The current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications should be used to the extent
possible; entire sections rarely need to be rewritten and should only be modified as necessary.
Specifications are a set of provisions and requirements that accompany (but are not included in) the plans. NDOT
specifications for the furnishing and installation of signs, sign supports, and other materials are contained in Section
627 of the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications unless otherwise specified.
The special provisions should include only information that is not already covered in the current edition of the NDOT
Standard Specifications or current specification pull sheets. Copies of product brochures or vendor specifications
usually will not be accepted.
A common problem occurs when revising, deleting, or replacing a portion of a standard specification. It can become
unclear if the remaining portion of the specification still applies. Accordingly, if a clause needs to be revised, deleted,
or replaced, then replace the entire sentence; if more than one sentence needs to be revised, deleted, or replaced,
then replace the entire paragraph. This helps ensure that the entire specification as revised makes sense.
Special provisions are developed in draft form from the Roadway Design—Specifications Section, from bid items
provided by the Lead Designer. Special provisions are written in the imperative mode (see page 1 of the current
edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications) in a format identical to the current edition of the NDOT Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. The Lead Designer and the Senior Designer must review the draft
special provisions and provide comments back to the Roadway Design—Specifications Section so that they can
develop the final special provisions.
8.2.9.
Special detail sheets should reflect the same drafting standards and level of detail as the standard construction
details. All details necessary for the construction and measurement of the subject feature must be incorporated into
the detail. Details must be complete because the contractor is obligated only to provide what is shown on the details.
These sheets are prepared to a larger scale than the plan sheets, such as 1:20 or larger (they may be labeled not to
scale). Items need to be fully dimensioned so that they are constructible, and the quantities are calculable.
If it is necessary to specify materials or methods by brand or trade name, coordinate with an NDOT Principal Traffic
Operations Engineer.
Notes must be included as required to further clarify and augment the details to control the quality of the methods and
materials used for construction. Modifying a standard construction detail should be considered instead of making a
new special detail sheet from scratch. In such cases, showing minimal alteration details in the contract and referring to
one or more standard construction details for the remaining information is permitted. However, it must be made
explicitly clear what portions of the standard details are applicable to the special situation, including any General
Notes.
The current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications should be used to the greatest extent possible; entire
sections rarely need to be rewritten and should only be modified as necessary.
The current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications is formatted using a three-component number, e.g.,
623.03.01. The first three digits represent the section number, which encompasses a general group of work units. For
this example, it is Section 627, Permanent Signs. The next two digits represent one of three subsections: 01
DESCRIPTION, 02 MATERIALS, and 03 CONSTRUCTION. The third numbers uniquely identify topics under each
subsection.
Each detail must be assigned an appropriate label. The locations where each detail applies may be noted by station
and offset if applicable. Special details must convey any conditions specific to the project or site that are necessary for
the calculation of quantities and the determination of construction methods. These details may include modified sign
structures, street illuminated signs, blank-out signs, etc.
For a new item, provisions must be written distinctly for each applicable subsection; for example, do not include
construction details under “Materials.” A common error is to describe construction methods under measurement.
The details must be fully dimensioned to provide the exact, or relative when appropriate, proportions needed to
construct the feature. Views and details must be appropriately labeled and related to other views and details.
Materials and work units must be clearly defined with appropriate symbols and area patterning (stipple). Legends
must be provided to define area patterning (stipple) and symbols where appropriate. General Notes must be used as
necessary to control the general construction facets of the detailed feature. Notes may be placed with individual
components of the detail where the note is specific to only that part of the special detail. Charts may be used to assign
conditional values to variables within the detail and to provide supporting information needed for construction.
It is essential to know and understand the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications to revise them. The
preferred method of editing is to obtain the electronic file for the section in question and modify using strikeout and
highlighting. Otherwise, language such as “Delete the first paragraph of 211.03.03 and replace with ‘…........’” may be
used.
A common problem occurs when revising, deleting, or replacing a portion of a standard specification. It can become
unclear if the remaining portion of the specification still applies. Accordingly, if a clause needs to be revised, deleted,
or replaced, then replace the entire sentence; if more than one sentence needs to be revised, deleted, or replaced,
then replace the entire paragraph. This helps ensure that the entire specification as revised makes sense.
8.2.8.
Special Details
Appendix D contains a set of Example Signing Design Plans and Sheets. These plans contain all the information to
develop a set of signing plans, including:
General Notes
General Notes can be included in the plans as necessary and should be limited to explanations required to clarify
details of the proposed work that are not satisfactorily covered in the Specifications, Supplemental Specifications,
Standard Construction Drawings, or elsewhere in the plans. General Notes also are used commonly for standard bid
items that require supplemental information not otherwise shown in the plans or specifications, such as the specific
devices that are to be installed or the method of maintaining the existing device. When a pay item varies from the
standard definition to the point that it becomes an “as per plan” item, or an “item special” is used to cover work for
which no standard item exists, then a Plan Note is required to define the work and materials that are included in the
price bid for that particular item.
When notes are submitted in draft form (intended for direct insertion as a Special Provision into the contract), they
must be written in the imperative mode (see page 1 of the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications) in a
8-7
•
Sign Removals
•
Sign Locations
•
Sign Details
•
Overhead Structure Details
•
Special Details (e.g., Vandalism Protection)
•
Milepost Index
•
Sign General Notes
SECTION 8. PLAN PREPARATION
•
1. Striping Removals (if applicable)
Sign Summary
8.3.
Striping Plans
8.3.1.
Required Information
2. Permanent Striping
Non-Standard Items
When required, sheets may be added to the striping plans to detail non-standard items, which are defined as those
items not covered adequately by the Standard Drawings.
Plans must be prepared using the English unit system. Striping removal sheets and striping plan sheets typically are
prepared at a scale of 1 inch = 100 feet, at a plan sheet size of 11 inches by 17 inches.
8.3.4.
Striping removal sheets and striping plan sheets should include the following information (where applicable):
Format and Scale
Prepare the plan sheets on a standard plan format. The scale must be such that all details are clear and legible.
Prepare the striping plans at a scale of no less than 1 inch = 100 feet. Display the proposed striping work with a
weight = 2, and existing elements and background with a weight = 0. Arrange the striping callouts to avoid design
linework for callout visibility. If necessary, mask the design linework behind the callouts to enhance visibility.
•
Roadway stationing, alignment information, and tick marks with the alignment line turned off; the alignment
line may be mistaken for proposed striping and is, therefore, turned off for clarity
•
Pavement and paved shoulder edges
•
The beginning and the end of the tapers used at the start of each deceleration lane
•
The end of each acceleration lane
•
Labels for each striping removal and proposed striping installation
•
Lane dimension annotation
•
Plan notes: if there are notes specific to the sheet that are needed to describe a special circumstance on that
sheet, they should be included on the sheet, rather than on the Notes Sheet
•
Begin and End Project, along with work limits for the mainline and for each crossroad for “stand-alone”
projects
•
Match lines along the centerline of any roadway should be avoided; reference the prior and next sheet where
the break occurs to the next sheet
•
Station equations; show the station equations along lines of survey, between centerline of route and baselines
of roadways, crossings between routes and intersections of roadways; match lines are preferred to “break
lines”
•
30% Preliminary Design Checklist
•
60% Intermediate Submittal Checklist
•
The north arrow (green, color 18), which appears on all sheets
•
90% QAQC Submittal Checklist
•
Mainline roadway horizontal orientation on the plan sheet; typically, the State Highway should be designated
as the mainline
•
100% Final Document Submittal Checklist
•
Reference to the control line
•
Project Review Checklist
•
Access points
8.3.2.
8.3.5.
There are currently no schedules required as part of the Striping plan set. Striping item numbers and quantities will be
populated in an estimate, but not included in the plan set.
8.3.6.
Review Checklists
At every design stage, the Striping design plans will need to be reviewed against the appropriate design stage
checklist. The checklists for each stage can be located in full detail in the NDOT Road Design Guide. The SSTC
Designer should compare the Striping design plans to the checklist to ensure that all required design elements have
been incorporated into the plans at the appropriate stage. Any variances between the Striping design plans and the
checklist should be resolved, or a written explanation provided for the variance, prior to the official submittal. These
design checklists need to be completed by the SSTC Designer and submitted to the NDOT Principal Traffic
Operations Engineer along with the SSTC design plans for the appropriate design stage. NDOT has developed
standard review checklists, which include:
The Project Review Checklist will need to be completed and submitted with every internal review at every stage of
design.
Required Documentation
8.3.7.
No additional documentation is required to support the Striping Removal or Striping plans.
8.3.3.
Striping Schedules
Specifications
Specifications are a set of provisions and requirements that accompany (but are not included in) the plans. NDOT
specifications for the supplying and installation of permanent painted pavement markings, pavement markers, and
pavement marking film are contained in Sections 632, 633, and 634 of the current edition of the NDOT Standard
Specifications, respectively.
List of Sheets
For a normal NDOT project, the documentation of the work to be performed will consist of the plan sheets, the special
provisions, and an estimate of quantities.
The special provisions should include only information that is not already covered in the current edition of the NDOT
Standard Specifications or current specification pull sheets. Copies of product brochures or vendor specifications
usually will not be accepted.
The Striping Plan usually is a portion of a larger highway construction project. In such cases, the Striping Plan will be
a section of the plan for the overall improvement and listed as such in the index of sheets that appears on the title
sheet. However, at times, the Striping Plan will constitute the entire project. In those cases, items normally not
included in the Striping Plan may be added (title sheet, location sketch, traffic control, etc.).
Special provisions are developed in draft form by the Roadway Design—Specifications Section, from bid items
provided by the Lead Designer. Special provisions are written in the imperative mode (see page 1 of the current
edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications) in a format identical to the current edition of the NDOT Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. The Lead Designer and the Senior Designer must review the draft
The striping portion of a plan usually consists of the following subdivisions, which are to appear in the order listed:
8-8
SECTION 8. PLAN PREPARATION
8.3.9.
special provisions and provide comments back to the Roadway Design—Specifications Section so that they can
develop the final special provisions.
Special Details
Special detail sheets should reflect the same drafting standards and level of detail as the standard construction
details. All details necessary for the construction and measurement of the subject feature must be incorporated into
the sheets. Details must be complete because the contractor is obligated only to provide what is shown on the details.
These sheets are prepared to a larger scale than the plan sheets, such as 1:20 or larger (they may be labeled not to
scale). Items need to be fully dimensioned so that they are constructible, and the quantities are calculable.
If it is necessary to specify materials or methods by brand or trade name, coordinate with an NDOT Principal Traffic
Operations Engineer.
The current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications should be used to the greatest extent possible; entire
sections rarely need to be rewritten and should only be modified as necessary.
Notes must be included as required to further clarify and augment the details to control the quality of the methods and
materials used for construction. Modifying a standard construction detail should be considered instead of making a
new special detail sheet from scratch. In such cases, showing minimal alteration details in the contract and referring to
one or more standard construction details for the remaining information is permitted. However, it must be made
explicitly clear what portions of the standard details are applicable to the special situation, including any General
Notes.
The current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications is formatted using a three-component number, e.g.,
623.03.01. The first three digits represent the section number, which encompasses a general group of work units. For
this example, it is Section 632—Permanent Painted Pavement Markings, Section 633—Pavement Markers, or Section
634—Pavement Marking Film. The next two digits represent one of three subsections: 01 = DESCRIPTION, 02 =
MATERIALS, and 03 = CONSTRUCTION. The third numbers uniquely identify topics under each subsection.
Each detail must be assigned an appropriate label. The locations where each detail applies may be noted by station
and offset if applicable. Special details must convey any conditions specific to the project or site that are necessary for
the calculation of quantities and the determination of construction methods. These details may include modified
striping, pavement markers, and special pavement markings.
For a new item, provisions must be written distinctly for each applicable subsection; for example, do not include
construction details under “Materials.” A common error is to describe construction methods under measurement.
It is essential to know and understand the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications to revise them. The
preferred method of editing is to obtain the electronic file for the section in question and modify using strikeout and
highlighting. Otherwise, language such as “Delete the first paragraph of 211.03.03 and replace with ‘….......’” may be
used.
A common problem occurs when revising, deleting, or replacing a portion of a standard specification. It can become
unclear if the remaining portion of the specification still applies. Accordingly, if a clause needs to be revised, deleted,
or replaced, then replace the entire sentence; if more than one sentence needs to be revised, deleted, or replaced,
then replace the entire paragraph. This helps ensure that the entire specification as revised makes sense.
The details must be fully dimensioned to provide the exact, or relative when appropriate, proportions needed to
construct the feature. Views and details must be appropriately labeled and related to other views and details.
Materials and work units must be clearly defined with appropriate symbols and area patterning (stipple). Legends
must be provided to define area patterning (stipple) and symbols where appropriate. General Notes must be used as
necessary to control the general construction facets of the detailed feature. Notes may be placed with individual
components of the detail where the note is specific to only that part of the special detail. Charts may be used to assign
conditional values to variables within the detail and to provide supporting information needed for construction.
8.3.8.
Appendix E contains a set of Example Striping Design Plans and Sheets. These plans contain all the information to
develop a set of striping plans, including:
General Notes
General Notes can be included in the plans as necessary and should be limited to explanations required to clarify
details of the proposed work that are not satisfactorily covered in the Specifications, Supplemental Specifications,
Standard Construction Drawings, or elsewhere in the plans. General Notes also are used commonly for standard bid
items that require supplemental information not otherwise shown in the plans or specifications, such as the specific
devices that are to be installed or the method of maintaining the existing device. When a pay item varies from the
standard definition to the point that it becomes an “as per plan” item, or an “item special” is used to cover work for
which no standard item exists, a Plan Note is required to define the work and materials that are included in the price
bid for that particular item.
When notes are submitted in draft form (intended for direct insertion as a Special Provision into the contract), they
must be written in the imperative mode (see page 1 of the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications) in a
format identical to the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction using
Microsoft Word, Universal font, size 11 (tables in font size 9). If it is necessary to specify materials or methods by
brand or trade name, refer to the Product Evaluation Program detailed in Chapter 2 of the NDOT Research Manual.
•
Striping Removals
•
Permanent Striping Plans
8.4.
Traffic Control Plans
8.4.1.
Required Information
Plans must be prepared using the English unit system. Traffic Control plan sheets typically are prepared at a scale of
1 inch = 100 feet, at a plan sheet size of 11 inches by 17 inches.
Traffic Control plan sheets should include the following information (where applicable):
General notes or special provisions are to be written consistently and completely, matching the current edition of the
NDOT Standard Specifications. The author of the notes should be familiar with the general format and writing style of
the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications, as well as the contents of any sections directly related to the
proposed modification. The current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications should be used to the greatest extent
possible; entire sections rarely need to be rewritten and should only be modified as necessary.
A common problem occurs when revising, deleting, or replacing a portion of a standard specification. It can become
unclear if the remaining portion of the specification still applies. Accordingly, if a clause needs to be revised, deleted,
or replaced, then replace the entire sentence; if more than one sentence needs to be revised, deleted, or replaced,
then replace the entire paragraph. This helps ensure that the entire specification as revised makes sense.
8-9
•
Roadway stationing
•
Pavement, paved shoulder edges, and temporary pavement
•
Curb lines, curb ramps, raised medians and islands, and painted islands or similar channelization (both
existing and proposed infrastructure)
•
Begin and end station and offset details for striping, including dimensions (lane tapers, shoulder tapers, lane
shifts, and barrier rail flares). Station and offsets are referenced from the alignment control line with a “plus”
station and offset
•
The beginning and the end of the tapers used at the start of each deceleration and acceleration lane
•
Bridge structures and retaining walls, including pier and abutment locations, and length of approach slabs;
include structure number when appropriate
SECTION 8. PLAN PREPARATION
•
Labels for each temporary sign placement, including sign designation and size, station, and side of road (i.e.,
LT or RT)
•
Reference existing and proposed ROW, temporary easements, and construction easements
•
Guardrails, temporary barriers, and permanent barriers
•
Plan notes: if there are notes specific to the sheet that are needed to describe a special circumstance on that
sheet, they should be included on the sheet, rather than on the General Notes Sheet
•
Legend, including symbols for traffic control devices and shading for phases and work zones
•
Colors and shading to represent various construction phases and work zone areas during construction
•
Match lines along the centerline of any roadway should be avoided; reference the prior and next sheet where
the break occurs to the next sheet
•
Match lines and break lines are used for spacing and sheet formatting
•
Proposed trees in areas adjacent to the proposed signs if landscaping is part of the project
•
Existing features appear in green; the north arrow (green, color 18) appears on all sheets
•
Mainline roadway horizontal orientation on the plan sheet; typically, the State Highway should be designated
as the mainline
•
Reference to the control line
•
Public and construction accesses entering the roadway
•
Direction of traffic
•
Typical cross sections
•
Temporary striping
•
Temporary signals, temporary walls, temporary lighting, and temporary drainage
6. Detour Plan (if applicable)
Non-Standard Items
When required, sheets may be added to the Traffic Control Plan to detail non-standard items, which are defined as
those items not covered adequately by the Standard Drawings.
8.4.4.
Prepare the plan sheets on a standard plan format. The scale must be such that all details are clear and legible.
Prepare the traffic control plan sheets at a scale of no less than 1 inch = 100 feet. Display the proposed Traffic Control
linework with a weight = 2, proposed roadway and supporting elements with a weight = 1, and existing elements and
background with a weight = 0. Arrange the callouts to avoid design linework for callout visibility. If necessary, mask
the design linework behind the callouts to enhance visibility. The scale for phasing diagrams, advanced signing, and
detour sheets are not standard and can vary based on capturing the desired area needed to provide the required
information.
8.4.5.
8.4.6.
Review Checklists
At every design stage, the Traffic Control Plans will need to be reviewed against the appropriate design stage
checklist. The checklists for each stage can be located in full detail in the NDOT Road Design Guide. The SSTC
Designer should compare the Traffic Control Plans to the checklists to ensure that all required design elements have
been incorporated into the plans at each appropriate stage. Any variances between the Traffic Control Plans and the
checklist should be resolved, or a written explanation provided for the variance, prior to the official submittal. These
design checklists need to be completed by the SSTC Designer and submitted to the NDOT Principal Traffic
Operations Engineer along with the SSTC design plans for the appropriate design stage. NDOT has developed
standard review checklists, which include:
Required Documentation
Traffic Control Lump Sum Breakdown. Many items included in traffic control tabulations are quantified as a lump
sum. A breakdown of what is included in the lump sum cost should be detailed and provided. A traffic control matrix
should be included if used for lump sum cost development or similar justifications of how costs were developed (i.e.,
assumption percentages, estimate sheet, etc.)
8.4.3.
Traffic Control Schedules
A summary of construction signs and devices is included in the Traffic Matrix sheets, located at the beginning of the
Traffic Control plan set. Construction sign tabulations in the Traffic Matrix include sign designations, messages, panel
size, and the number of uses per phase. Traffic control device tabulations in the Traffic Matrix include bid item
numbers, item descriptions, and a quantity per phase breakdown. Maximum totals are used for items that can be
reused, determining which phase has the maximum quantity. The total for items that cannot be reused between
phases are determined by adding up the quantity for all phases.
The CADD cell library that NDOT has developed for Signing drafting should be used
8.4.2.
Format and Scale
List of Sheets
For a normal NDOT project, the documentation of the work to be performed will consist of the specifications, the plan
sheets, and an estimate of quantities.
•
30% Preliminary Design Checklist
•
60% Intermediate Submittal Checklist
•
90% QAQC Submittal Checklist
•
100% Final Document Submittal Checklist
•
Project Review Checklist
The Project Review Checklist will need to be completed and submitted with every internal review at every stage of
design. The Traffic Management Plan (TMP) does not usually begin development until after the 60% review, often
after the 90% review.
The Traffic Control Plan is part of most highway construction projects. The Traffic Control Plan can be included as
part of the overall design plan set, or as a supplemental subset.
The Traffic Control Plan consists of several subdivisions, which are to appear in the order listed:
8.4.7.
1. Traffic Control Device Matrix
Specifications
Specifications are a set of provisions and requirements that accompany (but are not included in) the plans. NDOT
specifications for the accommodation of public traffic, furnishing and installation of construction signs, temporary
pavement striping tape, and temporary painted pavement markings are contained in Sections 624, 625, 635, and 636
of the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications, respectively.
2. Phasing and Staging Diagram (if applicable)
3. Advanced Signing
4. Traffic Control Plans
5. Special Sign Details (if applicable)
8-10
SECTION 8. PLAN PREPARATION
The special provisions should include only information that is not already covered in the current edition of the NDOT
Standard Specifications or current specification pull sheets. Copies of product brochures or vendor specifications
usually will not be accepted.
proposed modification. The current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications should be used to the greatest extent
possible; entire sections rarely need to be rewritten and should only be modified as necessary.
A common problem occurs when revising, deleting, or replacing a portion of a standard specification. It can become
unclear if the remaining portion of the specification still applies. Accordingly, if a clause needs to be revised, deleted,
or replaced, then replace the entire sentence; if more than one sentence needs to be revised, deleted, or replaced,
then replace the entire paragraph. This helps ensure that the entire specification as revised makes sense.
Special provisions are developed in draft form from the Roadway Design—Specifications Section, from bid items
provided by the Lead Designer. Special provisions are written in the imperative mode (see page 1 of the current
edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications) in a format identical to the current edition of the NDOT Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. The Lead Designer and the Senior Designer must review the draft
special provisions and provide comments back to the Roadway Design—Specifications Section so that they can
develop the final special provisions.
8.4.9.
Special detail sheets should reflect the same drafting standards and level of detail as the standard construction
details. All details necessary for the construction and measurement of the subject feature must be incorporated into
the detail. Details must be complete because the contractor is obligated only to provide what is shown on the details.
These sheets are prepared at a larger scale than the plan sheets, such as 1:20 or larger (they may be labeled not to
scale). Items need to be fully dimensioned so that they are constructible, and the quantities are calculable.
If it is necessary to specify materials or methods by brand or trade name, coordinate with an NDOT Principal Traffic
Operations Engineer.
The current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications should be used to the greatest extent possible; entire
sections rarely need to be rewritten and should only be modified as necessary.
Notes must be included as required to further clarify and augment the details to control the quality of the methods and
materials used for construction. Modifying a standard construction detail should be considered instead of making a
new special detail sheet from scratch. In such cases, showing minimal alteration details in the contract and referring to
one or more standard construction details for the remaining information is permitted. However, it must be made
explicitly clear what portions of the standard details are applicable to the special situation, including any general
notes.
The current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications is formatted using a three-component number, e.g.,
623.03.01. The first three digits represent the section number, which encompasses a general group of work units. For
this example, it is Section 624—Accommodations for Public Traffic, Section 625—Construction Signs, Section 635—
Temporary Pavement Striping Tape, and Section 636—Temporary Painted Pavement Markings. The next two digits
represent one of three subsections: 01 DESCRIPTION, 02 MATERIALS, and 03 CONSTRUCTION. The third
numbers uniquely identify topics under each subsection.
Each detail must be assigned an appropriate label. The locations where each detail applies may be noted by station
and offset if applicable. Special details must convey any conditions specific to the project or site that are necessary for
the calculation of quantities and the determination of construction methods.
For a new item, provisions must be distinctly written for each applicable subsection; for example, do not include
construction details under “Materials.” A common error is to describe construction methods under measurement.
The details must be fully dimensioned to provide the exact, or relative when appropriate, proportions needed to
construct the feature. Views and details must be appropriately labeled and related to other views and details.
Materials and work units must be clearly defined, with appropriate symbols and area patterning (stipple). Legends
must be provided to define area patterning (stipple) and symbols where appropriate. General notes must be used as
necessary to control the general construction facets of the detailed feature. Notes may be placed with individual
components of the detail where the note is specific to only that part of the special detail. Charts may be used to assign
conditional values to variables within the detail and to provide supporting information needed for construction.
It is essential to know and understand the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications to revise them. The
preferred method of editing is to obtain the electronic file for the section in question and modify using strikeout and
highlighting. Otherwise, language such as “Delete the first paragraph of 211.03.03 and replace with ‘…........’” may be
used.
A common problem occurs when revising, deleting, or replacing a portion of a standard specification. It can become
unclear if the remaining portion of the specification still applies. Accordingly, if a clause needs to be revised, deleted,
or replaced, then replace the entire sentence; if more than one sentence needs to be revised, deleted, or replaced,
then replace the entire paragraph. This helps ensure that the entire specification as revised makes sense.
8.4.8.
Special Details
Appendix F contains a set of Example Traffic Control Plans and Sheets. These plans contain all the information to
develop a set of Traffic Control plans, including
General Notes
General Notes can be included in the plans as necessary and should be limited to explanations required to clarify
details of the proposed work that are not satisfactorily covered in the Specifications, Supplemental Specifications,
Standard Construction Drawings, or elsewhere in the plans. General Notes also are used commonly for standard bid
items that require supplemental information not otherwise shown in the plans or specifications, such as the specific
devices that are to be installed or the method of maintaining the existing device. When a pay item varies from the
standard definition to the point that it becomes an “as per plan” item, or an “item special” is used to cover work for
which no standard item exists, a Plan Note is required to define the work and materials that are included in the price
bid for that particular item.
When notes are submitted in draft form (intended for direct insertion as a Special Provision into the contract), they
must be written in the imperative mode (see page 1 of the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications) in a
format identical to the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction using
Microsoft Word, Universal font, size 11 (tables in font size 9). If it is necessary to specify materials or methods by
brand or trade name, refer to the Product Evaluation Program detailed in Chapter 2 of the NDOT Research Manual.
General notes or special provisions are to be written consistently and completely, matching the current edition of the
NDOT Standard Specifications. The author of the notes should be familiar with the general format and writing style of
the current edition of the NDOT Standard Specifications, as well as the contents of any sections directly related to the
8-11
•
Traffic Control Device Matrix
•
Phasing and Staging Diagram
•
Advanced Signing
•
Traffic Control Plans
•
Special Sign Details
•
Detour Plans
This page intentionally left blank.
A-1
APPENDIX A. SPEED REDUCTION REQUEST FORM
A-1
This page intentionally left blank.
A-2
NEVADA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
REQUEST FOR TEMPORARY SPEED REDUCTION IN WORK ZONE
EA:_________
Requestor: Name ___________________ Division/Contractor _________________ Email _______________
General information:
Posted Speed:_____ mph
Route 1 _______ County _______
Route 2 _______ County______
MP Range ____ - ____
MP Range ____ - ____
Proposed Speed:_____ mph
Route 3 _______ County______
MP Range ____ - ____
Project Description:
Reasons for Speed Reductions:
Night Work
Longitudinal drop-offs
Flagger/Stop Condition
Temp Signal
Workers adjacent to live traffic
Lane closures
Lane Shifts
Construction / False Work over Road
Temporary pavement
Mitigation Strategies:
This project will include a Uniform Traffic Control Officer and XX speed feedback signs to
increase compliance with posted speed. XX CMS, ..., and balloon lighting will increase driver
awareness in the work zone. The work zone will be protected by XX truck mounted attenuators.
# Changeable Message Signs (CMS) ______
# Speed Feedback Signs ______
# Truck Mounted Attenuators ______
# Temp. Impact Attenuators ______
Explanation of Smart Work Zone
TMP Team:
~ For Traffic Operations only – Approvals ~
Recommended:
_______________
Comments:
Assistant Chief Comments:
Rodney D. Schilling, P.E. – Chief of Traffic Operations
A-3
016-001
Rev. 05/2022
This page intentionally left blank.
A-4
APPENDIX B. NDOT TEMPORARY RUMBLE STRIPS TYPICAL APPLICATION DETAIL
B-1
This page intentionally left blank.
B-2
Signs are for illustrative purposes only. Signs
GENERAL NOTES
required may vary depending on the TCP, NDOT
Typical Application, or project specific details
for the project.
1.
Temporary Rumble Strips shall be placed in an
array. An array will consist of a single group, or set,
of rumble strips.
2.
C
C
Each Rumble Strip Array should consist of a
minimum of three rumble strips placed transverse
Shldr. Taper
C
across the lane at locations shown. The spacing
within an array should be according to Table 2.
3.
The "RUMBLE STRIPS AHEAD" sign should
be located after the "ROAD WORK AHEAD" sign
and spaced as shown. If traffic is observed to be queuing,
C
or is expected to queue beyond the Rumble Strips, the
C
B
C
00
AHEAD
CLOSED
W13-1
"ROAD WORK AHEAD," and "RUMBLE STRIPS
C
AHEAD" signs along with the Rumble Strip Array may
be located upstream of the "ROAD WORK AHEAD"
C
C
A
sign as necessary to provide needed warning.
RI
GHT LANE
C
MPH
XX
C
XX MPH
C
AHEAD
WNV17-1
C
•C
R2-1
W3-5A
W20-1
C
C
‚C
SPEED ZONE
W ORK
ROAD
AHEAD
DOUBLE
PENALTY
I
N W ORK
ZONES
BEGI
N
W ORK ZONE
*
WNV16-2
C
D
C
C
C
‚C
C
C
A
D
C
D
4.
advance warning signs.
W20-5
W4-2(R)
5.
* *
* * *
Removal of the Temporary Rumble Strips
should be accomplished before removing the
Temporary Rumble Strips should not be used
on horizontal curves, loose gravel, sofr or bleeding
*
asphalt, heavily rutted pavements or unpaved surfaces.
END
W ORK ZONE
WNV16-3
6.
MULTI LANE
Temporary Rumble Strips shall be installed and
maintained as per manufacturer's recommendations.
7.
This standard sheet shall be used in
conjunction with other appropriate TCP standards,
NDOT typical application or project specific
details.
C
8.
Rumble Strips should not be used on lanes
with more than 2 lanes per direction, or roads with
AADT in excess of 10,000.
9.
Rumble Strip Arrays should be used at a
C
C
C
D
C
C
LIMIT XX" or "XX MPH SPEED ZONE AHEAD"
instead of "ONE LANE ROAD" sign when (optional)
speed reduction is used.
A
C
C
B
10.
B
TO
STOP
PREPARE
ROAD
AHEAD
ONE LANE
R2-1
•C
MPH
XX
C
AHEAD
XX MPH
W3-5A
C
00
C
‚C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
‚C
SPEED ZONE
ROAD
C
AHEAD
W ORK
DELAY
PO SSI
BLE
WNV16-2
WNV17-1 WNV16-4 W20-1
C
C
D
C
A
30 M I
NUTE
DOUBLE
PENALTY
I
N W ORK
ZONES
BEGI
N
W ORK ZONE
*
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
TYP
distance D (see Table 1) in advance of "SPEED
Rumble Strips used shall be rated for speeds
up to 80 MPH, be useable without adhesive, weigh
at least 80 lbs, be rated for surface temperature up to
180 degrees, and be at least 10 inches wide.
W13-1
W20-4
W20-7A
WNV29-1
RNV30-1
TWO LANE - TWO WAY
LEGEND:
TABLE 1
TABLE 2
- WORK AREA
Approximate distance
Distance (D) between
- CHANNELIZING DEVICES
Speed
Array and Warning Signs
Speed
between strips within
an Array
STATE OF NEVADA
- ARROW BOARD
< 40 MPH
- TEMPORARY RUMBLE STRIP ARRAY
< 40 MPH
120'
> 40 MPH &
10'
> 40 MPH &
160'
15'
< 55 MPH
< 55 MPH
* - SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET TC-1
> 55 MPH &
- FLAGGER LOCATIONS TO BE
DETERMINED BY THE FIELD ENGINEER
< 65 MPH
> 65 MPH
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TYPICAL RUMBLE STRIP DETAIL
> 55 MPH &
200'
< 65 MPH
> 65 MPH
400'
20'
35'
SEE SHEET TC-1 FOR TABLES AND NOTES
REVISED
B-3
SEPT '22
This page intentionally left blank.
B-4
APPENDIX C. TTC TYPICAL APPLICATION FIGURES
C-1
This page intentionally left blank.
C-2
Advance Warning Sign Spacing
Longitudinal Buffer Length
Distance Between Signs (ft)
Speed
(mph)
0-20
A
B
200
200
25-30
200
300
300
35-40
300
400
400
45-50
400
600
600
55-80
600
1000
1600
2640
C
Note: see Figure 6-2 for reference
Merging Taper Length and Channelizing Device Spacing
Speed
(mph)
Length for Merging Taper (L)
Lane Width
Taper and Channelization
Device Spacing (ft)
Speed
(mph)
20
Longitudinal Buffer Space
Length (ft)
115
25
155
30
200
35
250
40
305
45
360
50
425
55
495
60
570
65
645
10 ft
11 ft
12 ft
20
80
80
80
20
70
730
25
125
125
125
25
75
820
30
150
180
180
30
80
920
35
210
245
245
35
40
280
320
320
40
45
450
495
540
45
50
500
550
600
50
55
550
605
660
55*
60
600
660
720
60*
65
650
715
780
65*
70
700
770
840
70*
75
750
825
900
75*
80
800
Note: see Figure 6-2 for reference
880
960
80*
*On rural interstate highways where the speed limit is 55 mph or greater, the channelization device spacing (except for tapers) may
be increased to 80 feet. When increased device spacing is used, three drums shall be placed diagonally at one-half mile
increments to indicate the lane is closed.
C-3
Figure C-8-1. Multi-Lane Highway, One-Lane Closure
Figure C-8-2. Two-Lane, Two-Way Highway, One-Lane Closure
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-2
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-2
C-4
Figure C-8-3. Multi-Lane Highway, One-Lane Closure with Temporary Barrier Rail
Figure C-8-4. Two-Lane, Two-Way Highway, One-Lane Closure with Temporary Barrier Rail
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-3
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-3
C-5
Figure C-8-5. Multi-Lane Closure
Figure C-8-6. Half-Road Closure on Multi-Lane Undivided Road
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-5
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-4
C-6
Figure C-8-7. Multi-Lane Shift
Figure C-8-8. Median Crossover (Multi-Lane Divided Highway)
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-6
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-7
C-7
Figure C-8-9. Exit Ramp Opening
Figure C-8-10. Shoulder Work
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-8
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-8
C-8
Figure C-8-11. Multi-Lane Highway Haul Road
Figure C-8-12. Two-Lane, Two-Way Highway Haul Road
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-9
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-9
C-9
Figure C-8-13. Loose Grave/Dust Hazard
Figure C-8-14. Roadway Bumps
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-14
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-14
C-10
Figure C-8-15. Shoulder Drop-Off
Figure C-8-16. Uneven Lanes
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-14
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-14
C-11
Figure C-8-17. Intersection Outside Lane Work with Flaggers
Figure C-8-18. Intersection Outside Lane Work Without Flaggers
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-18
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-15
C-12
Figure C-8-19. Intersection with Median Island with Flaggers
Figure C-8-20. Intersection with Median Island Without Flaggers
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-19
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-16
C-13
Figure C-8-21. Intersection with No Island with Flaggers
Figure C-8-22. Intersection with No Island Without Flaggers
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-20
Source: NDOT Standard Plans, TC-17
C-14
APPENDIX D. SIGNING PLAN EXAMPLES
D-1
This page intentionally left blank.
D-2
STATE
PROJECT NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
CLARK
A
A
TS1
A
LEGEND:
X-XR
SIGN REMOVAL
AN
NT
EN
A
R/W
DO NOT DISTURB
D
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET NUMBER-SIGN
NUMBER REMOVAL).
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT
D
D
BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
EOP
P
"ES"
45
P
s
50
s
P
P
P
"XW"
55
1305
300
1
5 SB
-1
I
295
1
"X"
1305
300
1
"XE"
295
1
5 NB
-1
I
1305
300
1
15
295
1
20
EOP
"NW"
1-2R
1-1R
¼
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
A
1.
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
R/W
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0.
P
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
STATE OF NEVADA
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
3.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
P
P PP
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
P
SIGN REMOVALS
P
P
$FI
LEL$
6:45:48 PM
5/18/2022
4.
5.
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
A
D-3
T TS2)
0 - (SEE SHEE
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
X-XR
STATE
PROJECT NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
LEGEND:
P
1.
A
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
COUNTY
CLARK
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
SHEET NO.
TS2
A
A
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
M
SIGN REMOVAL
2.
0
)
0
X
+
X
8
S
2
T
T S"
E
E "E
H
S E
N
E LI
E
(S H
C
T
A
X-XR
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
D
DO NOT DISTURB
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
P
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
s
PP
P P
MH
MH
4.
s
s
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
P
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
MH
P
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
P P
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
P
P
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
NUMBER REMOVAL).
35
X-XR
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT
D
2-3R
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET NUMBER-SIGN
1.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0.
2.
s
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
0
3
P
BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
"ES"
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
4.
(SEE SHEET TS3)
NE "R4" 16+50 MATCH LI
R/W
s
R/W
2-4R
EOP
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
5.
"R4"
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
"ES"
20
s
40
P
EOP
P
P
I-15 SB
1310
P
P
"XW"
P
P
P
1315
1320
"X"
1310
1315
EOP
1320
"NW"
"XE"
35
I-15 NB
1310
1315
1320
P
P
s
40
P
15
s
EOP
s
T TS1)
0 - (SEE SHEE
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
35
20
s
2-1R
30
52
45
2-2R
"R1"
EOP
STATE OF NEVADA
E
NG
RA
AD
RO
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
RR
UP
$FI
LEL$
6:51:30 PM
5/18/2022
P
D-4
SIGN REMOVALS
R/W
A
13-4R
SE
MA (
TC E
SH
H
LI EE
NE
T
"T TSX
P"
X)
EOP
1
3+
00
LEGEND:
s
M
A (S
T
E
X-XR
E
C
SIGN REMOVAL
H
S
H
L
I
D
DO NOT DISTURB
N EE
E
T
"N
T
S
W
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
" XX
)
4
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET NUMBER-SIGN
3
X-XR
+0
NUMBER REMOVAL).
0
70
3-9R
M
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
0
)
5
X
X 4+
S 3
T
"
T W
E
E "S
H
S E
E LIN
E
(S H
C
T
A
A
A
"SW"
EOP
1.
NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
"NW"
3-11R
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
3.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
s
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
s
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0.
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
"R4"
3.
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
5.
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
"R3"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
10
3-10R
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
"TP"
"EN"
7
5
EOP
s
P
"XW"
P
P
I-15 SB
1325
P
P
1330
1335
"X"
EOP
1325
1330
1335
1330
1335
M ATC H
5.
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00 (SEE
SHEET
TS4 )
25
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
s
(SEE SHEET TS2)
NE "R4" 16+50 MATCH LI
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
4.
"XE"
I-15 NB
1325
3-12R
P
P
15
s
P
D
P
EOP
EOP
EOP
s
3-6R
s
3-15R
3-14R
s
3-4R
93
3-13R
3-8R
3-3R
s
s
"R2"
s
s
s
25
s
s
"R1"
15
s
s
s
3-2R
C AL
PI
TRO
W AY
K
R
PA
$FI
LEL$
STATE OF NEVADA
93
6:55:48 PM
D
s
s
3-7R
5
D
3-5R
5/18/2022
3-16R
15
3-1R
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
SIGN REMOVALS
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
A
s
R/W
D-5
D
SHEET NO.
TS3
A
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
D
STATE
NEVADA
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
X-XR
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET NUMBER-SIGN
1.
NUMBER REMOVAL).
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TS4
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT
D
D
PROJECT NO.
A
LEGEND:
X-XR
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
STATE
NEVADA
SIGN REMOVAL
2.
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
3.
DO NOT DISTURB
A
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
4-2R
A
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
2.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
s
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
3.
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
s
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
4.
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
5.
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-
N
ï»
=2
¿E
68
St
=
06
a= 81
16
22
Of
3
8.
56
f=0 0+
58
0.
7
.5
21
.68 7.
97 6
La
m
'
Lo
t=
n=
1
36
î€
15
€1
î€
6'
€3
'
LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
EOP
R/W
LO DGI
NG
P
52
FO O D
D
"R3"
NG
CAM PI
D
P
"SW"
4-3R
1
5
25
P
P
s
EOP
P
s
s
s
"XW"
P
P
20
P
s
P
s
I-15 SB
1340
1345
1350
"X"
1340
1345
EOP
1350
M ATC H
"XE"
I-15 NB
1340
1345
1350
P
s
P
P
P
s
s s
EOP
P
P
80
P
D
EOP
4-1R
"EN"
90
20
85
25
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
R/W
P
A
D-6
SIGN REMOVALS
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
$FI
LEL$
6:57:48 PM
5/18/2022
"R2"
A
M ATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00 (SEE SHEET TS5)
T 50
EXI
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00 (SEE
SHEET
TS3)
30
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
SHEET NO.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
A
LEGEND:
2.
X-XR
1.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
2.
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
X-XR
A
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
DO NOT DISTURB
D
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
SIGN REMOVAL
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET
NUMBER-SIGN NUMBER REMOVAL).
4.
3.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND
D
WILL NOT BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN
5.
(COLOR 18) AND NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
4.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
5.
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
R/W
P
P
45
P
D
D
5-1R
MATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00 (SEE SHEET TS4 )
D
EOP
s
"SW"
P
s
P
"XW"
15
I-15 SB
1355
1360
1365
"X"
EOP
1355
1360
1365
"XE"
1355
I-15 NB
1360
1365
105
P
P
00
1
EOP
D
5-2R
95
"EN"
R/W
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
SIGN REMOVALS
$FI
LEL$
6:59:44
PM
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
5/18/2022
TS5
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
A
D-7
A
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
LEGEND:
X-X
SINGLE POST SIGN
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
A
SHEET NO.
TS6
A
A
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET NUMBER-SIGN
NUMBER).
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT
TWO POST SIGN
D
BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
TWO POST BRACED SIGN
CANTILEVER STRUCTURE
SIGN BRIDGE STRUCTURE
BUTTERFLY STRUCTURE
XX-X
DO NOT DISTURB
15
MATC H LI
NE "ES" 58+00 - (SEE SHEET
TS7)
93
D
SIGN INSTALLATION
"XW"
D
EOP
s
P
s
"ES"
D
60
65
s
1
295
290
1
s
"X"
70
5 SB
-1
I
285
1
290
1
EOP
s
280
1
285
1
"XE"
290
1
5 NB
-1
I
280
1
285
1
s
s
s
s
s
s
280
1
EOP
D
6-3
D
6-2
6-1
R/W
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0. ALL
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL USE WT=1.
2.
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
STATE OF NEVADA
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
3.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
5.
$FI
LEL$
7:26:49 PM
5/18/2022
4.
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SIGN LOCATIONS
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY
140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
D-8
A
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
STATE
PROJECT NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET NUMBER-SIGN
X-X
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
CLARK
A
A
TS7
A
NUMBER).
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT
BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
R/W
NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
T TS8)
0 - (SEE SHEE
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
D
EOP
EOP
D
EOP
P
TS6)
SHEET
"ES"
45
P
50
s
P
"XW"
P
55
P
1305
EE
0 - (S
" 58+0
NE "ES
I
L
H
C
T
MA
300
1
5 SB
-1
I
"X"
295
1
EOP
1305
300
1
"XE"
295
1
5 NB
-1
I
1305
300
1
15
295
1
20
EOP
"NW"
EOP
7-1
7-2
45
R/W
LEGEND:
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
A
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0. ALL
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
SINGLE POST SIGN
PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL USE WT=1.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
TWO POST SIGN
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
TWO POST BRACED SIGN
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
CANTILEVER STRUCTURE
STATE OF NEVADA
3.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
SIGN BRIDGE STRUCTURE
4.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
$FI
LEL$
7:37:20 PM
5/18/2022
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
BUTTERFLY STRUCTURE
5.
5.
XX-X
SIGN INSTALLATION
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
D
DO NOT DISTURB
D-9
SIGN LOCATIONS
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY
140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
A
LEGEND:
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TS8
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
M
A
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0. ALL
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL USE WT=1.
TWO POST SIGN
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
2.
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
TWO POST BRACED SIGN
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
CANTILEVER STRUCTURE
3.
"ES"
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
3.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
SIGN BRIDGE STRUCTURE
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
BUTTERFLY STRUCTURE
4.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
A
)
X 00
X
+
S
8
T
2
T S"
E
E "E
H
S E
N
E LI
E
(S H
C
T
A
SINGLE POST SIGN
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
STATE
NEVADA
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
SIGN INSTALLATION
XX-X
5.
5.
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY
140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
s
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
D
DO NOT DISTURB
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
0
3
P
R/W
s
(SEE SHEET TS9)
NE "R4" 16+50 MATCH LI
8-4
s
R/W
"R4"
EOP
P
8-1
P
P
EOP
20
s
40
P
EOP
"XW"
"ES"
P
P
I-15 SB
1310
P
P
P
P
P
1315
1320
"X"
"NW"
EOP
1310
1315
1320
"XE"
35
I-15 NB
1310
1315
1320
P
P
s
40
P
15
EOP
s
s
EOP
20
s
T TS7)
0 - (SEE SHEE
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
35
25
8-5
30
8-2
"R1"
EOP
$FI
LEL$
7:41:49 PM
5/18/2022
X-X
52B
AD
RO
E
NG
RA
RR
UP
52A
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
8-3
STATE OF NEVADA
P
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
R/W
SIGN LOCATIONS
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET NUMBER-SIGN
NUMBER).
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
P
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT
D
BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
D-10
A
A
LEGEND:
TWO POST BRACED SIGN
CANTILEVER STRUCTURE
EOP
SIGN BRIDGE STRUCTURE
70
TWO POST SIGN
M
A (S
T
E
E
C
H
S
H
L
I
N EE
E
T
"N
T
S
W
" XX
)
4
3
+0
0
PROJECT NO.
DE-0003(139)
) 50
X
X 4+
S 3
T
"
T W
E
E "S
H
S E
N
E LI
E
(S H
C
T
A
M
SE
MA (
TC E
SH
H
LI EE
NE
T
"T TSX
P"
X)
1
3+
00
s
SINGLE POST SIGN
STATE
NEVADA
COUNTY
CLARK
A
A
"SW"
"NW"
93
EOP
9-18
15
D
SIGN INSTALLATION
DO NOT DISTURB
9-16
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
9-17
9-9
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER.
(SHEET NUMBER-SIGN NUMBER).
9-5
s
9-24
EOP
AND NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
"R3"
9-6
10
4
0
9-10
"EN"
9-13
20
15
93
9-11
P
EOP
"TP"
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
EOP
"XW"
s
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
P
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
P
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0. ALL
PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL USE WT=1.
2.
I-15 SB
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
1330
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
"X"
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
3.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
EOP
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
"XE"
4.
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
1330
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
4.
1"=100' SCALE.
5.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY
140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
1325
5.
I-15 NB
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
1330
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
s
D
P
P
EOP
15
P
9-12
9-2
93
9-4
9-8
9-14
9-19
s
9-25
s
EOP
9-20
s
s
"R2"
s
s
s
s
25
s
s
"R1"
15
9-26
s
9-3
D
C AL
PI
TRO
W AY
K
R
PA
$FI
LEL$
7:46:30 PM
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
93
D
EOP
s
s
9-7
5
9-15
15
9-1
5/18/2022
M ATC H
25
THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18)
9-23
9-22
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00 (SEE
SHEET
TS10)
9-21
"R4"
TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT BE DISTURBED.
15
(SEE SHEET TS8)
NE "R4" 16+50 MATCH LI
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE
D
EOP
s
X-X
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
SIGN LOCATIONS
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
D
s
R/W
D-11
A
TS9
A
BUTTERFLY STRUCTURE
XX-X
SHEET NO.
STATE
PROJECT NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
CLARK
TS10
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
LEGEND:
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
SINGLE POST SIGN
A
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
1.
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
TWO POST SIGN
3.
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
SIGN BRIDGE STRUCTURE
4.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PROPOSED ENTITITES SHALL USE WT=1.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
CANTILEVER STRUCTURE
A
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0. ALL
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
TWO POST BRACED SIGN
A
3.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
BUTTERFLY STRUCTURE
5.
4.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
D
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SIGN INSTALLATION
XX-X
5.
DO NOT DISTURB
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY
140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
30
10-2
"R3"
52
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00 (SEE
SHEET
TS9)
R/W
D
MATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00 (SEE SHEET TS11)
P
10-3
1
5
"SW"
25
P
P
EOP
s
P
s
s
EOP
"XW"
P
P
20
P
s
P
s
s
I-15 SB
1340
1345
1350
"X"
1340
EOP
1345
1350
M ATC H
"XE"
I-15 NB
1340
1345
1350
P
s
P
P
s
s s
P
P
EOP
P
80
P
EOP
"EN"
D
90
85
20
EOP
25
EOP
"R2"
10-1
STATE OF NEVADA
R/W
P
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET NUMBER-SIGN
NUMBER).
A
$FI
LEL$
7:49:41 PM
5/18/2022
X-X
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT
D
BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
D-12
SIGN LOCATIONS
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
A
SYMBOLOGY DESIGN NOTES
LEGEND:
X-X
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SYMBOL ANNOTATES THE SIGN NUMBER. (SHEET NUMBER-SIGN
1.
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TS11
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
NUMBER).
A
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
A
SINGLE POST SIGN
SYMBOL ANNOTATES SIGNS THAT ARE TO REMAIN AND WILL NOT
2.
BE DISTURBED. THIS SYMBOL SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
D
TWO POST SIGN
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
NOT LISTED IN THE SIGN SUMMARY.
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
TWO POST BRACED SIGN
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
CANTILEVER STRUCTURE
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
SIGN BRIDGE STRUCTURE
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
BUTTERFLY STRUCTURE
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SIGN INSTALLATION
XX-X
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
D
DO NOT DISTURB
R/W
P
P
45
r
P
11-2
D
D
D
MATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00 (SEE SHEET TS10)
EOP
s
"SW"
P
"XW"
s
P
15
I-15 SB
1355
1360
1365
"X"
EOP
1355
1360
1365
"XE"
1355
I-15 NB
1360
1365
105
P
P
00
1
D
11-4
11-3
95
11-1
"EN"
EOP
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=0. ALL
R/W
PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL USE WT=1.
STATE OF NEVADA
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
$FI
LEL$
7:53:29 PM
5/18/2022
4.
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
SIGN LOCATIONS
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
A
1"=100' SCALE.
5.
A
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY
140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
D-13
A
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
1.
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
THE TEXT SIZE FOR DIMENSIONS IN SIGNCAD SHALL BE SET AT
STATE
PROJECT NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
COUNTY
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
2.
THE GEOMETRY SCALE SHALL BE SET AT 1.5, THE MASTER
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
UNITS SHALL BE "INCH", AND FINAL TEXT SHALL BE SET AT
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
5.00.
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
3.
A
A
WHEN EXPORTING THE SIGNCAD FILE INTO MICROSTATION,
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
TS12
CLARK
0.03" WITH SCALE 1:100 BEFORE EXPORT INTO MICROSTATION.
A
2.
SHEET NO.
SIGNS SHALL BE ARRANGED BASED ON SIGN ORDER AND
ADDITIONAL SHEETS SHALL BE ADDED TO ACHIEVE SIMILAR
SPACING AS SHOWN IN THIS EXAMPLE.
*
7-1
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
STATE OF NEVADA
SIGN DETAILS
6-2
$FI
LEL$
8:39:21 PM
5/18/2022
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
A
6-1
**
* ATTACH GREEN BLANK PANEL ON THE PERMANENT SIGN PANEL
** ATTACH GREEN 52B PANEL ON THE PERMANENT SIGN PANEL OVER 52A
D-14
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
STATE
PROJECT NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
TS13
CLARK
A
A
A
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
3.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
8-3
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
*
6-3
THE TEXT SIZE FOR DIMENSIONS IN SIGNCAD SHALL BE SET AT
0.03" WITH SCALE 1:100 BEFORE EXPORT INTO MICROSTATION.
2.
WHEN EXPORTING THE SIGNCAD FILE INTO MICROSTATION,
THE GEOMETRY SCALE SHALL BE SET AT 1.5, THE MASTER
UNITS SHALL BE "INCH", AND FINAL TEXT SHALL BE SET AT
5.00.
3.
SIGNS SHALL BE ARRANGED BASED ON SIGN ORDER AND
ADDITIONAL SHEETS SHALL BE ADDED TO ACHIEVE SIMILAR
SPACING AS SHOWN IN THIS EXAMPLE.
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SIGN DETAILS
$FI
LEL$
8:42:23 PM
5/18/2022
10-2
10-2
A
* ATTACH GREEN 1/2 PANEL ON THE PERMANENT SIGN PANEL OVER 1/4
D-15
[NORTH] E; [Salt Lake City] E Mod; Down Arrow 16.0" 270{; Down Arrow 16.0" 270{;
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
2.
DE-0003(139)
COUNTY
2.
A
WHEN EXPORTING THE SIGNCAD FILE INTO MICROSTATION,
THE GEOMETRY SCALE SHALL BE SET AT 1.5, THE MASTER
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UNITS SHALL BE "INCH", AND FINAL TEXT SHALL BE SET AT
5.00.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
3.
SIGNS SHALL BE ARRANGED BASED ON SIGN ORDER AND
ADDITIONAL SHEETS SHALL BE ADDED TO ACHIEVE SIMILAR
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
SPACING AS SHOWN IN THIS EXAMPLE.
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
*
13-5
12
12-1
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
**
14-6
SIGN DETAILS
$FI
LEL$
8:44:22 PM
5/18/2022
14-6
A
A
* ATTACH GREEN 1/4 PANEL TO PERMANENT SIGN PANEL OVER 1/2
** ATTACH GREEN I-11 PANEL ON THE PERMANENT SIGN PANEL OVER I-515
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
D-16
SHEET NO.
TS14
CLARK
A
0.03" WITH SCALE 1:100 BEFORE EXPORT INTO MICROSTATION.
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
3.
PROJECT NO.
THE TEXT SIZE FOR DIMENSIONS IN SIGNCAD SHALL BE SET AT
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
STATE
NEVADA
A
>"X"
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
A
A
SHEET NO.
TS15
A
23.0'
11.5'
11.5'
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.7' UNDER 1"=10' SCALE.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 0.525'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 1.5'. ALL UNDER 1"=10' SCALE. WT=2.
ALL SHEET NUMBER SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
5.
8.83'
9.17'
4.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=10' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 110'X170' AREA.
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
PROTECTION
FOR DETAILS)
EXISTING
GUARDRAIL
POST
TYPE III
11.36'
6.50'
0.33'
EXISTING
CABLE
BARRIER
20.20'
(SEE SHEET TS19
29.03'
VANDALISM
1.33'
DASHED (LINE STYLE 2) UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
3.33'
12.0'
12.0'
12.0'
21.5'
9.9'
THRU LANE
THRU LANE
THRU LANE
SHLDR
MEDIAN
17.00'
PEDESTAL
12.0'
12.0'
12.0'
12.0'
SHLDR
THRU LANE
THRU LANE
THRU LANE
3.00'
DRILLED SHAFT
6-2
"X" 1289+84
BUTTERFLY SIGN STRUCTURE
(LOOKING NORTHBOUND)
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
NOTES:
1.
SEE NDOT STANDARD PLANS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
$FI
LEL$
10:14:20 PM
5/18/2022
FOR SIGN STRUCTURE DETAILS.
2.
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ELEVATIONS IN THE FIELD BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION.
SIGN STRUCTURE DETAILS
"X" 1289+84
A
D-17
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TS16
A
A
A
>"XE"
85.50'
0.33'
PROPOSED
GUARDRAIL
BASE PLATE
1.33'
20.09'
VANDALISM PROTECTION
(SEE SHEET TS19 FOR
DETAILS)
POST
TYPE VII-S
HIGH POINT
BASE PLATE
0.33'
18.44'
POST
TYPE VII-S
N CLEARANCE
18'MI
LUMINAIRE
RETRIEVAL SYSTEM
VANDALISM PROTECTION
(SEE SHEET TS19 FOR
DETAILS)
30.59'
13.33'
10.50'
17.68'
49.00'
18.81'
6.5'
6.5'
1
.
68%|
25'
3.92'
12'
12'
12'
12'
12'
12'
SHLDR
THRU LANE
THRU LANE
THRU LANE
EXIT LANE
SHLDR
25'
3.92'
WITH AN OPTION
5.29'
7-1
4.96'
"XE" 1298+00, 42.50' RT
SIGN BRIDGE STRUCTURE
(LOOKING NORTHBOUND)
3.5'
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
3.5'
1.
DRILLED SHAFT
DRILLED SHAFT
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.7' UNDER 1"=10' SCALE.
1.
DASHED LINES (LINE SYLE 4) SHALL BE USED TO SHOW
THAT ARROWS ARE CENTERED OVER THEIR ASSOCIATED
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
LANES.
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 0.525'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 1.5'. ALL UNDER 1"=10' SCALE. WT=2.
1.
$FI
LEL$
10:16:58 PM
5/18/2022
NOTES:
SEE NDOT STANDARD PLANS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
4.
CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ELEVATIONS IN THE FIELD BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
DASHED (LINE STYLE 2) UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
ALL SHEET NUMBER SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
FOR SIGN STRUCTURE DETAILS.
2.
2.
A
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=10' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 110'X170' AREA.
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
SIGN STRUCTURE DETAILS
"XE" 1298+00
A
D-18
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TS17
A
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
A
A
DASHED LINES (LINE SYLE 4) SHALL BE USED TO SHOW
THAT ARROWS ARE CENTERED OVER THEIR ASSOCIATED
LANES.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.7' UNDER 1"=10' SCALE.
2.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
DASHED (LINE STYLE 2) UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 0.525'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 1.5'. ALL UNDER 1"=10' SCALE. WT=2.
>"XE"
ALL SHEET NUMBER SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
29'
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=10' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
18'
18'MI
N CLEARANCE
EXISTING
BARRIER RAIL
HIGH POINT
27.53'
7.50'
1.33'
8.00'
SHEET WILL HAVE 110'X170' AREA.
VANDALISM PROTECTION (SEE
SHEET TS19 FOR DETAILS)
19.53'
5.
POST
TYPE V
BASE PLATE
0.33'
4.
EXISTING
BARRIER RAIL
6.5'
1
.
91
%|
12'
12'
12'
12'
12'
10'
SHLDR
THRU LANE
THRU LANE
THRU LANE
EXIT LANE
SHLDR
PEDESTAL
22'
2.33'
3.58'
3'
DRILLED SHAFT
8-3
"XE" 1314+55, 37.51' RT
CANTILEVER STRUCTURE
(LOOKING NORTHBOUND)
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
NOTES:
SEE NDOT STANDARD PLANS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
A
2.
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
FOR SIGN STRUCTURE DETAILS.
$FI
LEL$
10:21:19 PM
5/18/2022
1.
CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ELEVATIONS IN THE FIELD BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION.
SIGN STRUCTURE DETAILS
"XE" 1314+55
A
D-19
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TS18
A
A
A
DASHED LINES (LINE SYLE 4) SHALL BE USED TO SHOW
THAT ARROWS ARE CENTERED OVER THEIR ASSOCIATED
LANES.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.7' UNDER 1"=10' SCALE.
2.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18) AND
DASHED (LINE STYLE 2) UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
>"R3"
AND WIDTH OF 0.525'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 1.5'. ALL UNDER 1"=10' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
34.50'
ALL SHEET NUMBER SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
5.
12.00'
10.50'
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
12.00'
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=10' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
18.52'
DETAILS)
POST
TYPE VII
0.33'
BASE PLATE
PROPOSED
BARRIER RAIL
HIGH POINT
1.33'
VANDALISM PROTECTION
(SEE SHEET TS19 FOR
18'MI
N CLEARANCE
27.35'
8.83'
9.17'
SHEET WILL HAVE 110'X170' AREA.
PROPOSED
BARRIER RAIL
6.5'
5.
1
3%|
PEDESTAL
23'
3.92'
6.0'
12.0'
12.0'
12.0'
SHLDR
THRU LANE
THRU LANE
SHLDR
2.42'
100
50
0
-50
10-2
3'
DRILLED SHAFT
"R3" 13+45, 10.50' LT
CANTILEVER STRUCTURE
(LOOKING SOUTHBOUND)
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
NOTES:
2.
PM
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
SEE NDOT STANDARD PLANS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
FOR SIGN STRUCTURE DETAILS.
$FI
LEL$
10:33:57
5/18/2022
A
1.
CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ELEVATIONS IN THE FIELD BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION.
SIGN STRUCTURE DETAILS
"R3" 13+45
A
D-20
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TS19
A
A
A
Steel Post
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
11°15'0"
(Typ.)
A
A
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.07' UNDER 1"=1' SCALE.
3.
5°37'30"
(Typ.)
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 0.0525'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 0.15'. ALL UNDER 1"=1' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBER SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=1' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 11'X17' AREA.
•" o x 1'-6" Long
Steel Rod With
Sharp End (Typ.)
Alt. w/ 90° and 45° Rods
< 6"x •"
VANDALISM PROTECTION PLAN
Steel Post
Typ.
Hole for •" o Bolt
•" o x 1'-6" Long
Steel Rod With
Sharp End (Typ.)
90°0'0"
3"x3"
45°0'0"
(Typ.)
< 6"x •"
SECTION A-A
STATE OF NEVADA
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
$FI
LEL$
10:30:33 PM
5/18/2022
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
VANDALISM PROTECTION
DETAILS
A
D-21
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TS20
A
1.
Post lengths, for all
A
A
ground mounted signs, are calculated using an assumed cross-slope at the sign
base, as indicated in the column marked "Slope" on the Summary sheet. Post lengths noted are for
estimation purposes only. Post lengths shall
be field verified and checked prior to the order of the
post by the contractor.
PROJECT DE-0003(139)
2.
Sign numbers are taken from the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (2009 & revisions),
Standard Highway Signs (2004 & rev) and Standard Highway Signs - Nevada Supplement (2006).
3.
ITEM NO.
DESCRIPTION
TOTAL
UNIT
Mounting height shall be as shown on sheet TRS-1 of NDOT Standard Plans (2020 edition), except as
noted in remarks column of Sign Summary. Post lengths for all ground mounted signs are calculated
to the nearest inch.
4.
627 0022
PERMANENT OVERHEAD SIGN PANEL, RECONSTRUCT
5
Sign installations shall conform to the requirements of the NDOT Standard Plans for Road and
Bridge Construction (2020 edition), Roadside signs.
EACH
5.
Signs shown in plans with a D indicate signs that are to remain in place (do not disturb).
They are shown for reference purposes only.
627 0110
PERMANENT OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORT STRUCTURES
1
LS
627 0130
PERMANENT OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORT STRUCTURES, REMOVE
7
EACH
627 0150
PERMANENT SIGN PANELS (OVERHEAD)
4008
SQFT
627 0160
PERMANENT SIGN PANELS (OVERHEAD)(REMOVE)
2357
SQFT
627 0190
PERMANENT SIGNS (GROUND MOUNTED)(METAL SUPPORTS)
1662
SQFT
627 0220
PERMANENT SIGN PANELS (PANELS ONLY)
36
SQFT
6.
Signs shown in plans with a R indicate signs that are to be removed.
7.
Signs shown in plans with a T indicate sign installations that are temporary.
8.
Any sign not shown in plans shall not be disturbed.
9.
All reset sign panels shall be installed on new supports.
10.
All Street Name guide signs (sign no. D3-1) shall have the same legend both sides, and shall be
mounted on the top of the sign post, parallel
11.
to the named street.
Fabrication drawings of all overhead signs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the
Contractor's order for fabrication.
627 0240
PERMANENT SIGNS, REMOVE
1666
SQFT
627 0250
PERMANENT SIGNS, REMOVE (PANELS ONLY)
214
SQFT
12.
For installation and clearance of overhead signs, see sheet TS##
13.
Each sign requiring lighting shall have individual photo-electric cell.
14.
Omit walkway on overhead signs receiving luminaire retrieval system.
15
All signs installed on a 3" round post shall use Z bar sign panel bracing. Reference TRS-4 of the
Standard Plans for details.
627 0260
PERMANENT SIGNS, RESET
25
SQFT
16.
Mounting height & distance to edge of signs on multi use path shall be as shown in MUTCD (2009).
17.
For state furnished signs shown in the sign summary, contact NDOT sign shop to arrange
fabrication and pick-up a minimum of 10 working days prior. District 2, 310 Galletti Way, Sparks
NV 89431. 775-834-8456
18.
For overhead sign replacement the cost of removing or modifying an existing sign panel frame and
manufacturing new sign panel frame, sign struts, mounting brackets, mounting hardware and any
other related work necessary to retrofit the existing sign structure and panel frame shall be
included in the bid item 627 0022 "Permanent Overhead Sign Panel, Reconstruct", each. The cost
of removing the existing sign panel shall be paid for under bid item 627 0160 "Permanent Sign
Panels (Overhead) (Remove)", sqft. The cost of the new overhead sign panel shall be paid for under
bid item 627 0150 "Permanent Sign Panels (Overhead)", sqft. The cost of resetting an existing sign
panel shall be paid for under bid item 627 0170 "Permanent Sign Panels (Overhead) (Reset)", sqft.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.07' UNDER 1"=1' SCALE.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 0.0525'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 0.15'. ALL UNDER 1"=1' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBER SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
STATE OF NEVADA
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=1' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SHEET WILL HAVE 11'X17' AREA.
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
SIGN GENERAL NOTES
& QUANTITIES
$FI
LEL$
10:37:36 PM
5/18/2022
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
A
D-22
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TS21
A
A
A
NOTES:
1.
REMOVE EXISTING MILEPOSTS AT NO DIRECT PAYMENT.
2.
MILEPOSTS SHALL BE PAID FOR UNDER BID ITEM 627 0190,
PERMANENT SIGNS (GROUND MOUNTED) (METAL SUPPORTS).
3.
SEE DM-3 OF THE NDOT STANDARD PLANS (2020) FOR
DETAILS OF MILEPOSTS.
4.
MILEPOST PANEL LOCATIONS ARE STATIONED IN THE
CARDINAL DIRECTION OF THE ROUTE AND SHALL BE
INSTALLED FOR BOTH DIRECTIONS.
5.
ENHANCED REFERENCE PANELS AND STANDARD MILEPOST
PANELS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF
THE ROAD FACING APPROACHING TRAFFIC.
6.
ENHANCED REFERENCE PANELS MAY BE MOUNTED BACKTO-BACK ON THE MEDIAN BARRIER RAIL WHEN THERE IS A
MEDIAN BARRIER SEPARATION, OR A PHYSICAL CONSTRIANT
PREVENTS INSTALLATION ON THE RIGHT SIDE.
7.
MILEPOST PANELS AT COUNTY LINE LOCATIONS SHALL BE
INSTALLED ONTO THE SAME POST AS THE COUNTY LINE
DESIGNATION GUIDE SIGNS. FOR DETAILS ON INSTALLING
MULTIPLE MILEPOST PANELS ONTO SIGN POSTS REFER TO
THE STANDARD PLANS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE
CONSTRUCTION TRS-3. IF A COUNTY LINE DESIGNATION GUIDE
SIGN IS NOT PRESENT, INSTALL THE TWO COUNTY LINE
MILEPOST SIGNS SIDE BY SIDE ON A SINGLE TELSPAR POST
REFER TO THE STANDARD PLANS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE
CONSTRUCTION DM-3.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.07' UNDER 1"=1' SCALE.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 0.0525'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 0.15'. ALL UNDER 1"=1' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBER SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=1' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 11'X17' AREA.
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
MILEPOST LOCATIONS
$FI
LEL$
10:40:08 PM
5/18/2022
A
A
D-23
STATE
PROJECT NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
COUNTY
A
CLARK
A
STATE OF NEVADA
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
4.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.07' UNDER 1"=1' SCALE.
5.
ALL SHEET NUMBER SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TS", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TS1, TS2, TS3,..., TS10, TS11,...).
1.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SIGN SUMMARY TABLE CAN BE IMPORTED INTO A
STANDARD SHEET, BORDER, AND TITLE BLOCK AS
SHOWN ON THIS SHEET, OR CAN BE PRINTED DIRECTLY
$FI
LEL$
10:45:50 PM
5/18/2022
2.
3.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=1' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
FROM NDOT SIGN SUMMARY EXCEL FILE AS SHOWN ON
SHEET WILL HAVE 11'X17' AREA.
SHEET TS23.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 0.0525'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 0.15'. ALL UNDER 1"=1' SCALE. WT=2.
SIGN SUMMARY
A
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
D-24
SHEET NO.
TS22
A
SEE SHEET TS21 FOR DETAILS
12'-11" 13'-11" 13'-11"
2
3" RND DBL POST BRACED
7
1
OVERHEAD MOUNTED
INSTALL ON SIGN ISLAND
11"-6" 14'-4" 11'-7"
2
3" RND DBL POST BRACED
7
1
OVERHEAD MOUNTED
12'-10"
1
3" RND SNGL POST
7
1
12'-11"
1
3" RND SNGL POST
7
1
12'-11" 11'-8" 14'-2"
2
3" RND DBL POST BRACED
7
1
OVERHEAD MOUNTED
INSTALL ON SIGN ISLAND
13'-3"
1
3" RND SNGL POST
7
1
11'-10" 11'-8" 11'-11"
2
3" RND DBL POST BRACED
7
1
9'-8"
1
2.5" SQ 10 GA POST
7
1
9'-10"
1
2.5" SQ 10 GA POST
7
1
9'-8"
1
2.5" SQ 10 GA POST
7
1
9'-10"
1
2.5" SQ 10 GA POST
7
1
11'-5"
1
2.5" SQ 10 GA POST
6
1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
: 90
:
:
:
: 6
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
: 49
:
: 54
:
: 2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
: 6
:
: 8
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
: 35
:
: 35
:
:
:
:
:
:
: 35
:
: 35
:
: 23
Sign Message
Sign Station
Sign
Number
Removal
Removal
Bid Item
Number
New
Panel Size
(in. x in.)
h
w
**POST LENGTHS & TYPE ARE FOR INFORMATIONAL ESTIMATING PURPOSE ONLY. SEE GENERAL NOTES.
Location
Panel Size
(in. x in.)
h
w
Panel Area
Slope
New
Bid Item Sign No.
Number
REMOVALS
(Actual Sq. Ft.)
Type and Size (in)
Panel Area
Outer
(Actual Sq. Ft.)
Inner
NEW LOCATIONS
Curb & Gutter
Remarks
Brace
Length
(ft)
# of Posts
Post **
Length (ft)
Mounting Ht. (ft)
SIGN SUMMARY
27-Feb-2021
I-15 (MP MI 51 - MP MI 52)
18 x
54
27.00 627 0190
ENHANCED MILEPOST PANEL
I-15 (CLARK COUNTY)
138 x
90
86.25 627 0190
SPCL
VA MEDICAL / CENTER / EXIT 52A
"XE" 1284+50
RT
6-1
276 x
110
210.83 627 0190
SPCL
CC 215 (SYMBOL) WEST 1/4 / TROPICAL PKWY 1/2 / SPEEDWAY
"X" 1289+84
-
6-2
120 x
120 x
30
96
25.00 627 0190
80.00 627 0190
E1-5P
SPCL
EXIT 52B
TROPICAL / PKWY / 1/4 MILE
"XE" 1292+60
RT
6-3
120 x
588 x
30
160
25.00 627 0190
653.33 627 0190
E1-5P
SPCL
EXIT 52A
I-15 US-93 NORTH CC 215 WEST / SALT LAKE CITY / OVERHEAD
"XE" 1298+00
RT
7-1
"XE" 1302+40
RT
1-1R
1-2R
108 x
60
E1-5P
SPCL
102 x
216 x
30
120
21.25 627 0240
180.00 627 0240
EXIT 52
SPCL
96 x
72
48.00 627 0240
VA MEDICAL / CENTER / EXIT 52
"XE" 1304+60
RT
627 0190
W13-3
RAMP 45 MPH
"NW" 21+00
RT
7-2
627 0190
W4-2R
LANE ENDS (SYMBOL)
"ES" 42+80
RT
8-1
45.00 627 0190
E1-5a
EXIT / 52A 45 DEGREE ARROW
"XE" 1310+25
RT
8-2
EXIT 52
"R1" 12+10
RT
E1-5P
SPCL
W13-3
120 x
216 x
108 x
30
90
60
CC 215 (SYMBOL)WEST / TROPICAL PKWY / EXIT DOWN ARROW ONLY
102 x
216 x
36 x
30
120
48
21.25 627 0240
180.00 627 0240
12.00 627 0240
2-1R
CC 215 (SYMBOL)WEST / TROPICAL PKWY / EXIT DOWN ARROW ONLY
EXIT 45 MPH
25.00 627 0190
135.00 627 0190
E1-5P
SPCL
EXIT 52B
TROPICAL PKWY / 45 DEGREE ARROW
"XE" 1314+55
RT
8-3
627 0190
W4-3R
ADDED LANE (SYMBOL)
"R4" 21+50
RT
8-4
45.00 627 0190
E1-5a
EXIT / 52B 45 DEGREE ARROW
"XE" 1320+40
RT
8-5
E1-5a
90 x
60
37.50 627 0240
EXIT / 52 45 DEGREE ARROW
"XE" 1320+30
RT
2-2R
W4-2R
48 x
48
16.00 627 0240
LANE ENDS (SYMBOL)
"ES" 30+20
RT
2-3R
W4-2R
48 x
48
16.00 627 0240
LANE ENDS (SYMBOL)
"ES" 30+20
LT
2-4R
M3-4
M1-6
M5-1
36
26
30
0
18
36
21
4.50
6.50
4.38
0.00
CARDINAL DIRECTION MARKER-WEST
CC 215 MARKER
ADVANCE TURN ARROW
"R1" 23+50
RT
3-1R
x
x
x
x
627 0240
627 0240
627 0240
0 x
54 x
30
0.00
11.25 627 0190
R3-8a
ADVANCE INTERSECTION
"R1" 25+43
RT
9-1
54 x
30
11.25 627 0190
R3-8a
ADVANCE INTERSECTION
"R1" 25+43
LT
9-2
R5-1a
W3-1
36 x
36 x
24
36
6.00
9.00
627 0240
627 0240
WRONG WAY
STOP AHEAD (SYMBOL)
"R1" 25+50
LT
3-2R
R5-1a
36 x
24
6.00
627 0240
WRONG WAY
"R1" 25+50
RT
3-3R
42 x
30
8.75
627 0190
R5-1a
WRONG WAY
"R1" 25+55
RT
9-3
42 x
30
8.75
627 0190
R5-1a
WRONG WAY
"R1" 25+55
LT
9-4
30 x
30
6.25
627 0190
R5-6
NO BIKES (SYMBOL)
"R4" 11+39
RT
9-5
D-25
This page intentionally left blank.
D-26
APPENDIX E. STRIPING PLAN EXAMPLES
E-1
This page intentionally left blank.
E-2
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST1
A
A
T ST2)
0 - (SEE SHEE
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
"ES" +55
24.0' LT
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"ES" +55
24.0' LT
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"ES"
45
"XW"
50
55
1305
300
1
5 SB
-1
I
295
1
"XE" +70
36.0' LT
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
MATCH EXISTING
"XW" +00
"ES" +10
12.0' LT
"XW" +22
12.0' LT
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"XE"
5 NB
-1
I
300
1
295
1
MATCH EXISTING
"XE" +00
"XE" +70
24.0' RT
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=2.
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
3.
3.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
STATE OF NEVADA
1"=100' SCALE.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
ALL STATION AND OFFSET TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT
(10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100'
AM
$FI
LEL$
12:24:27
5/19/2022
SCALE.
4.
- LIMITS OF REMOVAL (CONCRETE GRINDING)
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
STRIPE REMOVALS
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
E-3
A
A
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST2
A
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=2.
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
0
)
0
X
+
X
8
T
2
S
T S"
E
E "E
H
S E
N
E LI
E
(S H
C
T
A
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
2.
A
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE WT=2 AND
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
3.
3.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
4.
ALL STATION AND OFFSET TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT
(10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100'
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
SCALE.
4.
A
M
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
A
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
"ES" +70
0.0' LT
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
35
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
0
3
REMOVE EXISTING
PAVEMENT MARKING
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
REMOVE EXISTING
PAVEMENT MARKING
(SEE SHEET ST3)
NE "R4" 16+50 MATCH LI
"ES"
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"ES" +36
12.0' LT
"ES" +36
12.0' RT
T ST1)
0 - (SEE SHEE
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
"ES"
35
REMOVE EXISTING
PAVEMENT MARKING
40
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"XW"
1310
I-15 SB
1315
1320
"XE"
35
I-15 NB
1310
1315
1320
"XE" +85
12.0' RT
"XE" +85
24.0' RT
"XE" +85
36.0' RT
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
STATE OF NEVADA
- LIMITS OF REMOVAL (CONCRETE GRINDING)
STRIPE REMOVALS
$FI
LEL$
6:26:45 PM
5/20/2022
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
A
E-4
(SEE SHEET STXX)
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
MATCH LINE "TP" 13+00
1.
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE
SHEET NO.
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST3
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
A
A
A
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
WT=2 AND TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7'
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
3.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
8.5' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
4.
COUNTY
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
SHALL USE WT=2.
3.
PROJECT NO.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL,
EDGE OF PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC.,
2.
STATE
NEVADA
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
ALL STATION AND OFFSET TEXT SHALL USE
NDOT FONT (10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT)
4.
AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00 (SEE
SHEET
ST4 )
REMOVE EXISTING
PAVEMENT MARKING
10
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
REMOVE EXISTING
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
PAVEMENT MARKING
"XW"
I-15 SB
1325
1330
1335
REMOVE EXISTING
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
PAVEMENT MARKING
M ATC H
(SEE SHEET ST2)
NE "R4" 16+50 MATCH LI
"TP"
"XE"
I-15 NB
1325
1330
1335
"TP" +87
6.0' RT
"TP" +90
6.0' RT
REMOVE EXISTING
PAVEMENT MARKING
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"TP" +98
12.0' LT
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"TP" +98
12.0' RT
"R1" +58
12.0' LT
"R1" +46
12.0' LT
25
"R1"
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"R1" +10
0.0' RT
10
$FI
LEL$
6:28:43 PM
- LIMITS OF REMOVAL (CONCRETE GRINDING)
"R1" +58
0.0' RT
"R1" +46
12.0' RT
C AL
PI
TRO
Y
KW A
PAR
5/20/2022
"R1" +65
12.0' RT
"R1" +20
0.0' RT
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
A
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
E-5
STRIPE REMOVALS
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
A
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST4
A
A
A
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
1.
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL,
EDGE OF PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC.,
3.
SHALL USE WT=2.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
2.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE
WT=2 AND TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7'
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
3.
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF
8.5' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
4.
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
ALL STATION AND OFFSET TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT
(10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"=100'
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"SW" +13
0.0' LT
"SW" +13
12.0' LT
M ATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00 (SEE SHEET ST5)
M ATC H
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00 (SEE
SHEET
ST3)
SCALE.
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"XW"
1340
I-15 SB
1345
1350
"XW" +34
12.0' LT
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"XE"
I-15 NB
1340
1345
1350
"XE" +65
12.0' RT
"XE" +65
24.0' RT
"XE" +65
36.0' RT
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
STATE OF NEVADA
PM
- LIMITS OF REMOVAL (CONCRETE GRINDING)
A
$FI
LEL$
6:31:07
5/20/2022
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
E-6
STRIPE REMOVALS
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
A
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST5
A
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
A
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL,
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
EDGE OF PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC.,
SHALL USE WT=2.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
2.
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE
WT=2 AND TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7'
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
3.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF
8.5' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
4.
5.
ALL STATION AND OFFSET TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
(10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT) AND WT=2 UNDER 1"100'
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
SCALE.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
M ATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00 (SEE SHEET ST4)
"SW" +01
0.0' LT
"SW" +01
12.0' LT
15
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
"XW" +48
12.0' LT
"SW"
"XW"
10
I-15 SB
1355
1360
1365
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
MATCH EXISTING
"XW" +00
"XE" +20
36.0' LT
"XE"
1355
1360
I-15 NB
"XE" +20
36.0' RT
1365
MATCH EXISTING
"XE" +00
REMOVE EXISTING STRIPE
STATE OF NEVADA
- LIMITS OF REMOVAL (CONCRETE GRINDING)
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
STRIPE REMOVALS
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
$FI
LEL$
6:32:56 PM
5/20/2022
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
A
E-7
A
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST6
A
A
A
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
* DOTTED WHITE LINE
12" SOLID WHITE LINE
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"ES"
45
12'
12'
2'12'12'
12'12'1
55
1305
300
1
5 SB
-1
I
"XW" +22
12.0' LT
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"NW" +55
12.0' LT
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"XE"
300
1
12'
2'12'12'
12'12'12'1
5 NB
-1
I
10
"XE" +86
12.0' RT
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
"NW" +39
12.0' LT
15
20
"NW" +53
12.0' RT
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"XE" +14
12.0' RT
MATCH EXISTING
"XE" +00
21' 12'12'12'12'
"ES" +10
12.0' LT
10'12'12'
MATCH EXISTING
"XW" +00
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
50
12'12'12'12'10'
"XW"
"ES" +81
0.0' LT
10'12'12' 4'
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"ES" +68
12.0' LT
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
"ES" +43
"ES" +25
T ST7)
0 - (SEE SHEE
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
"ES" +24
12.0' RT
"ES" +60
0.0' LT
"NW"
* DOTTED WHITE LINE
"NW" +37
0.0' RT
* 8" SOLID WHITE LINE
* 12" SOLID WHITE LINE
W/ EXIT RAMP GORE
W/ EXIT RAMP GORE
"NW" +32
12.0' RT
PAVEMENT MARKERS
PAVEMENT MARKERS
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
ALL EXISTING AND PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL BE TURNED
OFF EXCEPT FOR STRIPING AND EDGE OF PAVEMENT
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
(EOP) LINEWORK.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
2.
LEGEND:
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
*
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
3.
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
NOTES:
4.
4.
DIMENSIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY
$FI
LEL$
6:45:13 PM
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
5/20/2022
STATE OF NEVADA
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
- RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS (RPM's)
- LANE WIDTHS SHALL BE MEASURED FROM THE CONTROL LINE, SHOULDER
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE IN
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
DISTRICT 1. FOR DETAILS ON RAISED PAVEMENT MARKER
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
USE SEE THE CURRENT NDOT STANDARD PLANS FOR ROAD
PERMANENT STRIPING DETAILS
AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION.
- PAVEMENT MARKINGS (INCLUDING CROSSWALKS, STOP BARS, SYMBOLS,
AND WORDS) SHALL BE PREFORMED THERMOPLASTIC TYPE 2 OR EQUAL.
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
E-8
A
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST7
LEGEND:
*
A
A
A
- RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS (RPM's)
M
- LANE WIDTHS SHALL BE MEASURED FROM THE CONTROL LINE, SHOULDER
DIMENSIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
- PAVEMENT MARKINGS (INCLUDING CROSSWALKS, STOP BARS, SYMBOLS,
AND WORDS) SHALL BE PREFORMED THERMOPLASTIC TYPE 2 OR EQUAL.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
"ES" +19
12.0' RT
ALL EXISTING AND PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL BE TURNED
0
)
0
X
+
X
8
T
2
S
T S"
E
E "E
H
S E
N
E LI
E
(S H
C
T
A
NOTES:
OFF EXCEPT FOR STRIPING AND EDGE OF PAVEMENT
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
(EOP) LINEWORK.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
35
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
3.
0
3
2'
'1
10
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
6'
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
4.
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE IN
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
DISTRICT 1. FOR DETAILS ON RAISED PAVEMENT MARKER
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
USE SEE THE CURRENT NDOT STANDARD PLANS FOR ROAD
12" SOLID WHITE LINE
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
"
ES" +1
6
0.
0'
L
T
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
8'
"R4"
"ES" +35
0.0' LT
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
12'
20
35
12'12' 4'
40
"
R4" +1
9
1
2.
0'
RT
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"XW"
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
I-15 SB
1310
12'12'12'12'10'
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
1315
1320
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
* 12" SOLID WHITE LINE
"NW"
W/ EXIT RAMP GORE
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
12'12'12'12'
21'
XE" +23
"
RT
0'
2.
1
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"XE"
35
I-15 NB
1315
1320
12'
10
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
" +32
R1
"
T
L
0'
2.
1
15
9'
"R1" +00
0.0' LT
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
" +32
R1
"
T
L
0'
0.
20
30
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"R1"
7.5'
25
12'12'12'
1310
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
PAVEMENT MARKERS
"R1" +77
12.0' LT
40
T ST6)
0 - (SEE SHEE
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
8'
"ES"
6'
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
(SEE SHEET ST8)
NE "R4" 16+50 MATCH LI
"ES"
AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION.
5.
STATE OF NEVADA
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
PERMANENT STRIPING DETAILS
$FI
LEL$
6:35:40 PM
5/20/2022
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
A
E-9
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST8
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
ALL EXISTING AND PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL BE TURNED
(
MA SE
TC E
SH
H
LI EET
NE
"T STX
P"
X)
45°
1
3+
00
OFF EXCEPT FOR STRIPING AND EDGE OF PAVEMENT
"TP" +67
(EOP) LINEWORK.
* 8" SOLID WHITE LINE
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
WT=2 AND TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7'
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL R/W LINES SHALL
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
ALSO USE WT=2.
2.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF
A
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
"SW"
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
8" SOLID YELLOW, 45°
8.5' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
A
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
"TP" +10
3.
A
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
70
2.
1.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
PLANS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION.
"TP" +31
4'
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"TP" +08
42.0' LT
R=147'
"R4" +92
12.0' RT
(SEE SHEET ST7)
NE "R4" 16+50 MATCH LI
0
1
25
'
10'12
0
10
6'
24" SOLID
WHITE LINE
"TP" +18
36.5' LT
(CROSSWALK)
* 8" SOLID WHITE LINE
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"R3" +64
12.0' RT
"R3" +85
12.0' RT
"R3" +64
"EN"
"TP" +17
9.5' LT
"TP" +18
24.5' LT
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"R3" +64
24.0' RT
"R3" +47
"R3" +30
"TP" +02
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
7
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
10'
12'12'
"XW"
12'12'12'12'10'
1325
8'
I-15 SB
"TP" +20
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
7
5
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
"TP" +36
9.5' RT
"TP"
1330
1335
"TP" +01
"TP" +36
"TP" +01
12.5' LT
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"XE"
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"TP" +40
12'12'12'12'12'
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"TP" +77
* 8" SOLID WHITE LINE
1330
1335
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
6'
- RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS (RPM's)
"R1" +76
12.0' RT
"R1" +76
22.0' RT
"R1" +79
NOTES:
- LANE WIDTHS SHALL BE MEASURED FROM THE CONTROL LINE,
SHOULDER DIMENSIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY
WHITE LINE
15
24" SOLID
WHITE LINE
10
(STOP BAR)
"R1" +16
0.0' RT
"R2" +96
0.0' RT
R=107'
"R1" +04
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"R2"
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
"R1" +16
12.0' RT
"R1" +16
22.0' RT
24" SOLID
WHITE LINE
(CROSSWALK)
C AL
PI
TRO
Y
KW A
PAR
* 8" SOLID WHITE LINE
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
24" SOLID
(CROSSWALK)
5
"R1"
"R2" +66
12.0' LT
"TP" +87
"R1" +16
36.5' LT
12.0' LT
4' 10'
12'12'
25
LEGEND:
$FI
LEL$
"R1" +46
R=67' (CAT TRACKS)
6'
6'
12'
"R1" +76
0.0' RT
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
DOTTED WHITE LINE
"TP" +87
24.5' LT
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
6:37:35 PM
"TP" +87
"TP" +16
12.5' LT
* 8" SOLID WHITE LINE
9'
"R1" +46
0.0' RT
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
"TP" +95
21.5' RT
10'12'
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
M ATC H
5.5' 12'12'10'
I-15 NB
5/20/2022
20
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
* 8" SOLID WHITE LINE
1325
*
"R3"
.5
'
P
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
"R3" +29
12.0' RT
"R3" +29
0.0' LT
"TP" +17
21.5' LT
"R4" +73
0.0' LT
15
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
"R3" +08
"R4"
4
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
"TP" +13
22.0' RT"R3" +29
24.0' RT
(STOP BAR)
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
6
'
5.
"TP" +11
10.0' RT
24" SOLID WHITE LINE
10
'1
2
'
12
'
"TP" +10
4.0' LT
1
2'
1
4'
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
YELLOW LINE
"TP" +14
30.0' LT
"NW"
4.
* 8" SOLID
1
2'
1
4'
1
2'
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00 (SEE
SHEET
ST9)
MARKER USE SEE THE CURRENT NDOT STANDARD
12
'
"TP" +14
16.0' LT
6' 12'
10'
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
IN DISTRICT 1. FOR DETAILS ON RAISED PAVEMENT
12
'
12
'
12
'
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE
6' 12'
12'10'
4.
"R2" +43
59.9' RT
24" SOLID WHITE LINE
(STOP BAR)
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
- PAVEMENT MARKINGS (INCLUDING CROSSWALKS, STOP BARS,
SYMBOLS, AND WORDS) SHALL BE PREFORMED THERMOPLASTIC
TYPE 2 OR EQUAL.
E-10
PERMANENT STRIPING DETAILS
A
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST9
LEGEND:
*
- RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS (RPM's)
A
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
NOTES:
1.
1.
DIMENSIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
ALL EXISTING AND PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL BE TURNED
OFF EXCEPT FOR STRIPING AND EDGE OF PAVEMENT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
- PAVEMENT MARKINGS (INCLUDING CROSSWALKS, STOP BARS, SYMBOLS,
A
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
- LANE WIDTHS SHALL BE MEASURED FROM THE CONTROL LINE, SHOULDER
A
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
(EOP) LINEWORK.
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
AND WORDS) SHALL BE PREFORMED THERMOPLASTIC TYPE 2 OR EQUAL.
2.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE
WT=2 AND TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7'
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL R/W LINES SHALL
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
ALSO USE WT=2.
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
3.
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF
8.5' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
4.
N

=2
68
E=
St
06
a= 81
16
22
Of
3
8.
56
f=0 0
58
0.
+
.5
21
.68 77
La
.9 6 L
m
'
t
7
on
=1 =
36
î€
15
€1
î€
6'
€3
'
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE IN
DISTRICT 1. FOR DETAILS ON RAISED PAVEMENT
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
MARKER USE SEE THE CURRENT NDOT STANDARD
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
PLANS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION.
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
30
* 12" SOLID WHITE LINE
W/ EXIT RAMP GORE
* 12" SOLID WHITE LINE
W/ EXIT RAMP GORE
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
1
5
"R3" +15
12.0' RT
25
"R3" +15
0.0' RT
"SW" +51
12.0' LT
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"R3" +42
0.0' RT
10
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
I-15 SB
1340
"SW"
"XW"
"SW" +08
12.0' LT
20
12'12'12'12'
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
1345
1350
"XW" +34
12.0' LT
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
12'12'12'12'12'
"XE"
I-15 NB
1340
1345
1350
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
80
* DOTTED WHITE LINE
MATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00 (SEE SHEET ST10)
PAVEMENT MARKERS
"SW" +13
0.0' LT
"SW" +13
12.0' LT
12'12'
6'
12'
12'
12'10'
"R3"
M ATC H
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00 (SEE
SHEET
ST8)
PAVEMENT MARKERS
"SW" +20
12.0' LT
"EN" +88
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
10'12'
6'
6'
20
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"EN"
10'
'12'
2'12
10'1
12'
12'1
0'
"EN" +62
12.0' RT
"EN" +31
12.0' RT
85
"EN" +38
90
"EN" +31
24.0' RT
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"EN" +30
12.0' RT
25
"R2" +91
12.0' LT
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
"R2"
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
A
$FI
LEL$
6:39:56 PM
5/20/2022
12" SOLID WHITE LINE
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
E-11
PERMANENT STRIPING DETAILS
A
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
ST10
LEGEND:
*
- RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS (RPM's)
A
NOTES:
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
1.
- LANE WIDTHS SHALL BE MEASURED FROM THE CONTROL LINE, SHOULDER
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
A
A
ALL EXISTING AND PROPOSED ENTITIES SHALL BE TURNED
OFF EXCEPT FOR STRIPING AND EDGE OF PAVEMENT
DIMENSIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY
(EOP) LINEWORK.
2.
- PAVEMENT MARKINGS (INCLUDING CROSSWALKS, STOP BARS, SYMBOLS,
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE (FONT 10,
AND WORDS) SHALL BE PREFORMED THERMOPLASTIC TYPE 2 OR EQUAL.
2.
MEDIUM SIZE WITHIN NDOT CADD SETTINGS).
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINES SHALL USE
WT=2 AND TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7'
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL R/W LINES SHALL
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
ALSO USE WT=2.
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
3.
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF
8.5' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "ST", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (ST1, ST2, ST3,..., ST10, ST11,...).
4.
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE IN
DISTRICT 1. FOR DETAILS ON RAISED PAVEMENT MARKER USE
SEE THE CURRENT NDOT STANDARD PLANS FOR ROAD AND
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' IS TYPICAL (I.E. 11"X17"
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION.
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA), BUT IF POSSIBLE
SHOULD MATCH THE SCALE OF ROADWAY DESIGN SHEETS.
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
12" SOLID WHITE LINE
* 12" SOLID WHITE LINE
W/ EXIT RAMP GORE
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"SW" +01
0.0' LT
* DOTTED WHITE LINE
15
12'12'12'12'
"XW" +48
12.0' LT
"SW"
"XW"
12'12'12'12'12'12'
12'12'
"SW" +01
12.0' LT
10
I-15 SB
1355
1360
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
"XE" +46
12.0' RT
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
1365
MATCH EXISTING
"XW" +00
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
1355
1360
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
10'12'12'12'12'12'12'
12'12'12'12'12'
"XE"
0'
'12'1
10'12
M ATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00 (SEE SHEET ST9)
PAVEMENT MARKERS
I-15 NB
00
1
"EN" +44
12.0' LT
"EN" +89
1365
105
"EN" +89
MATCH EXISTING
"XE" +00
12" SOLID WHITE LINE
95
"EN" +31
12.0' RT
"EN" +75
12.0' LT
* BROKEN WHITE LINE (URBAN)
"EN"
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
* DOTTED WHITE LINE
8" SOLID YELLOW LINE
STATE OF NEVADA
PM
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
$FI
LEL$
6:41:54
5/20/2022
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
PERMANENT STRIPING DETAILS
A
E-12
APPENDIX F. TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN EXAMPLES
F-1
This page intentionally left blank.
F-2
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
A
SHEET NO.
A
TC1
A
SUMMARY OF CONSTRUCTION SIGNS AND DEVICES
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
PANEL SIZE
(IN X IN)
SQFT
NO. OF
SIGNS
TRAFFIC CONTROL
EACH
USE TOTAL
(SQFT)
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
SIGN NO.
PHASE
1A-1
MESSAGE
PHASE
1A-2
PHASE
1A-3
PHASE
1A-4
PHASE
1B-1
PHASE
1B-2
PHASE
2A-1
PHASE
2A-2
PHASE
3A-1
PHASE
3A-2
DETOUR
DETOUR
DETOUR
DETOUR
NB TROP
RANGE
I-15NB
I-15
TO
ROAD
ON RAMP
215WB
DETOUR DETOUR
DETOUR
I-15NB
RANGE
CC215
OFF
RD N TO
TO I-15
RAMP
I-15
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10)
AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT
SHALL USE TEXT HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF
M1-1 (15)
INTERSTATE SHIELD I-15
36
X
36
9.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
11
10
0
0
0
5
3
12
108.0
M1-4 (93)
US ROUTE 93
36
X
36
9.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
9.0
M1-6 (215)
CLARK COUNTY 215
36
X
36
9.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
3
0
4
7
63.0
M3-1
NORTH
24
X
24
4.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
10
0
0
0
0
0
10
40.0
M3-4
WEST
36
X
18
4.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
7
31.5
M3-5
TO
36
X
18
4.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
4.5
M6-1L
LEFT ARROW
30
X
21
4.4
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
8.8
M5-1
LEFT ARROW
30
X
21
4.4
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
8.8
M4-8A
END DETOUR
30
X
24
5.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
1
1
2
1
1
2
7
35.0
PRECEEDING "TC", AND FOLLOW THIS
M4-9L
DETOUR (LEFT)
29
X
24
4.8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
2
4
1
2
3
4
19.2
SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,...,TC10, TC11,...).
M4-9R
DETOUR (RIGHT)
30
X
24
5.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
3
2
5
1
1
4
5
25.0
R1-1
STOP SIGN
48
X
48
16.0
2
0
2
0
3
0
0
0
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
48.0
R11-2
ROAD CLOSED
48
X
30
10.0
0
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
1
0
4
1
1
2
1
2
1
6
60.0
R11-4
ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC
30
X
60
12.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
12.5
R2-1 (55)
SPEED LIMIT 55
48
X
60
20.0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
120.0
R2-1 (65)
SPEED LIMIT 65
48
X
60
20.0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
120.0
R3-1
NO RIGHT TURN
24
X
24
4.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
12.0
R3-2
NO LEFT TURN
24
X
24
4.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
8.0
R3-5R
RIGHT ONLY
30
X
36
7.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
7.5
R3-7R
RIGHT LANE MUST TURN RIGHT
30
X
30
6.3
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
12.6
R4-7
KEEP RIGHT
24
X
30
5.0
0
0
0
0
1
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
25.0
R5-1
DO NOT ENTER
48
X
48
16.0
2
0
0
0
1
0
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
48.0
R6-1L
ONE WAY
54
X
18
6.8
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
6.8
R6-1R
ONE WAY
54
X
18
6.8
0
0
0
0
1
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
13.6
RNV2-3
LEFT/THRU + THRU ONLY
36
X
30
7.5
0
0
0
0
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
15.0
RNV2-5
LEFT + THRU
36
X
30
7.5
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
15.0
RNV2-6
LEFT/THRU + THRU/RIGHT
36
X
30
7.5
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
15.0
RNV2-8
LEFT + THRU/RIGHT
36
X
30
7.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
7.5
RNV3-4
THRU + THRU + RIGHT
30
X
36
7.5
0
0
0
0
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
15.0
RNV3-5
LEFT + THRU + THRU
30
X
36
7.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
15.0
RNV31-2
RAMP CLOSED
48
X
36
12.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
60.0
RNV31-3
LANE CLOSED
48
X
36
12.0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
24.0
W1-4L
LANE SHIFT (LEFT)
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
3
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
48.0
W1-4cL
THREE LANE SHIFT (LEFT)
48
X
48
16.0
2
2
2
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
64.0
W1-4cR
THREE LANE SHIFT (LEFT)
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
32.0
W1-4R
LANE SHIFT (RIGHT)
48
X
48
16.0
4
1
0
3
3
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
64.0
W1-4BL
TWO LANE SHIFT (LEFT)
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
2
4
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
64.0
W1-4BR
TWO LANE SHIFT (RIGHT)
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
4
0
2
0
0
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
64.0
W1-6
ARROW
48
X
28
9.3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
18.6
W1-7
ARROW
48
X
24
8.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
8.0
W3-5A
55 MPH SPEED ZONE AHEAD
48
X
48
16.0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
96.0
W3-5A
65 MPH SPEED ZONE AHEAD
48
X
48
16.0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
64.0
W3-5A
75 MPH SPEED ZONE AHEAD
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
32.0
W4-2L
LANE ENDS (LEFT)
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
32.0
W4-2R
LANE ENDS (RIGHT)
48
X
48
16.0
2
0
2
3
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
48.0
W4-1
MERGE
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
16.0
W4-3
ADDED LANE
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
32.0
W8-1
BUMP
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
32.0
W12-1
SPLIT LANE
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
16.0
W13-1
ADVISORY SPEED (20 MPH)
30
X
30
6.3
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
6.3
W13-1
ADVISORY SPEED (35 MPH)
30
X
30
6.3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
12.6
W20-1
ROAD WORK AHEAD
48
X
48
16.0
19
0
0
0
0
0
18
0
16
16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
19
304.0
W20-2
DETOUR AHEAD
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
3
1
5
1
1
2
5
80.0
W20-5L
LEFT LANE CLOSED AHEAD
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
32.0
W20-5R
RIGHT LANE CLOSED AHEAD
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
2
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
64.0
W21-5
SHOULDER WORK
48
X
48
16.0
4
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
96.0
W21-6
RIGHT SHOULDER CLOSED
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
64.0
STATE OF NEVADA
W24-1L
DOUBLE REVERSE CURVE
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
16.0
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
W24-1R
DOUBLE REVERSE CURVE
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
16.0
WNV16-2
BEGIN WORK ZONE
48
X
24
8.0
10
0
0
0
0
0
10
0
10
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
80.0
WNV16-3
END WORK ZONE
48
X
24
8.0
7
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
8
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
64.0
WNV17-1
DOUBLE PENALTY IN WORK ZONES
48
X
48
16.0
10
0
0
0
0
0
10
0
10
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
160.0
WNV21-5aR
RIGHT SHOULDER CLOSED
30
X
48
10.0
6
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
60.0
WNV25-1
RAMP EXIT
42
X
54
15.8
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
15.8
WNV20-1
DETOUR (STRAIGHT)
30
X
24
5.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
1
0
1
3
0
4
20.0
WNV28-1
LANE SHIFT AHEAD
48
X
48
16.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0.07' UNDER 1"=1' SCALE.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL
BE UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT
SHALL USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.0525'.
LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH
OF 0.15'. ALL UNDER 1"=1' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
5.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=1' SHALL BE USED I.E.
11"X17" SHEET WILL HAVE 11'X17' AREA.
$FI
LEL$
12:03:31 AM
5/19/2022
A
0
625 0500
F-3
RENT CONSTRUCTION SIGNS
0
2
32.0
TOTAL
250
2867.0
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
TRAFFIC MATRIX
SHEET 1 OF 2
A
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
A
BID ITEM
PHASE
1A-3
PHASE
1A-4
PHASE
1B-2
PHASE
2A-1
PHASE
2A-2
PHASE
3A-1
PHASE
3A-2
DETOUR
I-15
DETOUR
I-15NB ON
RAMP
3086.46
5513.88
2933.01
7106.62
11054.21
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
9
12
0
9
0
24
2
4
UNIT
PHASE
1A-1
PHASE
1A-2
LINFT
3892.67
814
LS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ITEM DESCRIPTION
PHASE
1B-1
37394.76 47702.92 2767.03
DETOUR
DETOUR
NB TROP TO
RANGE ROAD
215WB
SHEET NO.
A
DETOUR
I-15NB OFF
RAMP
DETOUR
RANGE RD N
TO I-15
DETOUR
CC215 TO
I-15
MAX
TOTAL
0
0
0
0
122266
0
0
0
0
1
8
2
8
2
29
202 1290
REMOVE PAVEMENT MARKINGS
623 1580
TEMPORARY OVERHEAD SIGNAL SYSTEM
625 0130
RENT CONSTRUCTION BARRICADES (TYPE IIIB)
EACH
625 0220
RENT PORTABLE OVERHEAD LIGHTS
EACH
6
5
13
19
11
2
5
6
5
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
19
625 0230
RENT CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
EACH
3
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
3
0
4
4
1
5
1
2
2
8
625 0270
RENT ARROW BOARD (TYPE C)
EACH
0
0
2
5
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
625 0310
RENT TRAFFIC DRUMS
EACH
4
53
393
960
143
50
256
59
147
67
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
960
20
625 0360
RENT TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR
EACH
5
2
16
20
16
2
14
4
10
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
625 0420
RENT TRUCK-MOUNTED IMPACT ATTENUATOR
EACH
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
625 0510
RENT PORTABLE PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL
LINFT
2417
1849
15800
18672
7346
871
8546
3306
3142
2680
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
18672
625 0600
RENT DRIVER FEEDBACK SIGN
EACH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4.00
636 0120
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (DOTTED WHITE)
LINFT
0
0
0
0
250
250
1050
600
534
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2684.00
*
636 0150
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (8-INCH DOTTED WHITE)
LINFT
0
0
1474
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1474.00
*
636 0170
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (BROKEN WHITE)
MILES
0
0
2.472
2.639
0.06
0.413
0.266
0.285
5.887
0.578
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12.60
*
636 0190
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (SOLID WHITE)
MILES
0.843
0.751
2.983
4.339
1.086
0.412
2.482
0.435
6.057
0.999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
20.39
*
636 0210
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (8-INCH SOLID WHITE)
MILES
0
0
0.472
0.079
0.269
0
0
0
0
0.428
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1.25
*
636 0220
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (12-INCH SOLID WHITE)
LINFT
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
852.00
35.00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
887.00
*
636 0260
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (SOLID YELLOW)
MILES
0.6576
0.8027
1.6759
3.5716
0.8169
0.2797
1.2816
0.4341
5.3665
0.5803
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15.47
*
636 0320
TEMPORARY PAINTED STRIPING (DOUBLE SOLID YELLOW)
MILES
0.0689
0
0.0733
0.0362
0
0
0.1263
0
0.1725
0.0621
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.54
*
TC2
A
* TEMPORARY STRIPING QUANTITIES SHOWN ARE ESTIMATED
AS A SINGLE APPLICATION
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10)
AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT
SHALL USE TEXT HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF
0.07' UNDER 1"=1' SCALE.
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL
BE UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT
SHALL USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.0525'.
NOTES:
GENERAL NOTES:
LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH
1. TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS ARE PROVIDED IN THE PLAN SET ONLY FOR
SPECIFIC ROADWAY, DRAINAGE, AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION ITEMS.
2. CONTRACTOR-DESIGNED TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS SHALL BE USED FOR
REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRIPING; INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF
TEMPORARY STRIPING; INSTALLATION OF FINAL STRIPING; INSTALLATION
AND REMOVAL OF PORTABLE PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL; OVERLAY
OF THE I-515 BRIDGE OVER CITY PARKWAY; CLOSURE OF EASTERN AVENUE
AND OTHER WORK AS IDENTIFIED IN THE PLANS OR BY THE ENGINEER. NDOT
STANDARD TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS MAY BE USED FOR THOSE ITEMS NOTED
ABOVE THAT ARE WITHIN THE NDOT RIGHT-OF-WAY (NO DIRECT PAYMENT.)
3. WHEN TRAFFIC DRUM SYMBOLS IN THE PLANS ARE SHOWN CLOSELY SPACED
TO PROVIDE CHANNELIZATION AT THE CORNER OF AN INTERSECTION OR TO
CLOSE A ROADWAY OR RAMP AT ITS INTERSECTION WITH A STREET, THE TRAFFIC
DRUM SPACING SHALL BE 6' OR LESS INSTEAD OF THE SPACING INDICATED FOR
THAT TRAFFIC DRUM SYMBOL IN THE LEGEND.
4. TRAFFIC DRUMS SHALL BE PLACED A MINIMUM OF 2 FEET OFF THE EDGE OF THE
TRAVEL LANE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE PLANS.
5. CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGNS SHALL BE PLACED 10 DAYS PRIOR TO ACTIVE
CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MODIFY THE CMS AS NECESSARY FOR
ADVANCE NOTIFICATION.
6. CLOSED PANELS USED ON EXISTING SIGNS SHALL BE PLACED DIAGONALLY ACROSS
THE SIGN PANEL.
7. ALL EXISTING SIGNS IN CONFLICT WITH THE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS SHALL BE
REMOVED, RELOCATED, OR COVERED IN PLACE.
9. ALL EXISTING PAVEMENT MARKINGS IN CONFLICT WITH THE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS
SHALL BE REMOVED BY APPROVED METHODS. WHEN STRIPING OBLITERATION IS
NECESSARY, IT SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY AN NDOT APPROVED METHOD.
$FI
LEL$
12:47:49 AM
5/19/2022
8. TRAFFIC SIGNALS SHALL REMAIN IN OPERATION AT ALL TIMES. CONFLICTING SIGNAL
INDICATIONS SHALL BE COVERED AND SIGNAL OPERATION DURING CLOSURES OR
DETOURS SHALL BE COORDINATED AND APPROVED BY THE CITY OF LAS VEGAS AND
NDOT.
11. ALL PORTABLE PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL OFFSETS ARE TO FACE OF RAIL.
12. THE CONTRACTOR MUST USE WELDED GRATES IN ALL AREAS WHERE TRAFFIC RUNS
OVER DRAINAGE INLETS.
13. FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATIONS THAT TAKE PLACE AT NIGHT, THE USE OF
PORTABLE OVERHEAD TRAILER MOUNTED BALLOON LIGHTING WILL BE MANDATORY AT
FLAGGING STATIONS, PORTABLE TEMPORARY SIGNALS, LAE TAPERS AND SHIFTS,
TEMPORARY CROSSOVERS, POINTS OF INGRESS/EGRESS OF CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC,
AND ANY OTHER LOCATIONS WITHIN THE WORK ZONE THAT NEED THE ILLUMINATION
FOR THE SAFETY OF THE TRAVELING PUBLIX AS DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER.
THE TRAILER MOUNTED BALLOON LIGHT(S) SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 2000 WATTS
SUPPLY WITH A METAL HALIDE LIGHTING SOURCE, UNITS SHALL BE SELF-SUFFICIENT,
EASILY RELOCATED AND ADJUSTED, AND CAPABLE OF OPERATING CONTINUOUSLY FROM
1 HOUR PRIOR TO SUNSET TO 1 HOUR AFTER SUNRISE, PLACE, RELOCATE, AND ADJUST
TRAILER MOUNTED BALLOON LIGHT(S) AS DIRECTED.
1) QUANTITIES SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATED AND ARE SUBJECT
TO INCREASE OR DECREASE. ADDITIONAL SIGNS NOT LISTED,
MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.
OF 0.15'. ALL UNDER 1"=1' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
2) FOR DETAILS AND DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN SEE STATE OF
NEVADA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD
PLANS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION 2017 ENGLISH
VERSION AND NEVADA SIGN SUPPLEMENT 2006 EDITION.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A
PRECEEDING "TC", AND FOLLOW THIS
SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,...,TC10, TC11,...).
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=1' SHALL BE USED I.E.
11"X17" SHEET WILL HAVE 11'X17' AREA.
3) TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES SHALL CONFORM TO THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE M.U.T.C.D. 2009 AND NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD PLANS FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION 2017 ENGLISH VERSION.
4) SIGNS IN THE MISC COLUMN INCLUDE THE 13TH STREET
CLOSURE NOT TIED TO A SPECIFIC PHASE.
14. ALL BUSINESS ACCESSES SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT ALL TIMES. USE OF BUSINESS
DRIVEWAYS IS NOT EXCLUSIVE.
15. PORTABLE PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL (PPCBR) SHALL BE ANCHORED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH NDOT STANDARD PLAN R-8.7.1 ANCHORING OF PPCBR ON A BRIDGE
DECK SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER.
16. FOR PORTABLE PRECAST CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL (PPCBR) LOCATED BETWEEN OPPOSING
DIRECTIONS OF TRAFFIC, THE INSIDE SHOULDER WIDTH SHALL BE 3 FEET ON BOTH
SIDES OF THE PPCBR WHEREVER POSSIBLE. IF THE INSIDE SHOULDER WIDTH IS LESS
THAN 3 FEET, THEN ANCHOR PIN ALL SECTIONS.
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
17. ADVANCE WARNING SIGNS SHALL BE SET AT LEAST 2 FEET OUTSIDE THE TRAVEL LANES.
ADVANCE WARNING SIGNS IN THE INSIDE SHOULDER SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE BARRIER
RAIL IF THE INSIDE SHOULDER HAS INSUFFICIENT WIDTH FOR GROUND MOUNTING OUTSIDE
THE TRAVEL LANE AND SHALL NOT ENCROACH INTO THE OPPOSING TRAVEL LANE.
18. THE TYPE B WARNING LIGHT ATTACHED TO THE 55 MPH SPEED ZONE AHEAD SIGN (W3-5A)
SHALL BE A LIGHTWEIGHT WARNING LIGHT. A LIGHTWEIGHT WARNING LIGHT SHALL HAVE A
MASS OF 1.5 KG OR LESS (INCLUDING BATTERIES IF THE LENS IS MOUNTED ON TOP OF
THE BATTERY CASE), THE LIGHTWEIGHT WARNING LIGHT SHALL BE SECURELY ATTACHED TO
THE SIGN USING STANDARD VANDAL-RESISTANT HARDWARE.
10. OBLITERATION OF STRIPING BEYOND THE LIMITS OF THE PERMANENT STRIPING PLANS
SHALL BE REPLACED IN KIND.
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
TRAFFIC MATRIX
SHEET 2 OF 2
A
F-4
- PHASE 1A-1
STATE
PROJECT NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
CLARK
TC3
- CONSTRUCT TEMPORARY PAVEMENTS OUTSIDE OF TRAFFIC
- CONSTRUCT EAST SIDE OF R1 RAMP
A
A
A
- CONSTRUCT TROPICAL PKWY EXTENSION INTERSECTION
C
AT R4 RAMPS.
- CONSTRUCT CENTENNIAL PKWY. GAP PORTION TO BE
CONSTRUCTED IN PHASE 3A-2.
B
W
B
E
15
2 5
1
2
C
C
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF TROPICAL PKWY EXTENSION
C
- PHASE 1A-2
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10- LEROY 140 MEDIUM
TEXT) AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED.
- CONSTRUCT WEST SIDE OF R1 RAMP.
2.
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF R2 RAMP.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.07' UNDER 1"=1' SCALE.
- CONSTRUCT R3 RAMP.
R
R
P
U
- CONSTRUCT R4 RAMP.
- CONSTRUCT RCB CROSSING UNDER R3 RAMP
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE
- CONSTRUCT I-15 NB CONNECTION TO NW RAMP.
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.0525'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE
- CONSTRUCT SIDEWALK ON NORTH SIDE OF TROPICAL
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 0.15'. ALL UNDER 1"=1' SCALE. WT=2.
(N
OR
TH
)
PKWY BRIDGE OVER I-15. NIGHTTIME DETOUR
- PHASE 1A-3
- CONSTRUCT THE SECTION OF EN BRIDGE I-3248 OVER I-15
AND R3 RAMP. NIGHTTIME DETOUR. CONSTRUCTION WILL
LIKELY CONTINUE INTO THE NEXT PHASE.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
RD
- CONSTRUCT R2 RAMP AT TROPICAL PKWY. NIGHTTIME
4.
DETOUR.
RA
NG
E
- CONSTRUCT ES WIDENING WEST OF UPRR.
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF PROPOSED ES RAMP CONNECTION
"R-6"
TO EXISTING ES RAMP EAST OF UPRR.
- CONSTRUCT THE SECTION OF NW BRIDGE G-3249 OVER NEW
R4 RAMP. CONSTRUCTION WILL LIKELY CONTINUE INTO
NEXT PHASE.
- PHASE 1B-1
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF ES RAMP.
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF BRIDGE I-3248 ON THE EN RAMP.
AL PKWY
CENTENNI
I-15 AND R1 RAMP ON THE NW RAMP. NIGHTTIME DETOUR.
RANGE RD
- CONSTRUCT R-6 CONNECTION TO RANGE ROAD SOUTH
AND CENTENNIAL PKWY.
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF RANGE ROAD NORTH AND
CENTENNIAL PKWY INTERSECTION.
- CONSTRUCT BRIDGE I-3253 ON THE SW RAMP OVER
PROPOSED TROPICAL PARKWAY ALIGNMENT.
"R5"
- PHASE 1B-2
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF RANGE ROAD NORTH AND
"EN"
REGENA RD
CENTENNIAL PKWY INTERSECTION AT EXISTING
CAL PKW Y
TROPI
ON
EXTENSI
- CONSTRUCT REMAINING PORTION OF BRIDGE G-3249 OVER
"EN"
I -15 SB TO CC215 OFF RAMP WEST SIDE.
"SW"
- PHASE 2A-1
- CONSTRUCT SW RAMP CONNECTION FROM TROPICAL PKWY
"R3"
"ES"
STRUCTURE TO R3 RAMP.
- CONSTRUCT THE 2 RCB CROSSINGS UNDER SW RAMP.
R
R
P
U
- CONSTRUCT R5 RAMP CONNECTION TO TROPICAL
SB
5
-1
I
NB
5
-1
I
PKWY EXTENSION.
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF NW RAMP FROM R4 RAMP
TO EN RAMP.
- CONSTRUCT R-6 RAMP. INCLUDING STRUCTURE G-3250
- CONSTRUCT PROPOSED BRIDGES I-3251,I-3252 OVER
"NW"
CENTENNIAL PKWY.
- RANGE RD DETOUR.
- PHASE 2A-2
"R4"
- CONSTRUCT WEST SIDE PORTION OF CENTENNIAL PKWY
THAT CONNECTS CENTENNIAL PKWY TO RAMP R6.
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF RANGE ROAD, SOUTH OF REGENA.
"R2"
- RANGE ROAD DETOUR.
- PHASE 2A-2 (WEEKEND WORK)
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF PROPOSED RANGE ROAD SOUTH
AT EXISTING REGENA ROAD.
- CONSTRUCT SECTION OF PROPOSED CENTENNIAL PARKWAY.
- PHASE 3A-1
- COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION OF R5 RAMP, SW RAMP,
CAL PKWY
TROPI
CAL PKWY
TROPI
V)
CNL
(
"R1"
"ES"
NW RAMP, EN RAMP AND ES RAMP SOUTH OF PROPOSED
CENTENNIAL PKWY.
- COMPLETE PROPOSED RANGE ROAD NORTH CONNECTION TO
- CONSTRUCT PROPOSED CC215 SB NORTH OF PROPOSED
A
POPULATED BY PROJECTWISE
ATTRIBUTES.
D
R
- CONSTRUCT WEST SIDE SECTION OF PROPOSED CC215 NB
NORTH OF PROPOSED CENTENNIAL PKWY.
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS.
E
CENTENNIAL PKWY.
SB
5
-1
I
NB
5
-1
I
G
N
A
R
FUTURE CENTENNIAL PKWY.
STATE OF NEVADA
"NW"
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
- CONSTRUCT REMAINING SECTION OF BRIDGE I-3248 THAT
SPANS OVER THE EXISTING CC215 NB TO I-15 INTERSECTION.
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
- PHASE 3A-2
1.
OF CENTENNIAL PKWY.
$FI
LEL$
12:55:51 AM
5/19/2022
- COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION OF PROPOSED CC215 NB NORTH
UNLESS NOTED.
- TEMPORARY PAVEMENT (PHASES)
- PHASE 1A-1
- PHASE 1A-1a
- PHASE 1A-3
- PHASE 1B-1
- PHASE 1B-2
- PHASE 2A-1
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
PHASING DIAGRAM
A
F-5
WNV16-2
48"x24"
R2-1
48"x60"
'
0
6
E
NG
RA
4
2
R2-1
48"x60"
RD
W21-5
48"x48"
'
0
0
16
SP
EE
DW
0'
60
1
'
0
5
2
30
0'
30
0'
15
300
'
W1-4R
48"x48"
PROCEED
WITH
CAUTION
0'
25
W20-1
48"x48"
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
'
0
0
3
R2-1
48"x60"
'
0
5
2
W20-1
48"x48"
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10- LEROY 140 MEDIUM
TEXT) AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED.
WNV16-3
48"x24"
TROPICAL PKWY
TROPICAL PKWY
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 105' UNDER 1"=1500' SCALE.
'
0
5
2
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
R
'
0 IN E
0 G AP
10 BE T
E
O
T RG
E
M
AND WIDTH OF 33.75'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 225'. ALL UNDER 1"=1500' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
'
0
0
16
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
N 26802600
E 816200
LAMB BLVD
AY
BL
V
D
0'
00
1
300'
WNV16-3
48"x24"
PROCEED
WITH
CAUTION
0'
66
0'
66
0'
32
1
W20-1
48"x48"
'
0
0
10
-CMS SIGN MESSAGES
1
0'
66
0'
32
1
W21-5a(R)
48"x48"
W20-1
48"x48"
NOTE: CMS SIGNS SHOULD BE LOCATED A MINIMUM OF 500'
FROM THE FIRST STATIC SIGN.
0'
00
1
55
RR
UP
65
LAMB BLVD
W3-5a
48"x48"
S
CMS
PECOS RD
WNV17-1
48"x48"
W3-5a
48"x48"
W21-5aL
48"x48"
RT LANE
CLOSED
AHEAD
TC4
A
E 816200
DA
VA
W21-5
48"x48"
2
CLARK
A
W20-1
48"x48"
WNV16-3
48"x24"
SHOULDER
WORK
AHEAD
SHEET NO.
N 26812800
C
O
U
N
TY
2
1
DE-0003(139)
COUNTY
CM
N
E
PROJECT NO.
A
N 26812800
K
R
LA
C
STATE
NEVADA
W20-1
48"x48"
E 806600
WNV16-2
48"x24"
1000'
WNV17-1
48"x48"
1.
W4-2(R)
48"x48"
15
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS NOTED.
2.
'
0
2
13
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
W20-5(R)
48"x48"
'
0
6
6
3.
REFER TO STANDARD PLANS FOR SIGN USAGE AND SPACING.
'
0
6
6
STATE OF NEVADA
5
5
WNV17-1
48"x48"
W20-1
48"x48"
'
0
0
10
R2-1
48"x60"
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
WNV17-1
48"x48"
$FI
LEL$
1:01:48 AM
5/19/2022
WNV16-2
48"x24"
W3-5a
48"x48"
A
WNV16-2
48"x24"
C
M
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
W20-1
48"x48"
S
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
PHASE 1
ADVANCE SIGNING
A
2
F-6
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TC5
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=2.
2.
A
1
/4
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
R/W
A
A
SE
C.
LI
NE
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS NOTED.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
5.
E.
1
/1
6
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-
SE
C.
LI
NE
"ES" +39
9.0'LT
4.
LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
6.
ALL STRIPING STATION AND OFFSET CALLOUT TEXT SHALL
R=14991'
USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT) AND WT-2
515' LANE SHIFT
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"ES" +62
9.0' LT
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
"ES" +75
10.0' LT
MATCH
EX. STRIPING
"ES"
"ES" +25
11.6' LT
"ES" +75
9.0' LT
11.0' LT
B
P
45
"XW" +80
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
50
P
P
P
B
0
" 58+0
NE "ES
LI
55
300
1
222' PPCBR FLARE
1305
"XW" +65
13.3' LT
"XW" +51
13.3' LT
5 SB
-1
I
295
1
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"XW"
"X"
1305
"XE" +26
5.0' LT
7.0' RT
300
1
A
295
1
"XE"
5 NB
-1
I
1305
M ATC H
300
1
15
295
1
20
A
"XE" +62
R=9897'
R=9885'
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"NW"
R=9873'
4" BROKEN WHITE LINE
162' LANE SHIFT
"XE" +45
29.0' LT
17.0' LT
5.0' LT
7.0' RT
8" DOTTED WHITE LINE
280' PPCBR FLARE
"XE" +14
29.0'LT
17.0'LT
5.0'LT
7.0'RT
9.0'RT
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
R=9861'
WNV25-1
42" x 54"
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) AND WT=2,
UNLESS SPECIFIED.
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
R/W
3.
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK SMALL TEXT SHALL USE
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
5.
P
-LEGEND"XE"
>
- ACTIVE WORK ZONE
- TEMPORARY PAVEMENT
- COMPLETED WORK ZONE
12'
12'
12'
SHLD LANE
LANE
LANE
7'
5'
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA.
"NW"
>
VARIES
WORKZONE
- COMPLETED TEMPORARY WORK ZONE
- ARROW BOARD TYPE C
STATE OF NEVADA
EXISTING SIGN
- BARRICADE TYPE IIIB
(SEE SIGN REMOVAL PLAN)
- DIRECTIONAL ARROW
- TEMPORARY PORTABLE PRECAST
"XW"
>
"ES"
>
- TRAFFIC CONES @ 35 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
- TRAFFIC DRUMS @ 55 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
TO BE REMOVED
SECTION A-A
CMS - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
10'
12'
4' 7'
VAR.
10'
12'
SHLD
LANE
WZ
GORE
SHLD
LANE
3'
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
PHASE-1A-2
4'
CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (45 MPH)
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (55 MPH)
A
SECTION B-B
F-7
0
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
P
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TC6
A
A
-LEGEND- ACTIVE WORK ZONE
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
- TEMPORARY PAVEMENT
1.
1.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=2.
A
UNLESS SPECIFIED.
M
- COMPLETED WORK ZONE
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) AND WT=2,
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
2.
- ARROW BOARD TYPE C
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
- BARRICADE TYPE IIIB
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
- DIRECTIONAL ARROW
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
3.
CMS - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
0
)
0
X
+
X
8
C
2
T
T S"
E
E "E
H
S E
N
E LI
E
(S H
C
T
A
- COMPLETED TEMPORARY WORK ZONE
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK SMALL TEXT SHALL USE
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND
UNLESS NOTED.
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
"ES" +30
- TRAFFIC CONES @ 35 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
- TRAFFIC DRUMS @ 55 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
4.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
4.
1"=100' SCALE.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
- TEMPORARY PORTABLE PRECAST
CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL
5.
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (45 MPH)
5.
LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
MH
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA.
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (55 MPH)
6.
ALL STRIPING STATION AND OFFSET CALLOUT TEXT SHALL
USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT) AND WT-2
181' LANE SHIFT
59
0.
+8
35
T.
P.
R/W
R/W
P
144' PPCBR FLARE
"ES" +73
16.1'RT
27.1'RT
SE
C.
28
"ES" +53
5.4'LT
P
P
"
-S
RR
"
35
SE
CP.
29
"ES" +97
4.9'RT
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
0
3
"ES"
CONTRACTOR TO USE WELDED
GRATES IN TRAFFIC LANES
"ES" +21
7.4'RT
18.4'RT
R=1255'
R=1266'
515' LANE SHIFT
P
"ES" +45
8.8' RT
19.8' RT
"R4"
"ES" +80
A
NE "R4" 16+50
MATCH LI
P
P
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"ES" +81
7.0' RT
MATCH
STRIPING
20
35
A
W21-5a(R)
40
48" x 48"
P
"ES"
"XW" +13
37.8' RT
P
P
1310
I-15 SB
260' SHLD TAPER
P
"XW"
P
P
P
P
"XW" +77
36.0' RT
1315
1320
"NW"
"XW" +25
21.0' LT
TIE BARRIER INTO
EXISTING RAIL
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"XW" +85
1
/4
1310
"XE" +25
"XE" +34
5.0' RT
END 8" SOLID
SE
C.
WHITE
LI
NE
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"X"
4" BROKEN WHITE LINE
"XW" +67
36.0' RT
1315
1320
100'
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
"XE" +34
8.0' RT
"XE" +75
35
I-15 NB
1310
"XE" +56
3.0' RT
1315
1320
"XE" +00
1.7' RT
"XE"
"XE" +45
"XE" +24
P
"R1" +57
15.4' LT
"R1" +51
"R1" +89
2.1' LT
8.9' RT
B
40
"XE" +21
13.6' RT
15
"R1" +35
3.0' LT
8.0' RT
"R1" +57
2.3' LT
END 8"
SOLID WHITE
P
P
"R1" +78
5.0' LT
B
"R1" +66
20
R=6503'
1
/4 R=6492'
SE
C.
LI
NE
25
30
"R1" +26
3.0' LT
8.0' RT
W1-4(L)
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
"ES"
C
L
"R1"
270' LANE SHIFT
48" x 48"
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
330' LANE TAPER
"XE" +72
5.0' LT
"R1" +00
3.0'LT
8.0'RT
0
NE "ES" 43+0
MATC H LI
222' PPCBR FLARE
"R1"
C
L
P
11'
LANE
7'
22'
6'
WZ
WZ
11'
4'
11'
4'
LANE
SHLD
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
(SEE SIGN REMOVAL PLANS)
AD
RO
TO BE REMOVED
RR
UP
EXISTING SIGN
E
NG
RA
4'
SHLD
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
F-8
R/W
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
PHASE-1A-2
A
H
TC
MA
W
T A
ELO
NSE EE B
I
S
E
N
LI
CLOSE RIGHT TURN
"TP" +92
111.8' LT
MATCH
STRIPING
PLACED IN
PREVIOUS
LANE WITH DRUMS
R3-7R
30" x 30"
(
MA SE
TC E S
H
H
LI EET
NE
"T TCX
P"
X)
1
3+
00
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
270'
"TP" +37
86.2' LT
75.0' LT
SHEET NO.
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TC7
A
A
N.
1
/1
6
-LEGEND-
SE
C.
LI
NE
- ACTIVE WORK ZONE
- TEMPORARY PAVEMENT
"SW"
- COMPLETED TEMPORARY WORK ZONE
C
48" x 36"
COUNTY
- COMPLETED WORK ZONE
C
RNV31-3
PROJECT NO.
A
70
R=612'
R=600'
STATE
NEVADA
- ARROW BOARD TYPE C
L
CA
I
AY
OP
TR KW
R
PA
- BARRICADE TYPE IIIB
PLACED IN
CMS - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
"TP" +32
PREVIOUS PHASE
51.9' LT
40.3' LT
- DIRECTIONAL ARROW
- TRAFFIC CONES @ 35 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
- TRAFFIC DRUMS @ 55 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
4" DOUBLE YELLOW LINE
- TEMPORARY PORTABLE PRECAST
W
.1
/1
6
CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (45 MPH)
"TP" +41
32.7' LT
20.7' LT
SE
C.
LI
NE
"R4"
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (55 MPH)
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
25
1.
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=2.
2.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
3.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS NOTED.
4.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
5.
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
6.
ALL STRIPING STATION AND OFFSET CALLOUT TEXT SHALL
USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT) AND WT-2
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
2.
10
UNLESS SPECIFIED.
SEE NOTE 2
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
NE "R4" 16+50
MATCH LI
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
3.
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
"TP" +50
9.0' LT, 13.0' LT
25.0' LT, 28.0' LT
40.0' LT
MATCH STRIPING
PLACED IN
PREVIOUS PHASE
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
"TP" +73
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
200'LANE SHI
FT
4.
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
P
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
"TP"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA.
1325
1330
"TP" +71
29.7' RT
6.4' RT
"X"
1325
P
I-15 SB
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) AND WT=2,
M ATC H
1.
1335
1330
1335
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"TP" +48
5.8' RT
17.7' RT
"XE"
"XE" +05
I-15 NB
1325
1330
1335
330' LANE TAPER
"TP" +98
P
"XE" +02
5.0' LT
7.0' RT
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
270'LANE SHIFT
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
200' FLARE
"TP" +72
P
P
P
P
"XE" +31
19.0' RT
4" BROKEN WHITE LINE
"XE" +31
9.0' RT
P
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
W1-4(L)
48" x 48"
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
RNV2-4
36" x 30"
"R1" +69
11.0' LT
A
PERMANENT STRIPING
PERMANENT STRIPING PLANS.
(SEE NOTE 1)
TEMPORARY MODIFICATION TO ACCOMMODATE THE
"R1"
C
L
RAMP "EN" WHERE FALSEWORK WILL BE IN PLACE.
ONCE RAMP "EN" CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETE,
4' 5'
CONTRACTOR IS TO ADJUST TRAFFIC TO COMPLETE
WZ
11'
LANE
12' COMPLETED
LANE
WZ
R1-1
"R2"
C
L
SEE NOTE 3
48" x 48"
4'
"R1" +09
SEE NOTE 3
16 FT MIN CLEARANCE DURING THE CONSTRUCTION OF
PM
15
11'
LANE
2. THIS PAVEMENT SECTION OF RAMP "R3" MAY REQUIRE
$FI
LEL$
"R2" +76
68.4' LT
B
"TP" +06
26.5' RT
28.5' RT
5
1. FOR PERMANENT STRIPING DETAILS REFER TO
5:05:14
"R2"
R=35'
A
5/19/2022
B
"R2" +93
0.8' RT
25
TCP NOTES:
R1-1
R5-1
48" x 48"
48" x 48"
SECTION A-A
VARIES
WORKZONE
SECTION B-B
R3-7R
A
3. ALL TEMPORARY STOP SIGNS SHALL BE POST
5'
4'
12'
12'
LANE
LANE
8'
NE
I
H L
A
TC
A
T
M
NSE
I
E
SE
F-9
R/W
STATE OF NEVADA
VARIES
2' WORKZONE
SECTION C-C
30" x 30"
4'
PAVEMENT SECTION TO PROPOSED GRADE.
MOUNTED.
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
"R2" +73
2.5' RT
"R1" +46
13.0' LT
11.0' LT
100'
"R1" +48
0.1' RT
MATCH
PERMANENT
STRIPING
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
"R2" +62
11.9' LT
0.9' LT
C AL
PI
TRO
W AY
K
R
PA
"R1" +70
10.5' LT.
0.5' RT
"TP" +16
41.0' LT
"TP" +95
30.3' LT
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
PHASE-1A-2
A
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TC8
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
"SW "+07
85.6'RT
74.4'RT
"SW " +02
107.8'RT
95.7'RT
MATCH
EX.STRI
PI
NG
STATE
NEVADA
1.
A
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) AND WT=2,
1.
185' LANE SHIFT
2.
A
A
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
UNLESS SPECIFIED.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=2.
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
2.
3.
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
3.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS NOTED.
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
4.
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
5.
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
R=1250'
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA.
N.
1
/1
6
R=1261'
5.
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
SE
C.
LI
NE
6.
ALL STRIPING STATION AND OFFSET CALLOUT TEXT SHALL
USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT) AND WT-2
"SW" +07
57.6' RT
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
P
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
30
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
W1-4(L)
48" x 48"
R=1332'
R/W
R=1343'
"SW"
P
1
5
"R3"
"SW" +96
5.1' RT
END 4" YELLOW
BEGIN 8" WHITE
"SW" +49
9.4' RT
1.6' LT
"SW" +97
15.8' RT
4.8' RT
"SW" +52
25
"SW" +96
3.1' RT
"SW" +68
P
P
A
P
P
P
P
P
20
"XW"
1345
"XW " +82
13.0'LT
M ATC H
"XE" +76
29.00' LT
17.0' LT
5.0' LT
7.0' RT
BEGIN 8" WHITE
1340
25'
"XW" +80
1350
"XW" +52
13.0' LT
"XW " +07
I-15 SB
1340
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"SW" +35
11.0' LT
7.0' LT
"X"
1345
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
1350
"XE" +10
"XE"
I-15 NB
1340
1345
1350
M ATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00
LI
NE "R
3" 18+
00
A
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
P
"XE" +70
P
B
"XE" +76
31.5' RT
BEGIN 8" WHITE
P
"XE" +80
67.0' RT
B
"XE" +92
72.4' RT
"XE" +12
7.0' RT
R=2612'
R=2600'
P
80
P
P
"XE" +17
18.1' RT
30.1' RT
P
780' LANE TAPER
"XE" +65
18.5'RT
"XE" +25
9.0' RT
4" BROKEN WHITE LINE
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
W4-1(R)
48" x 48"
"EN"
90
-LEGEND- ACTIVE WORK ZONE
- TEMPORARY PAVEMENT
- COMPLETED WORK ZONE
85
20
- COMPLETED TEMPORARY WORK ZONE
25
STATE OF NEVADA
- ARROW BOARD TYPE C
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
"R2"
- BARRICADE TYPE IIIB
CMS - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
- DIRECTIONAL ARROW
"SW"
C
L
2' 11'
$FI
LEL$
5:08:41 PM
5/19/2022
- TRAFFIC CONES @ 35 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
- TRAFFIC DRUMS @ 55 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
LANE
6'
"R3"
C
L
VARIES
WORKZONE
4'
12'
LANE
6'
VARIES
- TEMPORARY PORTABLE PRECAST
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (45 MPH)
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (55 MPH)
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
PHASE-1A-2
R/W
WORKZONE
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
F-10
A
-LEGEND-
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TC9
A
A
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
- ACTIVE WORK ZONE
1.
- TEMPORARY PAVEMENT
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) AND WT=2,
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
UNLESS SPECIFIED.
- COMPLETED WORK ZONE
1.
- COMPLETED TEMPORARY WORK ZONE
2.
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
ALL EXISTING ENTITIES SUCH AS BARRIER RAIL, EDGE OF
A
PAVEMENT, CURB & GUTTER, ETC., SHALL USE WT=2.
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
- ARROW BOARD TYPE C
2.
- BARRICADE TYPE IIIB
3.
CMS - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
ALL CENTERLINE TEXT AND LINE SHALL USE WT=2 AND
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
TEXT WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF 7' UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. ALL
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
R/W LINES SHALL ALSO USE WT=2.
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
- DIRECTIONAL ARROW
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
- TRAFFIC CONES @ 35 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
- TRAFFIC DRUMS @ 55 FT SPACING (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
3.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS NOTED.
4.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
- TEMPORARY PORTABLE PRECAST
4.
CONCRETE BARRIER RAIL
MATCHLINE TEXT USE HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 8.5' UNDER
1"=100' SCALE.
5.
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (45 MPH)
DRAWING SCALE OF 1"=100' SHALL BE USED I.E. 11"X17"
SHEET WILL HAVE 1100'X1700' AREA.
5.
- TEMPORARY IMPACT ATTENUATOR (55 MPH)
ALL SIGN CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10LEROY 140 MEDIUM TEXT) AND WT-2 UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
6.
R/W
USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY 100 X SMALL TEXT) AND WT-2
UNDER 1"=100' SCALE.
P
P
ALL STRIPING STATION AND OFFSET CALLOUT TEXT SHALL
"XW "+07
"XW "+47
24.0'RT
P
260' SHLD TAPER
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
8" SOLID WHITE LINE
"XW" +80
P
"XW" +47
23.4' LT
11.4' LT
"SW"
P
MATCH LI
NE "X" 1367+00
"XW"
15
MATC H LI
NE "SW " 17+00
1355
1360
1365
I-15 SB
"X"
1355
1360
1365
A
"XE"
I-15 NB
1355
1360
1365
105
"XE" +22
P
P
00
1
A
4" SOLID YELLOW LINE
4" BROKEN WHITE LINE
4" SOLID WHITE LINE
95
"EN"
271' PPCBR FLARE
"XE+ +74
22.5'RT
N.
1
/1
6
W1-4c(R)
48" x 48"
SE
C.
LI
NE
P
P
"XE"+45
7.0'RT
9.0'RT
780' LANE TAPER
N.
1
/1
6
R/W
SE
C.
LI
NE
STATE OF NEVADA
"XE"
C
L
7'
12'
12'
12'
SHLD LANE
LANE
LANE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
"EN"
C
L
5'
VARIES
WORKZONE
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
$FI
LEL$
5:10:15 PM
5/19/2022
A
SECTION A-A
F-11
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
PHASE-1A-2
A
STATE
PROJECT NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (FONT 10) MEDIUM SIZE
TC10
CLARK
TEXT AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
A
2.
A
A
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT AND
WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
3.
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
TC-1
*
TC-3
TC-2
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
THE TEXT SIZE FOR DIMENSIONS IN SIGNCAD SHALL BE SET
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
AT 0.03" WITH SCALE 1:100 BEFORE EXPORT INTO
MICROSTATION.
STATE OF NEVADA
2.
WHEN EXPORTING THE SIGNCAD FILE INTO MICROSTATION,
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
THE GEOMETRY SCALE SHALL BE SET AT 1.5, THE MASTER
UNITS SHALL BE "INCH", AND FINAL TEXT SHALL BE SET AT
5.00.
**
3.
SIGNS SHALL BE ARRANGED BASED ON SIGN ORDER AND
ADDITIONAL SHEETS SHALL BE ADDED TO ACHIEVE SIMILAR
SIGN DETAILS
SPACING AS SHOWN IN THIS EXAMPLE.
$FI
LEL$
5:54:35 PM
5/19/2022
TC-4
A
* ATTACH YELLOW EXIT ONLY PANEL ON THE PERMANENT SIGN PANEL
** ATTACH GREEN ARROW PANEL ON THE PERMANENT SIGN PANEL
F-12
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TC11
DETOUR NOTES:
PURPOSE: FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF
CMS MESSAGES
RAMP R2
I-15 NB
1.
DETOUR USED IN:
1
RAMP R2: PHASE 1A STAGE 3
2.
RAMP
CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED TCP FOR
NIGHTLY LANE CLOSURES
ASSOCIATED WITH CLOSURE.
FOLLOW
DETOUR
CLOSED
3
I-15 NB
2
USE
RAMP
LAMB
CLOSED
BLVD
I-15
USE
NORTH
LEFT
DETOUR
LANE
A
A
A
- LEGEND -
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
30" X 24"
30" X 24"
H
F
B
H
W20-2
48" X 48"
NE
CO
UN
TY
3.
DA
VA
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
1
H
C
4.
H
F
F
M4-8A
H
M3-1
1.
C
24" X 18"
UNLESS NOTED.
5
1
E
B
CMS
1
H
D
F
C
24" X 12"
EL CAMPO GRANDE AVE
S
3
M
H
F
- ROAD CLOSURE
G
C
CMS - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
A
- BARRICADE TYPE IIIB
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
E
AT
ST
ER
NT
I
D
D
NN R
A
G
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
24" X 24"
U
.
P.
R
.
R
.
15
C
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
F
H
.
.R
.R
.P
U
F
M1-1
48" X 36"
AND WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
H
A
R11-2
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
F
E
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 175' UNDER 1"=2500' SCALE.
RK
A
CL
F
D
TEXT) AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED.
2.
D
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY 140 MEDUIM
NN LN
LI
WNV20-1
1.
RD
30" X 24"
RA
NG
E
C
M4-9R
PECOS RD
B
CMS
2
R.
R.
P.
.
U
LAMB BLVD
M4-9L
S
M
C
A
H
F
- CC-215 TO I-15 DETOUR ROUTE
B
E
NG
RA
- NB I-15 DETOUR ROUTE
RD
D
LV
B
H
S
A
G
VE
A
LAMB BLVD
T
IN
15
E
R
S
T
A
T
E
F
S
LA
A
S
T
A
F
F
OR
D D
R
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
VD
BL
AS
G
VE
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
S
LA
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
I-15 NB ON RAMP
DETOUR PLAN
$FI
LEL$
6:10:06 PM
5/19/2022
D
G R
I
A
R
C
A
F-13
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TC12
DETOUR NOTES:
PURPOSE: FOR THE CONSTRUCTION
CMS MESSAGES
OF THE RAMP NW FLYOVER
1.
I-15
1
DETOUR USED IN:
2.
OFF RAMP
CLOSED
PHASE 1B STAGE 1
FOLLOW
A
DETOUR
A
A
CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED TCP FOR
NIGHTLY LANE CLOSURES
ASSOCIATED WITH CLOSURE.
- LEGEND -
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
1.
30" X 24"
WNV20-1
30" X 24"
R.
R.
P.
.
U
2.
G
3.
W20-2
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
K
R
LA
C
NE
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
CO
U
NT
Y
AND WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
DA
VA
4.
48" X 48"
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
RA
NG
E
D
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 175' UNDER 1"=2500' SCALE.
RD
C
M4-9R
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY 140 MEDUIM
TEXT) AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED.
30" X 24"
LAMB BLVD
B
M4-9L
PECOS RD
A
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS NOTED.
E
AT
ST
ER
NT
I
R11-2
48" X 36"
F
K
R
LA
C
24" X 24"
N
E
DA
VA
D
NN R
A
G
M4-8A
24" X 18"
TROPICAL PARKWAY
NN LN
LI
M1-6 215
C
U
.
P.
R
.
R
.
F
C
O
U
N
TY
5
1
.
.R
.R
.P
U
E
E
EL CAMPO GRANDE AVE
CMS - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
- ROAD CLOSURE
- BARRICADE TYPE IIIB
- I-15 TO CC-215 DETOUR ROUTE
E
NG
RA
D
LV
B
RD
S
A
G
VE
S
LA
F
E
F
T
IN
C
M
15
E
R
S
T
A
T
D
B
LAMB BLVD
A
A
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
S
T
A
F
F
OR
D D
R
VD
BL
S
1
AS
G
VE
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
S
LA
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
I-15 NB OFF RAMP
DETOUR PLAN
$FI
LEL$
6:12:32 PM
5/19/2022
D
G R
I
A
R
C
A
F-14
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEET NO.
NEVADA
DE-0003(139)
CLARK
TC13
A
A
DETOUR NOTES:
PURPOSE: FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF
CMS MESSAGES
CC-215 STRUCTURES OVER CENTENNIAL
I-15
PKWY.
1
1.
DETOUR USED IN:
USE
DETOUR
LAMB
AHEAD
BLVD
A
PHASE 2A STAGE 1&2
2.
CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED TCP FOR
NIGHTLY LANE CLOSURES
ASSOCIATED WITH CLOSURE.
F
A
- LEGEND -
GENERAL DESIGN NOTES
30" X 24"
W20-2
48" X 48"
K
R
NE
AND WIDTH OF 5.25'. LARGE TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
DA
VA
AND WIDTH OF 15'. ALL UNDER 1"=100' SCALE. WT=2.
D
C
F
B
M1-1
48" X 36"
15
24" X 24"
F
C
A
D
NN R
A
G
M4-8A
4.
SHEET SPECIFIC DESIGN NOTES
1.
E
E
24" X 18"
ALL SHEET NUMBERS SHALL HAVE A PRECEEDING "TC", AND
FOLLOW THIS SEQUENCE (TC1, TC2, TC3,..., TC10, TC11,...).
ANY EXISTING ENTITIES SHALL BE GREEN (COLOR 18),
UNLESS NOTED.
E
AT
ST
ER
NT
I
F
5
1
C
S1
CM
TROPICAL PKWY
U
.
P.
R
.
R
.
F
R11-2
.
.R
.R
.P
U
E
UPPER AND LOWER TITLE BLOCK TEXT SHALL BE
UPPERCASE LETTERS ONLY. SMALL TEXT SHALL USE HEIGHT
CO
U
NT
Y
1
F
D
HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF 175' UNDER 1"=2500' SCALE.
3.
LA
C
ALL GENERAL DETAIL AND CALLOUT TEXT SHALL USE TEXT
NN LN
LI
WNV20-1
2.
RD
30" X 24"
RA
NG
E
M4-9R
ALL TEXT SHALL USE NDOT FONT (10-LEROY 140 MEDUIM
TEXT) AND WT=2, UNLESS SPECIFIED.
R.
R.
P.
.
U
LAMB BLVD
C
1.
30" X 24"
PECOS RD
B
M4-9L
CM
S
A
EL CAMPO GRANDE AVE
CMS - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN
- ROAD CLOSURE
- BARRICADE TYPE IIIB
- I-15 DETOUR ROUTE
E
NG
RA
G
S
A
G
E
V
S
LA
LAMB BLVD
T
IN
15
E
R
S
T
A
T
E
RD
D
LV
B
A
S
T
A
F
F
OR
D D
R
DENOTES A TAG EXISTS. POPULATED
BY PROJECTWISE ATTRIBUTES.
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
VD
BL
AS
G
E
V
S
LA
$FI
LEL$
6:14:45 PM
5/19/2022
D
G R
I
A
R
C
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
RANGE RD N TO I-15
DETOUR PLAN
A
F-15
This page intentionally left blank.
F-16
APPENDIX G. VARIOUS CONDITIONS
G-1
This page intentionally left blank.
G-2
DOUBLE POST BRACED MUST BE
PROTECTED OR OUTSIDE OF CLEAR ZONE
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
BORDER PKG
STATEWIDE
SHEET
NO.
SHEET
NO.
1
TS1
* USED IN DISTRICT 3
** FOR FREEWAY USE
*** ONLY USED ON ROUTES
ENTERING FROM UTAH & IDAHO
500'
500'
500'
500'
7
6
500'
8
500'
9
500'
12
11
10
Pl
acehol
der for
Aquati
c Speci
es
OR
10.4
26.6
6.4
32.6
12.8
8.8
32.6
60.4
10.2
6
27.4
8.2
60
RNV32-1MOD_60x60;
12.9
6
17.1
5.1
6
28.6
17.1
31
6
22.3
9.9
35.5
13.7
ON ROADWAY
13
9.
1
8
21.
8
6
6
21.
8
6.2
LI
VESTOCK
ON ROADWAY
10.3
SPCL;
38.8
10
47.1
50.6
25.8
32.1
8.3
10.3
31
55.8
8
35.1
47.1
27.1
32.1
40.4
25.8
41.8
8.3
35.1
27.1
"FOR AUTHORIZED VEHICLES", C; "USING WARNING LIGHTS", C;
12.9
8
50.5
21.2
24.3
9.7
6
37.9
21.2
12.9
8
8
6.0" Radius, 1.5" Border, 1.3" Indent, Black on, White;
84
6
LI
VESTOCK
6.4
6
5.1
"MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN", C 85% spacing;
8.8
52.2
7.6
9.
1 6 6 6 6
19.1
5.1 7.8
40.5
8
16
8.
6
5.1
6
8
6
16.8
12.1
24.3
8.2
10
6
6
6
6
42
8
6
8
78
6.4
6.2
2.3" Radius, 0.9" Border, 0.6" Indent, Black on, White;
10.4
14.6
OPEN RA NGE
108
7.3
6
USI
NG WARNI
NG LI
GHTS
6
BY DRI
VER
25.2
39.2
6.4
FOR AUTHORI
ZED VEHI
CLES
13
7
9.6
45.4
8
6
4.
5
DEVI
CE USE
8
6
CELLULAR
6
25.2
7.3
OPEN RA NGE
8
6
6
BY DRI
VER
60
DEVI
CE USE
4.
5
CELLULAR
6
6
HAND-HELD
4.
5
HAND-HELD
MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN
6
6
6
NO
4.
5
NO
78
6
9.
6
7
LI
VESTOCK
OPEN RANGE
ON ROADWAY
*SPECI
AL
OPEN RA NGE
LI
VESTOCK
ON ROADWAY
Paci
fi
c
***GNV24-2
Tim e Z one
EXCEPT
TO PASS
KEEP
RI
GHT
**R4-16
NO
PERMI
T REQUI
RED
CALL (
XXX) XXX-XXXX
HAZARDOUS MATERI
AL
RNV11-1
OR (
XXX) XXX-XXXX
MOVE OVER OR SLOW DOWN
FOR AUTHORI
ZED VEHI
CLES
SPECI
AL
USI
NG WARNI
NG LI
GHTS
NO
CELLULAR
4
HAND-HELD
12
BY DRI
VER
Verdi
DEVI
CE USE
Reno
SPECI
AL - DI
STANCE SI
GN
ROUTE CONFI
RMATI
ON
M3-1 (CARDI
NAL DI
RECTI
ON)
M1-1 (I
NTERSTATE)
M1-4 (US ROUTE)
M1-5 (STATE ROUTE)
Fernl
ey 47
SPEED
65
LI
MI
T
R2-1 SPEED LI
MI
T
EAST
80
I
NTERSTATE
W el
com e to
NEVA DA
SPECI
AL DESI
GN BY RENO SI
GN SHOP
(DI
FFERENT AT EACH ENTRANCE)
$1
000 MAX.FI
NE
5
500'
LI
TTERI
NG
4
3
500'
RNV20-1 MODI
FI
ED
2
500'
RNV32-1 MODI
FI
ED
1
500'
19.3
36.5
5
7.6
96
120
9.9
78
"NO", D; "HAND-HELD", D;
RNV32-1MOD_78x78;
9.0" Radius, 2.5" Border, 2.0" Indent, Black on, Yellow;
6.0" Radius, 1.8" Border, 1.5" Indent, Black on, Yellow;
"OPEN RANGE", E; "LIVESTOCK", D;
"OPEN RANGE", E; "LIVESTOCK", D;
"ON ROADWAY", D;
"ON ROADWAY", D;
"CELLULAR", D; "DEVICE USE", D;
6.0" Radius, 1.8" Border, 1.5" Indent, Black on, White;
19.2
9.6
10
STATE OF NEVADA
19.2
8.3
5.2
37.6
31
8
12.6
9.7
3.2
40.4
8.3
5.2
27.1
5.3
8
8
LI
VESTOCK
ON ROADWAY
54
6
$1
000 MAX.FI
NE
6 6 6
LI
TTERI
NG
OPEN RA NGE
3.
7
4
5.
9 4
NO
4.
5
36
"DEVICE USE", D; "BY DRIVER", D;
6
"NO", D; "HAND-HELD", D; "CELLULAR", D;
10
5.
9
"BY DRIVER", D;
8.7
41.8
27.1
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
5.3
3.2
21.2
48
9.7
6
37.9
21.2
96
RNV20-1MOD_48x36;
2.3" Radius, 0.9" Border, 0.6" Indent, Black on, White;
3.0" Radius, 1.3" Border, 0.8" Indent, Black on, Yellow;
"NO", D; "LITTERING", D;
"OPEN RANGE", E; "LIVESTOCK", D;
"$1000 MAX. FINE", C 80% spacing;
"ON ROADWAY", D;
NV BORDER
NV BORDER
SIGN
PACKAGE
SIGN PACKAGE
7
11
G-3
TEXT ONLY OPTION FOR
AREAS DBL POST BRACED
WILL NOT FIT
* END SIGN SHOULD BE PLACED
1/2 MILE AFTER THE TAC SENSOR
OR JUST PAST CHECK STATION EXIT
WHICHEVER IS GREATER
5280 ft
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
TACS
STATEWIDE
SHEET NO.
SHEET
2640 ft
2640 ft
TACS SENSORS
2
1
4
3
*
6
END
TRUCKS
MUST USE
RI
GHT LANE
TRUCKS
MUST USE
RI
GHT LANE
TRUCKS
MUST USE
RI
GHT LANE
BEGI
N
TRUCKS
MUST USE
36.8
20.6
10
7
24
7
10
6
10
MUST USE
6
20.6
END
54
7
10
24
BEGI
N
7
27.1
23.8
27.1
78
RI
GHT LANE
3.0" Radius, 1.3" Border, 0.8" Indent, Black on, White;
"BEGIN", D;
13.9
50.2
10.3
30.5
10
78
3.0" Radius, 1.3" Border, 0.8" Indent, Black on, White;
"END", D;
6
RI
GHT LANE
TRUCKS
13.9
5
21.9
10.3
STATE OF NEVADA
5.5
32.3
5
29.7
78
5.5
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
R4-5 NV_MODIFIED;
3.0" Radius, 1.3" Border, 0.8" Indent, Black on, White;
"TRUCKS", D; "MUST USE", D 50% spacing;
TIRE ANOMALY
CLASSIFICATION
TIRE
ANOMALY
SYSTEM (TACS)
CLASSIFICATION
SYSTEM (TACS)
"RIGHT LANE", D 50% spacing;
G-4
NO.
2
2
SHEET NO.
I
NSPECTI
ON
STATI
ON
I
NSPECTI
ON
STATI
ON
I
NSPECTI
ON
STATI
ON
NEXT RI
GHT
OPSED
WHEN FLASHI
NG
I
NSPECTI
ON
STATI
ON
NEXT RI
GHT
G-5
I
NSPECTI
ON
MI
LE
WHEN FLASHI
NG
COMMERCI
AL
VEHI
CLES
MUST ENTER
NEXT RI
GHT
I
NSPECTI
ON STATI
ON
with SLI & Budget approval
Y
Y
STATI
ON
½
COMMERCI
AL
VEHI
CLES
MUST ENTER
NEXT RI
GHT
I
NSPECTI
ON STATI
ON
OPSED
I
NSPECTI
ON
STATI
ON
1 M ILE
I
NSPECTI
ON
STATI
ON
2 M ILES
INSPECTION
STATION
* optional flashing signs
Y
Y
*
3b
*
5b
2
3a
4
5a
6
7
SHEET
3
NO.
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
INSPECTION
STATEWIDE
2 miles
1 mile
4000 ft (approx.)
800 ft min.
1
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
STATE OF NEVADA
INSPECTION
STATION
1
STATE
SHEET NO.
SHEET
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DETAILS
STATEWIDE
4
NO.
3
108
9
37.2
10
42.8
9
108
23.4
61.2
23.4
11.2
87.2
27.5
8
50.1
11.2
10.4
10
7
24
7
22
8
6
1
0.
.
7
9
OPSED
6
8
5
7.
WHEN FLASHI
NG
10
I
NSPECTI
ON
10
I
NSPECTI
ON
10
7
9.
8
10.4
10
29.5
49
29.5
5
7.
108
8
10
I
NSPECTI
ON
66
STATI
ON
78
5
7.
10
STATI
ON
RNV10-1_VARx24;
3.0" Radius, 1.0" Border, White on, Black;
82
20.4
23.6
29.5
49
37.2
"INSPECTION", E 75% spacing; "STATION", E; Arrow Custom - 30.0" 45';
1.8" Inner border Black, 6.0" Radius, 1.5" Outer border, White on, Yellow;
"INSPECTION", E; "STATION", E; "NEXT RIGHT", E;
"WHEN FLASHING" Black, D;
RNV10-1_VARx24;
D8-2_MODIFIED;
3.0" Radius, 1.0" Border, White on, Black;
1.8" Inner border Black, 6.0" Radius, 1.5" Outer border, White on, Green;
"OPSED", E Mod;
Horizontal Line Black; "INSPECTION", E; "STATION", E; "NEXT RIGHT", E;
4
10
18
4
10
18
10
62
10
9
edge A
12.5
1.1
30
30
RNV10-1_30x18;
RNV10-1_30x18;
No border, White on, Black;
No border, White on, Black;
"CLO", E Mod;
"EN", E Mod;
Pi
ano Hi
nge
2
82
20.4
10
61.2
8
20.4
26.3
27.3
82
20.4
8
10
10
20.4
26.3
82
20.4
32.4
25.9
47
66
10
61.2
7.9
8
8
2 M ILES
11
8
8
10
61.2
32.4
5a
10
8
10
66
10
47
10
8
10
11
8
1 M ILE
10
10
8
10
11
MI
LE
10
½
STATI
ON
8
66
STATI
ON
10
8
47
10
STATI
ON
I
NSPECTI
ON
10
10
I
NSPECTI
ON
10
I
NSPECTI
ON
3a
3b
10
3a
13.1
42.8
10
1
27.3
23.4
10
6.0" Radius, 2.0" Border, White on, Green;
EN
4
10
2
10.
61.2
9
D8-2_MODIFIED;
5.0" Radius, 2.0" Border, White on, Green;
Reverse Face
17.5
1.1
3.3
10.4
87.2
23.4
29.5
D8-3_MODIFIED;
CLO
27.8
101.4
3.3
10.4
39.2
102
edge A
24
OPSED
10
61.2
39.2
7
20.4
Front Face
4
7
NEXT RI
GHT
7
9.
10
"OPSED", E Mod;
5
7.
10
10
6
23.
NEXT RI
GHT
STATI
ON
20.4
34.3
25.9
2.9
102
102
102
D8-1_MODIFIED;
D8-1_MODIFIED;
D8-1_MODIFIED;
5.0" Radius, 2.0" Border, White on, Green;
5.0" Radius, 2.0" Border, White on, Green;
5.0" Radius, 2.0" Border, White on, Green;
"INSPECTION", E 75% spacing; "STATION", E; "½ MILE", E;
"INSPECTION", E 75% spacing; "STATION", E; "1 MILE", E;
"INSPECTION", E 75% spacing; "STATION", E; "2 MILES", E;
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
4
6
7
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SIGN DETAILS
SIGN DETAILS
G-6
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DETAILS
STATEWIDE
SHEET
SHEET NO.
NO.
108
23.9
6.8
24.8
6
29.4
52.4
21.8
27
29.4
4
6
23.9
38
31.4
49.2
6.8
21.8
108
29.4
84
14.1
10
8
WHEN FLASHI
NG
8
1
0.
.
7
9
54
5.
2
4.
5
50.2
10
6
6
10
10
MUST USE
6
8
4.
5
4
RI
GHT LANE
13.9
8
I
NSPECTI
ON STATI
ON
13.9
30.5
5.5
32.3
5
5
21.9
29.7
10.3
RI
GHT LANE
5.5
4
78
7
8
TRUCKS
68
MUST ENTER
6
90
8
VEHI
CLES
8
NEXT RI
GHT
8
R4-5 NV_MODIFIED;
3.0" Radius, 1.3" Border, 0.8" Indent, Black on, White;
"TRUCKS", D; "MUST USE", D 50% spacing;
77.6
6.
2
7
10
5.1
6
10
MUST USE
"RIGHT LANE", D 50% spacing;
3.2
11.8
101.6
3.2
3.2
66.4
8
20.8
50.2
30.5
32.3
16.9
8
6
21.9
11.8
29.7
8
7
20.8
3.2
16.9
24
OPSED
44.7
6
TRUCKS
10.3
NEXT RI
GHT
4
4
8
78
I
NSPECTI
ON STATI
ON
8
6
COMMERCI
AL
6
MUST ENTER
25.1
6
8
22
1
0.
.
7
9
6
8
8
VEHI
CLES
WHEN FLASHI
NG
6
COMMERCI
AL
8
7
5.1
22
47.5
8
6
78
26.3
56
14.1
20.8
6
66.4
10
20.8
29.4
29.5
49
20.8
29.5
6.8
R13-1 MODIFIED;
49.2
27
8
52.4
22.9
24.8
29.4
31.4
4
8
20.8
38
29.4
1.8" Inner border Black, 6.0" Radius, 1.5" Outer border, White on, Yellow;
6.8
22.9
3.0" Radius, 0.9" Border, 0.6" Indent, Black on, White;
8
9
10a
"WHEN FLASHING" Black, D 50% spacing;
R4-5_WHEN FLASHING_MODIFIED_84x78;
6.0" Radius, 1.8" Border, 1.5" Indent, Black on, White;
"TRUCKS", D; "MUST USE", D 50% spacing;
"COMMERCIAL", D; "VEHICLES", D; "MUST", D; "ENTER", D; "INSPECTION", D 50% spacing;
1.8" Inner border Black, 6.0" Radius, 1.5" Outer border, White on, Yellow;
"STATION", D 50% spacing; "NEXT", D; "RIGHT", D;
"WHEN FLASHING" Black, D 75% spacing;
RNV10-1_VARx24;
R13-1 MODIFIED;
3.0" Radius, 1.0" Border, White on, Black;
6.0" Radius, 1.8" Border, 1.5" Indent, Black on, White;
"OPSED", E Mod;
"COMMERCIAL", D; "VEHICLES", D; "MUST ENTER", D; "INSPECTION STATION", D 50% spacing;
"RIGHT LANE", D 50% spacing;
"NEXT RIGHT", D;
5a
10b
5b
STATE OF NEVADA
STATE OF
OF
NEVADA
DEPARTMENT
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SIGN DETAILS
SIGN DETAILS
G-7
5 4
SHEET NO.
6
Solid Yellow Line With
Double Solid Yellow Line
Center Marking
Solid White Line
Match Existing
Broken Yellow Line
Broken White Line
Double Solid Yellow Line
WS/4
500'
Shifting Taper (•T)
1/4 Mile
1/4 Mile
USE
TRUCKS
LANE
GHT
RI
R4-5
36 x 48
SLOWER
KEEP
C
TRAFFI
GHT
RI
R4-3
36 x 48
USE
TRUCKS
LANE
GHT
RI
R4-5
36 x 48
TRUCK
500
LA NE
FEET
R4-6
36 x 48
*
*
Solid White Line
Broken White Line
Broken White Line
Solid White Line
Double Solid Yellow Line
Double Solid Yellow Line
"A"
D/4
D/4
MATCHLI
NE
D/4
D/4
D/2
D
W 4-2R
36 x 36
RI
GHT
LANE
ENDS
W 9-1R
36 x 36
Solid White Line
Center Marking
Double Solid Yellow Line
Match Existing
"A"
MATCHLI
NE
Merge Taper (T)
300'
T = Taper Length
S = Posted Speed
W = Offset in Feet
STATE OF NEVADA
STATE OF NEVADA
44 MPH and Less
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
T = WSò /60
45 MPH and Greater
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
T = WS
TYPICAL
TYPICAL
D = Advance Warning Distance
TRUCK
CLIMBING
LANE
TRUCK
CLIMBING
LANE
(See MUTCD Section 2C.05, Table 2C-4 Guidelines for Advance Placement of Warning Signs, use Condition A)
* Alternately repeat sign every quarter mile for the length of truck climbing lane.
T-XX.X.X
ADOPTED
2019
G-8
(634)
REVISED
.
Signed Original On File
CHIEF TRAFFIC OPS ENGR.
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
TYPICALS
STATEWIDE
SHEET
SHEET
NO.
NO.
7
TS1
NOTES:
1.
Wrong Way Driver posts shall include OM2-2V facing normal traffic
at a mounting height of 4 feet. OM2-1V may be substitued in some cases.
2.
Wrong Way Driver posts may include (optional) a strip of retro-reflective
material on the sign support. It shall be at least 2 inches in width and cover
from within 2 feet above the edge of the roadway up to the sign. The strip
shall be red and shall face away from normal traffic.
unless specified in the special provisions.
3.
For ITS Wrong Way Driver System see sheet XXX
4.
Sign group A (nearest to the cross street) shall be mounted be mounted at
4 feet. Sign group B (farthest from the cross street) shall be mounted at 7
feet. All other mounting heights are per NDOT Standard Plans TRS-1.
*
Angle DO NOT ENTER and FREEWAY ENTRANCE SIGNS at 45 degrees.
**
The use of oversized signs (see MUTCD table 2B-1) is typical.
R5
1**
DO
EN
TE
R
NO
T
R51a **
WAY
W RONG
R51a **
WAY
ON
EW
A
Y
1**
R5-
TER
EN
DO
T
NO
SI
G N G RO UP
R51a **
WAY
B
SI
G N G RO UP
A
G
NV
41
32(
I
)
Y
A
EW
ON
W RONG
M
FR
E
EW
EN
AY
T
R
AN
CE
EA
ST
I
N
TE
RS
TA
TE
11
G-9
M
STOP
R11
Y
A
EW
ON
1
R6
80
*
62(
I
)
R51a **
250'
(
Ty
p
i
c
a
l
)
M
WAY
T
Y
WA
EE
CE
FR
AN
TR
EN
250'
(
Ty
p
i
c
a
l
)
O M 22V
O M 22V
W RONG
-1
V4
S
ER
NT
I
*
250'
(
Ty
p
i
c
a
l
)
EASTATE
W RONG
GN
)
I
-2(
M3
80
250'
(
Ty
p
i
c
a
l
)
-1
M1
R6
1
)
I
-2(
M6
O M 22V
O M 22V
ON
EW
A
Y
STATE OF NEVADA
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
TYPICAL EXIT/ON RAMP
TYPICAL
SIGN EXIT/ON
LOCATIONSRAMP
SIGN LOCATIONS
SHEET NO.
8
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
SIGN TENSION
MOUNTING DETAIL
G-10
SHEET NO.
9
PLACEMENT OF MERGE ARROWS
A
D
300'
M
D
‚D
MA
MA
MA
MA
X
M = MERGE LANGTH
S = POSTED SPEED
MA = MERGE ARROW PLACEMENT
W = OFFSET IN FEET
D = ADVANCE WARNING DISTANCE
A = ACCELERATION LANE LENGTH
D = DOTTED WHITE LINE LENGTH
M = MERGE LENGTH
T
M
D =
2
3A
(SEE M.U.T.C.D. SECTION 2C.05)
44 MPH OR LESS, T= WSò/60
45 MPH OR GREATER, T= WS
T = TAPER LENGTH
M = A - D
MA = M/4
MA = MERGE ARROW PLACEMENT
M = ƒ D
X = LANE REDUCTION SIGN PLACEMENT *
MA = D/4
* For placement of the lane reduction sign, see Table 2C-4
(Condition A) in the 2009 MUTCD, using the speed less than
For Further Details on "LANE REDUCTION"
posted speed determined in Table 4-26 of the 2017 NDOT
See Part III of the MUTCD
Access Management System and Standards.
TYPICAL LANE REDUCTION
For Further Details on "PARALLEL ACCELERATION LANE"
See Part III of the MUTCD
TYPICAL
PARALLEL ACCELERATION LANE
18'
C
5'-9"
Ed
ge
C
C
of
Pa
ve
me
20°
nt
2'
5'
-6"
C
C
(42 ftò)
MERGE ARROW
G-11
Di
r
ec
t
i
on
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
of
Vi
ew
MERGE ARROW DETAILS
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DISTRICT PROJECT
CLARK
SHEET NO.
SHEET NO.
1,320'
36" x 24"
X" x 72" *
X" x 66" *
X" x 66" *
42" x 60"
48" x 72"
60" x 54"
STATE
OF
NEVADA
STATE
OF
NEVADA
DEPARTMENT
OF
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT
OF
TRANSPORTATION
US 95
95 SB
SBAT
ATANN
ANNRD
RD
US
EXISTING/ADJUSTEDHOV
HOV
EXISTING/ADJUSTED
ACCESSOPENING
OPENING
ACCESS
* UNLESS MULTIPLE LINES OF TEXT
G-12
10
TYPE E
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DISTRICT PROJECT
CLARK
SHEET NO.
SHEET NO.
11
TYPE E
STATE OF NEVADA
STATE OF NEVADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
NOTES:
- RPM OFF-RAMP STRIPING TO BE PAINT IN RURAL AREAS.
- RPM TO BE 6" ON RAMP AFTER GORE.
DUALEXIT
EXITRAMP
RAMP
DUAL
RAISEDPAVEMENT
PAVEMENTMARKINGS
MARKINGS
RAISED
G-13
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
SHEETNO.
NO.
SHEET
NEVADA
DISTRICT PROJECT
CLARK
12
W14-3
48" x 48" x 36"
DOUBLE SOLID YELLOW LINE
SOLID WHITE LINE
DOUBLE SOLID YELLOW LINE
BROKEN YELLOW LINE
(OR SOLID YELLOW LINE
WITH BROKEN YELLOW LINE)
W14-3
48" x 48" x 36"
STATE
STATE OF
OF NEVADA
NEVADA
DEPARTMENT
DEPARTMENTOF
OFTRANSPORTATION
TRANSPORTATION
NO
NO PASSING
PASSING ZONE
ZONE SIGNS
SIGNS
G-14
STATE
PROJECT NO.
COUNTY
NEVADA
DISTRICT PROJECT
CLARK
SHEET NO.
SHEET NO.
13
STATE
OF
NEVADA
STATE
OF
NEVADA
DEPARTMENT
OF
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT
OF
TRANSPORTATION
EXIT
EXITPANELS
PANELSWITH
WITHDIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS
G-15
This page intentionally left blank.
G-16
APPENDIX H. 6-INCH EDGE LINE POLICY MEMO
H-1
This page intentionally left blank.
H-2
1263 South Stewart Street
Carson City, Nevada 89712
Phone: (775) 888-7440
Fax:
(775) 888-7201
MEMORANDUM
Date: December 14, 2021
To:
Scott Hein, P.E., Chief Road Design Engineer
From:
Rodney Schilling, P.E., PTOE, Chief Traffic Operations Engineer
Subject:
6-inch edge-lines
The Traffic Operations Division recommends implementing a statewide policy to utilize 6-inch edge-line
striping for rural roadways with an average annual daily traffic (AADT) count greater than 400 vehicles or
for rural roadways with speeds greater than 40 mph. Rural roadways are determined using
Functional Classifications maps. An area is rural unless it is denoted as urban.
Enhancing striping increases driver awareness and understanding of roadway geometrics, even under
adverse conditions. Transitioning from a 4-inch edge-line to a 6-inch edge-line on rural roadways has been
shown to decrease all crash types by 21% on comparable rural roadways 1. The crash modification from a
4-inch edge-line to a 6-inch edge-line for all crashes on two-lane rural highways is 17.5%, for fatalities and
injuries of 36.5%, and 12.3% for non-injury crashes 2. The 6-inch edge-line has increased visibility which
, due to its increased width. This increased visibility is critical to the
safe operation of a motor vehicle during long rural drives, adverse weather conditions, and when
drowsiness affects driver performance.
The FHWA included 6-inch stripe requirements for roads with speeds greater than 40 mph in the draft
update to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). The MUTCD requirement for 6-inch
edge-lines has not been finalized at this time but is expected to be included in the 11 th edition of the
MUTCD. Additionally, 6-inch edge-lines have a higher detection rate by autonomous vehicle sensors.
Pavement markings are mentioned most frequently by the autonomous vehicle industry as an
infrastructure upgrade to support the deployment of autonomous vehicles according to the National
Committee on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (NCUTCD).
Implementing this policy supports
and vision to achieve zero fatalities and to
become a leader and partner in delivering effective transportation solutions for a safe and connected
Nevada.
All projects which meet these criteria are to incorporate the 6-inch edge-line striping. These include, but
not limited to, permits, 3 quotes, betterments, preservation, capacity, safety, as well as routine striping
performed by District Maintenance forces. This is a systemic approach to safety that involves widely
implemented improvements based on high-risk roadway features correlated with specific severe crash
types. A list of routes for prioritization based upon 2015-2020 crash data are attached per district with the
final implementation to be determined upon available funding.
1
Nevada Department of Transportation Planning Level Crash Modification Factor (CMF) List, Version 1.0 Revised
January 2021.
2
two-lane
-325.
H-3
Recommended Approval:
Approved:
______________________________
_____________________________
Jeff Lerud, P.E., CPM
Kristina Swallow, P.E.
Deputy Director Operations & Maintenance
Director
CC:
Jenica Keller, Assistant Director, Operations
Sajid Sulahria, Assistant Director, Engineering
Mario Gomez, District 1 Engineer
Sami Yousuf, Assistant District 1 Engineer
Mike Fuess, District 2 Engineer
Steve Baer, Assistant District 3 Engineer
Trent Averett, Assistant District 3 Engineer
Karim Yousuf, District 3 Traffic Engineer
Anita Bush, Chief Maintenance and Asset Management Engineer
Fred Shakal, Chief Traffic Safety Engineer
Lacey Tisler, Assistant Chief Traffic Safety Engineer
Sam Lompa, Chief Construction Engineer
Jae Pullen, Assistant Chief Traffic Operations Engineer
Casey Sylvester, Principal Signs Striping and Traffic Control Engineer
Juan Balbuena, FHWA Nevada Division
H-4
DATA YEARS 2015-2020
6 INCH EDGE LINE PRIORITIZATION LIST FOR EACH DISTRICT
DISTRICT
I
DISTRICT
II
DISTRICT
III
PRIORITIZATION
1
2
3
4
5
PRIORITIZATION
1
2
3
4
5
PRIORITIZATION
1
2
3
4
5
URBAN
SR 160
SR 146
SR 564
SR 169
SR 372
URBAN
US 50A - FERNLEY
US 95A - FERNLEY
SR 431
US 395 FROM MINDEN TO TOPAZ
SR 756 - DOUGLAS COUNTY
URBAN
SR 794
US 95
SR 787
SR 227
SR 294
H-5
RURAL
SR 160
SR 168
SR 163
SR 158
SR 156
RURAL
SR 362 - HAWTHORNE
US 95 - HAWTHORNE
SR 447
SR 445
SR 396 - LOVELOCK
RURAL
SR 305
SR 304
SR 223
SR 806
SR 278
This page intentionally left blank.
H-6